FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 2-Way Mobile Radio with BT/BTLE/WiFi

 

Mobile Radio APX P25 Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Installation Manual SEPTEMBER 2019 2019 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved

*MN005720A01*

MN005720A01-AA MN005720A01-AA Contents Contents List of Figures..............................................................................................................7 List of Tables............................................................................................................. 11 Foreword....................................................................................................................12 Copyrights................................................................................................................. 13 Notations Used in This Manual................................................................................14 Related Publications.................................................................................................15 Commercial Warranty............................................................................................... 16 I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long.......................................................................16 II. General Provisions.................................................................................................................. 16 III. State Law Rights (Applicable Only in U.S.A.)......................................................................... 17 IV. How To Get Warranty Service................................................................................................17 V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover...................................................................................... 17 VI. Patent And Software Provisions.............................................................................................18 VII. Governing Law...................................................................................................................... 18 Introduction............................................................................................................... 20 1.1 Mobile Radio Description.......................................................................................................20 1.1.1 Dimensions.............................................................................................................. 20 1.2 Standard Configurations........................................................................................................23 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration....................................................................................... 23 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration................................................................................... 24 1.2.3 Multi Control Head................................................................................................... 28 1.3 Motorcycle Configurations..................................................................................................... 28 1.4 Base/Control Stations............................................................................................................ 28 1.5 Tools Required for Radio Installations...................................................................................29 Standard Configurations.......................................................................................... 30 2.1 Planning the Installation.........................................................................................................30 2.1.1 Installation Examples............................................................................................... 30 2.1.2 Wiring Diagrams...................................................................................................... 32 2.1.3 Radio Operation Wiring for Dash and Remote Configurations................................ 42 2.1.3.1 Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation.............. 42 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation.......... 42 2.1.4 Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance)..........................................................44 2.1.5 Siren/PA Configuration and Programming...............................................................45 2.2 Radio Mounting......................................................................................................................46 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion....................................................................................... 47 2 MN005720A01-AA Contents 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion...................................................................................49 2.2.2.1 Remote Mount Control Head Installation................................................... 49 2.2.2.2 Multiple Control Head Installation.............................................................. 52 2.2.2.3 Cable Installation........................................................................................53 2.2.2.4 Setting the Initial Control Head ID..............................................................53 2.2.2.5 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling........................................... 55 2.2.3 Radio Locking.......................................................................................................... 57 2.2.3.1 Locking Kit..................................................................................................57 2.3 Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head)..................................................................... 58 2.3.1 Optional Locking Feature for High-Power Chassis Power Cables...........................58 2.3.2 O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Control Head Power Cables............................................... 60 2.3.3 Battery Selector Switch............................................................................................61 2.4 Antenna Installation............................................................................................................... 62 2.4.1 Antenna Installation on a Metal Body Vehicle..........................................................62 2.4.2 Distance Between Antennas....................................................................................63 2.4.3 Mini-UHF Connection...............................................................................................64 2.4.3.1 Installing Mini-UHF Connection..................................................................65 2.4.4 GPS Antenna Placement......................................................................................... 66 2.4.5 QMA Connection......................................................................................................66 2.4.6 GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connection..................................................... 66 2.5 Installing the Speaker............................................................................................................ 66 2.5.1 Internal Speaker Disassembly................................................................................. 67 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip..................................................................................................... 69 2.7 RFID (Option)........................................................................................................................ 70 2.7.1 RFID Reading.......................................................................................................... 70 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped)............................................................................ 72 2.8 Completing the Installation.................................................................................................... 73 Universal Relay Controller Installation................................................................... 74 3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting..................................................................................... 74 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly.............................................................. 76 3.2.1 Installing the Power Cable....................................................................................... 76 3.2.2 Installing Ground Cable........................................................................................... 76 3.2.3 Installing the Wires...................................................................................................77 3.2.4 Installing the O7/O9 to URC Cable.......................................................................... 79 Options and Accessories Installation..................................................................... 80 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation....................................................................................... 80 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation.............................. 80 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays.......................................... 81 4.2 Installing Remote-Mount Accessory...................................................................................... 81 3 MN005720A01-AA Contents 4.2.1 Installing Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch...................................................... 82 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation..................................................................83 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation................................................................ 83 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation..................................................................................................83 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer.................................................................................................. 84 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio..........................................85 4.2.7 Earphone Jack......................................................................................................... 85 4.2.8 USB Data Cables.....................................................................................................85 4.2.9 RS232 Cables..........................................................................................................86 4.3 Vehicle Interface Port Overview............................................................................................ 86 4.3.1 VIP Output Connections.......................................................................................... 86 4.3.2 VIP Input Connections............................................................................................. 88 4.4 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Siren............................................................. 88 4.5 Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2)........................................................................ 89 4.5.1 Disassembly and Assembly..................................................................................... 90 4.5.1.1 Disassembly...............................................................................................90 4.5.1.2 Assembly....................................................................................................90 4.5.2 Adapter Cable.......................................................................................................... 91 4.6 Memory and Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option......................................................... 93 Motorcycle Radio Installation.................................................................................. 94 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description................................................................................................ 94 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure............................................................................................. 94 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit................................................................................................. 94 5.1.3 Control Head Cable................................................................................................. 94 5.1.4 Microphone.............................................................................................................. 95 5.1.5 External Speaker..................................................................................................... 95 5.1.6 Headset Capability...................................................................................................95 5.1.7 Antenna....................................................................................................................95 5.1.8 Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire.......................................................................................95 5.2 Installation Overview..............................................................................................................95 5.2.1 Important Installation Hints...................................................................................... 96 5.2.2 Parts Identification................................................................................................... 97 5.2.3 Order of Installation..................................................................................................97 5.3 Universal Mounting Plate.......................................................................................................98 5.3.1 Installing the Universal Mounting Plate....................................................................98 5.4 Speaker and Control Head Installation.................................................................................. 99 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together.............99 5.4.1.1 Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together 100 4 MN005720A01-AA Contents 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together.....................................................................................................................101 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately........ 102 5.4.3.1 Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately.......................................................................................................103 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately..................................................................................................................103 5.5 Installing the Speaker.......................................................................................................... 105 5.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip Installation................................................................................. 105 5.6.1 Extension Bracket Mounting.................................................................................. 105 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting...................................................... 106 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting................................................................................106 5.7 Installing Antenna Base and Cables....................................................................................106 5.8 Installing the Antenna.......................................................................................................... 109 5.9 Cable Routing......................................................................................................................109 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure.......................................................................111 5.11 Transceiver and Cabling Installation..................................................................................112 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure.......................................................................113 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver..................................................................................... 114 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option............................................................................ 116 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option........................................................................ 116 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory.......................................................................................116 5.15 Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield..........................................................................117 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring............................................................................................................. 119 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring..................................................................................................120 Finishing the Installation........................................................................................121 6.1 Cable Connection................................................................................................................ 121 6.1.1 Connecting the Cables for O2 Control Head......................................................... 121 6.1.2 Connecting the Cables for O3 Control Head......................................................... 121 6.1.3 Connecting the Cables for O5 and O7 Control Heads...........................................122 6.1.4 Connecting the Cables for O9 Control Head......................................................... 122 6.2 Dust Cover Installation.........................................................................................................122 6.3 Miscellaneous Information................................................................................................... 124 Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting................................................125 7.1 Checking the Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing................................................ 125 7.2 Checking the Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring..............126 7.3 Improving the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines.........................................126 7.4 Minimizing the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas........................................................... 127 7.5 Jump-Starting the Vehicle....................................................................................................127 7.6 Eliminating Noise/Howling from PA Speaker.......................................................................127 5 MN005720A01-AA Contents Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering........................................................... 128 A.1 Service Information............................................................................................................. 129 A.2 Service Information APAC................................................................................................130 Glossary...................................................................................................................134 6 List of Figures MN005720A01-AA List of Figures Figure 1: Front and Side View of O5 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion.......... 20 Figure 2: Front and Side View of O2 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion.......... 20 Figure 3: Front and Side View of O7 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion.......... 21 Figure 4: Front and Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable................................................... 21 Figure 5: Front and Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion..........................21 Figure 6: Front and Side View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion..........................21 Figure 7: Front and Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion..........................22 Figure 8: Front and Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion......................................................... 22 Figure 9: Top and Side View of O9 Universal Relay Controller (URC) with Trunnion (URC is an orderable accessory).........................................................................................................................22 Figure 10: Dash Mount Configuration for O2 Control Head................................................................... 23 Figure 11: Dash Mount Configuration for O3 Control Head................................................................... 23 Figure 12: Dash Mount Configuration for O5 Control Head................................................................... 24 Figure 13: Dash Mount Configuration for O7 Control Head................................................................... 24 Figure 14: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O2 Control Head.....................................................................................25 Figure 15: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, and O3 Control Head.........................................................................................................................25 Figure 16: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O5 Control Head.....................................................................................26 Figure 17: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O7 Control Head.....................................................................................26 Figure 18: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, and O9 Control Head.........................................................................................................................27 Figure 19: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and O7 Control Head (URC is optional)............................................................... 27 Figure 20: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and O9 Control Head (URC is optional)............................................................... 28 Figure 21: Dash Mount Installation.........................................................................................................30 Figure 22: Remote Mount Installation.....................................................................................................31 Figure 23: Remote Mount Installation for Radio with O9 Control Head and Universal Relay Controller (URC is optional)...............................................................................................................31 Figure 24: Radio Installation (O2 Dash Mount)...................................................................................... 32 Figure 25: Radio Installation (O3 Dash Mount)...................................................................................... 33 Figure 26: Radio Installation (O5 Dash Mount)...................................................................................... 33 Figure 27: Radio Installation (O7 Dash Mount)...................................................................................... 34 Figure 28: Radio Installation (O2 Remote Mount).................................................................................. 34 Figure 29: Radio Installation (O3 Remote Mount).................................................................................. 35 Figure 30: Radio Installation (O5 Remote Mount).................................................................................. 35 7 MN005720A01-AA List of Figures Figure 31: Radio Installation (O7 Remote Mount).................................................................................. 36 Figure 32: Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional).........................36 Figure 33: Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts)..............................................................37 Figure 34: Remote Control Head Pinouts...............................................................................................38 Figure 35: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount .................................................................... 39 Figure 36: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount................................................................. 40 Figure 37: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for O9 Remote Mount (URC is optional)...............................41 Figure 38: Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Trunnion Orientation.................................................. 47 Figure 39: Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting............................................................................... 48 Figure 40: Below Dash Trunnion Mounting............................................................................................ 48 Figure 41: O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads)...............................................................................................................................................50 Figure 42: O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View........................................................................ 51 Figure 43: O5 Control Head Rear View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads)...................... 52 Figure 44: O9 Control Head Rear View..................................................................................................52 Figure 45: APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View............................................................................. 54 Figure 46: Radio Display with Current Control Head ID......................................................................... 54 Figure 47: APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob....................................................... 54 Figure 48: O3 Control Head................................................................................................................... 55 Figure 49: O3 Control Head Rear View..................................................................................................56 Figure 50: Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View..............................................................................56 Figure 51: Locking Kit (Optional)............................................................................................................57 Figure 52: Inserting DC Cable to the Radio............................................................................................58 Figure 53: Installing the Locking Bracket................................................................................................59 Figure 54: Bracket Installation (Assembled State)................................................................................. 59 Figure 55: Bracket Uninstallation (1 of 2)............................................................................................... 59 Figure 56: Bracket Uninstallation (2 of 2)............................................................................................... 60 Figure 57: HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector..................................................60 Figure 58: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack

(2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm).............................................................................................61 Figure 59: Battery Selector Switch......................................................................................................... 62 Figure 60: Multiple Antennas Separation for locations 16....................................................................63 Figure 61: Mini-UHF Connection ........................................................................................................... 64 Figure 62: Mini-UHF Connector Tool......................................................................................................65 Figure 63: GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connector on the radio................................................ 66 Figure 64: Speaker Mounting................................................................................................................. 67 Figure 65: Removing the screws on the Control Head...........................................................................68 Figure 66: Removing the Control Head..................................................................................................68 Figure 67: Disconnecting the Speaker Connector..................................................................................69 Figure 68: Reattaching the Control Head...............................................................................................69 8 MN005720A01-AA List of Figures Figure 69: RFID Location....................................................................................................................... 70 Figure 70: Read Angle for Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio...........................................................70 Figure 71: Tag Angle for Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio............................................................. 71 Figure 72: Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation).................................................71 Figure 73: Example of Reader and Tag Misalignment (Reader Orientation)......................................... 71 Figure 74: Universal Relay Controller Orientation.................................................................................. 74 Figure 75: Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View..........................................................75 Figure 76: Power and Ground Cable Glands......................................................................................... 76 Figure 77: Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket...................................................................................... 77 Figure 78: Wires Installation...................................................................................................................78 Figure 79: Wire Installation with Black Stick...........................................................................................78 Figure 80: O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation.......................................................................................... 79 Figure 81: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram.......................................................................................80 Figure 82: Horn/Light Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................... 81 Figure 83: Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount....................................................................82 Figure 84: Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram..................................................................................84 Figure 85: Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections..........................................................................................85 Figure 86: Remote Control Head Pinouts...............................................................................................86 Figure 87: HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail.......................................................................................... 86 Figure 88: Relay Coil..............................................................................................................................87 Figure 89: Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory........................................ 88 Figure 90: Location for Pin 8.................................................................................................................. 89 Figure 91: Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_).......................................... 91 Figure 92: Rear Accessory Connector Audio Configuration...................................................................92 Figure 93: Rear Accessory Connector Data Configuration.................................................................... 92 Figure 94: Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit)......................................98 Figure 95: Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01)..................................................................99 Figure 96: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together........................ 100 Figure 97: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together...........101 Figure 98: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately..................... 102 Figure 99: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately........104 Figure 100: Location of Antenna Port...................................................................................................107 Figure 101: Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Antenna Band Identification...................................107 Figure 102: Routing the Coaxial Cable for GPS/Wi-Fi......................................................................... 108 Figure 103: Routing the Coaxial Cable for Antenna.............................................................................108 Figure 104: Cable Routing....................................................................................................................110 Figure 105: Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation......................................................................... 112 Figure 106: Installing Cables................................................................................................................113 Figure 107: Installing the Transceiver.................................................................................................. 115 9 MN005720A01-AA List of Figures Figure 108: Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework.................................................................................. 117 Figure 109: Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield........................................................................... 117 Figure 110: Position the Sunshield.......................................................................................................118 Figure 111: Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion...............................................................................118 Figure 112: Position Control Head as Desired..................................................................................... 119 Figure 113: Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram.............................................................................................. 119 Figure 114: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram...................................................................................120 Figure 115: Dust Cover Installation Locations......................................................................................123 10 MN005720A01-AA List of Tables List of Tables Table 1: Tools Required for Radio Installations......................................................................................29 Table 2: Dash O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections.......................................................................................................................................43 Table 3: Remote O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections.......................................................................................................................................43 Table 4: Remote O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections.......................................................................................................................................43 Table 5: Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS..................................................................................... 44 Table 6: Power Level Configurations......................................................................................................46 Table 7: Mid Power Trunnion Kit............................................................................................................ 48 Table 8: Available CAN Cables.............................................................................................................. 53 Table 9: Ignition Interface Cables...........................................................................................................53 Table 10: Power Cables......................................................................................................................... 58 Table 11: Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format...................................................................... 72 Table 12: Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power........................................................................... 72 Table 13: VIP Output Connections.........................................................................................................87 Table 14: VIP Input Connections............................................................................................................88 Table 15: Adapter Cable.........................................................................................................................91 Table 16: Transceiver Installation Parts List.........................................................................................115 Table 17: List of Telephone Numbers.................................................................................................. 129 Table 18: Service Information Telephone Numbers and Addresses of the Asia and Pacific Motorola Solutions Centers............................................................................................................. 130 11 MN005720A01-AA Foreword Foreword This manual includes all the information necessary to maintain peak product performance and maximum working time, using levels 1 and 2 maintenance procedures. CAUTION: These servicing instructions are for the use of qualified personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not service parts other than those contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. 12 MN005720A01-AA Copyrights Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 2019 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a specific mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 13 MN005720A01-AA Notations Used in This Manual Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of warning, caution, and notice notations. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and due care must be taken and observed. WARNING: WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or injury. CAUTION: CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, might result in equipment damage. NOTICE: NOTICE indicates an operational procedure, practice, or condition that is essential to emphasize. 14 MN005720A01-AA Related Publications Related Publications The following list contains part numbers and titles of related publications. 68012006035, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O2 Control Head User Guide 6875946M01, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O3 Control Head User Guide 6875947M01, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O5 Control Head User Guide 68012006034, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O7 Control Head User Guide 68007024014, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O9 Control Head User Guide MN005718A01, Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual MN005719A01, Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Detailed Service Manual PMLN6193, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O2 Quick Reference Card PMLN5591, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O3 Quick Reference Card PMLN5592, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O5 Quick Reference Card PMLN6194, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O7 Quick Reference Card PMLN5711, ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O9 Quick Reference Card 6881095C99, RF Energy ExposureTraining and Product Safety Information for Mobile Two-Way Radios installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations 15 MN005720A01-AA Commercial Warranty Commercial Warranty Limited Warranty For information on warranty terms, see the Support page at https://www.motorolasolutions.com. I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long Motorola Solutions Inc. ("Motorola Solutions") warrants the Motorola Solutions manufactured Communication Products listed below ("Product") against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

Mobile Radios Product Accessories One Year One Year The radios additionally ship with a standard 1-year Repair Service Advantage (RSA) (for U.S. customers) or 1-year Extended Warranty (for Canada customers). However, at the time of order, you may choose to omit these warranties. For more RSA or Extended Warranty information, please refer to the price pages. Motorola Solutions, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of Motorola Solutions. This express limited warranty is extended by Motorola Solutions to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of Motorola Solutions. Unless made in a separate agreement between Motorola Solutions and the original end user purchaser, Motorola Solutions does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. Motorola Solutions cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, Motorola Solutions disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. General Provisions This warranty sets forth the full extent of Motorola Solutions responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at Motorola Solutions option, is the exclusive remedy. This warranty is given in lieu of all other express warranties, implied warranties, including without limitation, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are limited to the duration of this limited warranty. In no event shall Motorola Solutions be liable for damages in excess of the purchase price of the product, for any loss of use, loss of time, inconvenience, commercial loss, lost profits or savings or other incidental, special or consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use such product, to the full extent such may be disclaimed by law. 16 MN005720A01-AA Commercial Warranty III. State Law Rights (Applicable Only in U.S.A.) Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages or limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation or exclusions may not apply. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. How To Get Warranty Service You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation, and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola Solutions through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product, it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola Solutions at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover This warranty does not cover the following conditions:

Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola Solutions supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola Solutions normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. Rechargeable batteries if:

- Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.

- The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. Freight costs to the repair depot. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with Motorola Solutions published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from Motorola Solutions. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. Normal and customary wear and tear. WARNING: The circuitry found on the control head and its associated interface boards is designed to function "as-is". Any attempt at modifying or altering the circuitry would void the warranty, and/or could result in radio malfunction or hazardous conditions for the radio and its associated vehicle. 17 MN005720A01-AA Commercial Warranty VI. Patent And Software Provisions Motorola Solutions will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola Solutions will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim. But such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

Motorola Solutions will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim. Motorola Solutions will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise. Product or parts become, or in Motorola Solutions opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit Motorola Solutions, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes noninfringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by Motorola Solutions, nor will Motorola Solutions have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of Motorola Solutions with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola Solutions software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola Solutions software. Motorola Solutions software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such Motorola Solutions software or exercise of rights in such Motorola Solutions software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under Motorola Solutions patent rights or copyrights. VII. Governing Law This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, USA. 18 MN005720A01-AA Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards Notice Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards CAUTION: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. Install only Motorola Solutions approved antennas and accessories. To ensure compliance to RF Energy Safety Standards:

Be sure that antenna installation is per Antenna Installation on page 62 of this manual. Be sure that the Product Safety and RF Safety Booklet enclosed with this radio is available to the end user upon completion of the installation of this radio. Before using this product, read the guide enclosed with your radio which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for compliance with applicable standards and regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit http://

www.motorolasolutions.com. WARNING: This equipment is compliant with Class A of EN55032. In a residential environment, this equipment may cause radio interference. 19 MN005720A01-AA Introduction Introduction This manual covers the installation procedures for ASTRO mobile and motorcycle radios with O2, O3, O5, O7, and O9 control heads and accessories required to complete the radio system. The radio system consists of a control head, radio, antenna, microphone, speaker, cabling, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and accessories. 1.1 Mobile Radio Description This chapter covers the basic dimension of the mobile radio. 1.1.1 Dimensions When installing the radio, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave extra room in the rear of the radio for cabling and accessory connections. Leave extra space in the front of the radio for access, controls, and cabling (if remote mount) and to the sides of the radio so that you can access and install the trunnion screws/wing screws. NOTICE: The rear accessory connector adds 0.75 in. to the overall length. The remote mount length is 244 mm. Figure 1: Front and Side View of O5 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 2: Front and Side View of O2 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion NOTICE: The rear accessory connector adds 0.75 in. to the overall length. The remote mount length is 194 mm. 20 22418020018751802242066989222209 Figure 3: Front and Side View of O7 Control Head with Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion MN005720A01-AA Introduction Figure 4: Front and Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable Figure 5: Front and Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 6: Front and Side View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion 21 178512242071945180611533820999123975118075 MN005720A01-AA Introduction Figure 7: Front and Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 8: Front and Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion Figure 9: Top and Side View of O9 Universal Relay Controller (URC) with Trunnion (URC is an orderable accessory) 22 20917891108821781908318521061.5 MN005720A01-AA Introduction 1.2 Standard Configurations This chapter covers the dash mount, remote mount, and multi-control head configurations. 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration There are two versions of the mobile dash mount. The first are the O2, O5, and O7 control heads which are mounted on the front of the transceiver housing. The second is the O3 control head which is connected to the transceiver through a coiled cable, which is plugged into the CAN connector on the transceiver. Electrical connection between the two takes place within the radio through a flexible circuit board between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the control head for O2, O5, and O7 and between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the TIB for the O3. Figure 10: Dash Mount Configuration for O2 Control Head No. 1 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 11: Dash Mount Configuration for O3 Control Head 23 1111 MN005720A01-AA Introduction No. 1 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 12: Dash Mount Configuration for O5 Control Head No. 1 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 13: Dash Mount Configuration for O7 Control Head No. 1 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration In the remote control version, the transceiver and the control head are mounted separately in the vehicle. The O2, O5, and O7 control heads are mounted in remote trunnions near the operator. The O3 and O9 control heads are also mounted near the operator using extension cables. The transceiver and control head are mounted using a trunnion or other mounting hardware. If the transceiver is located in a car trunk, ensure that it is mounted securely and that sufficient cooling is provided. Do not cover the transceiver with baggage, blankets, and others. NOTICE: The keypad mic should only be plugged into the Modified Modular Plug (MMP) connector located on the control head, in either dash mount or remote mount configuration. 24 1111 Figure 14: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O2 Control Head MN005720A01-AA Introduction No. 1 2 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio MMP Figure 15: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, and O3 Control Head No. 1 2 Description 5 m (17 ft) Extension Cable ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio 25 11222212 MN005720A01-AA Introduction Figure 16: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O5 Control Head No. 1 2 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio MMP Figure 17: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly, and O7 Control Head No. 1 2 Description ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio MMP 26 1122112222 Figure 18: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, and O9 Control Head MN005720A01-AA Introduction No. 1 2 Description 17 ft Extension Cable ASTRO 25 Subscribers Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Figure 19: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and O7 Control Head (URC is optional) No. 1 2 Description 17 ft Extension Cable O7 to URC Cable 27 1212 MN005720A01-AA Introduction Figure 20: Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and O9 Control Head (URC is optional) No. 1 2 Description 17 ft Extension Cable O9 to URC Cable 1.2.3 Multi Control Head The multi control head option allows separate, remotely operated control heads to operate and control the radio. For example, a fire truck could have a control head located in the cab and on the rear of the truck so that the radio could be operated from outside the vehicle. NOTICE: The dual control head can be used together in the future. 1.3 Motorcycle Configurations The mobile motorcycle radio models provide most of the equipment needed for installing a standard mobile radio on a motorcycle. Most of this radio system is standard equipment. See Motorcycle Radio Installation on page 94 for further information. NOTICE: The motorcycle configurations are not applicable O9 control heads. 1.4 Base/Control Stations NOTICE: The base/control station option is not applicable for O9 control heads. 28 12 MN005720A01-AA Introduction The antenna installation must comply with the following requirements if mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed in the 6881095C99 manual:

The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. 1.5 Tools Required for Radio Installations These are the tools required for mobile radio installation. Table 1: Tools Required for Radio Installations Tool 10 mm wrench 5 mm Allen wrench Rubber-coated pliers Regular slot screwdriver of Phillips #2 Pin removal tool RF antenna tool Wing screw torque tool Part Number 6680163F01 HLN6695_ HLN6970_ 29 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Standard Configurations The radio operates only in negative ground electrical systems with a valid operating range of 10.816.3 VDC. Before starting the installation, ensure that the ground polarity of the vehicle is correct. Accidentally reversing the polarity could damage the radio and cause the cable fuses to blow. 2.1 Planning the Installation Planning is the key to fast, easy radio installation. Before starting the installation, inspect the vehicle and determine how and where you intend to mount the antenna, radio, and accessories. Plan wire and cable run to provide maximum protection from pinching, crushing, and overheating. CAUTION:

Before installing any electrical equipment, check the user manual of the vehicle for warnings or recommendations. Authorized servicer or installer should complete the installation of this device. Failure to properly install the device may result in damage to the device, or improper operation. 2.1.1 Installation Examples The mobile two-way radio offers various methods of installation, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. The radio can be dash or remote mounted except for the O9 control head, which can only be mounted remotely. Figure 21: Dash Mount Installation Dash mount radios mounted in the middle console, on the transmission hump, or under the dash, Description Antenna -Wavelength Radio Speaker Battery No. 1 2 3 4 30 91132214 Figure 22: Remote Mount Installation Remote mount radio control heads mounted in the middle console, on the transmission hump, or under the dash. MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations No. 1 2 3 4 5 Description Antenna -Wavelength Radio Speaker Battery Control Head Figure 23: Remote Mount Installation for Radio with O9 Control Head and Universal Relay Controller (URC is optional) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Antenna -Wavelength Radio Speaker Battery Control Head Siren Speaker Universal Relay Controller Box Siren Box 31 91135251491136752814

 

 

MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 2.1.2 Wiring Diagrams The following figures show the wiring diagrams for all the possible configurations. Identify which of these figures shows the configuration that you are installing, and use the diagram when planning the installation. For remote mount configuration, refer to Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation on page 42 and Installing Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch on page 82 for further details and recommended wiring of the emergency cables. Figure 24: Radio Installation (O2 Dash Mount) 32 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWDASHMOUNT RADIOANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 13ftIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ2PINOUT)DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)3ft Figure 25: Radio Installation (O3 Dash Mount) MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 26: Radio Installation (O5 Dash Mount) 33 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWDASHMOUNT RADIOANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 13ftIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ2PINOUT)DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)3ftBATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWDASHMOUNT RADIOANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 13ftIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ2PINOUT)DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)3ft MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 27: Radio Installation (O7 Dash Mount) NOTICE: In dash mount configuration, it is mandatory that a rear accessory cable is attached to the back of a mid power radio, to ground the Emergency pin to ground (GND). Or, an emergency footswitch or pushbutton switch must be attached to the back of a mid power radio. If the emergency pin is not grounded, upon the attachment of the A+ cable at the DC connector, the radio detects HIGH for the emergency pin state, and assume that emergency has been activated. This condition is an attempt to power on the radio, and results in excessive current draw and incorrect radio operation. Refer to Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation on page 42 for further details and recommended wiring of Emergency in dash mount configuration. Figure 28: Radio Installation (O2 Remote Mount) 34 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWDASHMOUNT RADIOANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 13ftIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ2PINOUT)DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)3ftBATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHREDLEADFUSEBLOCKYELLOWLEADBLACKLEAD(+)(-)FUSEFUSECONTROL HEADFIREWALLHOLEANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 1DC POWERCABLERADIOFUSEANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)PWRSPKJ400-1REDSWB+J400-2GREENGNDJ400-3-NOPINJ400-4-"VIP"detect:GPIO=HIGHJ400-5BLUEVIP_OUT_1J400-6YELLOWVIP_OUT_2J400-7BLACKVIP_OUT_3J400-8WHITEVIP_IN_1(VIP_INGPIO)J400-9ORANGEVIP_IN_2(VIP_INGPIO)J400-10VIOLETVIP_IN_3CANCANUSBACCPORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEADVIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4006910742581RadioPinNumberVIPCable(HKN6196_)WireColorFunction3ft3ftDEKVIPJ400 Figure 29: Radio Installation (O3 Remote Mount) MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 30: Radio Installation (O5 Remote Mount) 35 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYCHhangupboxSPEAKERO3CH5m(17ft)CABLE(PMLN4958)EMERGENCYSWITCHFUSEFUSEBLOCK(+)(-)REDLEADFUSEFIREWALLHOLEMOUNTINGSCREWIGNSENSE(ACC)P2(SEEJ626PINOUT)CABLEHLN6863DCPOWERCABLETRUNNIONconnecttoP2FRONTACCESSORYCABLE(PMLN4959)ANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA1J2REARACCESSORYCONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT212V(RELAY)VIPOUT112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGNSENSE(ACC)ANTENNA2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNA3GPS(OPTIONAL)3ft3ftRADIOBATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHREDLEADFUSEBLOCKYELLOWLEADBLACKLEAD(+)(-)FUSEFUSECONTROL HEADFIREWALLHOLEANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 1DC POWERCABLERADIOFUSEANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)PWRSPKJ400-1REDSWB+J400-2GREENGNDJ400-3-NOPINJ400-4-"VIP"detect:GPIO=HIGHJ400-5BLUEVIP_OUT_1J400-6YELLOWVIP_OUT_2J400-7BLACKVIP_OUT_3J400-8WHITEVIP_IN_1(VIP_INGPIO)J400-9ORANGEVIP_IN_2(VIP_INGPIO)J400-10VIOLETVIP_IN_3CANCANUSBACCPORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEADVIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4006910742581RadioPinNumberVIPCable(HKN6196_)WireColorFunction3ft3ftDEKVIPJ400 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 31: Radio Installation (O7 Remote Mount) Figure 32: Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional) 36 BATTERYHORNRELAYLIGHTRELAYMICCLIPSPEAKERMICEMERGENCYSWITCHREDLEADFUSEBLOCKYELLOWLEADBLACKLEAD(+)(-)FUSEFUSECONTROL HEADFIREWALLHOLEANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 1DC POWERCABLERADIOFUSEANTENNA 2WI-FI(OPTIONAL)ANTENNA 3GPS (OPTIONAL)PWRSPKJ400-1REDSWB+J400-2GREENGNDJ400-3-NOPINJ400-4-"VIP"detect:GPIO=HIGHJ400-5BLUEVIP_OUT_1J400-6YELLOWVIP_OUT_2J400-7BLACKVIP_OUT_3J400-8WHITEVIP_IN_1(VIP_INGPIO)J400-9ORANGEVIP_IN_2(VIP_INGPIO)J400-10VIOLETVIP_IN_3CANCANUSBACCPORTS ON REAR OF REMOTE CONTROL HEADVIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4006910742581RadioPinNumberVIPCable(HKN6196_)WireColorFunction3ft3ftDEKVIPJ400MICMICCLIPEMERGENCYSWITCH(SEE J2PINOUT)GUN LOCKEARJACKControl HeadSpeakerSiren SpeakerSiren BoxRED LEADHORNRELAYANTENNA 1FIREWALLHOLEDC POWERCABLEURC Controller BoxBLACKLEADLIGHTBARO9 TO URC CableRADIOCAN CableANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNACONNECTIONANTENNA 2(+)(-)RED LEADRED LEADRED LEADYELLOW LEADCONTROL HEADFUSEFUSEFUSEFUSEBLOCKBATTERYFUSECIRCUIT BREAKER Figure 33: Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts) MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description J500 USB J100 M.A.P J200 PWR/SPKR (RED) J300L CAN (BLUE) J300R CAN (BLUE) J400 DEK/VIP (YELLOW) GCAI 37 VIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4006910742581J400-1 RED SWB +J400-2 GREEN GNDJ400-3 - NO PINJ400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGHJ400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO)J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO)J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 RadioPinNumberVIP Cable(HKN6196_)Wire ColorFunctionJ2REAR ACCESSORY CONNECTOR1781413202126SPKR-SPKR+VIPOUT 212V(RELAY)VIPOUT 112V(RELAY)GROUNDEMERGENCYIGN SENSE(ACC)1234567 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 34: Remote Control Head Pinouts Description J100 J200 J300L J300R J400 J500 USB DEK VIP (YELLOW) CAN (BLUE) CAN (BLUE) PWR SPK (RED) M.A.P No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 38 123456121110987 Figure 35: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 39 RADIO COMPARTMENT = OPERATOR COMPARTMENTVEHICLE BATTERY COMPARTMENTCONTROL HEADIGN SENSE (thin RED)ACC lineGROMMETVEHICLEIGNITION SWITCHVEHICLEBATTERYCHASSIS GNDFUSEFUSESEE NOTEA+ (RED)SPEAKERMICROPHONETRANSCEIVERNOTE:See TABLE 2-1 for wiring of the thin RED wire. A good GROUND connection to the car chassis is required for correct radio opearaions.NOTE:Ignition sense cable uses either 3-amp fuse (6580283E01) or 4-amp fuse (6580283E02) REARCONNECTOR MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 36: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount 40 IGN SENSE(YELLOW) ACC lineVEHICLEIGNITION SWITCHGROMMETVEHICLEBATTERYCHASSIS GNDMICROPHONECONTROL HEAD (REAR VIEW)DIGITAL CONTROL CABLEREMOTE MOUNT OPERATIONRADIO COMPARTMENTVEHICLE BATTERYCOMPARTMENTOPERATOR COMPARTMENTTRANSCEIVERCHASSIS GNDNOTE:See TABLE 2-1 for wiring of the YELLOW wire. A good GROUND connection to the car chassis is required for correct radio operation.REARCONNECTORTIBGROMMETSPEAKERA+ (RED)SEE NOTEFUSEFUSE Figure 37: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for O9 Remote Mount (URC is optional) MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 41 RADIO COMPARTMENTCAUTIONOPERATOR COMPARTMENTVEHICLE BATTERYCOMPARTMENTSiren Box(BLK)A+(Red)A+(Red)15A FuseMICROPHONEVEHICLEIGNITION SWITCHVEHICLEBATTERYPART OFVEHICLEWIRINGSiren SpeakerON/ACC3A OR 4A FUSESEE NOTESPEAKERRADIO POWER CABLE(RED/BATTERY HOT)15A, 20A OR30A FUSE16A Circuit BreakerGROMMETGROMMETGROMMETREARCONNECTORURC ControllerBoxChassis GNDGCAI to RJ45CableRADIOTIBChassis GNDCAN extension cableA+(Red)IGN Sense(yellow)(BLK)Control Head (Rear View)Chassis GND(+)(-)NOTE:For remote mount configurations, do not supply IGNITION at the radio's rear accessory connector. IGNITION should be supplied according to TABLE 2-2. See TABLE 2-2 for combinations of wiring theRED and YELLOW cables.The RED and YELLOW power cables connect to either the vehicle battery or the ignition switch. Connect the RED cable directly to the battery. The receiver operates when the control head is on. Connecthe YELLOW cable to the ignition switch. The transmitter operates only when the ignition switch is on.Alternate connections: Connecting both RED and YELLOW cables to the battery allows the control head to turn the receiver and transmitter on or off. Connecting both RED and YELLOW cables to theignition switch allows the ignition switch to turn the receiver and transmitter on or off. Alternator whine and other noise problems may occur. Isolate the RED cable with a Motorola relay (5900813674). MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 2.1.3 Radio Operation Wiring for Dash and Remote Configurations Determine the radio functionality you wish to achieve from the tables in Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation on page 42, which is the vehicle ignition switch state is controlling, the physical wiring of the radio ignition sense (ACC) wire, and by the programmed CPS setting. For more radio functionality as determined by the programming of the ignition switch in the CPS, refer to the Help menu in your CPS (Ignition as: Required, Blank, Soft Power Off, TX Inhibit, PTT TX Inhibit, Ignition Only Power Up). Choose a clean ignition point which is not shared in the immediate vicinity by other high current accessories/devices. This choice helps to reduce the transients on the ignition line. Examples of high-current accessories/devices are air horn, relays, and lightbars. It is safe to wire to the vehicle ACC line, not the START, or the solenoid side of the ignition circuit. Refer to Finishing the Installation on page 121 for best installation practices. The Ignition sense (ACC) cable uses either a 3 A fuse

(6580283E01) or 4 A fuse (6580283E02). 2.1.3.1 Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation The standard dash mount rear ignition sense cable HLN6863 contains a thin red ignition wire, a jumper wire that shorts emergency to ground, and two gray wires attached to an external speaker plug. The thin RED wire is the ignition sense wire. Refer to the tables from Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation on page 42 for its correct wiring configurations. NOTICE: This cable must be attached for the radio to operate in dash mount configuration regardless of how emergency is programmed in the CPS or wired inside the vehicle. Either the emergency jumper wire or an emergency accessory (footswitch or button) must be wired to the rear of the radio in dash mount configuration. Otherwise, upon attachment of the radio power cable to the vehicle battery, the radio incorrectly determines that emergency operation has been activated, such as when an emergency footswitch is de-pressed and the emergency pin is ungrounded. 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation The single control head O2, O3, O5, O7, and O9 remote mount configurations receive power from the J200 red and black wires connector. The yellow wire at J200 is an ignition sense wire. On mid power radios, the J2 and J600 connectors can also be used for ignition sense. On high-power radios, the J200 yellow wire or the J600 connector can be used for ignition sense. If HLN6863 is attached at J100 of the O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 control head, the thin red wire do not function as an ignition sense wire, since the J100 connector has no ignition sense electrical connection. NOTICE: It is incorrect to attach the ignition sense wire to more than one wire or connector. Refer to the following tables for its correct wiring configurations. The O3 control head receives its power down the CAN cable, and detects the ignition state by the ignition sense pin at either J2 or J600. On mid power radios, the J2 and J600 connectors can also be used for ignition sense. On high-power radios, only the J600 connector can be used for ignition sense. In Multi-Control Head installations, the yellow ignition wire must be connected to the head assigned ID

#1. See Setting the Initial Control Head ID on page 53 for further information. In remote mount O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9, an Emergency jumper to ground is placed by default on the TIB (JU344) so that there is no need to attach a cable with an emergency accessory to either J2 or J600. This jumper must be removed if an emergency accessory (footswitch or button to Ground) is installed at either J2 or J600 (or J626 on the accessory cable). If the jumper JU344 is removed but no 42 Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations emergency accessory is installed, the radio powers up incorrectly into emergency mode all the time. Refer to Figure 83: Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount on page 82 for details. The design of the control head is different compared to the radio. Therefore it is also not necessary to attach HLN6863 to J100 to prevent accidental emergency operation. The control head uses an edge-

detect, not a state-detect like on the radio, so mounting of HLN6863 is not mandatory. Table 2: Dash O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections Dash Mount HLN6863 Thin Red Wire Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire X HLN6863 Thin Red Wire X Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire X X X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as program-

med in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configura-

tion. Table 3: Remote O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections Remote Mount Control Head Yel-

low Wire Control Head Red Wire Control Head Red Wire X Control Head Yel-

low Wire X Control Head Red Wire X Control Head Yel-

low Wire X X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as program-

med in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configura-

tion. Table 4: Remote O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections Mid Pow-

er Dash/

Remote High-Pow-

er Dash/

Remote Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 X Connected to battery X X 43 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Mid Pow-

er Dash/

Remote High-Pow-

er Dash/

Remote Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 X Transceiv-

er Red Power Wire X HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as program-

med in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configura-

tion. CAUTION:

DO NOT connect any wires to the battery terminals until you have finished the entire radio installation (dash or remote mount configuration) to avoid potential equipment damage. Incorrect wiring of the radio may result in incorrect ignition sense detection, incorrect power-on state, or incorrect power-off state of the radio system. The Control Head Power cable wire (RED) and Transceiver Power cable wire (RED) are always attached to the battery terminal and NOT to the ignition switch. 2.1.4 Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance) The CPS (Customer Programming Software) selectable settings is used to control the radio functionality based on the state of the vehicle Ignition status. These descriptions can be found in the CPS tool HELP Guides and are repeated here for convenience. Table 5: Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS Feature Blank Description Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed or with the Emer-

gency Power-up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed. Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed or with the Emer-

gency Power-up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed. If IGNITION is not present, all transmissions are inhibited. The radio does not affiliate with trunking systems and therefore cannot receive any trunking dispatch communications. Emergency Alarm transmissions are NOT possible with the use of the Emergency Power-up feature. Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed or with the Emer-

gency Power-up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed. TX Inhibit PTT TX Inhibit 44 Feature Description MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations If IGNITION is not present, all transmissions are inhibited. The radio is able to affiliate with trunking systems. The radio can ONLY receive trunking dispatch communications. Required Soft Power-off Emergency Alarm transmissions are possible with the use of the Emer-

gency Power-up feature. Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed and Ignition is present. Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is cycled and radio was previously turned ON. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed, or when Igni-

tion is lost. Radio POWERS ON when the Power button is pressed, or when Ignition is detected. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power button is pressed, or when Igni-

tion is lost. Ignition Only Pow-

er-up Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is present. Radio POWERS OFF when Ignition is lost. Control head Power button is ignored. NOTICE: When either TX Inhibit, PTT TX Inhibit or Required are selected, the Emergency Power-up feature is not available. When any other Ignition Switch setting is made, Emergency Power-up is available regardless of the current ignition state. Any optional inactivity time-out timer setting in CPS may delay the power-off of the radio once Ignition sense is removed. 2.1.5 Siren/PA Configuration and Programming The Siren/PA is shipped pre-wired for 100 W operation. It can be rewired for 65 W, 75 W, or 130 W power levels. Refer to this procedure if you want to change to another power level. Procedure:

1 Open the Siren/PA connector cover to gain access to the two-connector speaker leads. Do not change the speaker common lead (pin 20). The other lead is connected to pin 35 (for 100 W operation). 2 Using an appropriate pin removal tool, extract pin 35 and move it to one of the following pin locations:

Pin location 36 for 75 W operation Pin location 28 for 65 W or 130 W operation 3 Do one of the following:

For 65 W or 75 W operation, reassemble the connector. 45 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations For 130 W operation, parallel the two 11 speakers, each rated at 65 W minimum. Proper phasing of the two speakers is important when connecting two speakers in parallel, wire similar speaker terminals together to ensure maximum loudness and prevent "deadspots". For example, if the terminals are marked "1" and "2", connect the terminals marked "1" together and connect those wires to one speaker lead. Connect the terminals marked "2" together and connect those wires to the other speaker lead. CAUTION: Before continuing, remember that under a high-line supply condition (16.6 V), up to 30% more power goes to the speakers after reconfiguring for 130 W operation. Do this setting only when your PA speakers can handle the extra power. 4 When the Siren/PA is configured for dual speaker for 130 W operation, it is necessary to remove a resistor and move two jumpers to set the correct power level. Remove the Siren/PA cover, and locate resistor R219 (0 ). This resistor should be removed for 130 W operation. Locate jumpers JU100 and JU101. These jumpers should be installed for 130 W operation. 5 Close and reconnect the Siren/PA connector cover. NOTICE: Jumpers JU100 and JU101 do not affect the Siren output level. JU100 and JU101 compensate for the lower speaker load and the two speakers in parallel by decreasing the gain U102-1. JU100 affects the radio PA level and JU101 affects the PA audio level. Pin locations of various power level configurations are listed in the following table. Table 6: Power Level Configurations Power Level Pin Location of Speaker Leads 20, 28 20, 36 20, 35 20, 28 R219 IN IN IN OUT JU100/JU101 Across pins A and B Across pins A and B Across pins A and B Across pins B and C 65 W 75 W 100 W 130 W 2.2 Radio Mounting CAUTION:

DO NOT mount the radio on a plastic mounting surface without first reinforcing the mounting surface; the weight of the radio may crack or break the mounting surface. DO NOT mount the radio on a flat or concave surface where the radio could be partially submersed in water. It is especially important if the cab area of the vehicle is cleaned by spraying it with water. If the radio sits in water for a length of time, moisture may seep inside the radio and damage the electronic components. DO NOT allow water to stand in recessed areas of vertically mounted radios. Remove any moisture immediately to prevent it from seeping down into the radio. Shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose usually is more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that permits routing the RF antenna cable as directly as possible. 46 NOTICE: For optimum radio performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in the following figures. For new or existing installations of APX 2500, APX 4500, and APX 1500, use only the APX mobile trunnion, kit number HLN6861_. Figure 38: Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Trunnion Orientation MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Applies to radios in dash and remote installations. No. 1 Description Radio Front 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion Procedure:

1 Referring to the following table, select the suitable trunnion kit per the type of mid power radio. 2 Mount your radio on the transmission hump or under the dash. NOTICE:

When mounting the trunnion on the transmission hump, ensure that the transmission housing is not affected. Plan your installation, ensuring enough room for the accessory connector and cable at the back of the radio. This configuration shows the O5 control head. The TIB is used for O3 control head for the same configuration. 47 1 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 39: Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting Figure 40: Below Dash Trunnion Mounting Table 7: Mid Power Trunnion Kit Item 1 Part Number 0305760W04 0312002B14 HLN6861_

-

-

2 3 4 5 48 Description Trunnion Mounting Wing Screw Self-Drilling Tap-

ping Screw ASTRO Trunnion Hardware Kit Threaded Hole for Screw Groove Mid Power Radio Enhanced Single Band Mobile Enhanced Single Band Mobile Enhanced Single Band Mobile

-

-

11311456327 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Item 6 Part Number

-

Description Plastic Guides Mid Power Radio

-

3 Using the trunnion mounting bracket as a template, mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. Use the innermost four holes for a curved mounting surface such as the transmission hump, and the four outermost holes for a flat surface such as under the dash. 4 Center punch the spots you have marked and realign the trunnion in position. 5 Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the four self-drilling screws provided. 6 Ensure that the plastic guides are aligned (horizontal) to the grooves of the trunnion. Slide the radio into the grooves until it snaps into place. 7 Secure the radio with the two screws provided (Item 1). The torque down force for 0371859H01 should be between 50 in-lbf to 52 in-lbf. 8 For screw 0305760W04, the wing screw torque tool (HLN6970_) is designed to securely tighten the trunnion wing screws while installing the radio. The tool can also be used to loosen the wing screws. Detailed instructions are included in the tool packaging. 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion For remote mount installation, the radio may be mounted anywhere in the vehicle, as long as the installation location is safe, follows the cautions mentioned at the beginning of this section, and is accessible for servicing/maintenance and cabling. A typical mounting location recommended by Motorola Solutions is in the trunk of the vehicle. The trunnion provided may still be used to mount the transceiver, and the mounting process is the same for dash mount installation. See Figure 30: Radio Installation (O5 Remote Mount) on page 35 or Figure 31: Radio Installation (O7 Remote Mount) on page 36 for remote installation. 2.2.2.1 Remote Mount Control Head Installation Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, and control and antenna cable lengths. The recommended mounting surfaces for the control unit are under the mounting surface, on the transmission hump, or on the center console. Installing Remote Mount Control Head on page 50 shows how you should install the trunnion, control head, and cables for the O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 control head. NOTICE:

Connector-protective covers (Dust Covers) HLN6980_ are provided with the radio. Install the covers on exposed connectors for added environmental robustness. An adjustable trunnion, which allows several mounting positions, is supplied to mount the control unit. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories, nor disturb passenger seating or leg room. The control head must be within convenient reach and viewing of the user. If the trunnion is mounted on a plastic mounting surface, all four mounting screws should penetrate the supporting metal frame of the mounting surface. If that is not possible, use a metal backing plate (not supplied) to strengthen the installation. 49 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 2.2.2.1.1 Installing Remote Mount Control Head Procedure:

1 Use the control unit trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes; drill 5/32" holes. If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 2 Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10-16" x 5/8" self-tapping screws provided. 3 Temporarily install the control head (adjusting for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. 4 Test the installation to ensure that the control head feels securely locked in place while you are pressing its buttons. 5 Finish the installation by fully tightening the screws. Figure 41: O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) Description Metal Backing Plate (Not Supplied) No. 1 50 1 Figure 42: O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Adjust the control head to a desired angle and secure with wing screws Mounting surface IMPORTANT: If the trunnion is mounted on a plastic or unstable surface, use a metal backing plate (not supplied). Drill four 5/32 holes in the mounting surface Trunnion Use four mounting screws on all installations 51 123456 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 43: O5 Control Head Rear View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) Figure 44: O9 Control Head Rear View 2.2.2.2 Multiple Control Head Installation Install control heads in a multiple control head configuration as per the steps detailed in Installing Remote Mount Control Head on page 50. Two heads can be connected to each of the two CAN connectors on the radio, with the remaining heads connected to one or both of the first two. You can also connect control heads in a daisy chain configuration from the CAN connector of a single radio. See the following figures for examples. NOTICE: The transceiver must be configured for Multiple Control Head through CPS programming. Navigate to the Control Head tab in the Radio Wide section of the CPS, and select Help for further information and tutorials. NOTICE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. See Setting the Initial Control Head ID on page 53 for further information. Use the most convenient configuration for your installation, ensuring that the combined cable lengths do not exceed 131 feet (40 meters). See Table 8: Available CAN Cables on page 53 for a list of 52 available CAN cable lengths. Control head ground, power and ignition sense wires (black, red, and yellow respectively) may need more length (not supplied) in installations that locate the head more than 10 feet from a power source. MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Table 8: Available CAN Cables Part Number HKN6164_ HKN6165_ HKN6166_ HKN6167_ HKN6168_ HKN6169_ HKN6170_ PMLN4958_ Description Cable, Remote Mount, 40 m (131 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 35 m (115 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 23 m (75 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 15 m (50 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 9 m (30 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 5 m (17 ft) Cable, Remote Mount, 3 m (10 ft) Cable, O3 Extension, 5 m (17 ft) Table 9: Ignition Interface Cables Part Number Description Cable, M.A.P. 26 pin with Only Ignition and SPK HLN6863_ PMLN4959_ Cable, Y-Splitter with DB-25 and M.A.P. Interface 2.2.2.3 Cable Installation Route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges or crushing. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. Figure 35: Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount on page 39 shows how the cables and components are connected. It is not recommended to route cabling or wiring inside the wheel wells of a vehicle. 2.2.2.4 Setting the Initial Control Head ID The Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode allows you to define which control head in a Multi-Control Head system becomes control head number 14. Prerequisites: Set the control head ID number for each attached head the first-time Multi-Control Head is used. Procedure:

1 Press the Power button to power off the radio. 2 Simultaneously press and hold the left-most Soft Menu key and the Emergency button on the control head. 53 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 45: APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View No. 1 2 3 Description Power button Left-most Soft Menu key Emergency button 3 Press the Power button to power on the control head. Figure 46: Radio Display with Current Control Head ID The head is powered on into FPP mode and displays the current control head ID number. 4 Turn the Mode knob to change the control head ID number. Figure 47: APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob No. 1 Description Mode Knob 5 Repeat step 1 through step 4 to set the ID of the remaining control heads. NOTICE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID #1. 54 O5321O51

 

 

MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 2.2.2.5 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, control, and antenna cable lengths. The control head extension cable and the accessories cable should be installed and routed properly to avoid complications. Prerequisites: Route the cables in the wiring troughs (where available) of the vehicle or route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges, or crushing. One suggested route is along one side of the driveshaft hump under the carpet. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. Figure 48: O3 Control Head No. 1 2 3 4 5 Description Top Left Front Right Back The recommended mounting surface for the control unit is on the center console. Figure 50: Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View on page 56 shows how the hang-up clip control head, and cables should be installed for the O3 control head. 55 12345 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations A mounting clip, which allows the control head to be mounted, is supplied together with the control head. Procedure:

1 Use the provided mounting clip to determine the location of the two screw holes. 2 Drill 7/16 deep holes for the upper and lower screws. 3 Use the tapping screw provided to install the mounting clip. CAUTION: Shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose is usually more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. Figure 49: O3 Control Head Rear View Figure 50: Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View 56 1223 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Item No. 1 2 3 Part Number 01-80743T91 03-07644M19

-

Description Mic Hang-Up Clip Assembly Screw, Machine, 8-32 x 7/16 Vehicle Mounting Surface 2.2.3 Radio Locking The section describes the radio locking on the trunnion. 2.2.3.1 Locking Kit Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio If an optional locking kit (HLN6372_) is used, position the lock housing on the trunnion after installing the radio mounting screws. Then rotate the lock with the key in it and remove the key to lock the radio. You can install the lock on either side of the radio, and in dash and remote mount installations. Figure 51: Locking Kit (Optional) No. 1 2 3 Description Wing Screw Lock Housing Lock 57 123 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 2.3 Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head) Route the RED power cable from both the radio and the control head to the vehicle battery compartment, using accepted industry methods and standards. Be sure to grommet the firewall hole to protect the cable. Remove the 15 A (part number 6580283E06), 20 A (part number 6580283E07), or 30 A (part number 6580283E09) fuse from the fuseholder and connect the red lead of the radio power cable to the positive battery terminal using the hardware provided as shown in Figure 57: HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector on page 60 and Figure 58: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) on page 61. Connect the black lead to a convenient solid chassis ground point. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the battery negative terminal. Table 10: Power Cables Description Mid Power Dash Mount Mid Power Remote Mount O5, O7, and O9 Remote Control Head Power Cable Part Number HKN4191_ HKN4192_ HKN6188_ NOTICE: Remote Control Head power cable uses a 5 A Fuse (part number 6580283E03). 2.3.1 Optional Locking Feature for High-Power Chassis Power Cables An optional clip (HLN7017_) can be used to increase DC cable retention in high-power radios. Procedure:

1 Insert the DC cable to the radio by aligning the male and female portions of the battery side with the mating components on the radio side. Figure 52: Inserting DC Cable to the Radio 2 Insert the locking bracket (HLN7017_) onto the DC cable. 3 Slide the bracket toward the radio until the bracket clips snap onto the radio features. 58 Figure 53: Installing the Locking Bracket MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 54: Bracket Installation (Assembled State) 4 To disassemble the power cable, squeeze the locking bracket clips inward and while squeezing the clips, pull the locking clip and power cable to remove the power cable. Figure 55: Bracket Uninstallation (1 of 2) 59 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 56: Bracket Uninstallation (2 of 2) 2.3.2 O2, O3, O5, O7, or O9 Control Head Power Cables Figure 57: HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector 60 Figure 58: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack

(2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations NOTICE:

Audio Out Does not require CPS programming. Attaching a headset mutes the external speakers of the radio which are attached to the SPK jack of the control head. Record Out Requires CPS programming. In CPS, navigate to Radio Wide/Advanced/Record Audio and select TX + RX Audio. 2.3.3 Battery Selector Switch In vehicles with a Battery Selector Switch, the ignition sense (yellow) wire should be the only wire connected to the Battery Selector Switch. The radio transceiver and control head power wires (red) must be connected directly to the vehicle battery. If the control head power wire and the control head ignition sense wire are both connected to a Battery Selector Switch, but the radio transceiver power lead is not, improper power-cycling and off-state battery drainage may occur. If the desired state of the radio is a total battery drain elimination, then route all power and ignition sense wires through the Battery Selector Switch, so that the control head and radio transceiver both see the loss of battery power at the same time. 61 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 59: Battery Selector Switch 2.4 Antenna Installation IMPORTANT: To ensure optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety standards, these antenna installation guidelines, and instructions are limited to metal-body vehicles with appropriate ground planes and consider the potential exposure of back seat passengers and bystanders outside the vehicle. NOTICE: For mobile radios with rated power of 7 W or less, the only installation restrictions are to use only Motorola Solutions approved antennas and install the antenna externally on metal body vehicles. For mobile radios with tuned power greater than 7 W, always adhere to all the guidelines and restrictions in Antenna Installation on a Metal Body Vehicle on page 62. 2.4.1 Antenna Installation on a Metal Body Vehicle You can install the antenna at the following locations:

External installation Check the requirements of the antenna supplier and install the vehicle antenna external to a metal body vehicle in accordance with those requirements. Roof top For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations, mount the antenna at the center of the roof. Trunk lid On some vehicles with clearly defined, flat trunk lids, you can mount the antennas of some radio models at the center of the trunk lid. For vehicles without clearly defined, flat trunk lids

(such as hatchback autos, sports utility vehicles, and pick-up trucks), mount the antenna at the center of the roof. Ensure that the following are observed before installing an antenna on the trunk lid:

- Ensure that the distance from the antenna location on the trunk lid is at least 85 cm (33 in.) from the rear seat head-rest to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations.

- Ensure that the trunk lid is grounded by connecting grounding straps between the trunk lid and the vehicle chassis. CAUTION: If these conditions cannot be satisfied, then mount the antenna on the roof top. NOTICE:

Do not cut the antenna cables to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations. To ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations, mount the 1/4 wave antenna of VHF and UHF bands only at the center of the roof, . 62 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Ensure that the antenna cable can be easily routed to the radio. Route the antenna cable as far away as possible from any vehicle electronic control units and associated wiring. Check the antenna location for any electrical interference. NOTICE: Any two metal pieces rubbing against each other such as seat springs, shift levers, trunk and hood lids, exhaust pipes, and others close to the antenna can cause severe receiver interference. 2.4.2 Distance Between Antennas The following figure indicates the separation distances required for the various antennas used with all mobile radios. Each "cross-hair" symbol represents a possible location (LOC) of an antenna. The recommendation is to locate them as close to the center of the roof and/or trunk as possible, without interference with a lightbar. NOTICE: Do not cut the antenna cable. Figure 60: Multiple Antennas Separation for locations 16 Letters A, B, C, and D indicates the maximum distance of 8 inches between the edge of the ground plane and the accessory antenna location. 63 BBACCDDALOC:3LOC:1LOC:4LOC:5LOC:2LOC:6RoofCenterTrunkCenter MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations NOTICE:

A minimum of 18 inches separation is required between the lightbar and any roof-mounted antennas to prevent interference with the lightbar circuitry (see lightbar manufacturers installation information). LMR antennas should only be placed at the center of the roof (LOC:1) or center of the trunk

(LOC:2). To ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations, install VHF and UHF 1/4 wave antenna at LOC:1 (center of the roof only). Install the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth roof mount antenna at LOC:3, LOC:4, LOC:5, or LOC:6. For the installation of glass mount Wi-Fi/Bluetooth antenna, refer to the antenna installation manual. 2.4.3 Mini-UHF Connection To help the installation of the radio antenna, there are labels indicating the frequency. The first is on the FCC label at the top of the radio which calls out the frequency with arrows indicating the location of the RF connector at the back of the radio. The second is at the back of the radio, next to the RF connector. To ensure a secure connection of an antenna cable mini-UHF plug to a radio mini-UHF jack, their interlocking features must be properly engaged. If they are not properly engaged, the system loosens. Do not use a tool (pliers or wrench) to overcome a poor engagement. NOTICE: Applying excessive force with a tool such as stripping threads, deforming the collar or connector, or causing the connector to twist in the housing opening and break, can damage the antenna or the connector. The mini-UHF connector tool (Motorola Solutions part number HLN6695_) is designed to securely tighten the antenna plugradio jack connection without damaging either the plug or the jack. Motorola Solutions recommends the following sequence to ensure proper attachment of the system

(see the following figures). Figure 61: Mini-UHF Connection Description Coax Conductor Plug (Pin) Collar Pulled Back to Flange Flange No. 1 2 3 64 123456 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations No. 4 5 6 Description Cable Mini UHF Jack RF Antenna Connector Label 2.4.3.1 Installing Mini-UHF Connection Prerequisites:

Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. Ensure that the collar of the antenna cable plug is loose and does not bind. Ensure that the mini-UHF jack is tight in the radio housing. Procedure:

1 Slide the collar back against the flange. 2 Insert the antenna cable plug pin fully into the radio jack, but do not engage the threads. 3 Ensure that the plug and jack interlocking features are fully seated. Do the check up by grasping the crimp on the cable jack, rotating the cable, and noting any movement. If the features are seated correctly, there should be NO movement. 4 Finger-tighten the antenna cable plug collar onto the radio jack. 5 Give a final tug by hand to the collar and retighten by hand as firmly as possible. 6 Slip the mini-UHF connector tool over the coaxial cable, using the gap between the tool legs. Figure 62: Mini-UHF Connector Tool No. 1 2 3 Description Squeeze Firmly Together Tighten HLN6695_ 7 Slide the tool up onto the knurled collar of the plug. 8 Squeeze the two straight legs of the tool firmly together between your thumb and index finger and turn clockwise (as shown) to tighten the collar. It should take 1/4 turn or less. 65 132 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations NOTICE: DO NOT use pliers or any other device to grip the tightening tool. It has been designed to allow you to achieve the proper torque on the collar without overtightening. Overtightening the collar can damage the connector and the radio. When you feel the tool slipping on the collar, the connection has been properly tightened. The tool can also be used to loosen a tight collar. 2.4.4 GPS Antenna Placement Place the GPS antenna (excluding the Motorcycle GPS antenna) at least, 3 ft

(0.9 m) away from any transmitting antenna, and the antenna must have a clear, unobstructed view of the sky for best performance. Consider the length of the cabling before the installation is started. 2.4.5 QMA Connection The radio uses a quick disconnect connection called QMA. This does not require any tightening. Ensure there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. Ensure that the collar of the antenna cable plug does not bind. Engage the QMA cable plug onto the jack, listening for a click to ensure proper engagement. Gently tug on the cable to ensure that it is engaged. To disengage, pull back on the cable plug collar and pull the cable straight off the jack. 2.4.6 GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connection Connect GPS and Wi-Fi antenna cable QMA plug to the radio QMA jack for GPS and Wi-Fi respectively. Figure 63: GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connector on the radio 2.5 Installing the Speaker The speaker kit includes a trunnion bracket that allows the speaker to be mounted in various ways. With the trunnion bracket, the speaker can mount permanently on the mounting surface or in accessible firewall areas. The trunnion allows the speaker to tilt for best operation. Mount the speaker out of the way so that the vehicle occupants cannot kick or knock around it. Prerequisites:

CAUTION: DO NOT ground the radio speaker leads. This system has a floating speaker output

(DC voltage on both leads); damage to the audio circuit results if either lead is grounded or if they are shorted together. 66 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Procedure:

1 To mark the mounting hole locations, use the speaker mounting bracket as a template. 2 Use the self-drilling screws provided to fasten the trunnion. 3 Attach the speaker and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. 4 Route the speaker wires under the carpet or floor covering, or behind the kick panels. Ensure that the wires are out of the way of the occupants of the vehicle. 5 Do not submerse the 2-pin speaker connector in water nor place this connector in an area that could have standing water. Figure 64: Speaker Mounting No. 1 2 3 4 Description Trunnion Bracket Firewall Dashboard EITHER way 2.5.1 Internal Speaker Disassembly Prerequisites:

NOTICE:

This configuration is only applicable for O2 Control Heads. Procedure:

1 Unplug the power, antenna, microphone, and all accessories connections. If the radio is a remote-mount radio, disconnect the remote-mount control cable from the front of the transceiver. 2 Remove the four screws found on the control head with a Torx T-20 bit. Discard the screws. 67 1234 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations Figure 65: Removing the screws on the Control Head 3 Firmly grasp the front panel of the control head. Carefully remove the front housing assembly from the back housing assembly. Note the position of the attached flex and do not pull on it excessively. Figure 66: Removing the Control Head 4 Put the control head face down on a clean, flat surface to avoid damaging it. Do not touch the o-

ring on the back housing. 5 Carefully disconnect the speaker connector from the circuit board. 68 Figure 67: Disconnecting the Speaker Connector MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 6 Reattach the front housing assembly to the back housing assembly. Ensure that the flex is returned to its original position and that the o-ring on the back housing assembly is not pinched. Figure 68: Reattaching the Control Head 7 Secure the front housing assembly back to the back housing assembly with four new screws using the Torx T-20 bit. Apply 9 in. lbs. torque for each screw. 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip This section describes the microphone hang-up clip for mobile radios. The hang-up clip must be within reach of the operator and close enough to the control head to prevent cable strain. Measure this distance before actually mounting the bracket. Since the bracket has a positive-detent action, you can mount the microphone at any position. To locate the mounting holes, use the hang-up clip as a template. To avoid interference when removing the microphone, install the flathead screw at the top clip hole. Some microphone models require the grounding of the microphone clip in order for HUB operation to work correctly. Refer to the documentation that comes with your Motorola Solutions microphone model. NOTICE: For multi-control head configuration where only one of the control heads has a microphone, the control heads without a microphone attached must have their HUB or Monitor pin (J100-22) jumpered by a wire to GND (J100-1 or J100-14) for HUB operation to work. 69 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 2.7 RFID (Option) A mobile radio equipped with an RFID tag allows an alternate option to track the radio. Each RFID equipped radio has an RFID tag preprogrammed with the serial number (also found on the FCC label), band, and radio model information of the radio. Figure 69: RFID Location No. 1 Description RFID Tag 2.7.1 RFID Reading To read an RFID tag using a UHF Gen 2 RFID reader (for example, Motorola Solutions MC9090-G), open an appropriate RFID read application, point the RFID reader at the tag, and activate the RFID antenna of the reader. The RFID reader must be within 1 ft. from the tag to read. Two variables, Read Angle and Reader Orientation, aid in the distance to read and write the RFID Tag. Read distance is independent of Tag Angle, but the reader should be as close to perpendicular to the tag as possible (Read Angle). As Read Angle increases past 60 degrees, read distance begins to decrease, and the tag becomes unreadable once Read Angle exceeds 90 degrees. RFID tag cannot be read through metal. The orientation of the reader (Reader Orientation) and the tag must be aligned to improve read and writability. Figure 70: Read Angle for Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio 70 112

 

 

MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations No. 1 2 Descrption RFID Tag Read Angle Figure 71: Tag Angle for Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio No. 1 2 Descrption RFID Tag Tag Angle Figure 72: Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation) Figure 73: Example of Reader and Tag Misalignment (Reader Orientation) No. 1 Descrption Reader 71 12112212 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations No. 2 Descrption Tag 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped) Reprogram the tag (up to 12 ASCII characters when encoded to hexadecimal format) by using any UHF Gen 2 capable RFID writer, for example, Motorola Solutions MC9090-G. NOTICE: Follow the read direction in RFID Reading on page 70 to optimize reprogramming. Table 11: Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format Model Number M22URS9PW1BN M24URS9PW1BN M25URS9PW1BN M25URS9PW1BNI M36URS9PW1BN Radio Tier/Band/Output Level APX 4500 700/800 MHZ APX 2500 700/800 MHZ APX 6500 700/800 MHZ APX 5500 700/800 MHZ APX 1500 700/800 MHZ Last Two Digits F8 F8 F5 F5 F9 Table 12: Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power Characters F D E R T E S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Radio Band/Tier/Power 700/800 and 900 VHF UHF 700/800 and VHF VHF and UHF UHF1 and UHF2 700/800 and UHF APX 7000 APX 7500 Mid Power APX 7500 High Power APX 6000 APX 6500 Mid Power APX 6500 High Power APX Low Tier Portable APX Low Tier Mobile MP/APX 4500 MP/APX 2500 MP APX Lowest Tier Mobile MP/APX 1500 MP 72 MN005720A01-AA Standard Configurations 2.8 Completing the Installation Follow the following steps to complete the installation. Procedure:

1 Connect the speaker to the accessory cable. 2 Verify that the ignition sense wire is attached according to planned ignition sense. 3 Attach the accessory cable into J600. 4 Verify that the control head is attached to either the TIB or the CAN extension cable. 5 Attach the power cable to the back of the transceiver. 73 MN005720A01-AA Universal Relay Controller Installation Universal Relay Controller Installation The Universal Relay Controller (URC) is an extension of an orderable accessory for O7 or O9 control head. URC is used to control high power switching peripherals, for example, lightbar. URC works on all power application controlled lightbars. URC is connected to the transceiver GCAI port. The URC design consists of a microcontroller and uses ten relays to control the switching device. A separate ground for isolation exists between the relay and MCU sections, which is provided by the use of iCoupler from Analog Devices. Each relay is connected to an output with 15 A fuse. The maximum load allowed on each output is 12 A. Two cables, each with the maximum of 60 A, can be used to connect to the input connector at the bus bar. Each cable is connected with a 60 A circuit breaker. One-wire EEPROM is employed to enable GCAI to recognize the URC accessory ID. CPS can be used to program the relay patterns. When installing URC, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave more room in the front and rear of the box for cabling and accessory connections; and also to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion screws. The recommended mounting location for URC is in the car trunk, either next to the transceiver or within the area not further than 4.5 m away from the transceiver. Ensure that sufficient cooling is provided. Do not cover URC with baggage, blankets, and so on. CAUTION: Do not backfeed power into URC. 3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that permits routing the cable as directly as possible. Prerequisites:

NOTICE: For optimum URC performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in the following figure. Figure 74: Universal Relay Controller Orientation An adjustable trunnion, which allows several mounting positions, is supplied for mounting the URC. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories. Procedure:

1 Use the URC trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes. Then, drill 5/32 in. holes. If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 74 MN005720A01-AA Universal Relay Controller Installation 2 Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10 16 in. x 5/8 in. self-tapping screws provided. 3 Temporarily install the URC (adjust for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. Test the installation to ensure that the unit is securely locked in place. Figure 75: Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Use four mounting screws on all installations Mounting surface Metal backing plate (not supplied) IMPORTANT: Use this plate if mounting trunnion on plastic or unstable surface. Drill four 5/32 holes in mounting surface Trunnion Adjust the universal relay controller to desired angle and secure with wing screws 75 123456 MN005720A01-AA Universal Relay Controller Installation 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly This sections provides the instruction for URC cable assembly. 3.2.1 Installing the Power Cable Procedure:

1 Remove the cap nut of power cable gland assembly, and insert the power cable through the cap nut and neoprene seal in the cable gland body. Use power cable with either AWG 6 or AWG 8 only (recommended OD range of cable is 5.5 mm to 9 mm) that is able to withstand 80 A and 50 A respectively, to ensure water sealing of the controller. User can decide to install one or two power cables based on the requirements. The power cables (A+) are not supplied. 2 The loose end of the power cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then placed on the power lug and secured down by a set screw. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 18 lb-in. 3 The other end of the power cable should be connected to circuit breaker (Motorola Solutions part number 40012006001) end which indicates "AUX" and then, to power supply on the other end which indicates "BAT", instead of connecting to power supply directly. 4 Repeat step 1 to step 3 to install the second power cable, if required. 5 If only one power cable is installed, it is recommended to cover the other side of the power cable gland with power cable gland seal with tightening torque 18 lb-in. 3.2.2 Installing Ground Cable Procedure:

1 Remove the cap nut of ground cable gland assembly, insert the ground cable through the cap nut, and then reassemble the cap nut. Use ground cable with AWG 14 only (recommended OD range of cable is 2 mm to 4 mm) that is able to withstand 5 A. The ground cables (A+) are not supplied. NOTICE: The ground is used to switch the relays, and not act as a ground to the actual device being controlled. 2 The loose end of the ground cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then connected to a two-pin terminal block. Both pins on the terminal block are inter-connected and either pin can be used. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 7 lb-in. Figure 76: Power and Ground Cable Glands 76 12 MN005720A01-AA Universal Relay Controller Installation No. 1 2 Description Ground Cable Gland Power Cable Gland Figure 77: Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket No. 1 2 3 4 5 3.2.3 Installing the Wires Procedure:

Description Cable Gland Body Neoprene Seal Cap Nut Gasket, Cable Gland Counter Nut 1 Assemble the wires into the lightbar gasket retainer and lightbar gasket. The URC can support lightbars through control wires with outer diameter ranging from 1.52 mm to 3.77 mm (0.06 in. to 0.148 in.), with wire gauges ranging from AWG 1220. 2 Each individual loose wire (before stripping off the wire jacket) is inserted one at a time through the chassis. Ensure that the lightbar wire is straight before inserting the wire into the chassis. The radial gasket seals each of the wire individually. When a thick wire (for example AWG 14 wire or wire OD > 2.90 mm) is inserted through the chassis, there is potential tearing at the rubber gasket. Remove the rubber gasket residual. 3 Thin wires 2.5 mm and below should be dressed into the retention feature using a black stick. Thick wires above 2.5 mm should be routed above the retention feature. Strip off the wire until 7.94 mm (5/16 in.) after the wire is inserted into the URC, and install the wire into the respective lightbar terminal block. 77 32154 MN005720A01-AA Universal Relay Controller Installation Figure 78: Wires Installation No. 1 2 3 Description Lightbar Wire with Diameter above 2.5 mm Lightbar Wire with Diameter 2.5 mm and below Wire Retention Feature Figure 79: Wire Installation with Black Stick No. 1 Description Black Stick 4 Cover the lightbar gasket retainers hole with seal, gasket, and ground cable gland, if no wire is inserted. 5 The lightbar gasket should be replaced at each reassembly of the wire. 78 1231 MN005720A01-AA Universal Relay Controller Installation NOTICE: Use of other cable gauges except as recommended in this manual may result in water intrusion. Any reassembly of wire needs a new lightbar gasket replaced. If the current loading for one wire is higher than 12 A, the wires should be split before being assembled to the URC system. Wires kit (PMKN4109_) is provided to ease installation of the URC. Incorrect use of the wires kit, for example, improper connection at external loose end wires, may impact the robustness of the URC. 6 Remove the wires and gasket residual inside the URC after the wire installation, before closing the top housing of the URC. 3.2.4 Installing the O7/O9 to URC Cable The O7/O9 to URC cable (Motorola Solutions part number 3064153H02) can be assembled either before or after reassembling the top housing. Procedure:

1 Insert the RJ45 port of the cable into the RJ45 connector on the URC and turn the locking collar 90 to the right to ensure that it is locked properly. 2 Test if the cable is locked properly by trying to pull out the cable. Figure 80: O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation 79 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation Options and Accessories Installation This chapter provides the options and accessories installation for dash mounted and remote mounted configurations. 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation For dash-mounted configurations, the accessories must be installed through the accessory connector assembly that is on the rear of the radio, next to the power connector. Motorola Solutions-approved accessories are supplied with male terminals crimped to a 20-gauge wire designed to fit the plug of the accessory connector assembly. Insert the male terminal into the accessory connector assembly in the appropriate location and connect the accessory connector assembly in the rear accessory port. Do not use other generic terminals in the plug. Generic terminals cause electrical intermittences and may damage the plug. 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the footswitch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Open the accessory cable connector housing; remove the jumper wire. Connect the emergency switch wires to pins 14 and 15 (see Figure 81: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram on page 80). Close the connector housing; route the finished cable from the switch location to the control head location. NOTICE: The emergency footswitch should be attached with A+ unattached. A+ should be attached after successfully securing the screws in the connector. Figure 81: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram 80 ACCESSORIESCONNECTORJ2 IN DASH MOUNTJ100 IN REMOTE MOUNTPIN 14PIN 15NOTE 1SPST NORMALLY CLOSEDEMERGENCY SWITCHNOTE 1: REMOVE BLACK JUMPER WIRE INSIDE ACCESSORY CONNECTOR HOUSING. INSERT WIRES FROM EMERGENCY SWITCHGNDEMER1781413202126 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation CAUTION: The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers to have emergency deactivated by default, regardless of the setting in Customer Programming Software (CPS). However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio powers up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this condition can result in an incorrect operation of the radio and excessive current drain of the vehicles battery when the engine is off. 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays Prerequisites: For installations that use the horn/lights option, select a suitable location for mounting

(normally under the dash). Referring to Figure 82: Horn/Light Wiring Diagram on page 81, perform the following procedure:

Procedure:

1 Horn Relay Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires (male pins) into locations 18 and 24 of the connector. 2 Lights Relay Connect the relay across the head lamp ON/OFF switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires (male pins) into locations 19 and 24 of the accessory connector. Figure 82: Horn/Light Wiring Diagram 4.2 Installing Remote-Mount Accessory Procedure:

1 Select an appropriate place to mount the option or accessory hardware. 2 Route the accessory-to-control head cables under floor coverings or behind panels so that the vehicle occupants do not snag or break the wires. 81 CONNECTACROSS HORNRING SWITCHCONNECTACROSS HEADLAMP SWITCHSPSTN.O.RELAY12V COIL12V COILVIP OUT 1SWB+VIP OUT 2SPSTN.O.RELAYACCESSORIESCONNECTORPIN 18PIN 24PIN 19SWB+VIP OUT 2(LIGHTS)VIP OUT 1(HORN)1781413202126 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation 3 Attach wires from the accessory to the appropriate wire on the VIP cable (see Table 13: VIP Output Connections on page 87 and Table 14: VIP Input Connections on page 88). CAUTION: The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers to have emergency de-activated by default, regardless of the setting in Customer Programming Software (CPS). However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio will power up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this can result in an incorrect operation of the radio and excessive current drain of the vehicle battery when the engine is off. 4.2.1 Installing Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch When and where to use:

Mount the switch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Connect the button/switch wires to a ground pin and the emergency pin, removing the default jumper wire in the rear accessory cable. The button/switch shorts the pins when inactive. When the button/switch is pressed, its contact opens, the emergency path is ungrounded and pulled-high inside the radio transceiver, and detected by the processor. If an emergency accessory is used at either (or both) J2 connector and J626 connectors, all jumper wires, shorting emergency to ground, must be removed so the button/switch press can be detected. In additional to removing the default jumper wires in accessory cables, remove a jumper part on the printed circuit board of the TIB, in order for the button/switch to be detected. On the TIB PCB (both mid power and high power use the same TIB), a 0 jumper is placed by default so that the radio does not go into emergency when no cable is attached at either J2 or J626 in remote mount configuration. This jumper part, JU344, must be removed if either or both J2 and J626 have any type of emergency cable and button/switch attached. Otherwise, the processor will never see emergency become un-grounded. Figure 83: Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount Procedure:

1 Turn off power to the radio system. 2 Detach the TIB from the radio transceiver. 3 Detach the TIB flex. 4 Remove TIB PCB from the plastic housing using TORX T10 screwdriver. Refer to the disassembly procedure in the Basic Service Manual. 5 Locate JU344, See Figure 83: Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount on page 82. 6 Remove JU344 from the TIB PCB using a soldering gun. Clean off excess solder. 82 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation 7 Reassemble the TIB following the Basic Service Manual procedure. Use 6-8 in-lbs torque on each screw. Remember to include the TIB O-ring gasket. 8 Reattach the TIB flex. 9 Reattach the TIB to the radio transceiver. 10 To secure the TIB to the radio transceiver, apply 6-8 in-lbs of torque to each screw . 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation Mount the horn relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation Mount the light relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the head lamp ON/OFF switch. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation The O7 or O9 control head can program up to three gunlocks through the programmable buttons. You can set the time for the momentary trigger using the time-out trigger button. Connect the relay contacts across the gunlock switch to install the gunlock. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. Install a failsafe or redundant bypass switch for the gunlock. It is suggested to use a separate timer switch or a manual push-on button switch to activate the gunlock. Connect the switch from the supply to the gunlock directly, as shown in Figure 84: Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram on page 84. Place the manual button at a suitable and reachable location, yet not easily seen. 83 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation Figure 84: Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer Configure the Horn Relay for either Negative Contact or Positive Contact as shown in section 6.3 of the siren/PA manual (6881093C18). Program the designated VIP-OUT line for Horn-Ring Transfer and program the designated VIP-IN line for Horn-Ring. Figure 85: Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections on page 85 shows wiring diagrams for connecting the Horn-Ring through a transfer relay for both negative and positive ground systems. Refer to the siren/PA manual (6881093C18) for more information. 84 Transceiverandcontrol headVIP CableVIP OUTGNDGNDGNDGunlockRedundancyWiringCar BatteryMomentary ortime-out bypassmanual switch Figure 85: Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 58: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) on page 61) provides access to both the transmitted and the received audio speech. This audio can be recorded with a standard tape recorder using a 2.5 mm connector. 4.2.7 Earphone Jack The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 58: HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack (2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) on page 61) allows the use of a standard earphone/headset instead of the external speaker. Once a cable is plugged into this 2.5 mm jack, the external speaker attached at the control head turns mute. 4.2.8 USB Data Cables It is recommended that the USB 1.5 m data cable HKN6163_ is used for both dash mount configurations (at J2 connector) and for remote mount configurations (at J100 connector) because the HKN6163_ has the emergency jumper present, which is necessary for correct dash mount configurations. For interfacing at the MMP port, use Cable HKN6184_ which is a USB device cable. The USB 4 m (15 ft.) data cable HKN6172_ is recommended for remote mount configurations only (at J100). If the customer intends to use the HKN6172_ for dash mount configurations (at J2), the cable 26-pin connector must be opened and an emergency jumper-wire placed across pins 14 and 15. Refer to Figure 81: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram on page 80. 85 To Control Head VIPOutput Programmed forHorn-Ring TransferTo SW B+ atVIP ConnectorAny SPDT Relay with 12V Coiland Suitable Contact Ratings forVehicle InstallationNormally-OpenMomentaryContact PushbuttonTo Control Head VIPOutput Programmed forHorn-Ring TransferTo SW B+ atVIP ConnectorTo Control Head VIPInput Programmedfor Horn-RingTo DIG. GND atVIP ConnectorTo HornBreakHereHornRingUnder HoodHorn RelayBreakHereHornRing+ 12VN.C.N.C.COM.COM.N.O.N.O.To VIP Input Programmed for Horn-RingTo DIG. GND at VIP ConnectorPositive-Contact Horn-RingPushbutton ConnectionsNOTE: Locate Pushbuttonin a Location Convenient tothe Driver+ 12VHornTo Control Head VIPInput Programmedfor Horn-RingNegative-Contact Horn-Ring MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation 4.2.9 RS232 Cables RS232 cables are not compatible with Customer Programming Software (CPS) radio reading or programming, but can be used for interfacing with RS232 accessories or RS232 computer programs. HKN6122_ is an RS232 serial COM port computer interface cable from J600 connector. The followings are the RS232 cables :

HKN6160_ is a 6 feet dash RS232 cable from J2 connector HKN6161_ is a 20 feet dash RS232 cable from J2 connector HKN6183_ is a 4 meter cable from MMP connector 4.3 Vehicle Interface Port Overview The Vehicle Interface Port (VIP) allows the control head to operate outside circuits and to receive inputs from outside the control head. There are three VIP outputs which are used for relay control. There are also three VIP inputs which accept inputs from switches (remote mount only). Figure 86: Remote Control Head Pinouts Figure 87: HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail No. 1 Description Yellow Ring 4.3.1 VIP Output Connections The VIP output pins are on the back of the control head (J100 and J400), or the rear accessory port

(J2), as shown in Wiring Diagrams on page 32, Figure 92: Rear Accessory Connector Audio 86 J400-1 RED SWB +J400-2 GREEN GNDJ400-3 - NO PINJ400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGHJ400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO)J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO)J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 RadioPinNumberVIP Cable(HKN6196_)Wire ColorFunctionVIP CONNECTOR PIN-OUTJ4001 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation Configuration on page 92 and Figure 93: Rear Accessory Connector Data Configuration on page 92, respectively. Use these connections to wire control relays. One end of the relay should connect to switched B+

voltage, while the other side connects to a software controlled ON/OFF switch inside the control head. The relay can be normally on or normally off depending on the configuration of the VIP outputs. There are three VIP output connections, as follows:

Table 13: VIP Output Connections VIP OUT NUMBER J400 SW B+

Pin Num-

ber 1 2 3 Red 1 Red 1 Red 1 On/Off Switched Pin Num-

ber 5 (Blue) 6 (Yellow) 7 (Black) J2 SW B+

Pin Num-

ber 24 24 NA On/Off Switched Pin Num-

ber 18 19 NA J100 SW B+

Pin Num-

ber 24 24 NA On/Off Switched Pin Num-

ber 18 19 NA The function of these VIP outputs can be field programmed in the control head. Typical applications for VIP outputs are external horn/lights alarm and horn ring transfer relay control. For further information on VIP outputs, see the control head programming manual. VIP OUT 1 and VIP OUT 2 can be accessed from either J100 or J400 connectors to allow a previously wired VIP OUT at J2 to move easily to J100. However, when any cable is inserted into J400, J100 VIP OUTs are disabled. When installing relays to the VIP OUT lines, a diode is necessary to prevent damage to the transistor or MOSFET, due to back EMF when the field collapses on the relay coil. Some vendor relays already come with this diode built-in, and other relays require the customer to install it. Figure 88: Relay Coil on page 87 shows the proper placement of the diode across the relay coil. The transistor or MOSFET is located inside the radio or the D.E.K. box. Figure 88: Relay Coil NOTICE: See Replacement Parts Ordering on page 128 to order relay for your VIP OUT applications. Example relay hardware: TLN4533_ (relay without internal diode), HLN6969_

(relay with internal back EMF protection diode), and HKN4258_ (relay wiring cable). 87 N.C.N.O.RelayGDSVIPoutSW B+Note:To 'activate' a VIPOUT, you have to ground the VIPOUT, such that the current now flows thru the relay coil to GND through a MOSFET inside the radio or control head, which causes the relay wiper to toggle. The MOSFET of a VIPOUT should never be used to directly drive an accessory. The MOSFET should be used to control an external relay. ProtectionDiode MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation 4.3.2 VIP Input Connections The VIP input pins are only available on the back of the control head (remote mount). These connections control inputs from switches. One side of the switch connects to ground while the other side connects to a buffered input on the control head. The switch can be normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) depending on the configuration of the VIP inputs. The following are the three VIP input connections:

Table 14: VIP Input Connections VIP IN NUMBER J400 J2 1 2 3 Ground Pin Number 2 (green) 2 (green) 2 (green) On/Off Switch-

ed Pin Number Ground Pin Number On/Off Switch-

ed Pin Number 8 (white) 9 (orange) 10 (violet) NA NA NA NA NA NA NOTICE: Remote Mount requires the VIP cable to be attached to J400. MCH installations require the VIP inputs to be connected to the head assigned ID #1. See Setting the Initial Control Head ID on page 53 for further information. CAUTION: ASTRO mobile radios equipped with the following features are able to transmit automatically, even if the radio is turned off:

Automatic Vehicle Location Other Special Data Products All ASTRO mobile radios have accessory connector pins 14 and 15 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by removing the accessory connector, or otherwise failing to maintain a normally closed path, could, if left unchecked, drain the vehicle battery, and possibly cause transmissions to occur. 4.4 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Siren Procedure:

1 When using emergency footswitch or pushbutton with siren/PA configuration, REMOVE pin 8

(emergency) from the siren connector of the HKN4363_ siren cable. Figure 89: Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory 88 1 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation No. 1 Description Siren Cable 2 Remove the knob from the siren/PA cable connector. 3 Remove all four screws from the connector in the siren/PA cable. 4 Open the connector cap and locate pin 8. 5 Using the contact removal tool (6684690C02), remove pin 8 from the connector. 6 Put the connector cap in place and proceed to reinstall the four screws and the knob. Figure 90: Location for Pin 8 4.5 Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) The APX mobile accessory connector assembly is mounted on the right rear of the radio, opposite the antenna and next to the power connector. It is fastened to the radio via jackscrews and held together by the two cover screws. It is a multi-

functional connector that allows for many different types of adaptations. All approved accessory wires are securely strain-relieved through the exiting slots at the back of the accessory connector assembly. The terminations that are supplied with all accessories are fully engaged and locked into the plug connector (6680163F01). They can also be detached for service with the assistance of a terminal removal tool. The accessory connector assembly can be serviced multiple times for future installation upgrades. The accessory connector assembly, supplied with every APX mobile dash-mounted radio, is equipped with a 26-pin plug assembly, two covers, two jackscrews, two cover screws, one emergency jumper, one ignition sense cable assembly, and one speaker pigtail. The jumper is provided to complete the circuit for emergency mode. If this circuit becomes open, the radio is set to emergency mode. 3980034F05 is the crimping pin part number for use with any wires used inside the accessory cable connector. 89 123 4567 89AB29303132 3334 3536 37232425261617181910111213 1415 20212227281 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation 4.5.1 Disassembly and Assembly This section provides the detailed disassembly and reassembly information. 4.5.1.1 Disassembly Procedure:

1 Disconnect the negative terminal from the vehicle battery. Make sure that the battery cable is secured such that it cannot power the vehicle electrical system. 2 Unscrew both jackscrews completely. 3 Pull the accessory connector assembly out from the radio. 4 Loosen both cover screws, but do not remove them completely. 5 Pull the jackscrews away from the plug and hold them back. 6 Pry apart the accessory connector assembly covers. 7 Attach any new wire to its proper location by pushing in the male terminal. When you hear a pop, the wire is engaged. To verify that the wire is engaged, tug gently on the wire and be sure that it does not come out. To avoid severe damage to the plug, do not overload the wire. 4.5.1.2 Assembly Procedure:

1 Place the plug-in one cover. Be sure that the flange of the plug is in the slot of the cover. See Figure 91: Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_) on page 91. 2 Push the jackscrew through the plug to hold it in. 3 Position each wire across the strain-relief features in the cover. Avoid damaging loads on the plug by allowing some slack in each wire in the accessory connector wire chamber. 4 Place the second cover onto the plug. Be sure that the flange is protruding through both covers. 90 Figure 91: Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_) MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation 5 Squeeze the covers together bending the wires in the strain-relief features. You may need a pair of pliers to seat the assembly covers. 6 Once the covers are fully seated, fasten them with the cover screws. Tighten the screws firmly but do not over-tighten them. Be sure that none of the wires are pinched. 7 Reattach the accessory connector assembly to the back of the radio and fasten it by finger-tightening the jackscrews to prevent any loosening. NOTICE: See Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual for detailed descriptions of these pins and other connectors located in the mobile radio. 4.5.2 Adapter Cable If you are planning on installing a mobile radio as a replacement for an ASTRO Spectra radio, the following adapter cables are available:

Table 15: Adapter Cable Part Number HKN6158_ HKN6159_ Description Cable, Audio Adapter Kit Cable, Data Adapter Kit NOTICE: The adapter cables can only be connected to J2 in the rear of the transceiver. Use the HKN6158_ audio adapter kit cable if your vehicle was formerly wired for an ASTRO Spectra or ASTRO Spectra Plus radio, and use the rear cable pins as shown in the following figure. 91 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation Figure 92: Rear Accessory Connector Audio Configuration No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Description GND SPKR LO-

SPKR HI+

IGNITION SWB+

VIP OUT 2 EMER N.C. MIC HI PTT VIP OUT 1 DISC. AUD Use the HKN6159_ data adapter kit cable if your vehicle was formerly wired for an ASTRO Spectra or ASTRO Spectra Plus radio, and used the rear cable pins as shown in the following figure. Figure 93: Rear Accessory Connector Data Configuration Description DIG GND SPKR LO-

No. 1 2 92 543219101112131415768123456789810111288543219101112131415768123456789101112131415 MN005720A01-AA Options and Accessories Installation No. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description SPKR HI+

IGNITION SWB+

VIP OUT 2 EMER CTS-ASTRO RTS_DCE RTS- ASTRO CTS_DCE BUS+

TX-ASTRO RX_DCE VIP OUT 1 RX-ASTRO RX_DCE BUS-

BUSY You must attach the correct adapter. Installing the wrong adapter may damage the data communication circuitry inside your radio. If you are unsure of the pinout of your former wiring harness, consult your ASTRO radio installation technician. 4.6 Memory and Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option For the installation or removal of the Memory or 3-Day Secure Key Retention Options

(MHLN6999_ and MHLN7000_), see the Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual. NOTICE: The Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option is not applicable for APX 2500/APX 4500/APX 1500 Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio. 93 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Motorcycle Radio Installation This chapter covers the motorcycle radio installation. The motorcycle radio installation is not applicable for APX 4500/APX 1500 radios and O9 control heads. 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description The motorcycle model includes all the same components in the standard radio, with the exceptions listed in the model charts in the Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual

(MN005718A01). 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure The transceiver is mounted in the weather-resistant enclosure that consists of a bottom housing and a hinged top cover. The top cover has a locking latch that requires a key to open. The enclosure is mounted above the rear motorcycle wheel, oriented so that the lock is forward and the hinged cover opens toward the rear of the motorcycle. The bottom housing has a grommeted hole for cable entry and weep holes to permit water drainage. The enclosure is mounted on the motorcycle with a universal mounting plate and shock and vibration isolators. A large, braided ground-strap (installed between the mounting plate bolts and the motorcycle frame) grounds the transceiver. 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit All radio functions, except push-to-talk (PTT), are activated from the weather-resistant control head. The control head and the external speaker are mounted for easy access near the center of the handlebars. The control head is positioned for unobstructed viewing, and it may be tilted on the horizontal axis for ease of viewing. The microphone cable port on the front of the control head is plugged and is not used. 5.1.3 Control Head Cable The control-head cable connects the control head to the transceiver. The cable is routed along the motorcycle frame and has weather-resistant connections at both ends. Excess cable is coiled under the transceiver inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Each end of the cable is strain-relieved with jackscrews at the control head and the transceiver. The cable is shielded to reduce the effects of radio frequency interference and ignition sense noise. 94 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.1.4 Microphone A weather-resistant, palm microphone, and coiled cord plug into a pigtail connector on the control cable. The microphone attaches to a hang-up bracket located within easy reach of the motorcycle rider. The coiled cord is long enough to be operated by someone standing next to the motorcycle, yet short enough to not interfere with the motorcycle steering or operation. 5.1.5 External Speaker A 3.2-Ohm, 10-watt-rated-audio-power, external speaker is mounted on the front of the motorcycle. The speaker cable is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceiver rear accessory connector. A sealed, weather-resistant, speaker-muting (toggle) switch is mounted on top of the speaker. The external speaker connects to the rear accessory connector of the transceiver. 5.1.6 Headset Capability The motorcycle radio is compatible with headset accessories that would provide hands-free operation of the radio. Motorola Solutions does not manufacture headset equipment, but provides the interconnection for headset equipment with the motorcycle radio. Aftermarket headset equipment is available through Motorola Solutions (see Replacement Parts Ordering on page 128). CAUTION: To avoid loud audio, refer to the CPS help menu for audio settings if the Motorola Solutions mobile radio is used with any motorcycle helmet headset. 5.1.7 Antenna The antennas are mounted on top of the transceiver weather-resistant enclosure. The enclosure metal lining acts as the antenna ground plane. 5.1.8 Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire The ignition sense wire connects to the motorcycle fuse box and is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceiver rear accessory connector. The radio is wired so that transmission is inhibited if the motorcycle ignition sense switch is off. If the PTT switch is pressed with the ignition sense off, a low-frequency tone sounds. The receiver is controlled by the control head on/off switch. 5.2 Installation Overview All mobile radios are tested and inspected before shipment. It is suggested that the transmitter frequency, deviation, and power output be checked at the time of installation. It is the license holder's responsibility to ensure that the operating parameters of his station comply with applicable laws governing radio communications equipment. For tests and alignment procedures, refer to the appropriate service manual (refer to Related Publications on page 15). Generally, the installation of the motorcycle radio takes place in the following parts:

95 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Mounting the universal mounting plate and related hardware at the rear of the motorcycle. Mounting the control head, speaker, microphone, and related hardware forward on the motorcycle. Routing the power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable to the weather-resistant enclosure. Mounting the weather-resistant enclosure and radio chassis, and connecting the cables. Mounting the antennas to the weather-resistant enclosure. A universal mounting plate, supplied by Motorola Solutions, is first mounted to either a motorcycle carrier at the rear of the motorcycle or to the rear frame of the motorcycle itself. The mounting procedures for the universal mounting plate vary from motorcycle to motorcycle. Therefore, the procedures given in this manual for installing the mounting plate may not specifically apply, but are provided for guidance. The control head, speaker, and microphone are mounted forward on the motorcycle, on or near the steering column. There are several possible mounting configurations which use a combination of Motorola Solutions and customer-built brackets. These configurations are outlined in this manual. Because of the large number of motorcycle makes and models in existence, the customer-built brackets are necessary to tailor the mounting of the Motorola Solutions equipment to the particular motorcycle being used. Suggestions for customer-built brackets are given in this manual. The power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable are routed to the weather-resistant enclosure position. The enclosure and the radio chassis are then mounted. Special care is required when connecting cables to the radio equipment within the enclosure. 5.2.1 Important Installation Hints Consider the following when mounting the radio components:

Excess lengths of control-head, power, ignition sense, and speaker cables must be routed in the enclosure as shown in Figure 106: Installing Cables on page 113. All components must be mounted securely in order to withstand the constant and sometimes severe vibration experienced on a motorcycle. No cantilever action, which could cause severe vibration, should be generated in the mounting hardware. The control head and microphone must be placed for ease of accessibility by the motorcycle operator. Forward components (control head, microphone, and speaker) should not interfere with visual or physical access to controls and instruments. Forward components should not interfere with the handling of the motorcycle. Cabling between the control head and the radio chassis should be run to minimize interference with operator movements. The weather-resistant enclosure should be placed to avoid any interference with the motorcycle operator. Electrical continuity must be present through the enclosure shock mounts to the motorcycle frame for proper electrical and RF grounding. The antenna is designed for mounting on the top of the weather-resistant enclosure. Only the supplied microphone mounting clip should be used to ensure secure mounting of the microphone. This clip has a very strong spring to ensure positive retention of the microphone over rough terrain. Also, there must be electrical continuity from this clip to the motorcycle frame for DC grounding. 96 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Direct access to the microphone should be provided from both sides of the motorcycle. Sufficient slack in the microphone coiled cord should be allowed so as not to impede steering. Mounting hardware must be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, ensure that the added capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. A suitable covering should be applied to the DB-9 receptacle when the water resistant microphone

(HMN1079B) is not connected. 5.2.2 Parts Identification The following installation procedures refer to Figure 94: Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) on page 98 through Figure 107: Installing the Transceiver on page 115. Detailed descriptions of the mounting hardware used in each procedure are provided in parts lists section of the Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual. The parts that are supplied by Motorola Solutions are contained in one of the following kits:

Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Microphone Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Speaker with Mute Switch Motorcycle Hardware Kit SECURENET or Motorcycle Hardware Kit Motorcycle Power Cable Kit Motorcycle Mounting Kit Weather-Resistant Enclosure (Black) Antenna 5.2.3 Order of Installation Prerequisites:

Before starting the installation, familiarize yourself with the mounting hardware (see Figure 94:

Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) on page 98 through Figure 107:

Installing the Transceiver on page 115). Perform the installation procedures in the order that follows. Procedure:

1 Install the universal mounting plate on the motorcycle. 2 Install the control head and speaker. 3 Install the microphone hang-up clip. 4 Install antenna base and cable onto enclosure. 5 Install the cables. 6 Install the weather-resistant enclosure on the universal mounting plate. 7 Route the cables inside the weather-resistant enclosure. 8 Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure. 9 Install the antennas on the enclosure. 97 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.3 Universal Mounting Plate The universal mounting plate, supplied with the motorcycle radio, must be mounted on the motorcycle first. It provides the base for the weather-resistant enclosure to be mounted. The method used for mounting the plate depends on the make and model of the motorcycle and whether the plate is mounted to a carrier or to the motorcycle chassis. After the plate has been securely mounted to the motorcycle, mounting the weather-resistant enclosure onto the plate is straightforward. Figure 94: Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) on page 98 illustrates the universal mounting plate mounted to a motorcycle carrier. Since there are so many makes and models of motorcycles and motorcycle carriers, it is impossible to give specific step-by-step instructions for mounting the universal mounting plate. However, noting the following considerations aids in the installation procedure. A minimum of holes are pre-drilled into this plate as supplied. Mounting holes must be drilled as required for the particular motorcycle on which the plate is being mounted. The universal mounting plate should be mounted on the motorcycle in such a manner that the later mounting of the weather-resistant enclosure does not interfere with the motorcycle seat back, with any other obstacles, or with the motorcycle operator. The enclosure may be temporarily bolted to the universal mounting plate and the unit positioned on the motorcycle to ensure that the criteria are met. To ensure a good grounding path from the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle carrier or frame, stainless steel lock washers must be used with the mounting hardware in two areas to score through the paint on the universal mounting plate and on the carrier or frame. It provides good electrical contact with the underside of the motorcycle carrier or motorcycle frame. Figure 94: Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) 5.3.1 Installing the Universal Mounting Plate Follow the procedure to mount the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle. Procedure:

1 Determine the mounting position for the mounting plate. 2 Determine whether stainless steel spacers are required for clearance in mounting the plate. 3 Drill four 9/32-inch holes in the mounting plate and the corresponding motorcycle carrier or chassis for mounting the plate. 4 Attach the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle using four machine screws, eight lock washers, and four nuts. Tighten screws securely. The lock washers must cut through the paint on the plate and motorcycle carrier or frame to ensure a good ground path. 98 UNIVERSALMOUNTING PLATE64-83673F02SCREW03-00001908LOCKWASHER04-00139951LOCKWASHER04-00139951NUT02-00009644CARRIER MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.4 Speaker and Control Head Installation NOTICE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, refer to Internal Speaker Disassembly on page 67. The control head mounting location and configuration is determined largely by the make and model of motorcycle. Two different mounting configurations are described below. One involves mounting the speaker and control head together as a unit using the combination speaker/control-head bracket

(shown in Figure 96: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 100) supplied by Motorola Solutions. Alternately, the control head may be mounted by itself using a smaller control-head bracket supplied by Motorola Solutions. In this case, the speaker is mounted elsewhere. This section outlines installation procedures for each configuration mentioned above. The customer (or installer) is in the best position to determine the most appropriate mounting configuration for the control head and speaker based on the particular motorcycle on which the equipment is to be mounted. CAUTION: When determining its location, position the control head so that it is clearly visible and within easy reach of the motorcycle operator. Figure 95: Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01) 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Figure 96: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 100 illustrates the combination of speaker/control head bracket. This combination bracket is used only when the control head and speaker are mounted as a unit. Handlebar-mounting bracket which may be required if the combination speaker/control-head bracket cannot be easily mounted to the motorcycle. In this case, the handlebar-mounting bracket is mounted to the motorcycle, and the combination bracket is then mounted to the handlebar-mounting bracket. 99 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Figure 96: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Provision has been made on the combination speaker/control-head bracket for mounting the microphone hang-up clip. If that mounting is desired, the hang-up clip must be attached to the bracket before installing the control head and speaker. See Microphone Hang-Up Clip on page 69 for the hang-

up clip procedure. 5.4.1.1 Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Follow the procedure to install the speaker and control head. Procedure:

1 Determine the location to mount the speaker/control head. Consider how the speaker/control-

head bracket may be mounted, and whether a handlebar-mounting bracket is needed. Select a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. NOTICE: The angle at which the handlebar-mounting bracket or the speaker/control-

head bracket is mounted to the motorcycle determines the firing angle of the speaker. 2 If the handlebar-mounting bracket is needed, install it first. 3 Mount the speaker/control-head bracket, either directly to the motorcycle, or, if used, to the handlebar-mounting bracket, using four stainless-steel machine screws, lock washers, and nuts. 4 Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the speaker/control head bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 5 Mount the speaker on the speaker/control-head bracket, using two machine screws and lock washers. Torque these screws to 20 in-lbs. 6 Attach the control-head cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. This connection must be made before you mount the control head in the bracket.

(Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 7 Mount the control head to the bracket, using two machine screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 8 Adjust the control head viewing angle by loosening its mounting screws and rotating the control head to the desired angle. Re-tighten the screws to 20 in-lbs torque. 100 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Some motorcycles provide a console for mounting radio equipment. This console is attached to the top of the fuel tank. With the use of a mounting bracket, screws, nuts, and lock washers, the combination speaker/control-head bracket can be mounted to this console. Figure 97: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 101 illustrates this type of mounting. The console attachment screws must be removed, and the console must be lifted slightly from the fuel tank to gain access to attach mounting hardware, and to route cables later. In this installation, the microphone (mic), mic hang-up bracket, and mic extension bracket interfere with handlebar travel. Installation using this method is the same as in Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 100. Figure 97: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together 101 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately It may be necessary to use the smaller control head bracket (part number 0780127N02) and mount the speaker and microphone hang-up clip in another location on the motorcycle. Temporarily fasten the control-head end of the control-head cable to the control head. Also, fasten the control head to its bracket before installing the control head using the described bracket. Motorola Solutions-supplied spacers and mic-cable bracket are required to mount the control head to the handlebar. This mic-cable bracket has holes to mount the microphone-cable connector. Figure 98: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately 102 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.4.3.1 Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately Follow the procedure when mounting the smaller control-head bracket. Procedure:

1 Determine the location to mount the control head. Choose a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. 2 Securely mount the Motorola Solutions-supplied spacers, mic-cable bracket, and small control-

head bracket to the handlebars. 3 Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the mic-cable bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. Refer to Cable Routing on page 109 for Cable routing directions. 4 Attach the control-head end of the cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. 5 Mount the control head to the small control-head bracket, at the proper viewing angle, using two wing screws and tighten firmly. 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately The control head may be mounted to the fuel tank console using the smaller control-head bracket and spacers/hardware. In this configuration, the microphone cable connector may be attached directly to the console, eliminating the need for a custom bracket. 103 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Figure 99: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately 104 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Installation is the same as detailed in Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 101 and Installing Handlebar with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately on page 103. 5.5 Installing the Speaker Follow the procedure when the speaker is mounted separately from the control head. When and where to use: The speaker bracket supplied with the speaker may be used alone if a suitable location can be found, or if necessary, a customer-supplied bracket may be fabricated for mounting the speaker. NOTICE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, please refer to Internal Speaker Disassembly on page 67. Procedure:

1 Determine the location to mount the speaker and whether there is a requirement for a customer-

supplied bracket. 2 Fabricate a bracket if required. Use the Motorola Solutions-supplied speaker bracket as a template for drilling mounting holes. Drill holes in the fabricated bracket for mounting to the motorcycle. 3 Mount the fabricated bracket to the motorcycle chassis. 4 Mount the Motorola Solutions-supplied bracket to the fabricated bracket using two machine screws, flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. 5 Mount the speaker to the speaker bracket using two wing screws. Refer to Cable Routing on page 109 for Cable routing directions. 5.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip Installation Install the hang-up clip either on the supplied microphone extension bracket or on the side of the speaker/control head bracket. Both methods are shown in Figure 96: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 100. Determine the mounting location and install as described in the following paragraphs. NOTICE: Wherever the hang-up clip is mounted, it must be DC grounded for proper operation. After mounting the clip, be sure there is electrical continuity between the clip and the motorcycle chassis. 5.6.1 Extension Bracket Mounting Follow the procedure to mount the clip facing the operator. Procedure:

1 Attach the bracket to the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, four lock washers, and two nuts as shown in Figure 96: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 100. 2 Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 3 Fasten the hang-up clip to the extension bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 96: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 100. 105 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 4 Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting Follow the procedure for the speaker/control head bracket side mounting. Procedure:

1 Attach the hang-up clip to the left side of the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 96: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 100. 2 Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs. torque. 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting A customer-supplied bracket may be used to mount the microphone hang-up clip in another location. When and where to use:

Suggested locations include the handlebars, fuel-tank console, or any location which provides easy access to the microphone without blocking controls and indicators and without interfering with motorcycle handling. See Figure 97: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 101, Figure 98: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately on page 102, and Figure 99: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately on page 104 for alternative microphone hang-up clip mounting methods. Procedure:

1 Fabricate a bracket, then secure it to the motorcycle. 2 Use two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts to secure the hang-up clip to the customer-

supplied bracket. Ensure that the microphone clip is DC grounded to the motorcycle chassis (a grounding lug and strap are provided in the hang-up clip kit for this purpose) this is essential for proper radio operation. 5.7 Installing Antenna Base and Cables Prerequisites:

The GPS antenna assembly must be done after the removal of the metal liner but before reinstalling the radio liner. Procedure:

1 Open the top cover of the weather-resistant enclosure. 2 Uninstall the metal liner that is shipped attached to the weather-resistant enclosure. This liner has one depressed area at the top of the enclosure liner just toward the rear of the enclosure. This metal liner is not used with Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio. 3 Place the metal liner with two round, depressed areas toward the enclosure hinge and 5/8-inch hole near the front of the housing, inside the top cover, and align the six slots in the metal liner with the screw holes in the top housing. 4 The metal liner of the enclosure top cover acts as a ground plane for the antenna. 5 Locate the two round, depressed areas about 3 inches in diameter in the metal liner near the enclosure hinge. These areas are either Band 1 or Band 2 depending on the antenna port they 106 align to. Refer to band markings on radio for the proper antenna port location. For the GPS antenna, use the 5/8-inch hole near the front of the housing near the lock. Figure 100: Location of Antenna Port MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation No. 1 2 3 4 5 Description Top Cover for Radios GPS/Wi-Fi Antenna Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Antenna Port 6 These holes in the metal liner is used as a template to mark the position of the holes to be drilled at the top cover. The following guidelines provide the available options. Single Band Attached your single band antenna in the appropriate antenna position. GPS/Wi-Fi Mark a hole in the GPS/Wi-Fi Antenna position. Figure 101: Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Antenna Band Identification No. 1 2 3 Description Antenna Port GPS Antenna Port Wi-Fi Antenna Port 7 Remove the metal liner from the top cover. 8 For antenna positions, use the Motorola Solutions RPX-4378A Hole-Cutting Saw or equivalent, and carefully drill a 3/4-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. For the GPS/Wi-Fi, carefully drill a 1 1/16-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. The saw should have a clean and neat circle to ensure good contact between the antenna and the housing. 107 21345123 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation IMPORTANT: For proper seating of the antennas, deburr and scrape any foreign matter from both sides of the hole, being careful not to mar the finish of the shell. 9 Clean the mounting surface around the hole to remove dirt and wax. 10 Refer to the Motorcycle GPS Instruction Manual for further installation instruction for the GPS. GPS must be mounted before the metal liner is installed. 11 Re-install the metal liner with the cable clamps provided in the weather-resistant housing. If installing GPS, the GPS coaxial cable must be fed through the hole in the metal liner before the liner can be placed onto the housing. Then route the GPS Coaxial Cable through the cable clamps before tightening the hex screws. CAUTION: Be sure to observe the correct routing of the antenna cable. Failure to do so can damage the cable. Figure 102: Routing the Coaxial Cable for GPS/Wi-Fi No. 1 2 3 Description Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Connector 12 To attach the 700/800, VHF, or UHF antenna base, refer to the Antenna Installation Manual. 13 Route the coaxial cable for the 700/800, VHF, or UHF antenna through the cable clamps. Figure 103: Routing the Coaxial Cable for Antenna 108 123123 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation No. 1 2 3 Description Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Attach to Antenna Connector on Radio 14 After routing the cable, allow enough of the cable to reach the radio antenna connector and cut off any excess length of the cable. 15 To install the connector, refer to the Antenna Installation Manual. 5.8 Installing the Antenna Procedure:

1 Connect the appropriate antenna connectors to the antenna receptacles on the radio. Tighten the coupling until fully engaged. IMPORTANT: Antenna Placement and Cable Routing as described inside the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX radio series. 5.9 Cable Routing Five cables must be installed to interconnect the components of the radio system as shown in the following figure. The antenna cable is routed away from the other cables inside the enclosure hinged cover (see Installing Antenna Base and Cables on page 106). The four remaining cables, routed along the motorcycle frame, are described in the following paragraphs. NOTICE: Antenna Hole Placement and Cable Routing information in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable to the APX series. Removal of the fuel tank and seat from the motorcycle facilitates routing the cables along the frame. Motorcycles with consoles attached to fuel tanks require routing cables between console and fuel tank. In this case the tank is not removed. 109 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Figure 104: Cable Routing No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 110 Description Speaker Cable Speaker / Control Head Control Head Cable Microphone Ignition Cable Chassis Ground Fused Power Cable Speaker Cable Antenna Cable Accessory Cable Power Cable Control Head Cable Battery Fuse Block 4578632114131211109 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Speaker Cable Runs from the speaker to the accessory-cable connector inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Control Cable Runs from the rear of the control head to the front of the transceiver inside the enclosure. Ignition Sense (Red) Wire Portion of Accessory Cable Runs from the ignition sense fuse terminal of the fuse box to the rear area inside the enclosure. The lug for attaching the ignition sense wire is contained on the accessory cable. Power Cable The red, unterminated end runs from the positive terminal of the battery to the power connector that plugs in the rear of the transceiver. Lugs for attaching the red and black leads are contained in the motorcycle power-cable kit. The black, unterminated end runs from a suitable motorcycle chassis ground to the power connector. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the negative battery post. You may route the cables in any order. As you route each cable, temporarily fasten it at both ends. When all cables have been run, permanently fasten the cables with appropriate cable tie wraps. Observe the followings during routing and hook-up:

1 Route the cables so that none interfere with motorcycle operation. 2 Fasten the cables with supplied nylon tie wraps. The wraps should be firmly installed at frequent intervals along the cable length in such a manner that motorcycle vibration will not cause metal fatigue and subsequent breakage of the cable wires. 3 Position cables away from parts of the motorcycle that become hot. Bundle excess cable length inside the weather-resistant enclosure as discussed in Transceiver and Cabling Installation on page 112. The fifth cable is the microphone with coiled cord. Plug the 9-pin D-connector end of the coiled cord into its mating connector, which is attached near the control head discussed in an earlier paragraph. Tighten the coiled-cord-retention screws. Insert the S-hook strain relief (terminated to the coiled cord) into the hole in the mounting bracket. Slide the microphone into the microphone hang-up bracket. 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure Procedure:

1 Remove the radio-mounting plate by removing four screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 2 The weather-resistant enclosure is mounted to the universal mounting plate using shock mounts. Assemble the shock-mount components exactly as shown in Figure 105: Weather-

Resistant Enclosure Installation on page 112. Be sure to install ground straps between the shock-mount and the transceiver trunnion mount, and install one 7-1/2-inch ground strap between the right rear mount and the enclosure lids antenna ground plane 0 (shown in Figure 105: Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation on page 112 and in Figure 107: Installing the Transceiver on page 115). 3 The order of assembly is important to ensure proper shock mount operation. All components are supplied with the mounting kit. The five 7-1/2-inch straps are used on the rear and front shock mountsfour from shock mount to trunnion, and one from the shock mount to the lids antenna ground plane. NOTICE: Grounding through the power-supply cable is NOT sufficient. Whether the radio transceiver is mounted to a carrier or the chassis itself, the transceiver MUST be properly grounded to the motorcycle chassis. The ground strap supplied with the installation kit may have to be used to ensure a good RF ground path from the radio transceiver to the motorcycle chassis. 111 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 4 Install the 3-foot ground strap on one of the front shock mounts. Route it through the cable-

routing hole and connect the other end to the motorcycle frame (see Figure 105: Weather-

Resistant Enclosure Installation on page 112). WARNING: DO NOT connect the ground strap directly to the negative battery post. 5 The diagram of the shock mount is shown loosely assembled. After the hex screws are tightened, the rubber washers are compressed to fasten the weather-resistant enclosure securely to the universal mounting plate. 6 Figure 107: Installing the Transceiver on page 115 is an exploded view of the enclosure; it shows details that will help to understand how the enclosure is mounted. After the enclosure is completely mounted, check for proper ground connectioncontinuity between the antenna ground plane and the motorcycle frame. Figure 105: Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description Universal Mounting Plate Machine Screw Lockwasher Flat Washer Flat Rubber Washer Shouldered Rubber Washer 7-1/2-inch Ground Strap Ground Strap To Motorcycle Chassis Ground 5.11 Transceiver and Cabling Installation After the weather-resistant enclosure has been installed, the radio chassis (transceiver) is installed in the enclosure and then appropriate cables are connected. Before the transceiver can be installed, the cabling must be properly positioned in the enclosure. 112 1977234856 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure Follow the procedure to position the cabling in the weather-resistant enclosure. Procedure:

1 Run the speaker, power, control-head, and ignition sense cables into the enclosure. 2 Lay the excess cable length between the radio mounting bosses in an S configuration as shown in Figure 106: Installing Cables on page 113. Do not coil any excess cable. Use the supplied tie wraps to bundle cable as shown. NOTICE: If the extra cable length is not sufficient to match the illustrated cable routing, then match the illustration as closely as possible. 3 Connect the speaker cable to the accessory cable connector. NOTICE: The accessory-cable emergency connector is shipped with a shorting plug installed. The headset connector is also shipped with a shorting plug installed. If an emergency switch and/or headset is not used, the plugs must remain in. If an emergency switch and/or headset is used, remove the shorting plug and discard. 4 Install the mounting plate in position on top of the cables installed above. Take care not to damage or pinch the cables when securing the mounting plate in position. NOTICE: The control-head cable plug should be at the forward end of the enclosure, and the power-cable, speaker-cable, and accessory-cable plugs should be at the rear of the enclosure. Figure 106: Installing Cables No. 1 2 3 Description Transceiver Power Cable Accessory Cable Control Cable (CAN) 113 1234567891011 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Description Control Head Power (Red) Control Head Power Fuse Control Head Ground (Black) Ignition Sense (ACC) Emergency Cable Shorting Plug Headset Sporting Plug Accessory Cable Headset Connector Accessory Cable Emergency and External Alarm Connector 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver Prerequisites:

Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows (see Figure 107: Installing the Transceiver on page 115). Procedure:

1 Install the mounting trunnion and loose ends of the four ground straps to the radio-mounting plate, using four screws, flat washers, and external-tooth lock washers (see Figure 107:

Installing the Transceiver on page 115). The ground straps must be sandwiched between the flat washers and lock washers. The lock washer must be against the trunnion. The flat washer must be under the screw head. 2 Attach the transceiver to the mounting trunnion and secure with the two screws provided. 3 Connect the control cable to the front of the transceiver. Ensure the control cable connector screws are tightened. 4 Attach the accessory connector to the transceiver. Plug in the power connector. 5 Install the grommet around the cables and push the grommet into the cable-routing hole of the weather-resistant enclosure. 114 Figure 107: Installing the Transceiver MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Table 16: Transceiver Installation Parts List No. 1 2 3 Description Lock washer Flat washer (8 used) Screw 115 1532181741289675141116101312 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation No. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Description Screw Grommet Screw Lock catch Radio mounting plate Bottom housing Ground shield plane Top cover Gasket Hinge Enclosure mounts Transceiver Screw Trunnion External tooth lock washer (8 used) 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option Use the two-conductor, green/black cable which has one end terminated with two contacts that is supplied with the HLN5131_ Emergency Push Button. Disconnect the emergency switch shorting plug from the accessory cable. Replace the shorting wire of the shorting plug with the terminated end of the green/black emergency cable. Reconnect the plug to the accessory cable. 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option The motorcycle radio is offered with only one optional relay connection. If both horn and lights are required, wire a second relay coil parallel to the first relay. Use the two-conductor green/black cable which has one end terminated with two contacts that is supplied with the W116 Emergency Push Button. Insert the contacts into positions 3 and 4 of the emergency shorting plug of the accessory cable. Refer to Figure 113: Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram on page 119. 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory A six-position connector on the accessory cable has been made available for connecting a headset accessory. Headset manufacturers should be consulted for compatibility with the motorcycle radio prior to purchase and installation of the headset. To install, disconnect the headset shorting plug. Remove the headset shorting wire from the headset shorting plug. Terminate the contacts provided to the applicable wires of the headset cable. Insert the terminated wires into the headset shorting plug per the contact positions illustrated in the typical headset schematic found in this manual. Reconnect the terminated headset shorting plug to the accessory cable. 116 When upgrading from a mobile radio, the existing headset cable HLN6890 requires these two pins to be swapped. The other motorcycle headset cable with this pin change is 3080010R07. Figure 108: Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.15 Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield Follow the procedure to install the sunshield (part number NNTN7279_) to the O5 control head. Procedure:

1 Assemble the sunshield to the remote mount trunnion. The same process can be used for the motorcycle trunnion. Figure 109: Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield 2 Position the sunshield and remove the Velcro adhesive backing. 117 1 7 8 14 13 20 21 26 J2, BACK OF RADIO Insert into Pin 22(Monitor) Remove from Pin 1 (VIP OUT 1) (Female-Pins) 1 3 5 6 4 2 SPK - VIP OUT 1 AUX_MIC SPK + GND AUX_PTT MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation Figure 110: Position the Sunshield No. 1 Description Velcro Adhesive Backing 3 Slide the control head onto the trunnion while aligning the edge of the control head with the edge of the sunshield. Make sure the Velcro properly adheres to the control head. Figure 111: Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion 4 Position control head as desired and install screws. 118 1 Figure 112: Position Control Head as Desired MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring Figure 113: Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram 119 CONNECTACROSS HORNRING SWITCHOPTIONALSECOND RELAYCONNECTACROSS HEADLAMP SWITCHSPSTN.O.RELAYSPSTN.O.RELAYACCESSORY CABLEEMERGENCY ANDEXTERNAL ALARMSCONNECTOR12V COIL12V COILSWB+VIP OUT 2PIN 4HORN/LIGHTS WIRING DIAGRAMPIN 3SWB+HORN/LIGHTS43211234 MN005720A01-AA Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring Figure 114: Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram WARNING: Motorcycle products must have pins 1 and 2 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by removing the emergency shorting plug, or pressing the emergency switch, will turn on the radio. Failure to maintain a normally-closed path could drain the vehicle battery if left unchecked. Emergency-equipped radios are capable of transmitting without warning. 120 ACCESSORIESCONNECTORJ2 IN DASH MOUNTJ100 IN REMOTE MOUNTPIN 14PIN 15NOTE 1SPST NORMALLY CLOSEDEMERGENCY SWITCHNOTE 1: REMOVE BLACK JUMPER WIRE INSIDE ACCESSORY CONNECTOR HOUSING. INSERT WIRES FROM EMERGENCY SWITCHGNDEMER1781413202126 MN005720A01-AA Finishing the Installation Finishing the Installation This chapter provides the cable connection and dust cover installation procedure. 6.1 Cable Connection The topic provides the procedure for control heads cable connection. 6.1.1 Connecting the Cables for O2 Control Head Procedure:

1 Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. 2 Plug the radio CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 41: O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) on page 50 and Figure 43: O5 Control Head Rear View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) on page 52). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 3 Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector that comes out from the power cable. 4 Plug the VIP connector into the correct location an the back of the control head. 5 Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the radio. NOTICE: Connector-protective covers are provided with the radio. They should be used for added environmental robustness. 6 Ensure that the control head and microphone PTT switches are turned off. 7 Install the 15 A fuse in the radio power cable fuseholder and the 3 A or 4 A fuse in the ignition sense cable fuseholder. 8 Turn on the radio at the control head and verify proper operation of all controls and indicators. Radio operation in some installations requires turning on the ignition sense. 9 Perform a complete operational check of the radio. 10 Dress the control and power cables out of the way to prevent damage (pull any excess cable into the trunk area), securing the cables with clamps and tie wraps where necessary. 6.1.2 Connecting the Cables for O3 Control Head Procedure:

1 Unplug the CAN coiled cable connector from the Transceiver Interface. 121 MN005720A01-AA Finishing the Installation 2 Plug in the connector again. You hear a click sound. 3 Ensure that the location of the CAN connector is correct

(such as J800L or J800R) on the transceiver interface. 4 Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector of either J2 or J626

(refer to the cabling diagram for more information). 6.1.3 Connecting the Cables for O5 and O7 Control Heads Procedure:

1 Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. 2 Plug the radio CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 41: O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) on page 50 and Figure 43: O5 Control Head Rear View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) on page 52). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 3 Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector that comes out from the power cable. 4 Plug the VIP connector into the correct location at the back of the control head. 5 Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the radio. 6.1.4 Connecting the Cables for O9 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

Procedure:

1 Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. 2 Plug the radio CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 42: O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View on page 51 and Figure 44: O9 Control Head Rear View on page 52). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the GCAI connection on the control head back panel. 3 Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector that comes out from the power cable. 4 Plug the VIP connector into the correct location at the back of the control head. 5 Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the radio. 6.2 Dust Cover Installation To help protect and ensure that debris does not affect or damage your unused connectors, use the provided dust covers. Refer to the following figure to determine the correct cover for your connector. 122 Figure 115: Dust Cover Installation Locations MN005720A01-AA Finishing the Installation No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Description 1515047C01 1515048C01 1515049C01 1515327H02 1575693A01 7575262A01 SL000319A01 Control Head Control Head (Rear) Mid Power Tanapa (Remote Front) Enhanced Single Band Mobile Radio Mid Power Tanapa NOTICE:

Using a coin as a tool, parts 2 and 4 require you to insert then turn the coin approximately 1/3 turn until snug. Install parts 3 and/or 6 onto DB25 accessory cable assembly when the corresponding cable assembly connections are not in use. 123 1123567226114345678910117 MN005720A01-AA Finishing the Installation 6.3 Miscellaneous Information On the mid power radio, there are rubber port plugs which seals an opening that is used for future antenna connection. On the mid power radio, the port plug is at the bottom of the radio behind the control head or TIB. These plugs are critical to the sealing of the radio and should not be removed unless to replace it due to damage or to install the future antenna connector. Removal of the port plug in any other situation creates a leak path into the radio. 124 MN005720A01-AA Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting This chapter covers the Motorola Solutions recommended vehicle installation practices that can address or prevent many issues. Radio circuit damage due to overvoltage condition. Radio/Accessories "lock-up". Radio/Accessories change state/lock-up when radio PTT is depressed. Radio powers up in the FL 01/90 state (general communication error code). Radio intermittently resets. Radio loses secure key. Transmit audio distortion on motorcycle radio when engine is running. Keypad buttons become inoperative for motorcycle radios when engine is running. Alternator whines when transmitting with engine running. Radio/Accessories turn themselves on/off. 7.1 Checking the Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing If it is required to turn the radio on and off using the ignition sense switch, in addition to the control head on/off switch, connect the ignition sense lead to the accessory terminal from the ignition switch

(usually in the vehicle fuse panel under accessory or radio). NOTICE: Motorola Solutions recommends protecting or isolating the radio ignition sense input from voltage spikes more than +/- 40 VDC. Such spikes can be hundreds of volts in amplitude and are common in larger vehicles (for example utility trucks and buses), especially when the source is common to a solenoid coil. A triggerable oscilloscope is required to determine the existence of such spikes as most voltmeters cannot measure in short duration (< 1 ms). If the condition of the intended ignition sense source is unknown, Motorola Solutions recommends isolating the source from the radio with a relay or the use of a suppression diode wired between the source and ground. Any high current suppression diode (MR2535) with a breakdown voltage of between 18 V and 40 V would suffice. A suitable diode kit is available from Motorola Solutions parts, kit number HLN6325_. If it is required to have the radio power up only using the control head on/off switch, then connect the ignition sense lead directly to the positive terminal of the battery. The ignition sense will always be ignored and a re-wiring is necessary in the future if the operator chooses any ignition sense CPS setting. 125 MN005720A01-AA Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting 7.2 Checking the Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Dash and Remote Mount Configurations Scrape away paint on the chassis at the place where you are making the ground connection, and try to keep the ground lead as short as possible. Verify that the red A+ lead is connected directly to the positive terminal of the battery and the black ground lead is connected to the vehicle chassis using a wire with practical length. Ensure that the mobile radio antenna is the minimum required distance (three feet) from the mobile radio equipment to prevent radio frequency interference (RFI). For vehicles that have other types of electronic equipment installed such as lights, flashers, computers, siren/PA, and others, use a separate ground for the mobile radio equipment. Do not coil up any excess length of the red A+ lead. Doing this may produce a large transient voltage when there is a high current drain for example, during transmit. This could cause the radio to reset when the push-to-talk (PTT) is depressed. Motorcycle Configuration Ensure that the antenna ground connection is solid. An intermittent ground connection can distort the transmission when the motorcycle engine is running. Do not coil up any excessive length of antenna cable. It may affect the receive performance of the radio. If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, ensure that the added capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. 7.3 Improving the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines Use a relay to isolate the vehicle ignition switch point (ACC) from the radio ignition sense point. Control this relay from the vehicle ignition switch point (ACC). Supply a cleaner voltage from the positive terminal of the battery into the relay, which will now be attached to the radio ignition sense point. Now the ACC line toggles the relay, instead of directly toggling the radios ignition sense line. Install a Power Line Filter between the A+ lead and the positive terminal of the battery. The Power Line Filter filters the battery power applied to the transmitter power amplifiers. Pay extra caution to this because the series filter introduces a negative spike when the radio transmits that may cause problems with radio operation. Lock-up issues have been seen with the dual control head MCS 2000 configuration. For vehicles that use electromechanical relays to control external devices (lights, motors, switch boxes, and others), isolate these relay circuits as best as possible from the mobile radio equipment. Also, use diode suppression across the relay coil to minimize the noise produced by the collapsing magnetic field. If the ignition sense switch is used, ensure that there is not a large voltage drop between the A+

point (usually the positive terminal of the battery) and the ignition sense point. In general, the voltage difference between these two points, should not be greater than 1.5 V when all accessories/

air-conditioner are turned on. Refer to the Basic Service Manual for specifications for minimum and maximum voltage levels. Typical battery voltage levels are 13.6 V +/- 20%. 126 MN005720A01-AA Best Practices: Installation and Troubleshooting 7.4 Minimizing the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas For vehicles with high power radios that use glass mount antennas, keep the radio and antenna cable as far as possible from the radiating element of the antenna. If a sufficient distance is not maintained, the lack of a proper ground plane from the glass mount antenna may cause the radio transmit signal to interfere with itself and cause a reset. To minimize this effect, it may be necessary to install ferrite beads on the antenna cable to protect the radio from this interference. 7.5 Jump-Starting the Vehicle Prerequisites:

CAUTION: Do not jump-start vehicles with radio power or ignition sense cables connected. Damage to the radio and/or accessories may result. Jump-starting a vehicle can crank 300+ volts through the vehicle charging system and these transients can damage electrical equipment. The state of your radio before it needs a jump-start may be unknown, and the radio may attempt to return to its last state (radio ON), when doing a jump-start. Therefore, carry out the following procedure before jump-starting any vehicle containing a radio. Procedure:

1 Locate the ignition sense line (thin yellow wire or thin red wire, depending on dash mount or remote mount installation) and the main power leads (thick red wire) near the battery positive terminal. NOTICE:

These lines are fused. In the event these lines are not fused (add the appropriate fuse in line), use whatever tools necessary to physically disconnect the ignition sense and power lines from the battery terminal. Ensure that the disconnected lines are not in the way of moving motorcycle parts or interfering with the motorcycle operation in any way. 2 Open up the fuse holders and remove the fuses out of the kits. 3 Re-tighten the fuse holders but without the fuses to ensure that ignition sense and power lines do not interfere with moving motorcycle parts. 4 Proceed with the jump-start routine as described in the manual of your vehicle. 5 Once the jump-start process is complete, re-install the fuses into their holders. 7.6 Eliminating Noise/Howling from PA Speaker Refer to Installation Examples on page 30 for the recommended methods of installation available for the mobile two-way radio, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. Refer to Figure 32: Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional) on page 36 and Figure 33: Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts) on page 37 for the wiring diagrams for the recommended configurations. Refer to the Siren/PA User Manual for further details on lowering the wattage. 127 MN005720A01-AA Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering Basic Ordering Information Some replacement parts, spare parts, and/or product information can be ordered directly from the Motorola Solutions local distribution organization or through Motorola Online. While parts may be assigned with a Motorola Solutions part number, this does not guarantee that they are available from Motorola Solutions Radio Products and Solutions Organization (RPSO). Some parts may have become obsolete and are no longer available in the market due to cancellations by the supplier. If no Motorola Solutions part number is assigned, the part is normally not available from Motorola Solutions, or is not a user-serviceable part. Part numbers appended with an asterisk are serviceable by Motorola Solutions Depot only. Place orders for replacement parts, kits, and assemblies directly on Motorola Solutions local distribution organization or through Motorola Online. When ordering replacement parts or equipment information, include the complete identification number. This applies to all components, kits, and chassis. If the component part number is not known, the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part of, and sufficient description of the desired component to identify it. To identify non-referenced spare parts, request for help from the Customer Care organization of a Motorola Solutions local area representative. Types of Orders Mail Orders Telephone Orders and Parts Identification Fax Orders 128 Contact Information Mail orders are only accepted by the U.S. Fed-

eral Government Markets Division (USFGMD). Motorola Solutions 7031 Columbia Gateway Drive 3rd Floor - Order Processing Columbia, MD 21046 U.S.A. RPSO

(United States and Canada) 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM (Central Standard Time) Monday through Friday (Chicago, U.S.A.) 1-800-422-4210 1-847-538-8023 (United States and Canada) USFGMD 1-800-826-1913 Federal Government Parts -

Credit Cards Only 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Eastern Standard Time) RPSO (United States and Canada) 1-800-622-6210 MN005720A01-AA Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering Contact Information 1-847-576-3023 (United States and Canada) USFGMD

(Federal Government Orders) 1-800-526-8641 (For Parts and Equipment Pur-

chase Orders) Types of Orders Product Customer Service RPSO (United States and Canada) 1-800-927-2744 NOTICE: The Motorola Solutions RPSO was formerly known as the Radio Products Services Division (RPSD) and/or the Accessories and Aftermarket Division (AAD). A.1 Service Information EMEA Technical Support Operations (TSO) The EMEA Technical Support Operations (TSO) provides a remote Technical Support Service to help customers resolve technical issues and quickly restore networks and systems. This team of highly skilled professionals is available to customers with current service agreements in place that include the Technical Support Service. The TSO technical experts may be accessed through the Service Desk either electronically or using the listed telephone numbers. If you are unsure whether your current service agreement entitles you to benefit from this service, or if you would like more information about the Technical Support Service, contact your local customer support or account manager for further information. Contact Details Email: techsupport.emea@motorolasolutions.com Table 17: List of Telephone Numbers Country AUSTRIA DENMARK FRANCE GERMANY ISRAEL ITALY NETHERLANDS NORWAY POLAND RUSSIA SAUDI ARABIA SOUTH AFRICA In Country Number to Dial 0800 281 195 80 253 546 0800 914 532 or +33 176 775 609 0800 724 6872 or +49 69 22221568 180 931 5818 800 791 276 0800 0249 893 800 14 802 00800 1215 772 810 800 286 15011 800 811 0523 0800 994 886 129 MN005720A01-AA Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering Country SPAIN UNITED KINGDOM UNITED ARAB EMIRATES All Other Countries In Country Number to Dial 9009 416 84 0800 731 3496 or +44 207 019 0461 8000 3570 4387

+44 207 019 0461 Parts Identification and Ordering If you need help in identifying non-referenced spare parts, direct a request to the Customer Care Organization of a local area Motorola Solutions representative. Orders for replacement parts, kits, and assemblies should be placed directly at the local distribution organization of Motorola Solutions or through the Extranet site Motorola Online at https://emeaonline.motorolasolutions.com. Updated Versions of Manuals Verify the current version of the manual at our Extranet site, Motorola Online: https://

emeaonline.motorolasolutions.com. Your Input Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. A.2 Service Information APAC This topic contains contact details to service centers in Asia and Pacific region. Technical Support Technical support is available to assist the dealer/distributor in resolving any malfunction which may be encountered. Initial contact should be by telephone wherever possible. When contacting Motorola Solutions Technical Support, be prepared to provide the product model number and the serial number. Further Assistance from Motorola Solutions You can also contact the Customer Help Desk through the website: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/

en_xp/products. If a unit requires further complete testing, knowledge and/or details of component level troubleshooting or service than is customarily performed at the basic level, send the radio to a Motorola Solutions Service Center as listed in the following table:

Table 18: Service Information Telephone Numbers and Addresses of the Asia and Pacific Motorola Solutions Centers Country Singapore Telephone Number

+65-6352-6383 Address Motorola Solutions Singapore Pte. Ltd, c/o Azure Engineering, 49 Jalan Pemimpin,

#03-11 APS Industrial Building, Singapore 577203 Contact: Mareen Phua E-mail: mareen@azure.com.sg 130 Country Telephone Number Address MN005720A01-AA Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering Malaysia

+603-7809-0000 Indonesia

+62-21-3043-5239 Thailand Tel: +662-653-220 Fax: +668-254-5922 India

+91-9844218850 China

+86-10-8473-5128 Hong Kong 852-2966-4823 Enquiry: Goe Engkiet E-mail: eng-kiet.goe@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Sdn. Bhd. Level 14, Persoft Tower, No. 68, Pesiaran Tropicana, 47410 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Contact: Koh Tiong Eng E-mail: A21001@motorolasolutions.com PT. Motorola Solutions Indonesia 30th Floor, Gedung BRI II, Suite 3001, Jl. Jend. Sudirman Kav. 44-46, Jakarta 10210, Indonesia Contact: Eko Haryanto E-mail: Eko.Haryanto@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions (Thailand) Ltd. 142 Two Pacific Place Suite 2201, 3220 Sukhumvit Road, Klongtoey, Bangkok 10110 Contact: Nitas Vatanasupapon E-mail: Nitas@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions India Pvt. Ltd. C/o Communication Test Design India Private Limited,

#4, 5 Maruthi Industrial Estate, Rajapalya, Hoodi Village, Bangalore - 560048, India Contact: K. Umamaheswari E-mail: umamaheshwari@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions (China) Co. Ltd. No. 1 Wang Jing East Road, Chao Yang District, Beijing, 100102, P.R. China Contact: Sophy Wang E-mail: C18170@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Asia Pacific Ltd. Unit 1807-1812, 18/F, Two Harbourfront, 22 Tak Fung Street, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong 131 MN005720A01-AA Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering Country Telephone Number Address Philippines Tel: +632 858-7500 Fax: +632 841-0681 Korea

+822-3497-3649 Taiwan

+886-2-8729 8000 Australia

+613-9847-7725 Contact: Judy Leung E-mail: Judy.Leung@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Communications Philippines, Inc. Unit 2102, One Global Place Building, 5th Ave., Bonifacio Global City, Taguig, Philippines 1634. Contact: Arthur Nieves E-mail: Arthur.Nieves@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Korea, Inc. 9th Floor, Hibrand Building, 215, Yangjae-Dong, Seocho-Gu, Seoul, 137-924, Korea. Contact: KS Kwak E-mail: r45321@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Taiwan, Ltd. 8F, No. 9, Songgao Rd., Taipei 110, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Contact: Michael Chou E-mail: ftpe239@motorolasolutions.com Motorola Solutions Australia Pty. Ltd. 10 Wesley Court, Tally Ho Business Park, East Burwood Victoria 3151, Australia. E-mail: servicecentre.au@motorolasolutions.com Piece Parts Some replacement parts, spare parts, and/or product information can be ordered directly. If a complete Motorola Solutions part number is assigned to the part, it is available from Motorola Solutions Service Organization. If no part number is assigned, the part is not normally available from Motorola Solutions. If a list of parts is not included, that means that no user-serviceable parts are available for that kit or assembly. Customer Programming Software has no capability to tune the radio. Tuning the radio can only be performed at the factory or at the appropriate Motorola Solutions Repair Center. Component replacement can affect the radio tuning and must only be performed by the appropriate Motorola Solutions Repair Center. All orders for parts/information should include the complete Motorola Solutions identification number. All part orders should be directed to your local Motorola Solutions Service Organization. See your latest price pages. Parts Identification and Ordering Request for help in identification of non-referenced spare parts should be directed to the Customer Care Organization of Motorola Solutions local area representation. Orders for replacement parts, kits, 132 and assemblies should be placed directly on Motorola Solutions local distribution organization or from the Motorola Solutions Online (Extranet). MN005720A01-AA Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering 133 MN005720A01-AA Glossary Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to portable and mobile subscriber radio products. Analog Refers to a continuously variable signal or a circuit or device designed to handle such signals. band Frequencies allowed for a specific purpose. Customer Programming Software CPS-Software with a graphical user interface containing the feature set of an ASTRO radio. default A pre-defined set of parameters. DEK Direct Entry Keyboard digital Refers to data that is stored or transmitted as a sequence of discrete symbols from a finite set; most commonly this means binary data represented using electronic or electromagnetic signals. EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory EEPROM-A special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge. An EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off. FCC Federal Communications Commission. Firmware Code executed by an embedded processor such as the Host or DSP in a subscriber radio. This type of code is typically resident in non-volatile memory and as such is more difficult to change than code executed from RAM. frequency Number of times a complete electromagnetic-wave cycle occurs in a fixed unit of time (usually one second). Kilohertz (kHz) One thousand cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. 134 MN005720A01-AA Glossary Megahertz (MHz) One million cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. Megahertz One million cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. Microcontroller Unit MCU-Also written as C. A microprocessor that contains RAM and ROM components, as well as communications and programming components and peripherals. PA Power amplifier. paging One-way communication that alerts the receiver to retrieve a message. Push-to-Talk PTT-The switch or button usually located on the left side of the radio which, when pressed, causes the radio to transmit. When the PTT is released, the unit returns to receive operation. Radio Frequency RF-The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light (approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). RAM Random Access Memory Random Access Memory RAM-A type of computer memory that can be accessed randomly; that is, any byte of memory can be accessed without touching the preceding bytes. receiver Electronic device that amplifies RF signals. A receiver separates the audio signal from the RF carrier, amplifies it, and converts it back to the original sound waves. Registers Short-term data-storage circuits within the microcontroller unit or programmable logic IC. RESET Reset line: an input to the microcontroller that restarts execution. RX Receive. signal An electrically transmitted electromagnetic wave. software 135 MN005720A01-AA Glossary Computer programs, procedures, rules, documentation, and data pertaining to the operation of a system. Time-out Timer TOT-A timer that limits the length of a transmission. transceiver Transmitter-receiver. A device that both transmits and receives analog or digital signals. Also abbreviated as XCVR. transmitter Electronic equipment that generates and amplifies an RF carrier signal, modulates the signal, and then radiates it into space. TX Transmit. UHF Ultra-High Frequency. Universal Serial Bus USB-An external bus standard that supports data transfer rates of 12 Mbps. VHF Very-High Frequency. 136

 

 

Futurecom Systems Group, ULC DVRS RF Safety Booklet 8F083X03 Rev 17 Document Revisions Rev R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 R17 Date June 30,2017 Nov 10, 2017 Dec 21,2017 Nov 20, 2018 By Notes & References AJK/SN Added APX 8500 AJK/SN Revised APX8500 Antenna Installation instructions AJK/SN Added FCC/ISED Updates AJK/SN Revised FCC label, Added APX8500 HP configurations for DVR7/800, UHF, VHF. January 29, 2020 February 5, 2020 February 11, 2020 April 16, 2020 AJK/SN Added APX 4500, APX 2500 configuration for DVR VHF AJK/SN Added APX 4500, APX2500 configuration for DVR 700 AJK/SN Added APX 4500, APX2500 configuration for DVR800 AJK/SN Clean up details of mobiles to be clearer; added in new mobiles APX6500/APX6500Li/APX5500/APX4500/APX2500/APX1500 configuration for DVR VHF, UHF, 700, and 800 DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 2 Product Safety and RF Energy Exposure Booklet for Digital Vehicular Repeater Systems (DVRS) 8F083X03 Rev 17 ATTENTION!

Before using this equipment, please read this booklet which contains important operating instructions for safe usage, RF energy control and compliance with FCC/ISED exposure limits. Notes, Attentions, Important Throughout this manual, you will see Notes, and Attentions, Important Their meaning is as follows:

NOTE A clarifying statement that expands on the text that follows. IMPORTANT An important statement that should be considered and / or implemented in order to achieve adequate equipment operation. ATTENTION!

An instruction that must be followed in insure compliance with the appropriate standards or proper equipment operations NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the installation manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will commercial DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 3 not occur in a particular installation. 8F083X03 Rev 17 ATTENTION!

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Futurecom Systems Group, ULC could void the Users authority to operate the equipment. USA Users: Do not use the DVRS in the frequency band 406.0 406.1MHz. This frequency band is reserved for distress beacons. ATTENTION!

This radio is intended for use in occupational / controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC /ISED limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general RF EXPOSURE population, consumer, or any other use. RADIO OPERATOR It is the responsibility of the Repeater Operator to ensure that Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) limits are observed at all times during repeater transmissions. If this vehicular repeater is used in combination with a separate Mobile radio transmitter, the Repeater operator must ensure at all times that no person comes within the MPE distance from the vehicle body to ensure compliance with the FCC/ISED RF energy exposure limits for the general population. The minimum lateral distance between all possible personnel and the body of the DVRS equipped vehicle must be as specified in Table 1 (Stand-alone DVR) and Table 2 (DVR interfaced to a Mobile Radio i.e. DVRS). Failure to observe the MPE distance exclusion area around the antenna may expose persons within this area to RF energy above the FCC exposure limit for bystanders

(general population). Stand Alone DVR (20W) Recommended Lateral Distance from Antenna 82cm (32.3 inches) (up to 50% Tx duty cycle) 75cm (29.5 inches) (up to 50% Tx duty cycle) 73cm (28.7 inches) (up to100% Tx duty cycle) 76cm (29.9 inches) (up to100% Tx duty cycle) Table 1 Recommended Lateral Distance - Stand Alone DVR VHF UHF 380-512MHz 700MHz 800MHz NOTE:

50% Tx duty cycle is defined as Push To Talk (PTT), 50% Talk - 50% Listen. 100% Tx duty cycle is defined as Push To Talk (PTT), 100% Talk. DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 4 8F083X03 Rev 17 Mobile Radio Rated Power

(up to 50% Tx duty cycle) DVRS with <7 Watt Single Band Mobile Radio DVRS with 7 to 15 Watt Single Band Mobile Radio DVRS with 16 to 39 Watt Single Band Mobile Radio DVRS with 40 to 100 Watt Single Band Mobile Radio DVRS with up to 100 Watt Dual/Multi Band Mobile Radio Recommended Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body 20 cm (7.9 inches) 30 cm (11.8 inches) 60 cm (23.6 inches) 90 cm (35.4 inches) 90 cm (35.4 inches) Table 2 Recommended Lateral Distance DVRS (DVR interfaced to a Mobile Radio) IMPORTANT The maximum allowed gain of the /4 omni-directional antenna for the Digital Vehicular Repeater (DVR) is Unity (0dBd). RF Exposure Label The RF Exposure Label should be affixed in the vehicle beside the mobile radio control head. The label should be in the direct view of the Repeater operator. The label is supplied with the Digital Vehicular Repeater(DVR). FCC Label This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 5 8F083X03 Rev 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards ATTENTION!

To ensure compliance with RF Energy Safety Standards:

Install only Futurecom / Motorola approved antennas and accessories and set conducted power into the DVR and Mobile antennas equal to or lower then the approved power levels refer to Table 3 (Stand Alone DVR) or Table 4 (DVR interfaced to XTL Mobile Radio) or Tables 5-9 (DVR interfaced to APX Mobile Radios). Ensure the antenna installation is consistent with the DVR Antenna Installation instructions described in this document as well as with the Mobile Radio Antenna Installation Instructions published in the applicable Motorola Installation Manual. Ensure the Product & RF Safety Booklets 8F083X03(FCC) or 8F083X05(ISED) enclosed with the Mobile Radio and the DVR are available to the end user upon completion of the installation. ANTENNA STAND ALONE DVR MODEL

Kit #

(up to 100%

(up to 100%

(up to 50%

(up to 50%

(up to 50%

700 MHz

(20W) 800 MHz

(20W) Tx duty cycle) 20W Tx duty cycle) 20W Freq. Range

[MHz]

764-870 380-433 450-470 470-512 136-144 144-150.8 150.8-162 162-174 Type wave wave wave wave wave wave wave wave HAF4016 HAE6012A HAE4003A HAE4004 HAD4006 HAD4007 HAD4008 HAD4009 403-430

(20W) Tx duty cycle) 20W 450-470

(20W) Tx duty cycle) 20W 470-512

(20W) Tx duty cycle) VHF (20W)

(up to 50%

Tx duty cycle) 20W 20W 20W 20W 20W Table 3 Approved Stand-Alone DVR Combinations NOTE:

1. Mobile RF conducted antenna power in the tables below denotes up to 50% Tx duty cycle. 2. DVR RF conducted antenna power in the tables below denotes up to 100% Tx duty cycle. 3. AN and BN models for mobile radios refer to the last two digits of the Model number on the label affixed to the mobile product. DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 6 8F083X03 Rev 17 DVR: 7V083X06 (DQPMDVR8000P) Freq Range: 806-825, 851-870MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd FCC ID: LO6-DVRS800 Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Mobile XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3806 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 57W 10W / 57W 10W / 57W XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3808 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 57W 10W / 57W 10W / 57W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4870 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4862 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W XTL5000 UHF R2(450-512MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4867 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6016A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, HAE4012A, HAE4013A, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W XTL5000 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5823 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAF4013A, HAF4014A, HAF4016A, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 4A Approved 800 DVRS Configurations XTL5000 / XTL2500 DVR: 7V083X05 (DQPMDVR7000P) Freq Range: 764-776, 794-806MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd FCC ID: LO6-DVRS700 Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Mobile XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3806 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 5W / 57W 5W / 57W 5W / 57W Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3808 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, RAD4010A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 5W / 57W 5W / 57W 5W / 57W 1/2 wave, 3dBd 20W / 120W *

* XTL5000 VHF (136-174MHz) XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4870 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4862 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W XTL5000 UHF R2(450-512MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4867 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6016A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, HAE4012A, HAE4013A, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 57W XTL5000 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5823 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAF4013A, HAF4014A, HAF4016A, 1/4 HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 5W / 42W 5W / 42W wave, 0dBd 5W / 42W 1/4 wave, 3dBd 5W / 42W Table 4B Approved 700 DVRS Configurations XTL5000 / XTL2500 DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 7 DVR: 7V083X04 (DQPMDVR6000P) Freq Range: 470-512MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd FCC ID: LO6-DVRSUHF Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) 8F083X03 Rev 17 Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Mobile XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3806 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 57W 10W / 57W 10W / 57W XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3808 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 57W 10W / 57W 10W / 57W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4870 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4862 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W XTL5000 UHF R2(450-512MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4867 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6016A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, HAE4012A, HAE4013A, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W XTL5000 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5823 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAF4013A, HAF4014A, HAF4016A, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 4C Approved 470-512MHz DVRS Configurations XTL5000 / XTL2500 DVR: 7V083X03 (DQPMDVR5000P) Freq Range: 450-470MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd FCC ID: LO6-DVRSUHF Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Mobile XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3806 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 57W 10W / 57W 10W / 57W XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3808 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 57W 10W / 57W 10W / 57W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4870 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4862 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W XTL5000 UHF R2(450-512MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4867 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6016A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, HAE4012A, HAE4013A, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W XTL5000 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5823 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAF4013A, HAF4014A, HAF4016A, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 4D Approved 450-470MHz DVRS Configurations XTL5000 / XTL2500 DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 8 DVR: 7V083X07 (DQPMDVR4000P) Freq Range: 380-430MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd FCC ID: LO6-DVRSUHF Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna 8F083X03 Rev 17 Mobile XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3806 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 57W 10W / 57W 10W / 57W XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3808 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 57W 10W / 57W 10W / 57W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4870 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4862 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W XTL5000 UHF R2(450-512MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4867 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6016A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, HAE4012A, HAE4013A, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W XTL5000 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5823 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAF4013A, HAF4014A, HAF4016A, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 4E Approved 380-430MHz DVRS Configurations XTL5000 / XTL2500 DVR: 7V083X01 (DQPMDVR3000P) Freq Range: 136-174MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, FCC ID: LO6-DVRSVHF HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Mobile XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3806 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 6W / 57W 6W / 57W 6W / 57W XTL5000 VHF (147-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3808 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAD4007A, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 6W / 57W 6W / 57W 6W / 57W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4870 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W XTL5000 UHF R1(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4862 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6012A, HAE6013A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 2dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W XTL5000 UHF R2(450-512MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4867 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAE6016A, HAE4003A, HAE4011A, HAE4012A, HAE4013A, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W XTL5000 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5823 Max Power: DVR / Mobile HAF4013A, HAF4014A, HAF4016A, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 1/4 wave, 0dBd 1/4 wave, 3dBd 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W Table 4F Approved 136-174MHz DVRS Configurations XTL5000 / XTL2500 DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 9 8F083X03 Rev 17 Freq Range: 806-825, 851-870MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna DVRS Antenna and Power Matrix DVR: 7V083X06

(DQPMDVR8000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRS800 Mobile APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3824 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W APX6500/ APX7500 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5858 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3821 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4894 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4897 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R2

(450-520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4896 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W NOTE: IF YOUR MOBILE IS APX6500 AND MODEL

"AN" PLEASE ENSURE THE FCC ID ALIGNS WITH THE NUMBERS UNDER MOBILE. THE APX6500 HAS GONE THROUGH A REDESIGN AND THE NEWER MODEL "BN" HAS A DIFFERENT FCC ID WHICH STARTS AT TABLE 9 AND FORWARD APX7500 7/800 MHz 35W -

VHF 50W FCC ID: AZ492FT7037 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W APX7500 VHF 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7035 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 40W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7043 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7048 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R2 45W 7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7044 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R1 40W FCC ID: AZ492FT4895 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W APX7500 VHF 100W - UHF R1 100W FCC ID: AZ492FT4898 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT7047 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 0dBd Table 5A Approved 800 DVRS Configurations APX6500 / APX7500 (AN Model Only FOR APX6500) DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 10 Freq Range: 764-776, 794-806MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna 8F083X03 Rev 17 DVR: 7V083X05

(DQPMDVR7000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRS700 Mobile APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3824 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W APX6500/ APX7500 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5858 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3821 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4894 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4897 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R2

(450-520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4896 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W NOTE: IF YOUR MOBILE IS APX6500 AND MODEL

"AN" PLEASE ENSURE THE FCC ID ALIGNS WITH THE NUMBERS UNDER MOBILE. THE APX6500 HAS GONE THROUGH A REDESIGN AND THE NEWER MODEL "BN" HAS A DIFFERENT FCC ID WHICH STARTS AT TABLE 9 AND FORWARD APX7500 7/800 MHz 35W -

VHF 50W FCC ID: AZ492FT7037 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W APX7500 VHF 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7035 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 40W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7043 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7048 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W APX7500 UHF R2 45W 7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7044 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R1 40W FCC ID: AZ492FT4895 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W APX7500 VHF 100W - UHF R1 100W FCC ID: AZ492FT4898 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT7047 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W APX6500 UHF R1 40W -

UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT4904 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W Table 5B Approved 700 DVRS Configurations APX6500 / APX7500 (AN Model Only FOR APX6500) DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 11 Freq Range: 380-430MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna 8F083X03 Rev 17 DVR: 7V083X07

(DQPMDVR4000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRSUHF Mobile APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3824 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W APX6500/ APX7500 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5858 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3821 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4894 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4897 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R2

(450-520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4896 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W NOTE: IF YOUR MOBILE IS APX6500 AND MODEL

"AN" PLEASE ENSURE THE FCC ID ALIGNS WITH THE NUMBERS UNDER MOBILE. THE APX6500 HAS GONE THROUGH A REDESIGN AND THE NEWER MODEL "BN" HAS A DIFFERENT FCC ID WHICH STARTS AT TABLE 9 AND FORWARD APX7500 7/800 MHz 35W -

VHF 50W FCC ID: AZ492FT7037 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W APX7500 VHF 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7035 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 40W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7043 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7048 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R2 45W 7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7044 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R1 40W FCC ID: AZ492FT4895 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W APX7500 VHF 100W - UHF R1 100W FCC ID: AZ492FT4898 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT7047 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W APX6500 UHF R1 40W -

UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT4904 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd 10W / 48W 10W / 48W Max Power: DVR / Mobile Table 5C Approved UHF R1 DVRS Configurations APX6500 / APX7500 (AN Model Only FOR APX6500) DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 10W / 48W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 48W 12 Freq Range: 450-470MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd; HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0 dBd (HAE6016A offered only with DVR/ XTL combination) Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna 8F083X03 Rev 17 DVR: 7V083X03

(DQPMDVR5000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRSUHF Mobile APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3824 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W APX6500/ APX7500 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5858 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3821 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4894 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4897 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R2

(450-520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4896 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W NOTE: IF YOUR MOBILE IS APX6500 AND MODEL

"AN" PLEASE ENSURE THE FCC ID ALIGNS WITH THE NUMBERS UNDER MOBILE. THE APX6500 HAS GONE THROUGH A REDESIGN AND THE NEWER MODEL "BN" HAS A DIFFERENT FCC ID WHICH STARTS AT TABLE 9 AND FORWARD APX7500 7/800 MHz 35W -

VHF 50W FCC ID: AZ492FT7037 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W APX7500 VHF 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7035 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 40W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7043 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7048 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R2 45W 7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7044 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R1 40W FCC ID: AZ492FT4895 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W APX7500 VHF 100W - UHF R1 100W FCC ID: AZ492FT4898 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT7047 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W APX6500 UHF R1 40W -

UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT4904 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W Table 5D Approved UHF R2 DVRS Configurations APX6500 / APX7500 (AN Model Only FOR APX6500) DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 13 Freq Range: 470-512MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd; HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0 dBd (HAE6016A offered only with DVR/ XTL combination) Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna 8F083X03 Rev 17 DVR: 7V083X04

(DQPMDVR6000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRSUHF Mobile APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3824 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W APX6500/ APX7500 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5858 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3821 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4894 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4897 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R2

(450-520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4896 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W NOTE: IF YOUR MOBILE IS APX6500 AND MODEL

"AN" PLEASE ENSURE THE FCC ID ALIGNS WITH THE NUMBERS UNDER MOBILE. THE APX6500 HAS GONE THROUGH A REDESIGN AND THE NEWER MODEL "BN" HAS A DIFFERENT FCC ID WHICH STARTS AT TABLE 9 AND FORWARD APX7500 7/800 MHz 35W -

VHF 50W FCC ID: AZ492FT7037 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W APX7500 VHF 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7035 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 40W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7043 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7048 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 UHF R2 45W 7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7044 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R1 40W FCC ID: AZ492FT4895 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W APX7500 VHF 100W - UHF R1 100W FCC ID: AZ492FT4898 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT7047 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W APX6500 UHF R1 40W -

UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT4904 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W Table 5E Approved UHF R3 DVRS Configurations APX6500 / APX7500 (AN Model Only FOR APX6500) DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 14 Freq Range: 136-174MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna 8F083X03 Rev 17 DVR: 7V083X01

(DQPMDVR3000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRSVHF Mobile APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3824 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 60W 6W / 60W 6W / 60W APX6500/ APX7500 700/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT5858 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W APX6500/ APX7500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3821 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4894 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R1

(380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4897 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W APX6500/ APX7500 UHF R2

(450-520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT4896 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W NOTE: IF YOUR MOBILE IS APX6500 AND MODEL

"AN" PLEASE ENSURE THE FCC ID ALIGNS WITH THE NUMBERS UNDER MOBILE. THE APX6500 HAS GONE THROUGH A REDESIGN AND THE NEWER MODEL "BN" HAS A DIFFERENT FCC ID WHICH STARTS AT TABLE 9 AND FORWARD APX7500 7/800 MHz 35W -

VHF 50W FCC ID: AZ492FT7037 HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 60W 6W / 60W 6W / 60W APX7500 VHF 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7035 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 40W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7043 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W APX7500 UHF R1 100W -

7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7048 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W APX7500 UHF R2 45W 7/800 MHz 35W FCC ID: AZ492FT7044 HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R1 40W FCC ID: AZ492FT4895 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 60W 6W / 60W 6W / 60W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W APX7500 VHF 100W - UHF R1 100W FCC ID: AZ492FT4898 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W APX7500 VHF 50W - UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT7047 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 60W 6W / 60W 6W / 60W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W APX6500 UHF R1 40W -

UHF R2 45W FCC ID: AZ492FT4904 HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 48W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W 6W / 54W Table 5F Approved VHF DVRS Configurations APX6500 / APX7500 (AN Model Only FOR APX6500) DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 15 DVR: 7V083X06

(DQPMDVR8000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRS800 Freq Range: 806-825, 851-870MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) 8F083X03 Rev 17 Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-

174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 Antenna AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, Antenna HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, Antenna HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, Antenna HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, Antenna HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, Antenna HAD4016A, 1/4 wave, Antenna HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, Antenna HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, Antenna HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W APX8500 UHF (380-

470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 0dBd 3.5dBd 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W APX8500 UHF (450-

520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 3.5dBd RAE4015ARM, 5/8 wave, 5dBd RAE40416ARB

, 5/8 wave, 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W 10W / 54W APX8500 7/800MHz AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 0dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 6A Approved 800 DVRS Configurations APX8500 MP DVR: 7V083X05

(DQPMDVR7000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRS700 Freq Range: 764-776, 794-806MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-

174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 Antenna AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Antenna HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Antenna HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Antenna HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Antenna HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Antenna HAD4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Antenna HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Antenna HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Antenna HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, 3dBd RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 HAE6012A, 1/4 HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd RAE4015ARM, RAE40416ARB, 5/8 wave, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W APX8500 UHF (380-

470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 UHF (450-

520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 7/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 HAF4014A, 1/4 HAF4016A, 1/4 HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd wave, 3dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W Table 6B Approved 700 DVRS Configurations APX8500 MP DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 16 8F083X03 Rev 17 DVR: 7V083X07

(DQPMDVR4000P) Freq Range: 380-430MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd FCC ID: LO6-DVRSUHF Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 UHF (380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 UHF (450-520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAD4006A, 1/4 HAD4007A, 1/4 HAD4008A, 1/4 HAD4009A, 1/4 HAD4016A, 1/4 HAD4017A, 1/4 HAD4021A, 1/4 HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 HAE6012A, 1/4 HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 RAE4014ARB, 5/8 HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 5dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd RAE40416ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W APX8500 7/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 HAF4014A, 1/4 HAF4016A, 1/4 HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd wave, 3dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W Table 6C Approved UHF R1 DVRS Configurations APX8500 MP DVR: 7V083X03

(DQPMDVR5000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRSUHF Freq Range: 450-470MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd; HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0 dBd

(HAE6016A offered only with DVR/ XTL combination) Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna APX8500 VHF (136-174MHz) AN000131A01, 1/4 HAD4006A, 1/4 HAD4007A, 1/4 HAD4008A, 1/4 HAD4009A, 1/4 HAD4016A, 1/4 HAD4017A, 1/4 HAD4021A, 1/4 HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 HAE6012A, 1/4 HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W APX8500 UHF (450-520MHz) AN000131A01, 1/4 HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 RAE4014ARB, 5/8 HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 5dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd RAE40416ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W AN000131A01, 1/4 HAF4013A, 1/4 HAF4014A, 1/4 HAF4016A, 1/4 HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd wave, 3dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W Table 6D Approved UHF R2 DVRS Configurations APX8500 MP Mobile FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 UHF (380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 7/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 17 Freq Range: 470-512MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd; HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0 dBd (HAE6016A offered only with DVR/ XTL combination) Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAD4006A, 1/4 HAD4007A, 1/4 HAD4008A, 1/4 HAD4009A, 1/4 HAD4016A, 1/4 HAD4017A, 1/4 HAD4021A, 1/4 HAD4022A, 5/8 RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd wave, 3dBd 8F083X03 Rev 17 Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 HAE6012A, 1/4 HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 5dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd RAE40416ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 HAF4014A, 1/4 HAF4016A, 1/4 HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd wave, 3dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W Table 6E Approved UHF R3 DVRS Configurations APX8500 MP DVR: 7V083X01

(DQPMDVR3000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRSVHF HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Freq Range: 136-174MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAD4006A, 1/4 HAD4007A, 1/4 HAD4008A, 1/4 HAD4009A, 1/4 HAD4016A, 1/4 HAD4017A, 1/4 HAD4021A, 1/4 HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 HAE6012A, 1/4 HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAE6013A, 1/2 HAE6031A, 1/2 HAE4003A, 1/4 HAE6015A, 1/2 HAE6016A, 1/4 RAE4014ARB, 5/8 HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 2dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 2dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 5dBd wave, 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd RAE40416ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W 5W / 54W DVR: 7V083X04

(DQPMDVR6000P) FCC ID: LO6-DVRSUHF Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 UHF (380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 UHF (450-520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 7/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-174MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 UHF (380-470MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 UHF (450-520MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 APX8500 7/800MHz FCC ID: AZ492FT7089 AN000131A01, 1/4 wave, 0dBd HAF4013A, 1/4 HAF4014A, 1/4 HAF4016A, 1/4 HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd wave, 3dBd wave, 0dBd wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W Table 6F Approved VHF DVRS Configurations APX8500 MP DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 18 8F083X03 Rev 17 Freq Range: 806-825, 851-870MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd FCC ID: LO6-DVRS800 Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4016A, 1/4 wave, HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd Antenna RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3.5dBd 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 3.5dBd RAE4015ARM, 5/8 wave, 5dBd RAE40416ARB

, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 7A Approved 800 DVRS Configurations- APX8500 HP DVR: 7V083X05

(DQPMDVR7000P) Freq Range: 764-776, 794-806MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd FCC ID: LO6-DVRS700 Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4016A, 1/4 wave, HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd Antenna RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3.5dBd 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 3.5dBd RAE4015ARM, 5/8 wave, 5dBd RAE40416ARB

, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W 5W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W Table 7B Approved 700 DVRS Configurations- APX8500 HP DVR: 7V083X06

(DQPMDVR8000P) Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-

174MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (380-

470MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (450-

520MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 7/800MHz Max Power: DVR /

Mobile Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-

174MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (380-

470MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (450-

520MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 7/800MHz Max Power: DVR /

Mobile DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 19 8F083X03 Rev 17 Freq Range: 380-430MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4016A, 1/4 wave, HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd Antenna RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3.5dBd 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 3.5dBd RAE4015ARM, 5/8 wave, 5dBd RAE40416ARB

, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 7C Approved UHF1 DVRS Configurations- APX8500 HP Freq Range: 450-470MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4016A, 1/4 wave, HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd Antenna RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3.5dBd 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 3.5dBd RAE4015ARM, 5/8 wave, 5dBd RAE40416ARB

, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W DVR: 7V083X07

(DQPMDVR4000P) FCC ID: LO6-

DVRSUHF Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-

174MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (380-

470MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (450-

520MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 7/800MHz Max Power: DVR /

Mobile DVR: 7V083X03

(DQPMDVR5000P) FCC ID: LO6-

DVRSUHF Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-

174MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (380-

470MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (450-

520MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 7/800MHz Max Power: DVR /

Mobile AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 7D Approved UHF2 DVRS Configurations- APX8500 HP DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 20 8F083X03 Rev 17 Freq Range: 470-512MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4016A, 1/4 wave, HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd Antenna RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3.5dBd 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 3.5dBd RAE4015ARM, 5/8 wave, 5dBd RAE40416ARB

, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W 10W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 7E Approved UHF3 DVRS Configurations- APX8500 HP Freq Range: 136-174MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Antenna Antenna AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, HAD4016A, 1/4 wave, HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, HAD4022A, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd Antenna RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 5dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, RAE4014AR B, 5/8 wave, HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, HAE4012A, 1/2 wave, HAE4013A, 1/2 wave, RAE40416ARB

, 5/8 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 2dBd 0dBd 5dBd 0dBd 3.5dBd 3.5dBd 5dBd 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W AN000131A01

, 1/4 wave, HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, FCC ID: AZ492FT7118 0dBd 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W Table 7F Approved VHF DVRS Configurations- APX8500 HP DVR: 7V083X04

(DQPMDVR6000P) FCC ID: LO6-

DVRSUHF Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-

174MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (380-

470MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (450-

520MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 7/800MHz Max Power: DVR /

Mobile DVR: 7V083X01

(DQPMDVR3000P) FCC ID: LO6-

DVRSVHF Mobile APX8500 VHF (136-

174MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (380-

470MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 UHF (450-

520MHz) Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX8500 7/800MHz Max Power: DVR /

Mobile DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 21 Freq Range: 136-174 MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAD4006A, 4007A,4008A,4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) 8F083X03 Rev 17 NOTE: IF YOUR MOBILE IS APX2500/APX4500 AND MODEL "AN" PLEASE ENSURE THE FCC ID ALIGNS WITH THE NUMBERS UNDER MOBILE. THE APX2500/APX4500 HAS GONE THROUGH A REDESIGN AND THE NEWER MODEL "BN" HAS A DIFFERENT FCC ID WHICH STARTS AT TABLE 9 AND FORWARD DVR: 7V083X01

(DQPMDVR3000P) FCC ID # LO6-DVRSVHF Mobile APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (136-162MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 Max Power: DVR / Mobile APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (146-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 Max Power: DVR / Mobile Roof Mounted Antenna HAD40016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 6W / 60W HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 6W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (136-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (136-144 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (144-150.8 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4007A 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (150.8-162 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 60W APX2500/APX4500 VHF (162-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 60W APX2500/APX4500 VHF (132-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826

*HAD4022A 5/8 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 6W / 60W APX2500/APX4500 VHF (136-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826

*RAD4010ARB 1/2 wave,3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile

*Antenna length trimmed to frequency Table 8A Approved VHF DVRS Configuration APX 2500 and APX 4500 (AN Model Only) 6W / 60W DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 22 8F083X03 Rev 17 Freq Range: 764-806 MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A,1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) NOTE: IF YOUR MOBILE IS APX2500/APX4500 AND MODEL "AN" PLEASE ENSURE THE FCC ID ALIGNS WITH THE NUMBERS UNDER MOBILE. THE APX2500/APX4500 HAS GONE THROUGH A REDESIGN AND THE NEWER MODEL "BN" HAS A DIFFERENT FCC ID WHICH STARTS AT TABLE 9 AND FORWARD DVR: 7V083X05

(DQPMDVR7000P) FCC ID # LO6-DVRS700 Mobile APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (136-162MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 Max Power: DVR / Mobile APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (146-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 Max Power: DVR / Mobile Roof Mounted Antenna HAD40016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 5W / 60W HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 5W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (136-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (136-144 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (144-150.8 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4007A 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (150.8-162 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W APX2500/APX4500 VHF (162-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W APX2500/APX4500 VHF (132-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826

*HAD4022A 5/8 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 5W / 60W APX2500/APX4500 VHF (136-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826

*RAD4010ARB 1/2 wave,3dBd 5W / 60W Max Power: DVR / Mobile

*Antenna length trimmed to frequency Table 8B Approved 700 DVRS Configuration APX 2500 and APX 4500 (AN Model Only) DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 23 8F083X03 Rev 17 Freq Range: 806-869 MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A,1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) NOTE: IF YOUR MOBILE IS APX2500/APX4500 AND MODEL "AN" PLEASE ENSURE THE FCC ID ALIGNS WITH THE NUMBERS UNDER MOBILE. THE APX2500/APX4500 HAS GONE THROUGH A REDESIGN AND THE NEWER MODEL "BN" HAS A DIFFERENT FCC ID WHICH STARTS AT TABLE 9 AND FORWARD DVR: 7V083X06

(DQPMDVR8000P) FCC ID # LO6-DVRS800 Mobile APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (136-162MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 Max Power: DVR / Mobile APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (146-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 Max Power: DVR / Mobile APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (136-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 Max Power: DVR / Mobile APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (136-144 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 Max Power: DVR / Mobile Roof Mounted Antenna HAD40016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 60W HAD4017A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 60W HAD4021A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 60W HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd 10W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (144-150.8 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4007A 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W APX2500/ APX4500 VHF (150.8-162 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W APX2500/APX4500 VHF (162-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile 10W / 60W APX2500/APX4500 VHF (132-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826

*HAD4022A 5/8 wave, 3dBd Max Power: DVR / Mobile APX2500/APX4500 VHF (136-174 MHz) FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 10W / 60W

*RAD4010ARB 1/2 wave,3dBd 10W / 60W Max Power: DVR / Mobile

*Antenna length trimmed to frequency Table 8C Approved 800 DVRS Configuration APX 2500 and APX 4500 (AN Model Only) DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 24 8F083X03 Rev 17 DVR: 7V083X06

(DQPMDVR8000P) FCC ID: LO6-

DVRS800 APX6500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7130 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX6500 UHF

(380-470MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7129 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX6500 7/800MHz FCC ID:

AZ492FT7124 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile DVR: 7V083X05

(DQPMDVR7000P) FCC ID: LO6-

DVRS700 Mobile

*APX6500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7130 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile

*APX6500 UHF

(380-470MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7129 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile

*APX6500 7/800MHz FCC ID:

AZ492FT7124 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile Freq Range: 806-825, 851-870MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Roof Mounted Mobile Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, HAD4009A, HAD4016A, HAD4017A, HAD4021A, HAD4022A, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 5/8 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd RAD4010ARB, 1/2 wave, 3dBd 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 9A Approved 800 DVRS Configuration *APX6500/APX6500Li/APX5500/APX4500/APX2500/APX1500 (BN Model Only)

*All models noted are identical electrically. Only difference is software features Freq Range: 764-776, 794-806MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, HAD4016A, HAD4017A, HAD4021A, HAD4022A, RAD4010ARB, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 5/8 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd 1/2 wave, 3dBd 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W 5W / 60W HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W 5W / 48W HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W 5W / 42W Table 9B Approved 700 DVRS Configuration *APX6500/APX6500Li/APX5500/APX4500/APX2500/APX1500 (BN Model Only)

*All models noted are identical electrically. Only difference is software features DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 25 DVR: 7V083X07

(DQPMDVR4000P) FCC ID: LO6-

DVRSUHF Mobile

*APX6500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7130 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile

*APX6500 UHF

(380-470MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7129 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile

*APX6500 7/800MHz FCC ID:

AZ492FT7124 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile DVR: 7V083X03

(DQPMDVR5000P) FCC ID: LO6-

DVRSUHF Mobile

*APX6500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7130 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile

*APX6500 UHF

(380-470MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7129 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile

*APX6500 7/800MHz FCC ID:

AZ492FT7124 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile 8F083X03 Rev 17 Freq Range: 380-430MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, HAD4016A, HAD4017A, HAD4021A, HAD4022A, RAD4010ARB, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 5/8 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd 1/2 wave, 3dBd 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 9C Approved UHF1 DVRS Configuration *APX6500/APX6500Li/APX5500/APX4500/APX2500/APX1500 (BN Model Only)

*All models noted are identical electrically. Only difference is software features Freq Range: 450-470MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, HAD4016A, HAD4017A, HAD4021A, HAD4022A, RAD4010ARB, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 5/8 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd 1/2 wave, 3dBd 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 9D Approved UHF2 DVRS Configuration *APX6500/APX6500Li/APX5500/APX4500/APX2500/APX1500 (BN Model Only)

*All models noted are identical electrically. Only difference is software features DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 26 DVR: 7V083X04

(DQPMDVR6000P) FCC ID: LO6-

DVRSUHF Mobile

*APX6500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7130 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile

*APX6500 UHF

(380-470MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7129 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile

*APX6500 7/800MHz FCC ID:

AZ492FT7124 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile FCC ID: LO6-

DVRSVHF Mobile APX6500 VHF

(136-174MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7130 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX6500 UHF

(380-470MHz) FCC ID:

AZ492FT7129 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile APX6500 7/800MHz FCC ID:

AZ492FT7124 Max Power: DVR /

Mobile 8F083X03 Rev 17 Freq Range: 470-512MHz, Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAE4004A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, HAD4016A, HAD4017A, HAD4021A, HAD4022A, RAD4010ARB, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 5/8 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd 1/2 wave, 3dBd 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W 10W / 60W HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W 10W / 48W HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W 10W / 42W Table 9E Approved UHF3 DVRS Configuration *APX6500/APX6500Li/APX5500/APX4500/APX2500/APX1500 (BN Model Only)

*All models noted are identical electrically. Only difference is software features DVR: 7V083X01

(DQPMDVR3000P) Freq Range: 136-174MHz Trunk Mounted Antenna: HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd, HAD4009A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd Maximum conducted power delivered to antenna: DVR (W) / Mobile (W) Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna Roof Mounted Antenna HAD4006A, 1/4 wave, HAD4007A, 1/4 wave, HAD4008A, 1/4 wave, HAD4009A, HAD4016A, HAD4017A, HAD4021A, HAD4022A, RAD4010ARB, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 1/4 wave, 5/8 wave, 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 0dBd 3dBd 1/2 wave, 3dBd 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W HAE6010A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6011A, 5/8 wave, HAE6012A, 1/4 wave, HAE6013A, 1/2 wave, HAE6031A, 1/2 wave, HAE4003A, 1/4 wave, 5dBd 0dBd 2dBd 2dBd 0dBd HAE4011A, 1/2 wave, 3.5dBd HAE6015A, 1/2 wave, 2dBd HAE6016A, 1/4 wave, 0dBd RAE4014ARB, 5/8 wave, 5dBd 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W 6W / 120W HAF4013A, 1/4 wave, HAF4014A, 1/4 wave, HAF4016A, 1/4 wave, HAF4017A, 1/4 wave, 3dBd 3dBd 0dBd 3dBd 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W 6W / 42W Table 9F Approved VHF DVRS Configuration *APX6500/APX6500Li/APX5500/APX4500/APX2500/APX1500 (BN Model Only)

*All models noted are identical electrically. Only difference is software features DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 27 Antenna Installation Instructions IMPORTANT: To assure optimum performance and compliance with FCC/ISED RF Energy Exposure regulations, these antenna installation guidelines and instructions are limited to metal-body vehicles with appropriate ground planes and take into account the potential exposure of back seat passengers and bystanders outside the vehicle. 8F083X03 Rev 17 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle 1. External installation Check the requirements of the antenna supplier and install the vehicle antenna external to a metal body vehicle in accordance with those requirements. 2. Roof top For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety standards, mount the mobile radio antenna per Table B. 3. Trunk lid (DVR only) For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety standards, mount the mobile radio antenna per Table B. On some vehicles with clearly defined, flat trunk lids, the antennas of some radio models (see restrictions below) can also be mounted on the center area of the trunk lid. For vehicles without clearly defined, flat trunk lids (such as hatchback autos, sports utility vehicles, and pick-up trucks), mount the antenna in the center area of the roof. Before installing a DVR antenna on the trunk lid,

- Be sure that the distance from the antenna location on the trunk lid will be at least 85 cm (33 inches) from the rear seat head-rest to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations. Do not install the trunk antenna if the distance between the back seat passenger and the trunk mount antenna is less than 85cm.

- Ensure that the trunk lid is grounded by connecting grounding straps between the trunk lid and the vehicle chassis. 4. Mounting restrictions for certain radio models. NOTE: Do not cut antenna cables to ensure compliance with RF Energy Exposure regulations DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 28 5. Ensure that the antenna cable can be easily routed to the radio. Route the antenna cable as far away as possible from any vehicle electronic control units and associated wiring. 8F083X03 Rev 17 6. Check the antenna location for any electrical interference. NOTE: Any two metal pieces rubbing against each other (such as seat springs, shift levers, trunk and hood lids, exhaust pipes, etc.) in close proximity to the antenna can cause severe receiver interference. Fig 1 Multiple Antennas Separation for locations 1-10 Fig. 1 indicates the separation distances required for the various antennas used with XTL/APX mobile antennas used with the DVR antenna. Each "cross-hair" symbol represents a possible location (i.e. LOC) of an antenna. The recommendation is to locate them as close to the center of the roof and/or trunk as possible, without interference with a lightbar. This picture is not drawn to scale. For letters A, B, C, and D, Table A indicates the EXACT distance for separation of the LMR antennas. For letters E, F, G, and H, Table B indicates the maximum distance between the edge of the ground plane and the accessory antenna location. NOTE:

A minimum of 18 inch separation is required between lightbar and any roof mounted antennas, to prevent interference with the lightbar circuitry (see lightbar manufacturers installation information). DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 29 Characters Characters Distance Table A - Distance between Antenna 8F083X03 Rev 17 Distance 17.7 inches

(XTL and Non APX8500) 8 inches

(APX8500MP/APX8500HP) 17.7 inches

(XTL and Non APX8500)

(APX8500MP/APX8500HP) 8 inches 8 inches 8 inches A B C D E F G H 8 inches 8 inches 8 inches 8 inches Table B Antenna Locations for XTL/APX with DVR Antenna Location Mobile Products XTL5000/XTL2500 APX6500/APX7500

(AN Model Only) APX8500 MP/APX8500HP APX2500/APX4500

(AN Model Only) APX6500/APX6500Li APX5500/APX4500/APX2500/APX1500

(BN Model Only)

(Both Single and Dual Bands) Mobile LOC 2 LOC 1, LOC 3

(7/800 and All Band) LOC 1, LOC 3

(VHF and UHF) Loc 2 LOC 2 LOC 2 DVR LOC 5 LOC 5 LOC 5 LOC 5 LOC 5 QMA Connection (APX8500 MP/APX8500 HP Only) APX8500 is using a quick disconnect connection called QMA. This does not require any tightening. Ensure there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. Ensure that the collar of the antenna cable plug does not bind. Engage the QMA cable plug onto the jack, listening for a click to ensure proper engagement. Gently tug on the cable to ensure that it is engaged. To disengage, pull back on the cable plugs collar and pull the cable straight off the jack. DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 30 GPS/GLONASS/Wi-Fi/Antenna Placement (APX8500 MP/APX8500 HP Only) 8F083X03 Rev 17 Fig. 2 GPS/GLONASS and Wi-Fi Antenna Connector on the Back of the Mid Power Radio Mobile Radio / DVR Antenna separation To ensure interference-free performance when both the Mobile Radio and the DVR are active at the same time, the two antennas must be mounted in such way as to provide 30dB minimum antenna isolation. Fixed DVRS Site Antennas Mobile radio equipment is sometimes installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit. In such cases the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to assure optimal performance and make sure human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within the guidelines set forth in the above standards. The antennas must be mounted outside the building. Mount the antennas on a tower if at all possible. If the antennas are to be mounted on a building then it must be mounted on the roof. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. Temporary-Fixed Site Futurecom requires the P25 Transportable DVRS (TDVRS) operator to ensure FCC/ISED Requirements for Radio Frequency Exposure are met. It is the responsibility of the Licensee to ensure that the appropriate separation distances between the antennas and bystanders are established and followed to meet the FCC/ISED Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) Requirements in any particular Temporary-Fixed location. In situations where a site assessment is not practical, it is recommended that the antennas be located at least 9 feet from bystanders. This should ensure MPE compliance in any Temporary-Fixed application and is likely to be a much greater separation distance than is necessary in most cases. Failure to observe the MPE distance exclusion area around the antenna may expose persons within this area to RF energy above the FCC/ISED exposure limits for bystanders (general population). DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 31 Approved Antennas and Maximum output power (W) for combination DVR and APX mobiles for Temporary-Fixed Site 8F083X03 Rev 17 NOTE:

APX mobile RF conducted antenna power in the tables below denotes up to 50% Tx duty cycle. DVR RF conducted antenna power in the tables below denotes up to 100% Tx duty cycle. DVR Antenna Band VHF (136-174MHz) DDN9014 UHF1 (406-430MHz) DDN9015 UHF2 (450-470MHz) DDN9015 UHF3 (470-512MHz) DDN9015 DDN9016 700 (768-806MHz) 800 (806-869MHz) DDN9016 APX 8500 Antenna Band VHF (136-174MHz) DDN9014 UHF1 (406-470MHz) DDN9015 UHF2 (450-520MHz) DDN9015 700/800 (764-

870MHz) DDN9016 Power

(W) 6 10 10 10 5 10 Power

(W) 60 48 54 42 Max Power (W) for combination DVR and APX 8500 APX 8500 DVR/APX UHFR1 UHFR2 700/800MHz VHF UHFR1 UHFR2 UHFR3 700MHz 800MHz VHF 6/60 10/60 10/60 10/60 5/60 10/60 6/48 10/48 10/48 10/48 5/48 10/48 6/54 10/54 10/54 10/54 5/54 10/54 6/42 10/42 10/42 10/42 5/42 10/42 DVR DVRS-Product Safety and RF Exposure Booklet 32

 

 

APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX MOBILE O2 CONTROL HEAD APX 1500, APX 2500, APX 4500, APX 4500Li, APX 5500, APX 6500, APX 6500Li, APX 7500, APX 8500 USER GUIDE June 2019 2019 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved

*68012006035*

68012006035-EK English Contents Declaration of Conformity.............................................11 Important Safety Information........................................ 13 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada)................15 Software Version.......................................................... 16 Computer Software Copyrights.................................... 17 Documentation Copyrights........................................... 18 Disclaimer.....................................................................19 Read Me First...............................................................20 Notations Used in This Manual..........................20 Radio Maintenance............................................21 Radio Care..............................................21 Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio......................................23 Additional Performance Enhancement.............. 24 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data.....................24 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR)........ 24 CrossTalk Prevention............................. 24 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID)............ 24 SecureNet...............................................24 2 Over-the-Air Rekeying............................ 25 P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System

(DVRS)................................................... 25 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements...............................25 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You............................................................. 26 Preparing Your Radio for Use...................................... 27 Turning On the Radio ....................................... 27 Adjusting the Volume.........................................28 Validating Compatibility During Power Up.........28 Radio Controls..............................................................30 Control Head and Microphone...........................30 Programmable Features....................................31 One Touch Button...................................31 Assignable Radio Functions................... 32 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions..34 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions.........36 Menu Select Buttons...............................36 Advance Programmable Buttons............ 36 Home Button...........................................37 Dimmer Button........................................38 4-Way Navigation Button........................ 38 Data Feature Button............................... 38 Multi-Function Knob (MFK).....................38 Keypad.............................................................. 39 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode..40 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode..42 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode......44 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode.......................................................46 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................... 48 Status Indicators...........................................................49 Status Icons.......................................................49 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators.........52 TMS Status Icons................................... 52 TMS Menu Options.................................53 Call Type Icons..................................................54 LED Indicator.....................................................54 Multi-function Knob - Concentric Ring LED....... 55 Intelligent Lighting Indicators............................. 56 Alert Tones ....................................................... 57 General Radio Operation............................................. 64 Selecting a Zone................................................64 English Selecting a Radio Channel................................ 64 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call....... 65 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call.........................................65 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)................................66 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)..............67 Methods to Make a Radio Call.......................... 67 Making a Talkgroup Call ........................ 68 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only).... 68 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)....................................................... 69 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button............................................... 70 Monitor Feature................................................. 71 Monitoring a Channel..............................71 Monitoring Conventional Mode............... 71 Advanced Features...................................................... 73 Using ViQi..........................................................73 Advanced Call Features.................................... 78 Calling a Phone Not in the List............... 78 3 English 4 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)....................................................... 78 Receiving a Selective Call........... 78 Making a Selective Call................79 Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only)...................................... 80 Selecting a Talkgroup.................. 80 Sending a Status Call............................. 80 Making a Priority Dispatch Calls............. 81 Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only).... 82 Requesting a Reprogram

(Trunking Only)............................ 82 Classification of Regrouped Radios..........................................83 Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP)....... 83 Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel...........84 Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection...................................... 84 Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone..............................85 SmartConnect....................................................85 Contacts............................................................ 86 Making a Private Call from Contacts...... 86 Adding a New Contact Entry...................87 Deleting a Contact Entry.........................88 Adding a Contact to a Call List............... 89 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List.......................................................... 89 Editing an Entry Alias...................89 Editing as Entry ID....................... 90 Editing a Call Type.......................90 Scan Lists.......................................................... 91 Intelligent Priority Scan........................... 91 Viewing a Scan List................................ 92 Editing the Scan List............................... 92 Changing the Scan List Status............... 93 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status......................................................93 Scan.................................................................. 94 Turning Scan On or Off...........................94 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only)....................................... 95 Transmitting While the Scan is On......... 95 Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan.. 95 Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan.............................................95 Deleting a Nuisance Channel................. 96 Restoring a Nuisance Channel............... 96 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On....................................................... 96 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List...........97 Using the Hang Up Box (HUB)............... 97 Call Alert Paging................................................97 Receiving a Call Alert Page.................... 98 Sending a Call Alert Page.......................98 Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert...................................................... 100 Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) .......................................... 100 Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission...100 Emergency Operation......................................101 Exiting Emergency................................102 English Exiting Emergency as Supervisor

(Trunking Only)..................................... 103 Sending an Emergency Alarm.............. 104 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only)..................................................... 104 Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only).............................. 105 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call.................................... 106 Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic.......................................... 106 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm...... 107 Special Considerations for Emergencies.........................................108 Impact Detection...................................108 Detecting Impact........................ 109 Post-Alert Timer......................... 109 Triggering Emergency................109 Exiting Impact Detected Condition....................................110 Re-Initiating Impact Detection Sequence...................................110 Automatic Registration Service (ARS).............110 5 English 6 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode.. 110 User Login Feature............................... 112 Logging In as a User..................112 Logging Out............................... 114 Text Messaging Service (TMS)....................... 114 Accessing the Messaging Features......115 Composing and Sending a New Text Message............................................... 115 Sending a Quick Text Message............117 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message............................... 118 Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message............................ 118 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message......................... 119 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message............................ 119 Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message......................... 119 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message.................................... 120 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message.................................... 120 Receiving a Text Message.........121 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox.................................... 121 Replying to a Received Text Message.................................... 122 Accessing the Drafts Folder.......123 Sent Text Messages.................. 123 Deleting Text Messages............ 125 Secure Operations...........................................125 Enabling Secure Transmission............. 125 Accessing the Secure Feature..............126 Selecting Secure Transmissions.......... 126 Managing Encryption............................ 126 Loading Encryption Keys........... 126 Multikey Feature........................ 127 Selecting an Encryption Key...... 127 Selecting a Keyset..................... 128 Erasing Encryption Keys............129 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey.........................................129 MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying Page (Conventional Only)..........130 Infinite UKEK Retention............. 130 Hear Clear..................................130 Radio Lock.......................................................131 Changing Your Password..................... 131 Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password.............................................. 132 Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature (Secure Radios Only).............. 132 Radio Stun and Kill.......................................... 133 Radio Stun............................................ 133 Using Radio Stun....................... 133 Radio Kill...............................................134 Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio..........................................134 Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio................................. 135 Radio Inhibit.....................................................135 Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System...............................................135 English GPS Operation..................................... 136 GPS Performance Enhancement......... 137 The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)..................................................... 137 Location Format....................................138 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature................................................. 138 Selecting Location Format.................... 139 Turning Off GPS................................... 139 Saving a Waypoint................................140 Viewing a Saved Waypoint................... 141 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint............. 141 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint. 142 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint....... 143 Deleting All Saved Waypoints...............144 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint........................ 144 Location Feature in Emergency Mode..145 Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only)................................ 145 Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System)........ 146 Entering the Geofence Area................. 147 7 English 8 Mission Critical Geofence..................... 148 Entering Mission Critical Geofence.......148 Exiting Mission Critical Geofence......... 149 Trunking System Controls............................... 149 Operating in Failsoft System.................149 Out-of-Range Radio..............................150 SmartZone............................................ 150 Site Trunking Feature........................... 150 Locking and Unlocking a Site............... 150 Site Display and Search Button............ 151 Viewing the Current Site............ 151 Changing the Current Site......... 151 Trunked Announcement....................... 152 Initiating an Announcement....... 152 Ignition Switch Options.................................... 152 Blank.....................................................152 Tx Inhibit............................................... 153 PTT Tx Inhibit....................................... 153 Required............................................... 153 Soft Power Off...................................... 153 Ignition Only Power Up......................... 153 Using Emergency Power Up.................154 Auto Power Off Timer........................... 154 Voice Announcement ..................................... 155 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25)..................155 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site

..............................................................156 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry....................................157 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites....158 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites...................................... 159 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site........................................................159 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry.............................160 Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites...161 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites...................................... 161 Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels

.........................................................................162 Low Voltage Threshold Warning..................... 163 Next Button......................................................164 Wi-Fi................................................................ 164 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off........................ 165 Selecting WiFi Network.........................165 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio............................... 166 Utilities............................................................. 166 Viewing Recent Calls............................166 Selecting the Power Level.................... 167 Selecting a Radio Profile...................... 168 Controlling the Display Backlight.......... 169 Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off....169 Turning Voice Mute On or Off...............169 Using the Time-Out Timer.................... 170 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features................................................170 Analog Options.......................... 171 Digital Options............................171 Using the PL Defeat Feature................ 171 Digital PTT ID Support..........................172 Smart PTT (Conventional Only)............172 Transmit Inhibit..................................... 173 Enabling Transmit Inhibition.......173 Disabling Transmit Inhibition......174 English Instant Recall........................................ 174 Saving and Playback Calls........ 175 General Radio Information....................176 Accessing the Radio Information

................................................... 177 Viewing the IP Information......... 178 Viewing the Control Assignments.............................. 178 External Alarms (Horn and Lights)........179 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights......................................... 179 Using Permanent Horn and Lights......................................... 179 Changing the Selected Alarms.. 180 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On............................180 Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms..........................180 Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms........................................181 Front Panel Programming.....................182 Entering the Front Panel Programming Mode................... 182 9 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:................................................. 199 VII. GOVERNING LAW:.................................. 200 VIII. For Australia Only.................................... 200 SERVICE.........................................................201 English Editing FPP Mode Parameters.. 183 Accessories................................................................ 184 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range.... 185 Special Channel Assignments.........................185 Emergency Channel............................. 185 Non-Commercial Call Channel............. 185 Operating Frequency Requirements............... 186 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies.....................188 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources...................................................188 Glossary..................................................................... 189 Limited Warranty........................................................ 196 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.................... 196 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:........................................... 196 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:........................... 197 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:................................198 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.....198 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:...........................................................198 10 Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the following FCC logo. Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) English Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that APX MobileAPX NEXT conforms to FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 11 English NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 12 Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way RadiosRF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios CAUTION:

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

English http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum

(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter is approved by Industry Canada to operate with a Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. 13 English NOTICE:

Setting up the radio as an RF Modem takes complete control of the radio. In this mode, the radio no longer responds to button and PTT presses nor will it unmute to voice activity. This mode is designed to receive and pass specifically formatted over the air data to a tethered computer with RF modem enabled applications. This mode can only be exit by reprogramming the radio with Customer Programming Software (CPS) to not operate in RF modem mode and cycling power. 14 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada's license-exempt RSS's per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. English 15 English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R19.00.00 R01.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 177 to determine the software version of your radio. See Accessing the Radio Information to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the supported features. 16 Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. English 17 English Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 18 Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola Solutions reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola Solutions does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. English 19 English Read Me First This User Guide covers the basic operation of the radio. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. If you attempt to use features which are mutually exclusive, one or more of the following occurs:

The feature control or icon is grayed out. A negative tone sounds. The radio displays Feature not allowed. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of Warning, Caution, and Notice. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. WARNING:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. 20 CAUTION:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. NOTICE:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Home button or Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Phone Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the display of the radio. This means Press the right side of the 4-Way Navigation Button. Radio Maintenance This chapter covers the radio and battery care. Radio Care Proper radio usage and care assures efficient operation and long life for the product. The following are recommendations and warnings when using the radio. English CAUTION:

Your radio casting has a vent port that allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Never poke this vent with any objects, such as needles, tweezers, or screwdrivers.This could create leak paths into the radio and the radio submergibility will be lost. Your radio is designed to be submerged to a maximum depth of 6 feet, with a maximum submersion time of 2 hours. Exceeding either maximum limit may result in damage to the radio. Elastomer seals used in portable radios can age with time and environmental exposure. Therefore, Motorola Solutions recommends that radios be checked annually as a preventive measure in order to assure the waterseal integrity of the radio. Motorola Solutions details the disassembly, test, and reassembly procedures along with necessary test equipment in the Service Manual. If the radio battery contact is exposed to water without the battery attached, dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio. Turn the radio over with the battery 21 English contact facing down and shake the radio so any trapped water can escape. The battery contacts must be dry before attaching a battery or a short circuit of the contacts could occur. Avoid subjecting the radio to an excess of liquids. Accessory connector cover must be attached to the radio side accessory connector if an accessory is not attached to the radio. If the radio is submerged or exposed to a high force water spray, such as from a hose, remove the side accessory connector or accessory connector cover immediately and check to make sure no water was forced into the accessory connector/radio interface. Rinse and dry the area and re-attach the accessory or accessory connector cover if leakage occurs. If the radio is exposed to a corrosive environment, such as salt water or corrosive gases or liquids, rinse and clean the radio immediately to prevent damage to radio materials, especially plated surfaces. Refer to Cleaning Your Radio for detailed instructions. Remove the battery and the antenna before cleaning. 22 If the radio has been submerged in water, shake the radio well so that any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port can be removed. Otherwise, the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio. Do not disassemble the radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Any radio maintenance should be performed only by a qualified radio technician. Underwriter Laboratory (UL) certified radios should only be opened and serviced by UL approved service centers. Opening or repairing at unauthorized locations will invalidate the radios hazardous location rating. Do not pound, drop, or throw the radio unnecessarily. The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems. CAUTION:

The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. English Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio CAUTION:

Do not use solvents to clean your radio. Spirits may permanently damage the radio housing. Do not submerge the radio in detergent solution. 1 Combine one teaspoon of mild diswashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls or crevices. 3 Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. 23 English Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality, and efficiency of the radios. ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. Add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation to improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication such as failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. 24 CrossTalk Prevention This feature prevents crosstalk scenarios from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the internal SSI clock rate of the radio. This subsequently reduces the possibility of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV&D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. Over-the-Air Rekeying The Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram encryption keys in the radio after a rekey request. Single-system OTAR Single-system OTAR is supported by a single Key Management Facility (KMF). If the radio moves from one secure system to another, it must be reprogrammed to the new system. Multi-system OTAR Multi-system OTAR is supported by multiple KMFs. After an initial programming, the radio is able to seamlessly move to a secure system associated to a newly selected channel. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. English P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System

(DVRS) Motorola Solutions offers an MSI Certified APX compatible, third Party, P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS) that provides low-cost portable radio coverage in areas where only mobile radio coverage is available and portable radio coverage is either intermittent or non-existent. NOTICE:

Portable subscriber units enabled in the system for Radio Authentication shall be able to authenticate regardless of whether they are communicating directly on the system or through a DVRS. Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements A few enhancements have been made to the Conventional Talkgroup at the system. These enhancements improve the Scan feature operation significantly when multiple agencies are using a single conventional radio frequency channel. These enhancements allow users to use Selective Squelch to operate on only the subset of talkgroups that are relevant to the users rather than all talkgroups on the channel. These Scan improvements have been made to 25 English eliminate the audio holes that were present and to turn on the busy LED when activity is present on the channel. Mixed Vote Scan and Standard Conventional Scan configurations are supported. Priority Operation is also supported. Up to 30 different talkgroups can be supported using conventional channels. A maximum of four talkgroups can be supported when Vote Scan channels are being used. Smart PTT is supported with this enhancement as Smart PTT prevents users from transmitting while other users are on the channel. NOTICE:

User Selectable Talkgroups are not compatible with this Conventional Talkgroup Enhancement. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator for the correct radio settings, if the radio is to be operated in 26 extreme temperatures (less than -30 C or more than +60 C). NOTICE:

To assure radio longevity, front display, LTE, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and GPS are not available when radio internal temperature is below -20 C. The top display will indicate Cold Temp Mode in this temperature. LMR radio communication will continue to operate until the temperature reaches -30 C. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

NOTICE:

Specifications may vary for different radio models. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Preparing Your Radio for Use This section provides simple instructions to prepare your radio for use. Turning On the Radio 1 Press the Power Button radio. briefly to power on the After a short time, the red, yellow, and green LEDs light up. The display then shows the following:

Current zone and channel text Codeplug Alias Menu items on the home screen English Codeplug Alias feature is enabled through Customer Programming Software (CPS) configuration to display the codeplug alias as a temporary text during power on. The backlight turns on to the last selected dim level. NOTICE:

The Power Button is ignored if it is pressed before the LED lights up. If Fail ##/## appears on the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If Error ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Radio Maintenance on page 21 for more information. If Ch mismatch appears, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. 27 AB English 2 To turn off the radio, press the Power button after the LEDs light up. NOTICE:

The duration that user must press and hold the Power button to turn off the radio is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Adjusting the Volume 1 To increase the volume, rotate the Multi-Function Knob clockwise. 28 2 To decrease the volume, rotate this knob counterclockwise. The display shows volume bars and volume level when you change the volume. Validating Compatibility During Power Up The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power up. During validation, the display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. Press the Power On/Off Button to reset when the display shows Update done Please reset upon completion, or when the display shows Update failed Please reset when it fails to update. If the software updates are complete, the radio runs the usual power up operation. If the updates are incomplete, the radio runs the Maintenance Mode and the display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device; promptly followed by other maintenance statuses again. A NOTICE:

If SW incomplete appears, use Flashport Recovery Tool to update the control heads before you power on the radio again. English 29 English Radio Controls This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control the radio. Control Head and Microphone 1 These radio controls/buttons are programmable. 30 NOTICE:

The microphone is not part of a radio. It is an optional accessory. 1 2 3 4 5 Accessory Port (Microphone) Menu Select Buttons1 Dimmer Button Home Button Multi-Function Knob (MFK)1 1681011141213972435151618192017 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Accy 2Dot Button1 Accy 1Dot Button1 Accy No-Dot Button (Purple)1 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button Bluetooth Indicator2 Emergency Button1 Up & Down Buttons1 Power Button LED Indicators Data Feature Button1 Home Button (Microphone) Keypad Okay/Select Button (

Cancel Button (X) Navigation Button (Microphone)

) English Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to controls that are preprogrammed means that a qualified radio technician must use the radio programming software to assign a feature to a control. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press. Some functions can also be programmed to the radio switches. One Touch Button Each of the four Menu Select buttons, the Emergency button and the three Accy buttons on the microphone are programmable buttons which can be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician to a default function which is activated upon a short press. 2 The hardware of your radio is Bluetooth ready. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. 31 English Assignable Radio Functions Auxiliary Switches back and forth between two radios that are attached to the same control head. Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call.Allows you to answer a private call or phone call. Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. Delete Deletes digit, or deletes a nuisance channel in Scan. Digital Vehicle Repeater System Toggles between the Digital Vehicle Repeater System

(VRS) mode. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-

Two channel. 32 Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Ext PA On/Off Toggles the audio routing between the connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the internal public address (PA) system of the radio. Intercom Enables users of multiple control heads to talk to each other using the control heads in a multi-control head setup. Internet Protocol Address Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address, device name, and status of the radio. Location Determines the current location (latitude, longitude, time, and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location or turns the GPS functionality on or off for all locations. Message Enters the current message list. Monitor (Conventional Only) Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until the function is disabled. Multiple Private Line (Conventional Only) Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel from the scan list. One Touch 14 Launches a specific feature with. You can set up as many as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Private Call (Trunking Only) Allows a call from one individual radio to another. Private Line Defeat (Conventional Only) Overrides any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that is preprogrammed to a channel. Priority Dispatch Allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. Recent Calls Allows easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. English Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher that a new encryption key is needed. Repeater Access Button (RAB) (Conventional Only) Allows you to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that a new dynamic regrouping assignment is needed. Request-To-Talk (Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want to send a voice call. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Scan List Programming Selects the scan list for editing (by pressing and holding the Scan button). Secure/Clear Toggles secure transmission on or off. Selective Call (Conventional Only) Calls an assigned radio. Siren Turns different Siren Tones on or off. 33 English Site Display/Search (Trunking Only) Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for Automatic Multiple Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation. Site Lock/Unlock (Trunking Only) Locks onto a specific site. Status (ASTRO 25 Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct (Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater or communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup (Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Automatically registers the user to the server. 34 Virtual Partner Enables the Virtual Partner feature and allows you to perform queries using ViQi. Zone Down Toggles downward through the zones in the radio. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. Zone Up Toggles upward through the zones in the radio. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Air Horn Toggles the external air horn alert tone on and off. All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones on and off. Backlight Toggles the display backlight on and off. Dim Changes the display brightness. External Radio Toggles the external radio on and off. Front/Rear Toggles between one of the two control heads. HiLo Toggles the HiLo Airhorn tones on and off. Horns/Lights Toggles the horns and lights feature on and off. Keypad Lock Toggles the keypad lock on and off. Keypad Mute Toggles the keypad tones on and off. Low Power Toggles the transmit power level between high and low. Manual Toggles the manual tone on and off. Public Address On/Off Toggles the internal public address (PA) system of the radio on and off. Siren Toggles the external siren alert tone on and off. English Squelch Toggles the squelch level between normal open and tight. TX Power Level Toggles the transmit power level between high and low. Voice Announcement Audibly indicates the current feature mode, zone, or channel that you have been assigned to. Voice Mute Toggles the voice transmission between mute and unmute. Volume Set Tone Sets the volume set tone. Wail Toggles the external wail alert tone on and off. Yelp Toggles the external yelp alert tone on and off. 35 English Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following methods. A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Select Button (

). Menu Select Buttons NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Use the Menu Select button to access the menu entry of your radio feature. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a zone may to be the same. Press the Menu Select button (

) directly below Zone. 36 Advance Programmable Buttons This feature is to help you to shorten the process of applying certain common features. English C D E F Menu Select Buttons3 Accy No-Dot Button (Purple)3 Accy 1-Dot Button3 Accy 2-Dot Button3

(Quick Access) One Touch Button Enters a menu with a short press on the preprogrammed One Touch button. Features assigned to these buttons are Call, Call Alert, Phone, Repeater Access, MDC RTT Button Access, Status, and Message. button returns you to the Home (default) Home Button Pressing the screen. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. button is also used to save A B Emergency Button3 Up & Down Buttons 3 These programmable buttons support the One Touch Button feature. 37 ABCDEF English NOTICE:

Some features do not require you to press to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. The button also can revert to home channel from any other zone and mode in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Dimmer Button Use this button to adjust the brightness of the display. Long press to toggle between day and night mode. 4-Way Navigation Button Use the 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll up, down, left, or right with one of the following methods. Press and release one of the buttons to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the buttons to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). 38 Data Feature Button Use Data Feature button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. Multi-Function Knob (MFK) Mode Change Press the MFK once and turn clockwise to scroll the channel list. Volume Change Turn the MFK clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the volume level of the speaker. The volume level can be adjusted in 16 steps or 32 steps. A fast turn of the MFK adjusts the volume level in 16 steps with large increments in volume level. A slow turn of the MFK adjusts the volume level in 32 steps with small increments in volume level. The display shows the volume level and bars to indicate the current level. The level of last selected volume when your radio powers down remains the same when the radio powers up. The main display shows the icon of the secondary feature.The main display does not show the icon of primary feature. Your radio by default is set to use the primary feature. Short press the MFK to toggle it to work on either the secondary or primary feature. The concentric ring LED when the knob is set to secondary feature. The secondary feature has an inactivity timer. This timer starts when the secondary feature is idle. The radio returns to primary feature when the timer expires. If the MFK is set to operate only one feature, it is recommended that it be set to Volume Change. Consult your dealer or system administrator for the best options available for MFK. on the MFK will blink in green English Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the keypad microphone to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The following tables show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. 39 A English Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 1 A D G J

. B E H K M N P Q

, C F I L O R

?

!

;

@ _ S Key 40 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 T U W X V Y Z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 41 English Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 1 a d g j

. b e h k m n p q

, c f i l o r

?

!

;

@ _ s Key 42 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 t w u x v y z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 43 English Keypad Characters Numeric Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8

.

,

?

!

;

@ _ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Key 44 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 8 9 0 Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 45 English Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 A D B E C F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Key 46 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 Not applicable Not applicable English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 47 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Methods to Make a Radio Call on page 67 for more information. on the side of the microphone serves The PTT button two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. 48 A Status Indicators This section explains the status indicators of the radio. Status Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the display of the radio. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Call Received Radio has received an Individual Call. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the received signal strength for the current site (trunking only) The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the sig-

nal. English Direct On Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored

(during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or se-

lected conventional channel is activated. Off The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or se-

lected conventional channel is deactivat-

ed. or Power Level 49 English 50 L H Radio is set at Low power. Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot Radio detects activity on channel desig-

nated as Priority-One. Steady dot Radio detects activity on channel desig-

nated as Priority-Two. Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On Secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On AES secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. GPS Signal On Feature is enabled and signal is availa-

ble. Off Feature is disabled. Blinking Feature is enabled, but no signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On User is currently associated with the ra-

dio. Off User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Inverted User successfully login to the secured IP Packet Data. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. English Start Case Indicates that the first character of the text entry is capitalized. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Lowercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Mixedcase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in mixed case and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. 51 English Uppercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. MFK is in Mode Change feature Turn the MFK to change the channel/

zone. MFK is in Volume Change feature Turn the MFK to turn the volume up or down. The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed represents the signal strength of the Wi-Fi signal. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators Status icons and menu options shown here help you to work more efficiently with TMS feature. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 114 for more information. 52 TMS Status Icons The following icons appear on the radio display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of six messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply English User is composing a message with a pri-

ority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. TMS Menu Options The following menu options appear on the radio display when you send and receive text messages. Menu Option Back Save New Impt RqRp Del Description/Function Brings you back to the previous screen. Saves the messages you have edited to the Draft folder. Creates a new message. Toggles the Priority Status icon on or off for an outgoing message. Toggles Request Reply icon on or off for an outgoing message. Deletes a message or text. 53 Description/Function Radio number. English Menu Option Edit Exit No Optn Rply Sel Send Yes Edits a draft message or key in a target ad-

dress. Exits to the Home screen. Cancel the delete all messages options. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects a predefined message or address. Sends the message. Deletes all the messages in the current folder. Call Type Icons The following icons appear on the radio main display, when you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID. 54 Radio number added to a Call List. Mobile number. Mobile number added to a Call List. Landline phone number. Landline phone number added to a Call List. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Red LED A B Yellow LED C Green LED Solid red Radio is transmitting. Blinking red Double blinking red Radio is in Emergency Mode. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow (Conventional Only) Channel is busy. English Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Multi-function Knob - Concentric Ring LED The concentric ring LED using the secondary feature. See Multi-Function Knob

(MFK) on page 38 to understand the functionality of MFK. If Intelligent Lighting is activated, the concentric ring LED does not blink green when the MFK is in the secondary mode.The LED turns into solid color of orange, red or green depending on the status of Intelligent Lighting. See blinks green when the MFK is 55 ABC English Intelligent Lighting Indicators on page 56 for different status of Intelligent Lighting. Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporarily changes the display backlight color and the alert text background color of the radio to help signal that a radio event has occurred. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Orange Notification When Emergency Alerts Red Critical Alerts 56 The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio battery is low. The radio is out of range. The radio enters Failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. A Backlight and Bar Color Notification When English Green Call Alerts The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio lost GPS signal or GPS function fails. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. The radio enters Geofence. Alert Tones Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of the condition of your radio. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Short, Low-

Pitched Tone Tone Name Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Heard When radio fails its power-up self test. When an unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. 57 English You Hear Long, Low-

Pitched Tone A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Short, Medi-

um-Pitched Tone 58 Tone Name Individual Call Warning Tone Time-Out Timer Timed Out Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Lack of Voice PTT Time out Out of Range Invalid Mode Busy Heard When radio is in an individual call for greater than six seconds without any activity. After time out.

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed. When the radio ends your call after it detected there are lack of voice for five seconds after the PTT is pressed and hold. Your ra-

dio ends the call to enable your radio to receive calls from other radio users.

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the sys-

tem. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. When system is busy. Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received When a correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. When activity on a priority channel is received. English You Hear Long, Medi-

um-Pitched Tone A Group of Medium-Pitch-

ed Tones Short, High-

Pitched Tone

(Chirp) Two High-

Pitched Tones Tone Name Emergency Alarm/Call En-

try Central Echo Volume Set Emergency Exit Failsoft Automatic Call Back Keyfail Console Acknowledge Received Individual Call Call Alert Sent Site Trunking Low-Battery Chirp Heard When entering the emergency state. When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. When exiting the emergency state. When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is re-

ceived. When Call Alert or Private Call is received. When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. When battery is below preset threshold value. GPS Fails When the GPS fails or loses signal. 59 Tone Name Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Talk Permit New Message Priority Status Heard When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.

(When PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received.

(When PTT button is pressed) is verifying with the system for ac-

cepting its transmissions. When a new message is received. When a priority message is received. Tone Name Private Conversation When When a Private Call is received. Call Alert When a Call Alert page is received. English You Hear Ringing Gurgle Unique, Low-

Pitched Chirp Unique, High-

Pitched Chirp You Hear Two high-

pitched tones Four high-

pitched tones every five sec-

onds 60 You Hear Single, high-

pitched tone Four high-

pitched tones Sound similar to a telephone busy signal A series of two short, high-pitched tones A series of low-pitched tones followed by a series of high-pitched tones A series of high-pitched tones followed English Tone Name Central Acknowledge Mobile Unit Acknowledge System Busy Automatic Call Back Talk Permit (Optional) Scan Alert On When When a Call Alert, emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/

message transmission is received by the systems central control-

ler. When a Call Alert page is received by the intended unit, or the emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/message trans-

mission is acknowledged by the intended dispatcher. When the PTT button is pressed, indicates transmission fail be-

cause all system radio channels are in use. Release the PTT but-

ton and wait for call back. When a channel is now available for your previously requested transmission. When the PTT button is pressed, indicates the system is accepting your transmission. When Scan feature is activated through the preprogrammed but-

ton. Scan Alert Off When Scan feature is deactivated through the preprogrammed button. 61 English You Hear by a series of low-pitched tones Continuous, low-pitched tone Single, high-

pitched tone every nine seconds 62 Tone Name When Talk-Prohibit Smart PTT Inhibit Out-of-Range Illegal Mode Auto Power Off Failsoft

(When the PTT button is pressed) the system is out of service.

(When the PTT button is pressed) the channel is busy with the Smart PTT feature enabled.

(When the PTT button is pressed) indicates the radio is not in the range of the trunked radio system. Illegal Mode When you have entered When you have entered a mode where normal system traffic will be missed, or you are attempting something which is not permit-

ted. Examples include: forgetting to exit the telephone interconnect mode after a call ends (fleet and subfleet calls cannot be re-

ceived), attempting to transmit on a receive-only conventional mode, attempting to select a dynamic mode where no dynamic ID assignment has been made. Powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprog-

rammed length of time. When a trunked system central controller failure in an unmuted re-

ceive condition. The radio reverts from trunked operation to a sys-

tem similar to conventional radio repeater operation. Other system users can be heard sharing the channel. English You Hear Brief low-

pitched tone Single, short, high-pitched tone Single, low-

pitched tone Tone Name Time-Out Timer Warning or Menu Inactive Exit Valid Key Invalid Key When When your present transmission will soon be disabled. When you pressed a valid key, or you entered a feature configura-

tion state, or you are receiving or transmitting in the clear mode on secure models (with TX Clear Alert Tones enabled). When you tried to make an invalid key press, or that an emergen-

cy alarm, reprogram request, or status/message was not acknowl-

edged. 63 English General Radio Operation This chapter explains the general radio operations of your radio. Selecting a Zone Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. A zone is a group of channels. Do one of the following to select a radio channel. You can use these options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a zone using the MFK :

a. Rotate the MFK until the display shows the desired zone. Select a zone using the radio menu Zone:

or to Zone and press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. or to the required zone, or use the keypad to enter the zone number. a. b. 64 c. Press or the PTT button to confirm the selected zone number. d. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs. Do one of the following to select a radio channel. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a channel using the MFK:

a. If channel is set as the primary mode, turn the MFK until the display shows the desired channel. If channel is not set as the primary mode, press the MFK once and repeat this step. b. Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed channel. Select a channel using the radio menu Chan :

a. or to Chan . b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan . or to the required channel. c. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the selected channel. e. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. English B Yellow LED C Green LED The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. A Red LED Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio displays the following depending on the system your radio is configured to:

65 ABC English For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. See also Making a Talkgroup Call on page 68 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from one individual radio to another. The one-to-one call between the two radios are not heard by the others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio 66 automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. NOTICE:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), when there is no response from the receiving radio, the calling radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone after the timer expires. When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the caller alias or ID. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to hang up and return to the Home screen. NOTICE:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Resp, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Resp, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See also Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 68 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. NOTICE:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), if there is no response to the call after the timer expires, your radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone. English When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear a telephone-

type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green.The display shows Phone call and the call received icon blinks. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to hang up and return to the Home screen. See also Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 69 for details on making a Telephone Call. Methods to Make a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone menu. The MFK . A preprogrammed One Touch button. The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 86). 67 English NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. Making a Talkgroup Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last-

selected talkgroup. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . Use the MFK to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 98 for more information. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 4. 68 or to Call , and press the Menu Select button directly below Call . The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. English 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. A telephone-type ringing sounds if the receiving unit is in service. The display shows Calling...

<Number> or Calling... <Alias>. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 4. 69 English or to Phon, and press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 57 for more information if your call is not answered. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required phone number. Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 3 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radio coverage area by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. or to Dir and press the Menu Select button directly below Dir. 5 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 70 The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. English The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Monitor Feature The monitor feature is used to make sure that a channel is clear before transmitting. The lack of static on a digital channel when the users switch from analog to digital radios is not an indication that the radio is malfunctioning. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. d. If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. Monitoring a Channel in Trunked Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. b. Press the PTT button. c. If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if you hear no tone and the indicator lights steadily, then proceed with your message. d. Release the PTT button to receive transmission. If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows Out of range. Monitoring a Channel Monitoring a Channel in Conventional Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. b. Listen for activity on that channel. c. Adjust the volume by rotating the MFK if necessary. Monitoring Conventional Mode This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus, you can to listen to another user active on the 71 English channel. This way, you may be prevented from taking over someone elses conversation. 1 To activate monitoring, perform one of the following actions:

At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, or to Mon and press the Menu Select button directly below Mon momentarily. Take the control head off the hook. The display shows Monitor On. You hear all channel traffic. 2 Press the Menu Select button again to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows Monitor off. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. 72 Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Contacts Dialer Messages Utilities on page 166 Using ViQi ViQi is an intelligent virtual partner that provides critical information through common query searches and dialog interaction. With ViQi, you are able to perform tasks on your radio by using voice commands.ViQi is available on APX 8500, APX 6500, and APX 5500 radio models using the handheld control head or mobile keypad microphones with programmable buttons. English ViQi retrieves important information from the database without the need to access another device, vehicle, or wait for the dispatcher to run a query. 1 To use ViQi, press and hold the assigned programmable button. 2 After you hear a tone, speak the command clearly, then release the button. If To access ViQi, To identify your cur-

rent zone and chan-

nel, Then say "Look up informa-

tion..."

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my zone and channel"

"Current zone and channel"

"Zone and channel"

To change to a new zone and channel, say one of the follow-

ing commands:

73 English If Then If Then

"Zone <Zone Name>, channel

<Channel Name>"

"Change zone to

<Zone Name>, channel to

<Channel Name>"

"Switch zone to

<Zone Name>, channel to

<Channel Name>"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my zone"

"Current zone"

"Zone"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

To identify your cur-

rent channel, To change to a new channel, To identify your cur-

rent zone, To change to a new zone, 74

"Zone <Zone Name>"

"Change zone to

<Zone Name>"

"Switch zone to

<Zone Name>"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my chan-

nel"

"Current channel"

"Channel"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Channel

<Channel Name>"

"Change channel to

<Channel Name>"

If Then If

"Switch channel to

<Channel Name>"

To change to your home channel, To identify your cur-

rent volume level, To change your vol-

ume level, say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Home channel"

"Change to home channel"

"Switch to home channel"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my vol-

ume"

"Current volume"

"Volume"

say "Volume <Volume Level>". The follow-

ing terms represent the volume values:

To change to a new profile, English Then Low 10%

Medium 50%

High 100%

110 10%100%

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"<Profile Name>

profile"

"Change to

<Profile Name>

profile"

"Switch to

<Profile Name>

profile"

To start or stop scanning, say one of the follow-

ing commands:

75 English If To identify your bat-

tery level, To cancel your previ-

ous command, 76 say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my battery level"

"Battery level"

"Battery"

say "Cancel". NOTICE:

Cancel com-

mand works within a five-

second win-

dow after the last com-

mand. Then

"Start scan"

"Stop scan"

"Start scanning"

"Stop scanning"

If To perform a license plate query, Then say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Run a <State>

plate

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Check a <State>

plate"

To perform a drivers license query, NOTICE:

You can use variations such as

<Plate>

and <Tag>. say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"<State> license

<Alphanumeric String>"

If Then If Then English

"Run a <State>

driver's license

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Check the state of

<State> driver's li-

cense

<Alphanumeric String>"

NOTICE:

You can use variations such as

<Driver's License>,

<DL>, and

<License>. say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Check Vehicle Identification Num-

To perform a Vehicle Identification Num-

ber query, ber

<Alphanumeric String>"

"VIN check

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Run a VIN"

NOTICE:

You can use varia-

tions such as

<Vehicle Identification Number>, <VIN>, and <Vehicle Number>. 77 English Advanced Call Features This chapter explains the operations of the call features available in your radio. Calling a Phone Not in the List 1 or to Phon. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. 3 Enter the desired phone number on the keypad. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press the button or the PTT button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to exit. or Menu Select button directly below Phon 78 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio with privacy. Receiving a Selective Call When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blink and the display alternates between Call received and the home display. The speaker unmutes. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. NOTICE:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Call, your conversation is heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Call, you are not responding privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 79. English The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Making a Selective Call Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature by using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 3. or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. If you do not press remains in Selective Call state with the other unit. button to hang up, your radio 79 English You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls. Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. NOTICE:

Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 125 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup 1 or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last Talkgroup that was selected and stored. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

80 or to Pset for the preset preprogrammed Talkgroup. or to the required Talkgroup. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the currently selected Talkgroup and return to the Home screen. If the encryption key associated to the new Talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Key fail. If the encryption key that is associated to the new Talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Illegal key. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. Sending a Status Call This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-

pitched tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

4 Press to return to the Home screen. English Press the preprogrammed Status button. or to Sts and press the Menu Select button directly below Sts. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required status. Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. Making a Priority Dispatch Calls If a talkgroup is congested, the Priority Dispatch feature allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. This talkgroup is called the Priority Talkgroup. Each trunking talkgroup can have its own assigned Priority Talkgroup.Priority Dispatch is not available during Emergency operations. Scan feature is suspended when Priority Dispatch is initiated. Dispatch console that supports this feature must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. 81 English 1 Press the preprogrammed Priority Dispatch button. A tone sounds and the radio enters Priority Dispatch mode. The radio exits this mode when the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires. 2 Before the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires, press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The display shows the Priority Talkgroup alias. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The radio exits Priority Dispatch mode, returns to its original talkgroup, and displays the home channel alias. Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it receives a dynamic regrouping command and automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a gurgle 82 tone and the display shows the name of the dynamically regrouped channel. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the previous zone and channel that you were using. If you access a zone or channel that has been reserved as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to Rpgm then press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. The display shows Reprogram Rqst and Please wait. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press to cancel and return to the Home screen. Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into Select Enabled or Select Disabled categories. Select Enabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once you have selected the dynamic-

regrouping position. English Select Disabled Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The radio is forced to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan and Private Call features are unavailable when your radio is Select Disabled. Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature works on the condition at least one zone in the radio must be a non-

dynamic zone. This feature provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store frequently used channels be it conventional or trunking. These dynamic channels are saved from pre-existing (non-

dynamic) channels in the radio. This saves the time and effort from the regular navigation around the working zones and channels. User can also delete or update the list in the Dynamic Zone. 83 English Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel 1 2 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. or to <# Dynamic Zone Channels>.4 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 or to ZnPr. Press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

shown on the screen.4 If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. 3 4 or to List Selection. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Select Chan screen. 4 # indicates number of the channel on the 16-Position Switch which are numbered from 1 to 16. 84 5 or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Channel updated. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 2 or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. The display shows the dynamic channels list. or to the saved dynamic channel then press the Menu Select button directly below Del. The display shows Channel deleted screen. English 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>Blank. SmartConnect SmartConnect allows you to have voice communication by switching the device to any available network with the priority order of Wi-Fi LTE Satellite when LMR is out of range. The radio can connect through a fixed Wi-Fi access point in buildings or in-vehicle Broadband modems such as Sierra Wireless modem MG90, VLM750, or Satellite modem. When a channel is SmartConnect enabled and goes out of range, the radio displays Out of Range and SmartConnect capable icon connected to the available network, the radio displays

. Once the device is SmartConnect and SmartConnect connected icon

. 85 English NOTICE:

This feature is applicable only for APX 6000 series, APX 8000 series, and APX 8500 series. Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (ASTRO 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID

(number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to five IDs of different call types associated with it. Also, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the following types of calls:

Phone Call Private Call Selective Call Call Alert Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) 86 NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs. NOTICE:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a few contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 2 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn and proceed to the next step. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts and proceed to step 6. or to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 5 English 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. or to select the call type. Adding a New Contact Entry 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 1 2 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to [New Contact] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Name. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 87 English 4 Use the keypad to enter the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 5 or to [Add Number] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Type 1 <Default Type>. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. The display shows <Entry> Stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . Deleting a Contact Entry 7 8 or to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. or to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . The display shows Number 1 and a blinking cursor appears. 9 Use the keypad to enter the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. 88 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Del and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows <Entry> confirm del?. 4 Select the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the entry, or No to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen of Contacts. or until the display shows <Entry> and its associated number and press the Menu Select button directly below Rplc to replace the existing entry. The display shows <Entry> added, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. Adding a Contact to a Call List The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. English or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List This feature allows you to edit contacts in a call list. or to the entry you want to add and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Add to CallLst or Add to PhonLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or until the display shows [Available]

and press the Menu Select button directly below Add to add as a new entry. Editing an Entry Alias 1 2 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 89 1 2 3 English 3 4 or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing as Entry ID 1 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. 90 2 3 4 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing a Call Type 1 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . 2 3 4 5 The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to Type and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . or to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/

groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling English through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List Multi-System Talkgroup Scan Refer to a qualified radio technician for the maximum number of Scan Lists can be preprogrammed in your radio. A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Intelligent Priority Scan Intelligent Priority Scan feature allows you to add or delete conventional channels and trunking talkgroups from multiple system into the priority scan lists. You can add or delete priority scan list members and assign priorities using the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button. Radio displays the priority level of the scanned member. 91 English NOTICE:

Priority-One channel and Priority-Two channel member may belong to different Talkgroup Scan systems. Editing the Scan List This feature allows you to change scan list members and priorities. When the radio locks onto a channel in the Intelligent Priority Scan list, radio scans for higher priority member within the same Trunking or Conventional system. Viewing a Scan List 1 2 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL . or to view the members on the list. 3 Press Home screen. to exit the current display and return to the 92 1 2 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL . The display shows the lists that can be changed. or to the entry you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcl to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions to select another channel that needs to be added or deleted then repeat step 3. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. Use the keypad to enter the desired channel to the desired channel. or name. Use the MFK to select the channel. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 93 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status 1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan side button. 2 or to the member you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. English Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the MFK to select another scan list member. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. 93 English Press the Select button one or more times to toggle between different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:

A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button to initiate or stop scan. or to Scan and press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. If the scan is enabled, the display shows Scan on and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows Scan Off. The radio returns to the Home screen. 94 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) You can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect, and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls while scanning for activity. You may respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed. or to Mon and press the Menu Select button directly below Mon. The brief Monitor on display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. Transmitting While the Scan is On This feature allows the user to transmit using radio programmed for talkback scan and non-talkback scan. English Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below Scan momentarily. Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select 95 English button directly below page or call. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing pressing the Menu Select button below either page or call. or Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise

(termed nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, or to Nuis and press the Menu Select button directly below Nuis. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:

Stop and restart a scan. Mode change to another channel and back to the original channel. Turn off the radio and then turn it on again. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. 96 This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DYNP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. English 2 Press momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Restoring Priorities in a Scan List To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, perform one of the following actions:

Turn scan off, and then on. Change channels. Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Using the Hang Up Box (HUB) To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box

(HUB). NOTICE:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. If other users are away from their radios or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual call alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, if there is no answer after the maximum ring time or when you press the PTT button for an Enhanced Private Call, the radio automatically sends a call alert page. 97 English NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Receiving a Call Alert Page When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. If Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled, you hear one alert tone and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. Press the PTT button to answer or press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 68 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 68 for more information on returning the call. Sending a Call Alert Page Do one of the following to send a call alert page:

98 NOTICE:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Sending a call alert page using the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button:

a. Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-

Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows Paging...<Number> or

<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu Page :

or to Page . a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Page . or to select the required ID. c. d. Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows Paging...<Number> or

<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu Call :

a. or to Call . English b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Call . or c. to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. d. To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes . To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below No . The display shows Paging...<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. 99 English Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. 1 or to scroll to the VMut and press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. Voice mute is activated. 2 To turn the feature off, press the Menu Select button directly below VMut or the VMut preprogrammed button again. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below VMut or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. Voice mute on shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to all conventional dispatch calls and affiliated trunking group calls. 100 Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) This feature allows the user to broadcast a series of distinct, recognizable tones before a voice transmission from the dispatcher or a radio. The broadcasting dispatcher or radio user can select this alert tone transmission to be sent to an individual Talkgroup or over the entire system. Specific tone or series of tones are pre-programmed into the radios to allow the dispatcher or supervisor to select a list of tones to broadcast before they make their voice transmission. Each tone is distinctive to indicate different situation or different broadcaster. The transmitting radio also plays back the tones for the broadcaster to listen. NOTICE:

The receiving radios must be configured with the Quick Call II tone in order for the radio to sound the selected tone and also to sound a preconfigured alert tone after the selected tone has sound. Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission The broadcasting or transmitting radio must be pre-

programmed to see the tone in the Quick Call II tone list. The receiving radio must also be pre-programmed to decode the tone to broadcast. 1 2 or to QCII, and press the Menu Select button directly below QCII. or to select the tone to broadcast. 3 Press the PTT to broadcast the selected tone, or press and hold the PTT to broadcast the selected tone and transmit with your vocal transmission. You hear the radio sounds the selected tone. You can begin your call after the tone ends. 4 Release PTT to listen. Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Orange button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm English Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Special Considerations for Emergencies Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. One channel supports only one Emergency mode. The radio responds differently when pressing the preprogrammed Emergency button in each channel.Only one of the Emergency modes can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except if enabled, it returns to one of the following:

Tactical/Non-Revert The radio sends an emergency alarm and/or makes an emergency call on the current channel. Non-Tactical/Revert for Conventional System The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency channel to send an alarm and/or make an emergency call. 101 English Non-Tactical/Revert for Trunking System The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency talkgroup (trunking system) or channel (conventional system) to send an alarm and/or make an emergency call. NOTICE:

When changing channels during Emergency transmissions:

If the new channel is also preprogrammed for Emergency, you can change channels while in Emergency operation. The emergency alarm or call continues on the new channel. If the new channel is not preprogrammed for Emergency, the display shows No emergency, and you hear an invalid tone until you exit the Emergency state or change to a channel preprogrammed for Emergency. When enabled, the Emergency Keep-Alive feature prevents the radio from being turned off by using the On/Off/Volume Control Knob when the radio is in the Emergency state. 102 Exiting Emergency The dispatch console that supports this feature can be programmed to clear the emergency state of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. 1 To exit emergency, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

If Then Press and hold the preprogram-

med Emergency button until you hear the emergency exit tone. a From the Home screen, swipe down the Status Bar. b Tap Cancel and confirm the action by tapping Yes. If Then Figure 1: Exiting Emergency Exiting Emergency as Supervisor

(Trunking Only) Radios configured as Supervisor are able to cancel emergency mode of other radios. The dispatch console must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. Perform one of the following actions:

If If the emer-

gency mode is initiated by other radios, Then press and hold the Side But-

ton 1 and press the Emer-

gency button. If If the emer-

gency mode is initiated by other radios, If the emer-

gency mode is initiated by the Supervisor, English Then press and hold the 1-Dot

(Side Middle) button and press the Emergency button. Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold the Emer-

gency button. Press and hold the Side Button 1 and press the Emergency button. Press and hold the 1-Dot

(Side Middle) button and press the Emergency but-

ton. Wait for console to clear emergency. NOTICE:

The following buttons combinations are supported:

Radio Side Button 1 and Top (Orange) button. 103 English Radio Side Button 1 and accessory Orange button. indicates the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. Radio 1-Dot (Side Middle) and Top (Orange) buttons. Radio 1-Dot (Side Middle) and accessory Top

(Orange) buttons. 2 Press and hold the EMERGENCY button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. Accessory 1-Dot Button and radio Top (Orange) button. Accessory 1-Dot Button and accessory Orange button. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. A dispatcher acknowledgment Ack received display follows. For trunking system, the radio also sounds a high-pitched tone that 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.0 to 2.5 cm) from your mouth. 104 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Call with hot mic on your radio. English 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to send an Emergency Call with hot mic to a group of radios. Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. The hot mic applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. A tone sounds to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in the radio's codeplug programming. 4 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. 105 English Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features enabled, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display alternates Emergency and the home display. A high-pitched tone sounds, indicating that the trunked system central controller has received the alarm. A dispatcher acknowledgment (four high-

pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an Ack received display. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm and Call with hot mic to a group of radios. Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms and Call with hot mic on your radio. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. If successful, the display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. 106 English The radio exits Emergency Alarm and enters the Emergency Call state when one of the following scenarios occur:

You receive the dispatcher acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. You receive no acknowledgment. The display shows No acknowledge. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in your radio's codeplug programming. 4 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. NOTICE:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. 107 English Special Considerations for Emergencies If you press the emergency button while in a channel that has no emergency capability, a low-pitched tone sounds. If the unit is out of the range of the system and/or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. If you press the emergency button, then change to a mode that has no emergency capability, the display shows No emergency and a continuous low-pitched tone sounds until a valid emergency mode is selected or until the emergency is cancelled. When an emergency is active, changing to another mode where emergency is enabled (trunked or conventional) causes an emergency alarm and/or emergency call to be active on the new mode. Impact Detection This feature allows radio to detect the force of gravity impact or the orientation changes on the vehicle in the event of vehicle crash or rollover. 108 When these events are detected, radio activates the Emergency feature. This feature also sends out the location-based information if GPS feature is enabled. Radio automatically activates Impact Detected condition when the impact event meets or exceeds a predefined threshold. The radio must stay in this condition for a preprogrammed amount of time before the Emergency Alarm or Call is activated. In the event of hardware failure or malfunction, radio alternatively displays Impact HW and Error and a tone sounds when the radio power-up. Any button press of the radio or accessory except the programmed button for volume and backlighting functionality ceases the error message and sound. The following scenarios affects the Emergency feature activation:

Pressing a preprogrammed Emergency button cancels the Impact Detection sequence and enters the Emergency mode. Pressing the PTT button does not suspend the Impact Detection sequence. Pressing the PTT button, the Clr menu button or the preprogrammed Clear button when radio displays the impact detected display alert, exits the Impact Detected condition. Detecting Impact 1 Radio detects the impact on the vehicle and the impact event meets or exceeds the predefined threshold. One of the following scenarios occur:

Radio enters Impact Detected condition. Radio sounds alert tone and displays Impact on the screen, and Post-Alert Timer is initiated. Impact Detected condition continues for the time duration defined in the Post-Alert Timer field. When the timer expires, radio enters into Emergency mode. Radio displays Emergency on the screen. Radio enters Emergency mode immediately and displays Emergency on the screen. English NOTICE:

If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the radio inhibits all tones and lights on the radio. 2 Press the preprogrammed Clr menu button or the preprogrammed Clear button to exit the Impact Detected condition. Post-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time the radio needs to remain in the Impact Detected condition before radio enters into Emergency mode. When the Post-Alert Timer is initiated, the radio sounds alert tone and displays Impact on the screen. Triggering Emergency Emergency Alarm or call is triggered when you do not clear the Impact Detected condition and when the Post-Alert 109 English Timer comes to an end. The radio sends emergency message to units within the same Talkgroup. If GPS is enabled, the radio sends GPS coordinates to dispatcher. Exiting Impact Detected Condition If there is false alarm or you do not want to enter into Emergency mode, you can exit the Impact Detected condition and prevent emergency from going off with the following operation. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Clear button to exit. Press the Menu Select button below Clr to exit. Re-Initiating Impact Detection Sequence Radio must first exit Emergency mode to re-initiate the Impact Detected sequence. Radio must return to the normal operations before the next impact can be detected. Refer to Exiting Impact Detected Condition on page 110 to exit the Impact Detected condition. 110 Automatic Registration Service

(ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. The ARS for the radio consists of two modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-server Mode Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode The following methods are options on how to select or change the ARS Mode. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode using the 16-

Position Select knob:

a. Once the zone you want is displayed, turn the preprogrammed 16-Position Select knob to the desired mode. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat this step. English Selecting or Changing the ARS mode using the radio menu:

a. Press and hold or to Chan . b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan . The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. c. or or press the MFK once and rotate the MFK to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. d. Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and Selecting the ARS mode using the MFK :

a. After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. b. or or press the MFK once and rotate the MFK to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. 111 English If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat this step. c. Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and User Login Feature This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application

(Example: Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. NOTICE:

A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. NOTICE:

Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (AZ), small letters (az), numbers (09), symbols (*, #, -, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight characters or more. Logging In as a User 1 or to User and press the Menu Select button directly below User. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

112 or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to enter ID. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. Use the keypad to type or edit a user name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined user names. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined user name. Press and hold or to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn to select the predefined user name. If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. 4 Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number will appear as asterisks. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. English One of the following scenarios occurs:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and In progress, with Cncl . In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline, with Logt and Exit. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. 113 English NOTICE:

To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl. Logging Out Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. NOTICE:

Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft, and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. 1 or to Logt and press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and Clear private data?. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary Private data cleared. 114 Select No to keep your private data. Text Messaging Service (TMS) This features allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. The types of text messages available:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:

Compose Drafts Sent Inbox NOTICE:

See Status Icons on page 49 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 53 for more information on each menu option. Accessing the Messaging Features 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature using the radio menu. 2 or to TMS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 4 or to scroll through the main menu options. English NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B-

>C, a->b->c. During the numeric mode, except for keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message

(no multi-tap).

, pressing the 1 or to TMS. 115 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Comp to see the compose options. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below New to compose a new message. A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once the message is composed. 7 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send . 8 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking 116 cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTICE:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 118 for more information. You can also select the Drft option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 123 for more information. Sending a Quick Text Message Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. 4 5 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using the preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to step 4. To access this feature using the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Comp and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. English or to List. or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 7 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 8 Perform one of the following actions to send the message:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. The message is sent after the address is selected. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Proceed to step 10 to send the message. 117 English 9 or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. The message is sent after the address is selected. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTICE:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 118 for more information. 118 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. NOTICE:

The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to indicate the message as important. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message Ensure there is an outgoing message composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to remove the priority status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. English Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to request for a reply. The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 119 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Ensure that a outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 3 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to remove the priority status icon. or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. English 2 or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 3 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to indicate the message as important. or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to request for a reply. The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 120 Receiving a Text Message NOTICE:

When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send a notification to acknowledge that the message was received. Do one of the following to receive a text message. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message using the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Receiving a text message using the radio menu:

When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary New msg, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. English Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox The Inbox can hold up to 30 messages. NOTICE:

or to read the message if the content fills more than one screen. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. to Inbx and press the Menu Select button below Sel . or Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature to Inbx and press the Menu screen. Select button below Sel . or The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. 121 English 2 or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Rply , Del , or Back to access the option. Select Rply to reply the message. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. NOTICE:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 52 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message NOTICE:

The original date and time stamp, address, and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. 1 122 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rply to reply to a message. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to New and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to List and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of predefined messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 4 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once you have completed the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. English 6 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. NOTICE:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 118 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 1 or to TMS. 3 4 or to Drft and press the Menu Select button below Drft. The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. or to the required text message and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of 10 messages. The oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 123 English Viewing a Sent Text Message Select Back to return to the previous screen. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. or to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Sent. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. NOTICE:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 52 for more information. Sending a Sent Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn while viewing the message. 2 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send . or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn , Del , or Back to access the option. Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 2 3 124 English 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Press the Menu Select button directly below Curr to delete the current message. Press the Menu Select button directly below All to delete all the messages. NOTICE:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 118 for more information. Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. By default, the radio automatically enters the encrypted environment without having to manually select or clear the secure transmission. Deleting Text Messages Enabling Secure Transmission 1 From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen, scroll through the messages. or to 1 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to view the delete options. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Sec and press the Menu Select button directly below Sec. The display shows key has been enabled. and the current key if multi-

2 Monitor the mode to be sure it is not in use. 125 English 3 Press PTT button to transmit. Selecting Secure Transmissions NOTICE:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows Clear TX only. The radio does not transmit until you disable the secure mode. The radio can be configured to ignore the clear voice or unsecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. Accessing the Secure Feature 1 or to Sec. 2 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below Sec to display Secure feature screen. The display shows the Secure screen. 126 If the Ignore Secure/Clear Switch when Strapped programming option is enabled, the radio transmits without displaying any messages in the strapped mode of operation, regardless of the Secure/Clear switch setting. This option must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. The Secure/Clear switch only applies when the radio is transmitting. Managing Encryption This chapter explains the encryption feature on your radio. Loading Encryption Keys Refer to the Key Variable Loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. 1 Attach the KVL to your radio. The display shows Keyloading and the name of the ASTRO OTAR profile used by the selected channel. All other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. English 2 Press Target Load. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

For single key, select Key. For multikey, select Group. 4 Select the required keys and press Load on the KVL. The KVL indicates that keyload is successful. Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types of encryption keys:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys are strapped on a one-per-channel basis, through CPS. In addition, you can have operator-

selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are Trunked Multikey If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications, strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, a different key can be strapped to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key 1 or to Key. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 or to scroll through the encryption keys or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

127 English Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. NOTICE:

When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows Key fail. When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows Illegal key. Selecting a Keyset This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. 128 Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. 1 2 or to KSet and press the Menu Select button directly below KSet. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. or to scroll through the keysets or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:

, the PTT button, or the Exit menu Press selection to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Erasing Encryption Keys Keys that are erased from the radio are also removed from the key database of the associated ASTRO OTAR profile. Do one of the following to erase the selected encryption keys. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey Ensure that the Unique Shadow Key (USK) or Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) is loaded into the radio with the Key Variable Loader (KVL) while selected to the channel with the intended ASTRO OTAR profile selection before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. Erasing the selected encryption keys using the radio menu:

1 or to Reky. English a. b. or to Eras and press the Menu Select button directly below Eras. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. or to the desired encryption key or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below All to delete all keys, or press the Menu Select button directly below Sngl to delete current shown key. You can abort this screen and return to Home screen by pressing the Menu Select button directly below Abrt. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reky. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. Press the PTT button again, or the or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows Rekey fail. NOTICE:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the USK. 129 English MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying Page

(Conventional Only) This feature allows you to view or define MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode. In addition to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgments, and Power-up Acknowledgments. Some of the selected options require configuration at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even when all the encryption keys are erased. Without this UKEK key, the radio cannot be rekeyed over the air. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Hear Clear NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two components of Hear Clear. Companding Reduces the channel noise, such as OTA transmission that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expander Expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. Random FM Noise Canceller (Flutter Fighter) Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-

Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are canceled without affecting the desired audio signal. 130 English The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Changing Your Password Radio Lock This feature requires you to enter a password to unlock the radio when it powers on. The default password is 0123456789. Your service provider determines the following requirements:

Number of characters for a password Number of attempts for password entry If you exhaust all attempts at entering the correct password, the radio is deadlocked. Restart the radio to start over. NOTICE:

Depending on the configuration, the radio might carry over the number of attempts remaining even after a power cycle. If you exhaust all attempts in this configuration, the following occurs:

The radio remains inhibited All encryptions and secure keys are erased 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Unlock Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 7 Enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. 131 English If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. 7 Enter the new password. NOTICE:

If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Tactical Inh Encode Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. NOTICE:

If you enter three incorrect passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature (Secure Radios Only) This feature allows you to enable or disable the radio lock feature. It is programmable by a qualified radio technician. 1 or to LogF. 132 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LogF. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Stun. English One of the following results occur:

The display shows Pswd enabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. The display shows Pswd disabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. Radio Stun and Kill This chapter explains the radio stun and kill features. Radio Stun This feature allows you to stun another radio by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. This feature prevents an unauthorized user from using the radio. Once the radio is stunned, a password is required to re-

activate the stunned radio. Using Radio Stun 1 or to Stun. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows radio Contact IDs. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Dec fail. 133 English If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Ack. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen locked and request for password. NOTICE:

To un-stun a radio, follow the procedure in Unlocking Your Radio. Radio Kill This feature allows you to render your radio or another radio inoperable if the radio is misplaced or lost. When a radio is killed, the display turns blank and all functions of the radio are not usable. The killed radio can only be recovered from KILL with a special device. Consult an authorized and qualified technician for details. Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio Remote Kill allows you to render another radio inoperable by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. 1 or to Kill. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Kill. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows the radio Contact IDs. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. 134 Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Dec fail. If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Ack. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen turns blank, the killed radio is inoperable. Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio Direct Kill allows you to make your own radio inoperable. Press and hold the programmable button (2-dot) on the keypad microphone then press the Orange button until the display turns blank and becomes inoperable. English Radio Inhibit This feature allows the system administrator to put a radio into a non-functional state when the radio is missing or in an unknown hand. The radio stays in this state regardless of its power changes. NOTICE:

If the radio has Inter-system roaming capability, the system administrator is able to put the radio into a non-functional state when missing radio roamed to another system. The radio can only be uninhibited by receiving an uninhibited command from the system administrator or by reprogramming the radio through labtool or depot CPS only. Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System NOTICE:

This feature is addressed as GPS across the manual as the naming convention of the buttons and strings remain the same as the legacy feature of GPS. 135 English The availability and accuracy of this location information

(and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. GPS Operation The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites to establish location coordinates. Therefore, maximizing your view of unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

Underground locations Under any metal, or concrete roof, or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover Inside buildings, trains, or covered vehicles 136 In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. NOTICE:

Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 10 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and the open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of 60 programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. English The radio also stores four preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between programmable waypoints and preprogrammed waypoints. Programmable Way-

points User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be delet-

ed one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Way-

points Fixed location coordi-

nates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destina-

tion coordinates are edita-

ble. Coordinates cannot be deleted. 137 English NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Location Format This feature allows you to select different display formats of GPS location. The following GPS location formats are available:

Lat/Long(DD) Lat/Long(DDM) Lat/Long(DMS) UTM/UCS SLD99 MGRS NOTICE:

When you send your location to another radio, the receiving radio displays the location in its selected format. 138 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature NOTICE:

An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Location off <Latitude>.. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the GPS. The display shows Previous loc <Latitude>. 4 or to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 5 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh. The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new English location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current latitude. Toggle to see the longitude, time and date. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. 6 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Selecting Location Format 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 or to the preferred location format and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The front display shows the location with the selected format. NOTICE:

If the SLD99 format is selected and the range is invalid, the display shows - on the location. This situation occurs if you are using the radio outside of Sri Lanka and using the SLD99 format. To correct this situation, switch the location display format to other GPS options such as DDM, DMS, UTM/UCS, or MGRS. Turning Off GPS 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Previous loc <Latitude>. 4 or to Loc Format and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 or to check the time and date of the last successful location fix. 139 English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 5 or to Turn Off GPS (if preprogrammed). 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to turn off the GPS. The display shows Location off. 7 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving a Waypoint Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Save as Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to step 5. or to Save as Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to step 5. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. 3 Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required, or press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:

The display shows Saved as <Waypoint name>. The display shows Saved as Home. The display shows Saved as Dest.. or to Save as Waypt and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 140 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Viewing a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. English 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back, or to return to the Home screen, press or the PTT button. Editing the Alias of a Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

to scroll through the list. to select a waypoint to view the location or or information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 To view the longitude, time and date of the selected waypoint, Select button directly below Sel. or to View and press the Menu 2 3 4 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the alias. 141 English 6 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Waypoints main screen. 7 The display shows <Waypoint name> Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press screen. or the PTT button to return to the Home Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint NOTICE:

The user can only edit preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination. 142 Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [Home] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to [Destination] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 or to Edit location and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The first number blinks. 5 Utilize the following control buttons to select the number/coordinates if required, then press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to change the number/coordinates. Press to move to the previous number/

coordinates. Press to move to the next number/coordinates. Press to change the North (N), South or

(S), East (E) or West (W) direction. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Location screen. 6 Utilize the following control buttons or menu to change the number/coordinates if required then press the Menu Select button directly below OK once. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen English 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once complete setting up the new Home or Destination. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows [Home] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows [Destination] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

143 English or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 4 The display shows <Waypoint name> Confirm del?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. 2 3 4 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Delete All and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows All saved wayp confirm del?. The display shows <Waypoint name>deleted . Deleting All Saved Waypoints Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. NOTICE:

You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows All saved waypnts deleted. Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 144 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. English If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only) This feature is only available for radio-to-radio voice transmissions, dispatch call and selective call in conventional ASTRO system. For radio-to-radio transmission, in order to allow the radio to show peer-

location, the voice should be directly sent from one radio to another radio without passing through any infrastructure facility such as repeaters, phone, or DVRS system. Both the transmitting radio and receiving radio must be configured to enable them to send and/or receive the GPS coordinates. You can check with your nearest qualified technician for more details. NOTICE:

If the receiving radio is operating in a Mixed Mode channel, and the voice transmission is through the conventional ASTRO system then the radio can receive the location coordinates of its peers. 145 English This feature is also operable in a Scan Active channel or Scan Talkback channel. Upon receiving a voice transmission with GPS coordinates enabled on the receiving radio, the display shows the coordinates available in full or in short coordinates. There are two different formats available. Refer to the following list for the details shown in the Peer-Location quick text. Consult your agent to pick the best format to configure to your radio. Full location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude Relative distance or direction Short location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude 146 NOTICE:

If the transmitting radio is stale at its location after a period of time, the receiving radio display shows ID:<PTT ID> Last Knwn Loc: <Coordinates>. The ID:<PTT ID> and <distance> are optional details depending on the requirements of usage. If the transmitting radio does not have GPS or the receiving radio could not decode the GPS signal of the received signal, the receiving radio display shows ID:<PTT ID> Unknown Loc. The PTT ID is optional to be shown on the display per requirements of usage. Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System) Geofence is a virtual perimeter based on the GPS to define a geographical area on earth. Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, your radio receives the Dynamic Regroup command from the system and immediately connects to a Dynamic Regroup talkgroup. The radio display shows the new selected Dynamic Regrouped talkgroup with green intelligent light for your attention. On top of that, additional features are Voice Announcement of the new channel, and also direct content display of a text message to indicate that you are currently at Geofence area. Check with your nearest qualified technician on the requirements for these enhancements to work in Geofence. Any new text messages received at Geofence shall have its content displayed immediately on the radio display. NOTICE:

If the radio is set up in DVRS, only mobile radio is supported for this feature. Entering the Geofence Area The Voice Announcement and TMS display in this feature are optional. They must be configured to enable you to hear and see these indicators. When the radio enters a Geofence area, the radio immediately sends a message ACK back to the system. The radio searches the current zone for the channel with same talkgroup assigned as the Dynamic Talkgroup and also with same system ID of current trunk system. Once matched, the radio display shows the first matched and connected channel alias. English If there is no channel with matching Talkgroup ID and trunk system ID, the radio display shows the channel alias of

<DYNAMIC talkgroup>. Once the radio is connected, you hear a dynamic regroup tone, the radio display shows <DYNAMIC channel> with temporary green color intelligent backlight and you hear a Voice Announcement. NOTICE:

When the radio loses the GPS signal, the GPS icon blinks and the radio sounds two high-pitched tones repetitively to indicate that the GPS has failed to operate. The radio display shows the red intelligent light. If the first matched channel is not configured with Voice Announcement, no Voice Announcement is played. The system sends a message to your radio. The radio display shows a direct text message content without any user operation. This message indicates you are currently present in a Geofence area. This TMS remains open on the display until user presses exit/home to exit this screen. 147 Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. Entering Mission Critical Geofence When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, the radio displays <Geofence Alias> with intelligent backlight and the user hears a Voice Announcement. Zone and channel alias of the Geofence area is displayed. If the radio is set to manual, the user can choose either to proceed with zone and channel change or cancel the change. The radio then connects to the designated talkgroup. The radio displays the talkgroup alias and dynamic regroup tone sounds. The transmit power level changes and the radio shows a direct text message content without any user operation. English NOTICE:

If there is another incoming text message before you exit the previous message, the message screen is refreshed to show the latest message. The following procedure guides you to exit the text message received. Press the Menu Select button below Exit or return to Home screen. to The other operations are the same as normal dynamic regroup command. When the radio exits the Geofence area, your radio reverts to original channel or newly assigned talkgroup. The radio display shows the new channel together with Voice Announcement to indicate the changes. Voice Announcement of the new channel only works if that channel is configured with Voice Announcement. Mission Critical Geofence This feature allows the radio to use the GPS receiver to determine radio location at frequent intervals. This feature also allows the radio to evaluate if the radio is within the Geofence area in real time. 148 NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not be alerted by Voice Announcement

(VA), TMS display, Intelligent Backlight, and the Transmit Power Level. The user will be alerted only if these indicators are configured in the radio. The VA can be programmed to alert continuously or momentarily. If Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is enabled, the radio mutes any alert that is received when entering the Geofence area and unmutes when exiting. Exiting Mission Critical Geofence When the radio exits the Geofence area, the radio reverts to the original transmit power level, intelligent lighting, channel or newly assigned talkgroup. Voice announcement is cancelled or the user hears a pre-programmed VA tone. The radio displays the new channel and a message is received to indicate the changes. Trunking System Controls This chapters explains the trunking system control features in your radio. English Operating in Failsoft System The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communication during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-pitched tone and the display shows Failsoft. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. To continue in Failsoft and to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. 1 Rotate the MFK to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. 149 English Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until it locks onto a control channel or failsoft channel, or if it is turned off. SmartZone The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Headthe 150 RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. Site Trunking Feature If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. When this occurs, you can communicate only with the radios within your trunking site. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Site trunking. Locking and Unlocking a Site This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button. Follow the procedure to lock and unlock a site using the radio menu. 1 or to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. English 3 Perform one of the following actions:

2 Press the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Lock. The display shows Site locked. To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Unlk. The display shows Site unlocked. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. Site Display and Search Button The Site Display and Site Search button allows you to view the name of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. or to RSSI and press the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. The display shows momentarily the name of the current site and its corresponding received RSSI. Changing the Current Site 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. Press and hold down the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. 2 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. You hear a tone and the display shows momentary Scanning Site. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. 151 English Trunked Announcement The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-Ruthless Preemption When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-type busy tone, followed by a call back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. Initiating an Announcement Ensure your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls. 1 If channel is set as the primary mode, turn the MFK to locate the announcement-group mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate the announcement. Ignition Switch Options This feature allows the user to select the functionality of the radio based on the Ignition State of the radio users vehicle. Blank This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. 152 Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any Trunking dispatch communications since the radio will not affiliate with the Trunking systems. PTT Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the Trunking systems. Required This option allows the user to power on the radio only if the Ignition is present. The radio can be powered off either through Power button press or when Ignition is lost. In addition, the radio automatically powers on when the Ignition is present only if the radio was turned off due to the ignition being removed. English This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Soft Power Off This option allows the user to power on the radio either through Power button presses or when the Ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button was pressed or the Ignition was removed, the radio will be turned off. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Ignition Only Power Up This option allows the user to power on the radio only when Ignition is detected and will power off when it is removed. The radio does not power on or off with the Power button press. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires or when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. 153 English NOTICE:

While Ignition is not present, the radio powers-off with a radio-user Power Off button/knob selection if the radio was powered-up with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press or Ignition Auto Power Off timer is running. While Ignition is present, the radio powers-on with a radio-user Power On button/knob selection only if the radio was powered-down with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer. Using Emergency Power Up This feature allows the user to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a footswitch. In addition, when the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit, this feature will not be available to the users. Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. 154 Auto Power Off Timer Auto Power Off feature powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. There are two different versions of Auto Power Off:

Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the radio is power-on. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. Ignition Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the vehicle key is removed, when the voltage at the ignition sense is removed. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. When the vehicle key is reapplied, the voltage at the ignition is reconnected, this timer is stopped. Although both Inactivity Auto Power Off and Ignition Auto Power Off can be enabled together, Ignition Auto Power Off timer is mutually exclusive with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer when both are enabled. During the last two minutes of the timer countdown, the radio generates continuous low tone and blinks Powering Off warning on the display until the timer expires or the timer is reset. The radio automatically powers off after the timer expires. The duration of the timer is preprogrammed. English When you press the preprogrammed button or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, Talkaround/

Direct, or Transmit Inhibit. Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25) A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator together with audio alert sent to radios at a site or a few sites to notify the users when there is a special situation that they need to be aware of. Your radio supports up to 250 site aliases. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. Upon the activation of a SSA, the receiving radios display the alert alias and generate the periodic alert tone. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone, or channel the user has just been assigned to. This feature is useful when you have difficulty reading the content on the display. The available voice announcement priority options are:

High Voice announcement is enabled even when the radio is receiving calls. Low Voice announcement is disabled when the radio is receiving calls. Voice announcement is available in the following scenarios:

When the radio powers up. When you change to a new zone. When you change to a new channel. When you press the Menu Select button, preprogrammed button, or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct, or Transmit Inhibit. 155 English NOTICE:

Alert alias, alert tone, and alert period can be preprogrammed. Alert period is the duration for the radio to repeat the alert tone. An interval of 5 seconds might impact the battery life of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details. When mixing SSA with received voice audio, the SSA alert is reduced in volume to ensure that the voice message is still heard clearly. Therefore, it is important that the SSA audio files are created with clear loud audio to ensure they can still be heard clearly when played at reduced levels. 3 4 5 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 156 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 4 If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. English or to [SiteID Entry] to send alert through the manual entry. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the desired Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows the Select Alert screen. If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. 6 The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. 157 English If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site ID>does not exist. 7 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. 3 158 4 5 or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. English If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. 159 English 4 or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias>does not exist. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 160 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SiteID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the required Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. One of the following scenarios occur:

If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows Sending req. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the single site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. If the single site does not exist, the display shows

<Site ID> does not exist. 4 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites 1 or to SSA. English or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The SSA Alert for all sites stop. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 161 Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels This feature enables the mode of the radio to be changed based on the HUB on/off-hook state on all control heads. Whenever the radio goes off-hook, the radio changes to a preprogrammed zone channel specifically for off-hook state. When the user returns the radio to on-hook state, it reverts to its previous channel zone before the radio goes off-hook. When the radio is in off-hook state, manual mode change

(including mode change triggered by third party devices) is allowed. Radio reverts back to the last mode before off-

hook once the radio goes on-hook. English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. 162 NOTICE:

During PL Defeats and Suspend Scan during on-

hook state, the radio is converted to work in new channel and Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. We do not recommend that Hub Suspend Scan"

and "Channel Change on Off Hook" to be enabled simultaneously. During Dynamic Regroup channel selector lock state, Emergency, Transmit Inhibit, radio lock, or when external key loaded is attached to the radio, the Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. The Off Hook State for APX Dual Radio Setup For Dual Radio, the state of the HUB on the unselected radio is always considered as on-hook. The state of the HUB of the selected radio is always reflected as the actual states of the HUB. When the HUB is placed off-

hook, the selected radio makes channel change per CPS configuration, and the unselected radio does not trigger channel change. With Channel Change on Off Hook enabled, when the HUB is placed off-hook, and there is radio switch, the new selected radio moves to the target channel zone on off hook, and the new unselected radio reverts to the last user selected channel before off-hook. English The Off Hook State for Multiple Radios Setup When there are multi-control heads connected, the states of these HUBs reflect the active control head(s) state. Any HUB placed off-hook by active control head(s) makes the radio goes off-hook state. Only when all HUBs are placed on-hook, the radio can be in on-

hook state. NOTICE:

This feature needs to be carefully enabled. Users must also be familiar with the functionality of this feature as they have to be aware that removing the microphone triggers mode change most of the time. Low Voltage Threshold Warning This feature is created for APX mobile radio to provide warning for low voltage threshold. A specific external device is attached to the radio to monitor the automobile voltage. When the car battery went lower than a pre-defined threshold, the external device asserts the Vehicular Interface Port (VIP) input to the radio. When the voltage of the battery becomes normal, the external device de-asserts the VIP input to the radio. 163 English The voltage threshold is customized in the external device settings. When the VIP switch turns on, the VIP asserts input to the radio. The radio immediately initiates a 15 seconds of low Voltage Pre-alert Timer. If the status of the VIP changed before this time-out timer ends, the radio returns to normal operation. If the status from the VIP unchanged when the time-out timer ends, the radio shows Low battery on the display and also sounds low battery/voltage alert tone. The radio sounds a short, high-pitched tone immediately after the PTT button is released. NOTICE:

If the mobile radio does not have a control head connected, the bricks can only alert the user with battery alert tone and the transmit chirp. Next Button If the O2 radio is programmed with this function, a permanent softkey appears as the first softkey from the right on the display. The softkeys appear at the bottom row of the display. 164 NOTICE:

If the softkeys of the radio are configured less than four softkeys, there shall be no Next button. If there are more than four softkeys required on the radio, the Next button helps to toggle to next screen for the subsequent softkey(s) besides the first three softkeys. Pressing this button shall toggle the screens until the last softkey appears and then wraps back to the first four softkeys. Softkey without any function appears as blank. NOTICE:

When a radio is set up with multi control heads together with an O2 control head which were configured with a Next button, the Next button is also shown on the menus of other control heads. Wi-Fi You can connect your radio to a Wi-Fi network for wireless programming. NOTICE:

The Wi-Fi Network Name (SSID) for the radio to connect to must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the preprogrammed button:

a. To toggle the Wi-Fi on or off, press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. This button must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information.

-

a. Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the radio menu button:

or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. If the display shows WiFi Status being Off, press the Menu Select button directly below On. If the display shows WiFi Status as Searching, Connecting, Connected or No Service, press the Menu Select button directly below Off to turn Wi-Fi off.

-

Selecting WiFi Network This feature allows you to view and select the available WiFi network. English 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi to enter WiFi screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the WiFi. Radio starts searching for available network. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below List. Radio displays available network selection and the network signal strength. If the radio displays No network available, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh to search for available networks. 4 Press or to scroll through the list and press Menu Select button directly below Sel to connect to the selected network. Radio displays the WiFi status, the selected network, and the signal strength. NOTICE:

The List and Rfsh buttons are not available when WiFi is searching or connecting to network. 165 English Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Long press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. The display shows the current status of the Wi-Fi as described next. Searching Looking for available Wi-Fi networks that have been preprogrammed into the radio. Connecting In the process of connecting to a found Wi-Fi network. Connected Connected to one of the preprogrammed Wi-Fi networks. No Service No available networks or connection with one of the networks failed. 166 If the radio is Wi-Fi connected, you see a Wi-Fi on the display.In signal strength indicator, addition, the WiFi menu shows Connected under the connection Status heading, what network you are connected to under the Network heading, and the signal strength to that network under the Sig Strength heading. 2 Press to exit. Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. Viewing Recent Calls This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) NOTICE:

The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Viewing recent calls using the radio menu:

or to Rcnt. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt to access the Recent Calls feature screen. or to scroll through the list. c. d. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu

, or the Select button directly below Back, PTT button. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. English Selecting the Power Level NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Power level Low enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power level High enables a longer transmitting distance. Do one of the following to select the power level. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting the Power Level using the Transmit Power Level switch:

a. Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level using the radio menu:

a. or to Pwr. 167 English b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Pwr. The display shows Low power and the low power icon or the display shows High power and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Do one of the following to select a radio profile. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting a radio profile using the preprogrammed Profile button:

a. Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b. to scroll through the menu selections. or 168 c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Selecting a radio profile using the radio menu:

a. or to Prfl and press the Menu Select button directly below Prfl to access the Profiles feature screen. or to scroll through the menu selections. b. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. English Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radio display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio front display. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. The display shows momentary Tones off, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary Tones on, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. Press the Dimmer button to adjust the brightness of the display. Long press to toggle between day and night mode. Turning Voice Mute On or Off You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. Turning the tones on or off using the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button:

a. To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button. Turning the tones on or off using the radio menu:

a. or to Mute. Turning Voice Mute off or on using the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:

a. To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off using the radio menu:

or to VMut. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. The display momentarily shows Voice mute off, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or 169 English the display shows momentary Voice mute on, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer This feature turns off the transmitter of your radio. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 15 to 465 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. NOTICE:

You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. 1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a continuous talk prohibit tone. After four seconds, the transmission is cut-off and the LED goes out. 170 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. 1 or to Sql. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sql. The display shows Squelch XX, where XX is the value for the current squelch. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below +

to increase the squelch volume. Press the Menu Select button directly below -

to decrease the squelch volume. 4 Press to return to the selected channel. Analog Options Tone Private Line, Digital Private-Line, and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Option Carrier squelch Tone Private Line or Digi-

tal Private-Line Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch Normal Squelch Selective Switch English Result You hear all digital traffic. You hear any digital traffic having the correct net-

work access code. You hear any digital traffic having the correct net-

work access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch that preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. One of the following occurs:

The radio plays the active transmission on the channel. 171 English The radio is muted if no activity is present. Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. The ID number of your radio is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, the ID of your radio is sent continuously during the voice message. Smart PTT (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When Smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. The following table shows the variations of Smart PTT. 172 Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code Quick-Key Override Description You cannot transmit if traffic is detected on the channel. You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if se-

cure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Your radio must be pre-

programmed to allow you to use Quick-Key Over-

ride. This feature works with either one of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-in-

hibit state by quick-keying the radio (press PTT but-

ton twice within the pre-

programmed time limit). Transmit Inhibit This feature is available for APCO 25 trunking, Type II trunking and Conventional operations for all APX radios. When Transmit Inhibit feature is enabled, the radio stops all transmission including voice and data. The radio can receive messages but is not able to reply the acknowledgment request of the received message. User can physically control the transmission of the radio especially during operation in hazardous environments with this feature. An environment is considered hazardous when the power emitted by the radio power amplifier could initiate an explosion or other dangerous reactions. When the Transmit Inhibit feature is disabled, the radio functions according to its normal operations. The radio sounds alert tone when user enters or exits this feature and also when PTT is pressed. NOTICE:

Acknowledgment of any messages required from the radio is not transmitted if the Transmit Inhibition is enabled. English Enabling Transmit Inhibition Perform one of the following actions:

or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. Turn off the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. NOTICE:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit using the menu and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit on. You hear a sequence of short, low-high tones to indicate transmission is inhibited. Pressing PTT triggers the radio sounds a constant short, low-pitched tone (reject tone). 173 English NOTICE:

The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change after the radio powers up. The softkey TxIn is created to ease the user of inhibition transmission besides relying solely on Ignition Sense Line. Only if the Ignition Sense Line is on, the softkey TxIn works. If the Ignition Sense Line is on, user can always turn on or off the Transmit Inhibition using the softkey TxIn; but when the Ignition Sense Line is off, function of softkey TxIn is suspended, and the Transmit Inhibition function is always off. If PTT TX Inhibit is enabled, when using multi control head with one active configuration, with the PTT pressed on the active control head, any press on the programmable button of the other control head which meant for that control head to be active control head will cause an unstoppable long low-pitched tone (Talk Prohibit Tone). The display shows Tx inhibit. This behavior can be stopped by pressing PTT button again on the active control head Disabling Transmit Inhibition Perform one of the following actions:

174 or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. Turn on the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. NOTICE:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit using the softkey and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit off. You hear a sequence of short, high-low tone (Transmit Inhibit Off tone) to indicate transmission is back to normal operation. Instant Recall This feature allows the user to save the last received call and playback the recorded call. The feature buffers all incoming audio over the air and stored when the audio is saved. Saving and Playback Calls e. Perform one of the following to save and playback the recorded calls. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Playback and saving the recorded calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt. or b. c. to Recent Convs and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view the recent conversations. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Play. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the recorded calls in chronological order. b. c. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Stop to stop the radio playback. English or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Save. Radio displays Audio Saved momentarily. f. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. g. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Recent calls are lost after radio power cycle if the calls are not saved. Playback the saved calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt. or to Saved Convs and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view the recent conversations. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Play. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the saved calls in chronological order. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Stop to stop the radio playback. 175 English e. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. f. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving the recorded calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Long press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to save the recorded calls. Radio displays Audio Saved momentarily. Radio plays the saved call automatically if call saving is successful. A tone sounds if call saving is not successful. Playback the saved calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to playback the saved calls. call. If there is only a single saved call, the playback skips to the end of the call. Radio auto playback the most recent incoming call followed by saved calls in chronological order. Radio displays the playback status. NOTICE:

Received call overwrites the ongoing record playback. User can short press the programmable button within three seconds to continue the playback and ignore the receiving call. User can short press the programmable button to trigger playback when the radio is receiving call to overwrite the receiving call. Playback can be halted by any tone and button press except for specific buttons. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. b. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button again to skip to the next saved General Radio Information Your radio contains the following information:

Radio Information 176 IP Display SIM Status Control Assignments Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following radio information:

Host Version Secure Version CH 14 Version (depending on the number of channels connected.) Siren Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size and Type English RF Band(s) Processor Version MCHIB Version CHIB Version TIB Version TRC Version VRS Version URC Version DVRS App Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS DSP Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS CP Version (only when DVRS is available) AUX CH Version Codeplug Alias (Optional) NOTICE:

To return to the Home screen, press at any time. 1 or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 177 English 2 or to Radio Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Information screen. 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. Press to return to the Home screen . Viewing the IP Information This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. NOTICE:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. 178 or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. or to IP Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the IP Info screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. Viewing the Control Assignments This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 31 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. NOTICE:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. English 2 or to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Control Map screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. External Alarms (Horn and Lights) All control heads can be equipped for external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) alternating with the selected mode, until it is turned off. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows Horn/Lites off. Using Permanent Horn and Lights If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically turn on when the radio powers up. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). 179 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected alarm(s). The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. If you choose Horn, the display shows Horn on. An Off entry is shown at the softkey when one of the alarms is active. Selecting Off deactivates the current active alarm. Changing the Selected Alarms 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below H+L to turn on both horn and lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Lgts to turn on the lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Horn to turn on the horn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose H+L, the display shows Horn/

Lites on. If you choose Lgts, the display shows Lights on. 180 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On When you receive a call with the Alarms turned on, you hear the vehicles horn sounds for 4 seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. The display shows the type of call received (Call, Page, or Phone) and the selected mode name. The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). The Volume Knob and the Dimmer button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s) and exit the Horn and Lights feature. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. The Volume Knob and the Dimmer button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). English Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s). The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. 181 English Front Panel Programming You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Programming (FPP) to enhance the use of your radio. Entering the Front Panel Programming Mode You can follow this procedure to enter the front panel programming (FPP) mode on your radio. Federal 1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions and proceed to the next step:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 182 If the password is not entered, the radio displays the non-password protected zones only. 3 Press or to select Zn/Ch. 4 Press or to select the required zone. 5 Press or to select the required channel. The display shows the radio parameter screen. 6 Press edit. or to select the required parameter to Non-Federal 1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen 2 Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 3 Press or to select Zn/Ch. 4 Press or to select the required zone. 5 Press or to select the required channel. The display shows the radio parameter screen. 6 Press edit. or to select the required parameter to Editing FPP Mode Parameters Perform the following actions as required while navigating through the feature parameters. Press to scroll through options or navigate or vertically. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to edit the parameter values. Press the Back button to return to the previous screen. English 183 English Accessories Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all radio models and/or bandsplits. Refer to the radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. Visit http://www.motorolasolutions.com to know more about the accessories supported by this radio. 184 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude English bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. 185 English Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

-

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. NOTICE:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard.

-

186 Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

Frequency (MHz) ber 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

Transmit 156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 Receive 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 16 17**

18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 65 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 English 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 187 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources NOTICE:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. NOTICE:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impe-

dance RS232 18 V USB 3.6 V SB9600 5 V 115 Kbps 12 Mbps 9.6 Kbps 5000 90 120 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime 188 English Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to portable and mobile subscriber radio products. ACK Acknowledgment of communication. Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. ASTRO conventional Motorola Solutions standard for wireless analog or digital conventional communications. Autoscan A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. AUX CH Auxiliary Control Head. Analog Signal An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. ARS Automatic Registration Service ASTRO 25 Motorola Solutions standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Call Alert Privately paging an individual by sending an audible tone. Carrier Squelch Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receiver audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. Central Controller 189 English A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It Monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. Cursor A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on a display. Channel A group of characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. Control Channel In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-way/data-communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Conventional Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater. Frequencies are shared with other users without the aid of a central controller to assign communications channels. Conventional Scan List A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Deadlock Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio.The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. Digital Private Line A type of digital communications that utilizes privacy call, as well as memory channel and busy channel lock out to enhance communication efficiency. Digital Signal An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. Dispatcher An individual who has radio-system management duties and responsibilities. Digital Signal Processor 190 A microcontroller specifically designed for performing the mathematics involved in manipulating analog information, such as sound, that has been converted into a digital form. DSP also implies the use of a data compression technique. Dynamic Regrouping A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. DVRS Digital Vehicular Repeater System. ESN Electrical Serial Number. Failsoft A backup system that allows communication in a non-

trunked, conventional mode if the trunked system fails. FCC Federal Communications Commission. English Hang up Disconnect. IV&D Integrated Voice and Data. Key Variable Loader (KVL) A portable, handheld, rugged device used to transfer encryption keys to a target device. Encryption keys can be entered manually by the KVL user, auto-generated by the KVL, obtained from or shared with another KVL, or downloaded from a Key Management Facility (KMF). Liquid-Crystal Display (LCD) An LCD uses two sheets of polarizing material with a liquid-

crystal solution between them. An electric current passed through the liquid causes the crystals to align so that light cannot pass through them. Light Emitting Diode (LED) An electronic device that lights up when electricity is passed through it. MCHB 191 English Millennium Control Head Board. MDC Motorola Solutions Digital Communications. Menu Entry A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display. Selection of a feature is controlled by the programming of the buttons on the side of the radio. Monitor Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code 192 Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. Non-tactical/revert The user will talk on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Over-The-Air Rekeying Allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram the encryption keys in the radio. Page A one-way alert with audio and/or display messages. Personality A set of unique features specific to a radio. PIN Personal Identification Number. Preprogrammed A software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. Private (Conversation) Call A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the group. Private Line (PL) A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Programmable A radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-to-Talk PTT-The switch or button usually located on the left side of the radio which, when pressed, causes the radio to transmit. When the PTT is released, the unit returns to receive operation. Radio Frequency RF-The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light (approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). English Repeater Remote transmit/receive facility that re-transmits received signals in order to improve communications range and coverage (conventional operation). Selective Call A feature that allows you to call a selected individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. selective switch Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Squelch Muting of audio circuits when received signal levels fall below a pre-determined value. With carrier squelch, all channel activity that exceeds the preset squelch level can be heard. Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) DSP interface to peripherals that consists of a clock signal line, a frame synchronization signal line, and a data line. 193 English Standby An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Status Calls Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. Tactical/non-revert The user will talk on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. TalkAround Bypassing a repeater and talking directly to another unit for local unit-to-unit communications. Talkgroup An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communications path. TMS Text Messaging Service. 194 Trunking The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users. Allows users to share a smaller number of frequencies because a repeater or communications path is assigned to a talkgroup for the duration of a conversation. Trunking Priority Monitor scan list A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. USK Unique shadow key. UTC Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard (formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time; everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym = Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. VRS Vehicular Repeater System. Zone A grouping of channels. English 195 English Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX NEXT Radio APX Mobile Radios Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year For LACR region:

ASTRO APX NEXT Radio Three (3) Years 196 Product Accessories One (1) Year MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by English MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS offers the following optional extended service contracts. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) COMPREHENSIVE Provides for extended hardware repair coverage INCLUDING CHEMICAL, LIQUID, FIRE, AND OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE. Comprehensive coverage is available in conjunction with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty and starts from the FIRST DAY the radio is put into use. Service performed under this plan consists of repair or replacement of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay the inbound shipping charges only with use of the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS designated delivery service. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) LITE Provides extended hardware normal wear and tear repair coverage beginning AFTER MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty period expires. Service performed under this plan consists of repair of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF 197 English TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. be provided by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere 198 with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. English VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept 199 English its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, nor will MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS 200 software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. VIII. For Australia Only This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. Motorola Solutions Australias limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website: http://

www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/Contact_Us for the most updated warranty terms. SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola Solutions maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola Solutions to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola Solutions makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola Solutions service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola Solutions dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola Solutions two-way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Solutions Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. English 201

 

 

APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX MOBILE O3 CONTROL HEAD APX 2500, APX 5500, APX 6500, APX 7500, APX 8500 USER GUIDE June 2019 2019 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved

*6875946M01*

6875946M01-JK English Contents Declaration of Conformity.............................................11 Important Safety Information........................................ 13 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada)................15 Software Version.......................................................... 16 Computer Software Copyrights.................................... 17 Documentation Copyrights........................................... 18 Disclaimer.....................................................................19 Read Me First...............................................................20 Notations Used in This Manual..........................20 Radio Maintenance............................................21 Radio Care..............................................21 Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio......................................23 Additional Performance Enhancement.............. 23 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data.....................23 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR)........ 23 CrossTalk Prevention............................. 24 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID)............ 24 SecureNet...............................................24 2 Over-the-Air Rekeying............................ 24 P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System

(DVRS)................................................... 25 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements...............................25 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You............................................................. 25 Preparing Your Radio for Use...................................... 27 Turning On the Radio ....................................... 27 Adjusting the Volume.........................................28 Validating Compatibility During Power Up.........29 Radio Controls..............................................................30 Control Head and Microphone...........................30 Programmable Features....................................31 Assignable Radio Functions................... 31 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions..34 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions.........34 Menu Select Buttons...............................34 Home Button...........................................35 4-Way Navigation Button........................ 35 Data Feature Button............................... 35 Volume Rocker....................................... 35 Mode Rocker.......................................... 35 Keypad.............................................................. 35 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode..36 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode..38 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode......40 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode.......................................................42 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................... 44 Status Indicators...........................................................45 Status Icons.......................................................45 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators.........48 TMS Status Icons................................... 48 TMS Menu Options.................................49 LED Indicator.....................................................50 Intelligent Lighting Indicators............................. 51 Alert Tones ....................................................... 52 Phone Call Displays and Alerts......................... 55 General Radio Operation............................................. 57 Selecting a Zone................................................57 Selecting a Radio Channel................................ 57 Selecting a Channel by using Channel Search Button................................................................ 58 English Mode Select Feature......................................... 58 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey....................................................59 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button..................................................... 59 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call....... 60 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call.........................................60 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)................................61 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)..............62 Methods to Make a Radio Call.......................... 62 Making a Talkgroup Call ........................ 62 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only).... 63 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)....................................................... 64 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button............................................... 65 Monitor Feature................................................. 65 Monitoring a Channel..............................66 Monitoring Conventional Mode............... 66 Advanced Features...................................................... 68 3 English 4 Using ViQi..........................................................68 Advanced Call Features.................................... 70 Calling a Phone Not in the List............... 70 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)....................................................... 70 Receiving a Selective Call........... 70 Making a Selective Call................71 Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only)...................................... 72 Selecting a Talkgroup.................. 72 Sending a Status Call............................. 73 Making a Priority Dispatch Calls............. 73 Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only).... 74 Requesting a Reprogram

(Trunking Only)............................ 74 Classification of Regrouped Radios..........................................75 Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP)....... 75 Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel...........76 Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection...................................... 76 Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone..............................77 SmartConnect....................................................77 Contacts............................................................ 78 Making a Private Call from Contacts...... 78 Adding a New Contact Entry...................79 Deleting a Contact Entry.........................80 Adding a Contact to a Call List............... 81 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List.......................................................... 81 Editing an Entry Alias...................81 Editing as Entry ID....................... 82 Editing a Call Type.......................83 Scan Lists.......................................................... 83 Intelligent Priority Scan........................... 84 Viewing a Scan List................................ 84 Editing the Scan List............................... 84 Changing the Scan List Status............... 85 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status......................................................86 Scan.................................................................. 86 Turning Scan On or Off...........................86 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only)....................................... 87 Transmitting While the Scan is On......... 87 Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan.. 87 Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan.............................................88 Deleting a Nuisance Channel................. 88 Restoring a Nuisance Channel............... 88 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On....................................................... 89 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List...........89 Using the Hang Up Box (HUB)............... 89 Call Alert Paging................................................90 Receiving a Call Alert Page.................... 90 Sending a Call Alert Page.......................90 Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert........................................................ 92 Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) ............................................ 93 Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission.....93 English Emergency Operation........................................93 Exiting Emergency..................................94 Exiting Emergency as Supervisor

(Trunking Only)....................................... 94 Sending an Emergency Alarm................ 95 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only)....................................................... 96 Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only)................................ 96 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call...................................... 97 Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic............................................ 98 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm........ 98 Special Considerations for Emergencies...........................................99 Impact Detection.....................................99 Detecting Impact........................ 100 Post-Alert Timer......................... 101 Triggering Emergency................101 Exiting Impact Detected Condition....................................101 5 English 6 Re-Initiating Impact Detection Sequence...................................101 Automatic Registration Service (ARS).............102 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode.. 102 User Login Feature............................... 103 Logging In as a User..................104 Logging Out............................... 105 Text Messaging Service (TMS)....................... 106 Accessing the Messaging Features......106 Composing and Sending a New Text Message............................................... 107 Sending a Quick Text Message............108 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message............................... 110 Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message............................ 110 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message......................... 110 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message............................ 111 Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message......................... 111 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message.................................... 111 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message.................................... 112 Receiving a Text Message.........112 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox.................................... 113 Replying to a Received Text Message.................................... 113 Accessing the Drafts Folder.......114 Sent Text Messages.................. 115 Deleting Text Messages............ 116 Secure Operations...........................................117 Enabling Secure Transmission............. 117 Accessing the Secure Feature..............118 Selecting Secure Transmissions.......... 118 Managing Encryption............................ 118 Loading Encryption Keys........... 118 Multikey Feature........................ 119 Selecting an Encryption Key...... 119 Selecting a Keyset..................... 120 Erasing Encryption Keys............120 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey.........................................121 MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying Page (Conventional Only)..........121 Infinite UKEK Retention............. 122 Hear Clear..................................122 Radio Lock.......................................................123 Changing Your Password..................... 123 Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password.............................................. 124 Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature (Secure Radios Only).............. 124 Radio Stun and Kill.......................................... 125 Radio Stun............................................ 125 Using Radio Stun....................... 125 Radio Kill...............................................126 Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio..........................................126 Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio................................. 127 Radio Inhibit.....................................................127 English Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System...............................................127 GPS Operation..................................... 128 GPS Performance Enhancement......... 129 The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)..................................................... 129 Location Format....................................130 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature................................................. 130 Selecting Location Format.................... 131 Turning Off GPS................................... 131 Saving a Waypoint................................132 Viewing a Saved Waypoint................... 133 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint............. 133 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint. 134 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint....... 135 Deleting All Saved Waypoints...............136 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint........................ 137 Location Feature in Emergency Mode..137 Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only)................................ 137 7 English 8 Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System)........ 138 Entering the Geofence Area................. 139 Mission Critical Geofence..................... 140 Entering Mission Critical Geofence.......140 Exiting Mission Critical Geofence......... 141 Trunking System Controls............................... 141 Operating in Failsoft System.................141 Out-of-Range Radio..............................142 SmartZone............................................ 142 Site Trunking Feature........................... 142 Locking and Unlocking a Site............... 142 Site Display and Search Button............ 143 Viewing the Current Site............ 143 Changing the Current Site......... 143 Trunked Announcement....................... 144 Initiating an Announcement....... 144 Ignition Switch Options.................................... 144 Blank.....................................................144 Tx Inhibit............................................... 145 PTT Tx Inhibit....................................... 145 Required............................................... 145 Soft Power Off...................................... 145 Ignition Only Power Up......................... 145 Using Emergency Power Up.................146 Auto Power Off Timer........................... 146 Voice Announcement ..................................... 147 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25)..................147 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site

..............................................................148 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry....................................149 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites....150 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites...................................... 151 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site........................................................151 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry.............................152 Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites...153 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites...................................... 153 Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels

.........................................................................154 Low Voltage Threshold Warning..................... 155 Wi-Fi................................................................ 156 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off........................ 156 Selecting WiFi Network.........................157 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio............................... 157 Utilities............................................................. 158 Viewing Recent Calls............................158 Selecting the Power Level.................... 159 Selecting a Radio Profile...................... 159 Controlling the Display Backlight.......... 160 Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off....161 Turning Voice Mute On or Off...............161 Using the Time-Out Timer.................... 161 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features................................................162 Analog Options.......................... 163 Digital Options............................163 Using the PL Defeat Feature................ 163 Digital PTT ID Support..........................164 Smart PTT (Conventional Only)............164 Transmit Inhibit..................................... 164 Enabling Transmit Inhibition.......165 English Disabling Transmit Inhibition......166 Instant Recall........................................ 166 Saving and Playback Calls........ 166 General Radio Information....................168 Accessing the Radio Information

................................................... 169 Viewing the IP Information......... 170 Viewing the Control Assignments.............................. 170 External Alarms (Horn and Lights)........171 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights......................................... 171 Using Permanent Horn and Lights......................................... 171 Changing the Selected Alarms.. 172 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On............................172 Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms..........................172 Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms........................................173 Front Panel Programming.....................173 9 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:...........................................................189 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:................................................. 190 VII. GOVERNING LAW:.................................. 191 VIII. For Australia Only.................................... 191 SERVICE.........................................................192 English Entering the Front Panel Programming Mode................... 173 Editing FPP Mode Parameters.. 174 Accessories................................................................ 175 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range.... 176 Special Channel Assignments.........................176 Emergency Channel............................. 176 Non-Commercial Call Channel............. 176 Operating Frequency Requirements............... 177 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies.....................179 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources...................................................179 Glossary..................................................................... 180 Limited Warranty........................................................ 187 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.................... 187 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:........................................... 187 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:........................... 188 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:................................189 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.....189 10 Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the following FCC logo. Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) English Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that APX Mobile conforms to FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 11 English NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 12 Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way RadiosRF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios CAUTION:

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

English http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum

(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter is approved by Industry Canada to operate with a Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. 13 English NOTICE:

Setting up the radio as an RF Modem takes complete control of the radio. In this mode, the radio no longer responds to button and PTT presses nor will it unmute to voice activity. This mode is designed to receive and pass specifically formatted over the air data to a tethered computer with RF modem enabled applications. This mode can only be exit by reprogramming the radio with Customer Programming Software (CPS) to not operate in RF modem mode and cycling power. 14 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada's license-exempt RSS's per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. English 15 English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R19.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 169 to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the supported features. 16 Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. English 17 English Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 18 Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola Solutions reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola Solutions does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. English 19 English Read Me First This User Guide covers the basic operation of the radio. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. If you attempt to use features which are mutually exclusive, one or more of the following occurs:

The feature control or icon is grayed out. A negative tone sounds. The radio displays Feature not allowed. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of Warning, Caution, and Notice. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. WARNING:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. 20 CAUTION:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. NOTICE:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Home button or Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Phone Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the display of the radio. This means Press the right side of the 4-Way Navigation Button. Radio Maintenance This chapter covers the radio and battery care. Radio Care Proper radio usage and care assures efficient operation and long life for the product. The following are recommendations and warnings when using the radio. English CAUTION:

Your radio casting has a vent port that allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Never poke this vent with any objects, such as needles, tweezers, or screwdrivers.This could create leak paths into the radio and the radio submergibility will be lost. Elastomer seals used in portable radios can age with time and environmental exposure. Therefore, Motorola Solutions recommends that radios be checked annually as a preventive measure in order to assure the waterseal integrity of the radio. Motorola Solutions details the disassembly, test, and reassembly procedures along with necessary test equipment in the Service Manual. If the radio battery contact is exposed to water without the battery attached, dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio. Turn the radio over with the battery contact facing down and shake the radio so any trapped water can escape. The battery contacts must be dry before attaching a battery or a short circuit of the contacts could occur. 21 English Avoid subjecting the radio to an excess of liquids. Accessory connector cover must be attached to the radio side accessory connector if an accessory is not attached to the radio. If the radio is submerged or exposed to a high force water spray, such as from a hose, remove the side accessory connector or accessory connector cover immediately and check to make sure no water was forced into the accessory connector/radio interface. Rinse and dry the area and re-attach the accessory or accessory connector cover if leakage occurs. If the radio is exposed to a corrosive environment, such as salt water or corrosive gases or liquids, rinse and clean the radio immediately to prevent damage to radio materials, especially plated surfaces. Refer to Cleaning Your Radio for detailed instructions. Remove the battery and the antenna before cleaning. If the radio has been submerged in water, shake the radio well so that any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone 22 port can be removed. Otherwise, the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio. Do not disassemble the radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Underwriter Laboratory (UL) certified radios should only be opened and serviced by UL approved service centers. Opening or repairing at unauthorized locations will invalidate the radios hazardous location rating. Do not pound, drop, or throw the radio unnecessarily. The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems. CAUTION:

The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct English the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio CAUTION:

Do not use solvents to clean your radio. Spirits may permanently damage the radio housing. Do not submerge the radio in detergent solution. 1 Combine one teaspoon of mild diswashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls or crevices. 3 Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality, and efficiency of the radios. ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. Add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation to improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication such as failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. 23 English CrossTalk Prevention This feature prevents crosstalk scenarios from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the internal SSI clock rate of the radio. This subsequently reduces the possibility of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV&D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. Over-the-Air Rekeying The Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram encryption keys in the radio after a rekey request. Single-system OTAR Single-system OTAR is supported by a single Key Management Facility (KMF). If the radio moves from one secure system to another, it must be reprogrammed to the new system. Multi-system OTAR Multi-system OTAR is supported by multiple KMFs. After an initial programming, the radio is able to seamlessly move to a secure system associated to a newly selected channel. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 24 English P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System

(DVRS) Motorola Solutions offers an MSI Certified APX compatible, third Party, P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS) that provides low-cost portable radio coverage in areas where only mobile radio coverage is available and portable radio coverage is either intermittent or non-existent. NOTICE:

Portable subscriber units enabled in the system for Radio Authentication shall be able to authenticate regardless of whether they are communicating directly on the system or through a DVRS. Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements A few enhancements have been made to the Conventional Talkgroup at the system. These enhancements improve the Scan feature operation significantly when multiple agencies are using a single conventional radio frequency channel. These enhancements allow users to use Selective Squelch to operate on only the subset of talkgroups that are relevant to the users rather than all talkgroups on the channel. These Scan improvements have been made to eliminate the audio holes that were present and to turn on the busy LED when activity is present on the channel. Mixed Vote Scan and Standard Conventional Scan configurations are supported. Priority Operation is also supported. Up to 30 different talkgroups can be supported using conventional channels. A maximum of four talkgroups can be supported when Vote Scan channels are being used. Smart PTT is supported with this enhancement as Smart PTT prevents users from transmitting while other users are on the channel. NOTICE:

User Selectable Talkgroups are not compatible with this Conventional Talkgroup Enhancement. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator, if the radio is to be operated in extremely cold temperatures (less than

-30 C or more than +60 C), for the correct radio settings to ensure proper operation. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

25 English Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

NOTICE:

Specifications may vary for different radio models. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 26 Preparing Your Radio for Use This section provides simple instructions to prepare your radio for use. Turning On the Radio 1 Press the Power On/Off Button or the PTT button briefly to power on the radio. English After a short time, the red, yellow, and green LEDs light up. The display then shows the following:

Current zone and channel text Codeplug Alias Menu items on the home screen Codeplug Alias feature is enabled through Customer Programming Software (CPS) configuration to display the codeplug alias as a temporary text during power on. The backlight turns on to the last selected dim level. 27 AB English NOTICE:

The Power On/Off Button is ignored if it is pressed before the LED lights up. If Fail ##/## appears on the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If Error ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Radio Maintenance on page 21 for more information. If Ch mismatch appears, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. NOTICE:

The duration that user must press and hold the Power On/Off button to turn off the radio is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Adjusting the Volume 1 To increase the volume, press the Up arrow on the Volume Rocker. 2 To turn off the radio, press the Power On/Off button after the LEDs light up. 2 To decrease the volume, press the Down arrow on the Volume Rocker. 28 A Validating Compatibility During Power Up The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power up. During validation, the display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. Press the Power On/Off Button to reset when the display shows Update done Please reset upon completion, or when the display shows Update failed Please reset when it fails to update. If the software updates are complete, the radio runs the usual power up operation. If the updates are incomplete, the radio runs the Maintenance Mode and the display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device; promptly followed by other maintenance statuses again. NOTICE:

If SW incomplete appears, use Flashport Recovery Tool to update the control heads before you power on the radio again. English 29 English Radio Controls This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control the radio. Control Head and Microphone 30 Orange Button Power On/Off Button Programmable Button (Top) Programmable Button (Purple) Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button Programmable Button (1-Dot) Programmable Button (2-Dot) 14-Character Display Microphone Volume Rocker Home Button Keypad Data Feature Button 4-Way Navigation Button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Mode Rocker 16 Menu Select Button 17 LED Indicator 1248910111213356714151716 Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to controls that are preprogrammed means that a qualified radio technician must use the radio programming software to assign a feature to a control. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press. Some functions can also be programmed to the radio switches. Assignable Radio Functions Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call or phone call. Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. English Dynamic ID (Conventional Only) Allows you to edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. NOTICE:

If the Dynamic ID menu key is not pre-

programmed in the radio, use dongle to display the menu key. Press the menu key and enter the password to view or edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. If the password is not pre-programmed, press the menu key to directly view or edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-

Two channel. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Internet Protocol Address Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address, device name, and status of the radio. 31 English Location Determines the current location (latitude, longitude, time, and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location or turns the GPS functionality on or off for all locations. Message Enters the current message list. Monitor (Conventional Only) Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until the function is disabled. Multiple Private Line (Conventional Only) Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel from the scan list. One Touch 14 Launches a specific feature with. You can set up as many as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Private Call (Trunking Only) Allows a call from one individual radio to another. Priority Dispatch Allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. Radio Profiles Allows easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Recent Calls Allows easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher that a new encryption key is needed. Repeater Access Button (RAB) (Conventional Only) Allows you to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that a new dynamic regrouping assignment is needed. Request-To-Talk (Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want to send a voice call. 32 Scan Toggles scan on or off. Scan List Programming Selects the scan list for editing (by pressing and holding the Scan button). Secure/Clear Toggles secure transmission on or off. Selective Call (Conventional Only) Calls an assigned radio. Site Display/Search (Trunking Only) Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for Automatic Multiple Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation. Site Lock/Unlock (Trunking Only) Locks onto a specific site. Status (ASTRO 25 Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct (Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater or communicating directly with another radio. English Talkgroup (Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Automatically registers the user to the server. Virtual Partner Enables the Virtual Partner feature and allows you to perform queries using ViQi. Zone Down Toggles downward through the zones in the radio. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. Zone Up Toggles upward through the zones in the radio. 33 English Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Dim Changes the display brightness. Horns/Lights Toggles the horns and lights feature on and off. Low Power Toggles the transmit power level between high and low. Voice Announcement Audibly indicates the current feature mode, zone, or channel that you have been assigned to. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following methods. A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Select Button (

). 34 Menu Select Buttons NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Use the Menu Select button your radio feature. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

to access the menu entry of Press the Menu Select button (

) directly below Chan . A B C D Home Button Menu Select Buttons 4-Way Navigation Button Data Feature Button ADCB button returns you to the Home (default) Home Button Pressing the screen. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. button is also used to save NOTICE:

Some features do not require you to press to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. The button also can revert to home channel from any other zone and mode in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4-Way Navigation Button Use the 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll up, down, left, or right with one of the following methods. Press and release one of the buttons to scroll from one entry to the next one. English Press and hold one of the buttons to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Data Feature Button Use Data Feature button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. Volume Rocker Use the Volume Rocker to adjust the volume of the speaker by pressing the Up or Down arrows on the Volume Rocker. Mode Rocker Use the Mode Rocker to scroll through the channels by pressing the Up or Down arrows on the Mode Rocker. Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the keypad microphone to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is 35 English used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The following tables show the Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 8

?

!

;

@ _ 1 A D G J

. B E H K

, C F I L M N O Key 36 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 P T Q U W X R V Y S Z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 37 English Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 1 a d g j

. b e h k m n p q

, c f i l o r

?

!

;

@ _ s Key 38 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 t w u x v y z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 39 English Keypad Characters Numeric Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8

.

,

?

!

;

@ _ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Key 40 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 8 9 0 Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 41 English Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 A D B E C F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Key 42 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 Not applicable Not applicable English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 43 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button on the side of the microphone serves The PTT button two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Methods to Make a Radio Call on page 62 for more information. 44 A Status Indicators This section explains the status indicators of the radio. Status Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the display of the radio. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the received signal strength for the current site (trunking only) The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the sig-

nal. Direct English On Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored

(during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or se-

lected conventional channel is activated. Off The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or se-

lected conventional channel is deactivat-

ed. or Power Level 45 English 46 L H Radio is set at Low power. Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot Radio detects activity on channel desig-

nated as Priority-One. Steady dot Radio detects activity on channel desig-

nated as Priority-Two. Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On Secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On AES secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. GPS Signal On Feature is enabled and signal is availa-

ble. Off Feature is disabled. Blinking Feature is enabled, but no signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On User is currently associated with the ra-

dio. Off User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Inverted User successfully login to the secured IP Packet Data. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. English Start Case Indicates that the first character of the text entry is capitalized. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Lowercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Mixedcase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in mixed case and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. 47 English Uppercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed represents the signal strength of the Wi-Fi signal. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators Status icons and menu options shown here help you to work more efficiently with TMS feature. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 106 for more information. TMS Status Icons The following icons appear on the radio display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. 48 Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of six messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a pri-

ority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. English TMS Menu Options The following menu options appear on the radio display when you send and receive text messages. Menu Option Inbx Comp Drft Back Save Sent New List Impt Description/Function Brings you to your incoming messages screen. Brings you to the compose screen. Brings you to the saved message screen. Brings you back to the previous screen. Saves the messages you have edited to the Draft folder. Brings you to the sent messages screen. Creates a new message. Brings you to the predefined messages screen. Toggles the Priority Status icon on or off for an outgoing message. 49 English Menu Option RqRp Curr All Del Edit Exit No Optn Rply Sel Send Yes 50 Description/Function Toggles Request Reply icon on or off for an outgoing message. Deletes the current selected message. Selects to delete all the messages in the current folder. Deletes a message or text. Edits a draft message or key in a target ad-

dress. Exits to the Home screen. Cancel the delete all messages options. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects a predefined message or address. Sends the message. Deletes all the messages in the current folder. LED Indicator The LED radio. indicator shows the operational status of your Solid red Radio is transmitting. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow (Conventional Only) Channel is busy. Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. A Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. English Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporarily changes the display bar color and the alert text background color of the radio to help signal that a radio event has occurred. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Orange Notification When Emergency Alerts Green Call Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. The radio enters Geofence. 51 English Alert Tones Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of the condition of your radio. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Short, Low-

Pitched Tone Long, Low-

Pitched Tone 52 Tone Name Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Time-Out Timer Timed Out Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Lack of Voice PTT Time out Out of Range Invalid Mode Heard When radio fails its power-up self test. When an unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than six seconds without any activity. After time out.

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed. When the radio ends your call after it detected there are lack of voice for five seconds after the PTT is pressed and hold. Your ra-

dio ends the call to enable your radio to receive calls from other radio users.

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the sys-

tem. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. English You Hear A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Short, Medi-

um-Pitched Tone Long, Medi-

um-Pitched Tone A Group of Medium-Pitch-

ed Tones Tone Name Busy Heard When system is busy. Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received Emergency Alarm/Call En-

try Central Echo Volume Set Emergency Exit Failsoft Automatic Call Back Keyfail Console Acknowledge Received Individual Call When a correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. When activity on a priority channel is received. When entering the emergency state. When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. When exiting the emergency state. When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is re-

ceived. When Call Alert or Private Call is received. 53 Tone Name Call Alert Sent Site Trunking Low-Battery Chirp Heard When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. When battery is below preset threshold value. GPS Fails When the GPS fails or loses signal. Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Talk Permit When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.

(When PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received.

(When PTT button is pressed) is verifying with the system for ac-

cepting its transmissions. When a new message is received. When a priority message is received. English You Hear Short, High-

Pitched Tone

(Chirp) Two High-

Pitched Tones Ringing Gurgle Unique, Low-

Pitched Chirp Unique, High-

Pitched Chirp New Message Priority Status 54 English Phone Call Displays and Alerts The following phone call displays and alerts appears on the radio display when you make and receive Phone calls. The radio also uses alert tones to indicate the current status. You Hear A Long Tone You See No phone Phone busy When You press the PTT button and the phone system is not available. The phone system is busy. A Busy Tone Phone busy A High- Pitch-

ed Tone No acknowl-

edge When a channel is not available. The call is not acknowl-

edged. When you release the PTT button. Notes Press Home screen. to hang up. The radio returns to the to exit the phone mode and try your Press call later. The radio automatically connects when a channel opens. to hang up. The radio returns to the Press Home screen. The radio indicates to the landline party that the caller may begin talking. 55 English NOTICE:

You have the option of sending additional digits (overdial), such as an extension number, credit card, or PIN numbers to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for live overdial, every digit entered after the call is connected, is sent to the phone system. If the radio is preprogrammed for buffered overdial, the digits pressed are entered into memory and then sent when the PTT button is pressed. Press the PTT button to send either digits or voice, but not both at the same time. 56 General Radio Operation This chapter explains the general radio operations of your radio. A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs. Do one of the following to select a radio channel. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. English Selecting a Zone Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. A zone is a group of channels. Select a zone using the radio menu Zone:

a. b. or to Zone and press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. or to the required zone, or use the keypad to enter the zone number. c. Press or the PTT button to confirm the selected zone number. d. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a channel using the Mode Rocker Up or Down:

a. Press the Mode Rocker Up or Down. b. Press or the PTT button to confirm the channel. c. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Select a channel using the radio menu Chan :

or to Chan . a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan . or to the required channel. c. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the selected channel. Selecting a Radio Channel e. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. 57 English Selecting a Channel by using Channel Search Button This feature allows you to do a quick search for a specific channel in your radio by keying in the alias of the channel. Your radio prompts the first found channel if a match is found. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Channel Search button. or to ChSr and press the Menu Select button directly below ChSr. A blinking cursor appears on the Channel Search screen. 2 Use the keypad to type or edit your channel name. 3 To initiate searching, press the Menu Select button directly below ChSr once the entry is done. To exit this procedure, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl . One of the following scenarios occurs:

58 The display shows Searching. Once found, the display shows the matched channel name and the radio changes its transmission to the selected channel. If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows Invalid entry. Repeat step 2 to search again. If the entry does not match, the display shows Channel name not found.Repeat step 2 to search again; or press to exit. or the Menu Select button directly below Exit Mode Select Feature Mode Select allows a long press to save the current zone and channel of your radio to a programmable button, keypad button, or a softkey; then once programmed, the short-press of that button or softkey changes the transmission to the saved zone and channel. There are two methods to save the selected zone and channel:

Softkeys Programmable buttons and keypad buttons (digit 0 to 9) NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey Five softkeys are available for you to save the frequently used zone and channel. 1 Toggle from your current zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 or to MS1, MS2 ... or MS5. 3 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below one of the softkey (MS1MS5). You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. English NOTICE:

To change the programmed zone and channel, repeat this procedure. Short press of the programmed softkey changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this softkey. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button You can save the frequently used zone and channel to the programmable buttons and keypad digit 0 to 9 buttons. 1 Toggle from your current zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 Press and hold the button you desire to program. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. NOTICE:

Repeat this procedure to change the zone and channel of the programmed button. Short press of the programmed button changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this button. 59 English Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. 60 If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio displays the following depending on the system your radio is configured to:

For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. A 3 Release the PTT button to listen. See also Making a Talkgroup Call on page 62 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from one individual radio to another. The one-to-one call between the two radios are not heard by the others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. NOTICE:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), when there is no response from the receiving radio, the calling radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone after the timer expires. English When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the caller alias or ID. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to hang up and return to the Home screen. NOTICE:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Resp, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Resp, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. 61 English See also Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 63 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. NOTICE:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), if there is no response to the call after the timer expires, your radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone. When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear a telephone-

type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green.The display shows Phone call and the call received icon blinks. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 62 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to hang up and return to the Home screen. See also Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 64 for details on making a Telephone Call. Methods to Make a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone menu. The Mode Rocker . A preprogrammed One Touch button. The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 78). NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last-selected talkgroup. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . Use the Mode Rocker to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. English Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 90 for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 4. or to Call , and press the Menu Select button directly below Call . The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. 63 English Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. A telephone-type ringing sounds if the receiving unit is in service. The display shows Calling...

<Number> or Calling... <Alias>. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 64 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 4. or to Phon, and press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required phone number. Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 3 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. English The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. or to Dir and press the Menu Select button directly below Dir. 5 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 52 for more information if your call is not answered. Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radio coverage area by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Monitor Feature The monitor feature is used to make sure that a channel is clear before transmitting. The lack of static on a digital channel when the users switch from analog to digital radios is not an indication that the radio is malfunctioning. 65 English Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Monitoring a Channel Monitoring a Channel in Conventional Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. b. Listen for activity on that channel. c. Adjust the Volume Rocker if necessary. d. If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. Monitoring a Channel in Trunked Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. b. Press the PTT button. c. If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if indicator lights you hear no tone and the steadily, then proceed with your message. d. Release the PTT button to receive transmission. If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows Out of range. Monitoring Conventional Mode This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus, you can to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from taking over someone elses conversation. 1 To activate monitoring, perform one of the following actions:

At Home mode where the default zone and to Mon and channel are being displayed, press the Menu Select button directly below Mon momentarily. or 66 Take the control head off the hook. The display shows Monitor On. You hear all channel traffic. 2 Press the Menu Select button again to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows Monitor off. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. English 67 If To perform a license plate query, English Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Using ViQi ViQi is an intelligent virtual partner that provides critical information through common query searches and dialog interaction. ViQi is available on APX 8500, APX 6500, and APX 5500 radio models using the handheld control head or mobile keypad microphones with programmable buttons. ViQi retrieves important information from the database without the need to access another device, vehicle, or wait for the dispatcher to run a query. 1 To use ViQi, press and hold the assigned programmable button. To perform a drivers license query, 2 After you hear a tone, speak the command clearly, then release the button. 68 Then say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Run a <State>

plate

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Check a <State>

plate"

NOTICE:

You can use variations such as

<Plate>

and <Tag>. say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"<State> license

<Alphanumeric String>"

If Then If Then English

"Run a <State>

driver's license

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Check the state of

<State> driver's li-

cense

<Alphanumeric String>"

NOTICE:

You can use variations such as

<Driver's License>,

<DL>, and

<License>. say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Check Vehicle Identification Num-

To perform a Vehicle Identification Num-

ber query, ber

<Alphanumeric String>"

"VIN check

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Run a VIN"

NOTICE:

You can use varia-

tions such as

<Vehicle Identification Number>, <VIN>, and <Vehicle Number>. 69 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio with privacy. Receiving a Selective Call When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Call received. The speaker unmutes. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. English Advanced Call Features This chapter explains the operations of the call features available in your radio. Calling a Phone Not in the List 1 or to Phon. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. 3 Enter the desired phone number on the keypad. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press the button or the PTT button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to exit. or Menu Select button directly below Phon 70 NOTICE:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Call, your conversation is heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Call, you are not responding privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 71. Making a Selective Call Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature by using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 3. or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. English The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the last number dialed. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. 71 English button to hang up, your radio If you do not press remains in Selective Call state with the other unit. You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls. Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. NOTICE:

Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 117 for more information. 72 Selecting a Talkgroup 1 or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last Talkgroup that was selected and stored. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Pset for the preset preprogrammed Talkgroup. or to the required Talkgroup. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the currently selected Talkgroup and return to the Home screen. If the encryption key associated to the new Talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Key fail. If the encryption key that is associated to the new Talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Illegal key. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. Sending a Status Call This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Status button. to Sts and press the Menu Select button or directly below Sts. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required status. English Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-

pitched tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. Making a Priority Dispatch Calls If a talkgroup is congested, the Priority Dispatch feature allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. This talkgroup is called the Priority Talkgroup. Each trunking talkgroup can have its own assigned Priority Talkgroup.Priority Dispatch is not available during 73 English Emergency operations. Scan feature is suspended when Priority Dispatch is initiated. Dispatch console that supports this feature must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. 1 Press the preprogrammed Priority Dispatch button. A tone sounds and the radio enters Priority Dispatch mode. The radio exits this mode when the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires. 2 Before the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires, press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The display shows the Priority Talkgroup alias. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The radio exits Priority Dispatch mode, returns to its original talkgroup, and displays the home channel alias. 74 Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it receives a dynamic regrouping command and automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a gurgle tone and the display shows the name of the dynamically regrouped channel. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the previous zone and channel that you were using. If you access a zone or channel that has been reserved as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Perform one of the following actions:

English Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to Rpgm then press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. The display shows Reprogram Rqst and Please wait. channel, once you have selected the dynamic-

regrouping position. Select Disabled Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The radio is forced to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan and Private Call features are unavailable when your radio is Select Disabled. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press to cancel and return to the Home screen. Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into Select Enabled or Select Disabled categories. Select Enabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature works on the condition at least one zone in the radio must be a non-

dynamic zone. This feature provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store frequently used channels be it conventional or trunking. These dynamic channels are saved from pre-existing (non-

dynamic) channels in the radio. This saves the time and effort from the regular navigation around the working zones and channels. User can also delete or update the list in the Dynamic Zone. 75 English Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel 1 2 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. or to <# Dynamic Zone Channels>.1 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

shown on the screen.1 If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 or to ZnPr. Press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. 3 4 or to List Selection. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Select Chan screen. 1 # indicates number of the channel on the 16-Position Switch which are numbered from 1 to 16. 76 5 or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Channel updated. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 2 or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. The display shows the dynamic channels list. or to the saved dynamic channel then press the Menu Select button directly below Del. The display shows Channel deleted screen. English 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>Blank. SmartConnect SmartConnect allows you to have voice communication by switching the device to any available network with the priority order of Wi-Fi LTE Satellite when LMR is out of range. The radio can connect through a fixed Wi-Fi access point in buildings or in-vehicle Broadband modems such as Sierra Wireless modem MG90, VLM750, or Satellite modem. When a channel is SmartConnect enabled and goes out of range, the radio displays Out of Range and SmartConnect capable icon connected to the available network, the radio displays

. Once the device is SmartConnect and SmartConnect connected icon

. 77 English NOTICE:

This feature is applicable only for APX 6000 series, APX 8000 series, and APX 8500 series. Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (ASTRO 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID

(number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to five IDs of different call types associated with it. Also, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the following types of calls:

Phone Call Private Call Selective Call Call Alert Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) 78 NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs. NOTICE:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a few contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 2 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn and proceed to the next step. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts and proceed to step 6. or to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 5 English 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. or to select the call type. Adding a New Contact Entry 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 1 2 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to [New Contact] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Name. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 79 English 4 Use the keypad to enter the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 9 Use the keypad to enter the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 5 or to [Add Number] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Type 1 <Default Type>. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . or to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. or to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . The display shows Number 1 and a blinking cursor appears. 7 8 80 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. The display shows <Entry> Stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry 1 2 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 3 or to Del and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows <Entry> confirm del?. 4 Select the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the entry, or No to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen of Contacts. English 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or until the display shows [Available] and press the Menu Select button directly below Add to add as a new entry. or until the display shows <Entry> and its associated number and press the Menu Select button directly below Rplc to replace the existing entry. The display shows <Entry> added, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. Adding a Contact to a Call List The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to add and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List This feature allows you to edit contacts in a call list. Editing an Entry Alias or to Add to CallLst or Add to PhonLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 1 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . 81 English The entries are alphabetically sorted. Editing as Entry ID 2 3 4 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. 82 1 2 3 4 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. 5 Editing a Call Type or to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. English 1 2 3 4 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to Type and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/

groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List Refer to a qualified radio technician for the maximum number of Scan Lists can be preprogrammed in your radio. 83 English A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Intelligent Priority Scan Intelligent Priority Scan feature allows you to add or delete conventional channels and trunking talkgroups from multiple system into the priority scan lists. You can add or delete priority scan list members and assign priorities using the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button. Radio displays the priority level of the scanned member. NOTICE:

Priority-One channel and Priority-Two channel member may belong to different Talkgroup Scan systems. When the radio locks onto a channel in the Intelligent Priority Scan list, radio scans for higher priority member within the same Trunking or Conventional system. 84 Viewing a Scan List 1 2 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL . or to view the members on the list. 3 Press Home screen. to exit the current display and return to the Editing the Scan List This feature allows you to change scan list members and priorities. 1 2 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL . The display shows the lists that can be changed. or to the entry you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcl to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions to select another channel that needs to be added or deleted then repeat step 3. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. Use the keypad to enter the desired channel to the desired channel. or name. Use the Mode Rocker to select the channel. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 86 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. English Changing the Scan List Status 1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan side button. 2 or to the member you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the Mode Rocker to select another scan list member. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. 85 English Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. Press the Select button one or more times to toggle between different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:

A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. 86 A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button to initiate or stop scan. or to Scan and press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. If the scan is enabled, the display shows Scan on and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows Scan Off. The radio returns to the Home screen. Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) You can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect, and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls while scanning for activity. You may respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed. or to Mon and press the Menu Select button directly below Mon. The brief Monitor on display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. English Transmitting While the Scan is On This feature allows the user to transmit using radio programmed for talkback scan and non-talkback scan. Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below Scan momentarily. 87 English Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below page or call. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing pressing the Menu Select button below either page or call. or Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise

(termed nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. 88 When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, button directly below Nuis. to Nuis and press the Menu Select or The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:

Stop and restart a scan. Mode change to another channel and back to the original channel. Turn off the radio and then turn it on again. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DYNP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Restoring Priorities in a Scan List To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, perform one of the following actions:

Turn scan off, and then on. Change channels. English Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Using the Hang Up Box (HUB) To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box

(HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. NOTICE:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. 89 English Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. If other users are away from their radios or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual call alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, if there is no answer after the maximum ring time or when you press the PTT button for an Enhanced Private Call, the radio automatically sends a call alert page. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Receiving a Call Alert Page When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. If Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled, you hear one alert tone and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. Press the PTT button to answer or press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 62 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 63 for more information on returning the call. Sending a Call Alert Page Do one of the following to send a call alert page:

NOTICE:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Sending a call alert page using the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button:

90 a. Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-

Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows Paging...<Number> or

<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu Page :

a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below to Page . or Page . or c. English d. Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows Paging...<Number> or

<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu Call :

a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below to Call . or Call . to select the required ID. 91 English c. or to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. d. To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes . To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below No . The display shows Paging...<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. 92 Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. 1 or to scroll to the VMut and press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. Voice mute is activated. 2 To turn the feature off, press the Menu Select button directly below VMut or the VMut preprogrammed button again. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below VMut or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. Voice mute on shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to all conventional dispatch calls and affiliated trunking group calls. Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) This feature allows the user to broadcast a series of distinct, recognizable tones before a voice transmission from the dispatcher or a radio. The broadcasting dispatcher or radio user can select this alert tone transmission to be sent to an individual Talkgroup or over the entire system. Specific tone or series of tones are pre-programmed into the radios to allow the dispatcher or supervisor to select a list of tones to broadcast before they make their voice transmission. Each tone is distinctive to indicate different situation or different broadcaster. The transmitting radio also plays back the tones for the broadcaster to listen. NOTICE:

The receiving radios must be configured with the Quick Call II tone in order for the radio to sound the selected tone and also to sound a preconfigured alert tone after the selected tone has sound. Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission The broadcasting or transmitting radio must be pre-

programmed to see the tone in the Quick Call II tone list. The receiving radio must also be pre-programmed to decode the tone to broadcast. English 1 2 or to QCII, and press the Menu Select button directly below QCII. or to select the tone to broadcast. 3 Press the PTT to broadcast the selected tone, or press and hold the PTT to broadcast the selected tone and transmit with your vocal transmission. You hear the radio sounds the selected tone. You can begin your call after the tone ends. 4 Release PTT to listen. Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Orange button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

93 English Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Special Considerations for Emergencies Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. One channel supports only one Emergency mode. The radio responds differently when pressing the preprogrammed Emergency button in each channel.Only one of the Emergency modes can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except if enabled, it returns to one of the following:

Tactical/Non-Revert The radio sends an emergency alarm and/or makes an emergency call on the current channel. Non-Tactical/Revert for Conventional System The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency channel to send an alarm and/or make an emergency call. 94 Exiting Emergency The dispatch console that supports this feature can be programmed to clear the emergency state of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. To exit emergency, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Exiting Emergency as Supervisor

(Trunking Only) Radios configured as Supervisor are able to cancel emergency mode of other radios. The dispatch console must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. Perform one of the following actions:

If If the emergen-

cy mode is ini-

tiated by other radios, If the emergen-

cy mode is ini-

tiated by the Supervisor, Then press and hold the Side But-

ton 1 and press the Emer-

gency button. Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold the Emer-

gency button. Press and hold the Side Button 1 and press the Emergency button. Wait for console to clear emergency. NOTICE:

The following buttons combinations are supported:

Radio Side Button 1 and Top (Orange) button. Radio Side Button 1 and accessory Orange button. Accessory 1-Dot Button and radio Top (Orange) button. English Accessory 1-Dot Button and accessory Orange button. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. A dispatcher acknowledgment Ack received display follows. For trunking system, the radio also sounds a high-pitched tone that indicates the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 2 Press and hold the EMERGENCY button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. 95 English Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.0 to 2.5 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to send an Emergency Call with hot mic to a group of radios. Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. The hot mic applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Call with hot mic on your radio. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

96 English The display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. A tone sounds to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in the radio's codeplug programming. 4 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features enabled, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display alternates Emergency and the home display. A high-pitched tone sounds, indicating that the trunked system central controller has received the alarm. A dispatcher acknowledgment (four high-

pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an Ack received display. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. 97 English Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm and Call with hot mic to a group of radios. Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms and Call with hot mic on your radio. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. If successful, the display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. The radio exits Emergency Alarm and enters the Emergency Call state when one of the following scenarios occur:

You receive the dispatcher acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. You receive no acknowledgment. The display shows No acknowledge. 98 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in your radio's codeplug programming. 4 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. NOTICE:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. Special Considerations for Emergencies If you press the emergency button while in a channel that has no emergency capability, a low-pitched tone sounds. English If the unit is out of the range of the system and/or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. If you press the emergency button, then change to a mode that has no emergency capability, the display shows No emergency and a continuous low-pitched tone sounds until a valid emergency mode is selected or until the emergency is cancelled. When an emergency is active, changing to another mode where emergency is enabled (trunked or conventional) causes an emergency alarm and/or emergency call to be active on the new mode. Impact Detection This feature allows radio to detect the force of gravity impact or the orientation changes on the vehicle in the event of vehicle crash or rollover. When these events are detected, radio activates the Emergency feature. This feature also sends out the location-based information if GPS feature is enabled. Radio automatically activates Impact Detected condition when the impact event meets or exceeds a predefined threshold. The radio must stay in this condition for a 99 English preprogrammed amount of time before the Emergency Alarm or Call is activated. In the event of hardware failure or malfunction, radio alternatively displays Impact HW and Error and a tone sounds when the radio power-up. Any button press of the radio or accessory except the programmed button for volume and backlighting functionality ceases the error message and sound. The following scenarios affects the Emergency feature activation:

Pressing a preprogrammed Emergency button cancels the Impact Detection sequence and enters the Emergency mode. Pressing the PTT button does not suspend the Impact Detection sequence. Pressing the PTT button, the Clr menu button or the preprogrammed Clear button when radio displays the impact detected display alert, exits the Impact Detected condition. Detecting Impact 1 Radio detects the impact on the vehicle and the impact event meets or exceeds the predefined threshold. One of the following scenarios occur:

Radio enters Impact Detected condition. Radio sounds alert tone and displays Impact on the screen, and Post-Alert Timer is initiated. Impact Detected condition continues for the time duration defined in the Post-Alert Timer field. When the timer expires, radio enters into Emergency mode. Radio displays Emergency on the screen. Radio enters Emergency mode immediately and displays Emergency on the screen. 100 NOTICE:

If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the radio inhibits all tones and lights on the radio. 2 Press the preprogrammed Clr menu button or the preprogrammed Clear button to exit the Impact Detected condition. Post-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time the radio needs to remain in the Impact Detected condition before radio enters into Emergency mode. When the Post-Alert Timer is initiated, the radio sounds alert tone and displays Impact on the screen. Triggering Emergency Emergency Alarm or call is triggered when you do not clear the Impact Detected condition and when the Post-Alert English Timer comes to an end. The radio sends emergency message to units within the same Talkgroup. If GPS is enabled, the radio sends GPS coordinates to dispatcher. Exiting Impact Detected Condition If there is false alarm or you do not want to enter into Emergency mode, you can exit the Impact Detected condition and prevent emergency from going off with the following operation. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Clear button to exit. Press the Menu Select button below Clr to exit. Re-Initiating Impact Detection Sequence Radio must first exit Emergency mode to re-initiate the Impact Detected sequence. Radio must return to the normal operations before the next impact can be detected. Refer to Exiting Impact Detected Condition on page 101 to exit the Impact Detected condition. 101 English Automatic Registration Service

(ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. The ARS for the radio consists of two modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-server Mode Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode The following methods are options on how to select or change the ARS Mode. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode using the 16-

Position Select knob:

102 a. Once the zone you want is displayed, turn the preprogrammed 16-Position Select knob to the desired mode. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode using the radio menu:

a. Press and hold b. Press the Menu Select button directly below to Chan . or Chan . The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. c. or or press the Mode Rocker once and rotate the Mode Rocker to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat this step. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat this step. d. Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and c. Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and English Selecting the ARS mode using the Mode Rocker :

a. After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. b. or or press the Mode Rocker once and rotate the Mode Rocker to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. User Login Feature This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application

(Example: Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. NOTICE:

A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. 103 English NOTICE:

Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (AZ), small letters (az), numbers (09), symbols (*, #, -, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight characters or more. Logging In as a User 1 or to User and press the Menu Select button directly below User. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to enter ID. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. Use the 104 keypad to type or edit a user name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined user names. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined user name. or Press and hold to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn to select the predefined user name. If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. 4 Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number will appear as asterisks. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and In progress, with Cncl . In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline, with Logt and Exit. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. English NOTICE:

To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl. Logging Out Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. NOTICE:

Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft, and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. 1 or to Logt and press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and Clear private data?. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary Private data cleared. 105 English Select No to keep your private data. Accessing the Messaging Features 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature using the radio menu. 2 or to TMS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 4 or to scroll through the main menu options. Text Messaging Service (TMS) This features allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. The types of text messages available:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:

Compose Drafts Sent Inbox NOTICE:

See Status Icons on page 45 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 49 for more information on each menu option. 106 NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B-

>C, a->b->c. During the numeric mode, except for keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message

(no multi-tap).

, pressing the 1 or to TMS. English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Comp to see the compose options. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below New to compose a new message. A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once the message is composed. 7 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send . 8 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking 107 English cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTICE:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 110 for more information. You can also select the Drft option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 114 for more information. 108 Sending a Quick Text Message Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using the preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to step 4. To access this feature using the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Comp and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. or to List. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Proceed to step 10 to send the message. English 4 5 or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 7 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 8 Perform one of the following actions to send the message:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. The message is sent after the address is selected. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. 9 or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. The message is sent after the address is selected. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTICE:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 110 for more information. 109 English Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 107 for more information. NOTICE:

The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. 2 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to indicate the message as important. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message Ensure there is an outgoing message composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 107 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to remove the priority status icon. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 110 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 107 for more information 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to request for a reply. The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. English 2 or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 107 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 107 for more information. 2 3 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to indicate the message as important. or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to request for a reply. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 111 English Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Ensure that a outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 107 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 3 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to remove the priority status icon. or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 112 Receiving a Text Message NOTICE:

When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send a notification to acknowledge that the message was received. Do one of the following to receive a text message. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message using the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Receiving a text message using the radio menu:

When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary New msg, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox The Inbox can hold up to 30 messages. 2 NOTICE:

or to read the message if the content fills more than one screen. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. to Inbx and press the Menu Select button below Sel . or Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature to Inbx and press the Menu screen. Select button below Sel . or The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. English or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Rply , Del , or Back to access the option. Select Rply to reply the message. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. NOTICE:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 48 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message NOTICE:

The original date and time stamp, address, and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. 1 or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. 113 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rply to reply to a message. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once you have completed the message. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

6 or to New and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to List and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of predefined messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. NOTICE:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 110 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 4 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 1 or to TMS. 114 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of 10 messages. The oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. English 3 4 or to Drft and press the Menu Select button below Drft. The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. or to the required text message and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. 2 3 or to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Sent. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. 115 English While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn , Del , or Back to access the option. Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. NOTICE:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 48 for more information. Sending a Sent Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn while viewing the message. 2 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send . 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. 116 or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. NOTICE:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 110 for more information. Deleting Text Messages 1 From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen, scroll through the messages. or to 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to view the delete options. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Curr to delete the current message. Press the Menu Select button directly below All to delete all the messages. Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. By default, the radio automatically enters the encrypted environment without having to manually select or clear the secure transmission. Enabling Secure Transmission English 1 or to Sec and press the Menu Select button directly below Sec. The display shows key has been enabled. and the current key if multi-

2 Monitor the mode to be sure it is not in use. 3 Press PTT button to transmit. NOTICE:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows Clear TX only. The radio does not transmit until you disable the secure mode. The radio can be configured to ignore the clear voice or unsecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. 117 English Accessing the Secure Feature 1 or to Sec. Loading Encryption Keys Refer to the Key Variable Loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. 2 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below Sec to display Secure feature screen. The display shows the Secure screen. Selecting Secure Transmissions 1 Attach the KVL to your radio. The display shows Keyloading and the name of the ASTRO OTAR profile used by the selected channel. All other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. If the Ignore Secure/Clear Switch when Strapped programming option is enabled, the radio transmits without displaying any messages in the strapped mode of operation, regardless of the Secure/Clear switch setting. This option must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. The Secure/Clear switch only applies when the radio is transmitting. 2 Press Target Load. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

For single key, select Key. For multikey, select Group. 4 Select the required keys and press Load on the KVL. The KVL indicates that keyload is successful. Managing Encryption This chapter explains the encryption feature on your radio. 118 Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types of encryption keys:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys are strapped on a one-per-channel basis, through CPS. In addition, you can have operator-

selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications, strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, a different key can be strapped to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key 1 or to Key. English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 or to scroll through the encryption keys or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. NOTICE:

When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows Key fail. When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows Illegal key. 119 English Selecting a Keyset This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. or to KSet and press the Menu Select button directly below KSet. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. or to scroll through the keysets or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. 1 2 120 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:

, the PTT button, or the Exit menu Press selection to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Erasing Encryption Keys Keys that are erased from the radio are also removed from the key database of the associated ASTRO OTAR profile. Do one of the following to erase the selected encryption keys. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Erasing the selected encryption keys using the radio menu:

a. or to Eras and press the Menu Select button directly below Eras. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. b. or to the desired encryption key or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below All to delete all keys, or press the Menu Select button directly below Sngl to delete current shown key. You can abort this screen and return to Home screen by pressing the Menu Select button directly below Abrt. English 1 or to Reky. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reky. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. Press the PTT button again, or the or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows Rekey fail. NOTICE:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the USK. Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey Ensure that the Unique Shadow Key (USK) or Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) is loaded into the radio with the Key Variable Loader (KVL) while selected to the channel with the intended ASTRO OTAR profile selection before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying Page

(Conventional Only) This feature allows you to view or define MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode. In addition to Rekey 121 English Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgments, and Power-up Acknowledgments. Some of the selected options require configuration at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even when all the encryption keys are erased. Without this UKEK key, the radio cannot be rekeyed over the air. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 122 Hear Clear NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two components of Hear Clear. Companding Reduces the channel noise, such as OTA transmission that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expander Expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. Random FM Noise Canceller (Flutter Fighter) Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-

Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are canceled without affecting the desired audio signal. English The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Changing Your Password Radio Lock This feature requires you to enter a password to unlock the radio when it powers on. The default password is 0123456789. Your service provider determines the following requirements:

Number of characters for a password Number of attempts for password entry If you exhaust all attempts at entering the correct password, the radio is deadlocked. Restart the radio to start over. NOTICE:

Depending on the configuration, the radio might carry over the number of attempts remaining even after a power cycle. If you exhaust all attempts in this configuration, the following occurs:

The radio remains inhibited All encryptions and secure keys are erased 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Unlock Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 7 Enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. 123 English If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. 7 Enter the new password. NOTICE:

If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Tactical Inh Encode Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. NOTICE:

If you enter three incorrect passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature (Secure Radios Only) This feature allows you to enable or disable the radio lock feature. It is programmable by a qualified radio technician. 1 or to LogF. 124 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LogF. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Stun. English One of the following results occur:

The display shows Pswd enabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. The display shows Pswd disabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. Radio Stun and Kill This chapter explains the radio stun and kill features. Radio Stun This feature allows you to stun another radio by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. This feature prevents an unauthorized user from using the radio. Once the radio is stunned, a password is required to re-

activate the stunned radio. Using Radio Stun 1 or to Stun. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows radio Contact IDs. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Dec fail. 125 English If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Ack. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen locked and request for password. NOTICE:

To un-stun a radio, follow the procedure in Unlocking Your Radio. Radio Kill This feature allows you to render your radio or another radio inoperable if the radio is misplaced or lost. When a radio is killed, the display turns blank and all functions of the radio are not usable. The killed radio can only be recovered from KILL with a special device. Consult an authorized and qualified technician for details. Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio Remote Kill allows you to render another radio inoperable by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. 1 or to Kill. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Kill. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows the radio Contact IDs. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

126 Use the keypad to enter the required ID. or to the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Dec fail. If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Ack. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen turns blank, the killed radio is inoperable. Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio Direct Kill allows you to make your own radio inoperable. Press and hold the programmable button (2-dot) then press the Orange button until the display turns blank and becomes inoperable. English Radio Inhibit This feature allows the system administrator to put a radio into a non-functional state when the radio is missing or in an unknown hand. The radio stays in this state regardless of its power changes. NOTICE:

If the radio has Inter-system roaming capability, the system administrator is able to put the radio into a non-functional state when missing radio roamed to another system. The radio can only be uninhibited by receiving an uninhibited command from the system administrator or by reprogramming the radio through labtool or depot CPS only. Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System NOTICE:

This feature is addressed as GPS across the manual as the naming convention of the buttons and strings remain the same as the legacy feature of GPS. 127 English The availability and accuracy of this location information

(and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. GPS Operation The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites to establish location coordinates. Therefore, maximizing your view of unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

Underground locations Under any metal, or concrete roof, or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover Inside buildings, trains, or covered vehicles 128 In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. NOTICE:

Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 10 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and the open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of 60 programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. English The radio also stores four preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between programmable waypoints and preprogrammed waypoints. Programmable Way-

points User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be delet-

ed one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Way-

points Fixed location coordi-

nates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destina-

tion coordinates are edita-

ble. Coordinates cannot be deleted. 129 English NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Location Format This feature allows you to select different display formats of GPS location. The following GPS location formats are available:

Lat/Long(DD) Lat/Long(DDM) Lat/Long(DMS) UTM/UCS SLD99 MGRS NOTICE:

When you send your location to another radio, the receiving radio displays the location in its selected format. 130 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature NOTICE:

An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Location off <Latitude>

<Longitude>. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the GPS. The display shows Previous loc <Latitude>

<Longitude>. 4 or to check the time and date of the last successful location fix. English 5 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh. The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current latitude and longitude. Toggle to see the time and date. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. 6 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 4 5 or to Loc Format and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to the preferred location format and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The front display shows the location with the selected format. NOTICE:

If the SLD99 format is selected and the range is invalid, the display shows - on the location. This situation occurs if you are using the radio outside of Sri Lanka and using the SLD99 format. To correct this situation, switch the location display format to other GPS options such as DDM, DMS, UTM/UCS, or MGRS. Selecting Location Format 1 or to Loc. Turning Off GPS 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Previous loc

<Latitude><Longitude>. 131 English 3 or to check the time and date of the last successful location fix. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 5 or to Turn Off GPS (if preprogrammed). 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to turn off the GPS. The display shows Location off. 7 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving a Waypoint Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

132 or to Save as Waypt and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to Save as Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to step 5. or to Save as Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to step 5. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. 3 Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required, or press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:

The display shows Saved as <Waypoint name>. The display shows Saved as Home. The display shows Saved as Dest.. 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Viewing a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. English 5 To view the time and date of the selected waypoint, to View and press the Menu Select button or directly below Sel. 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back, or to return to the Home screen, press or the PTT button. Editing the Alias of a Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

to scroll through the list. to select a waypoint to view the location or or information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 133 English 4 or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the alias. 6 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Waypoints main screen. 7 The display shows <Waypoint name> Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press screen. or the PTT button to return to the Home 134 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint NOTICE:

The user can only edit preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination. Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [Home] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to [Destination] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 or to Edit location and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The first number blinks. 5 Utilize the following control buttons to select the number/coordinates if required, then press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to change the number/coordinates. Press to move to the previous number/

coordinates. Press Press to move to the next number/coordinates. or to change the North (N), South (S), East (E) or West (W) direction. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Location screen. 6 Utilize the following control buttons or menu to change the number/coordinates if required then press the Menu Select button directly below OK once. Press to move one space to the left. English Press Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to move one space to the right. to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once complete setting up the new Home or Destination. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows [Home] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows [Destination] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 135 English 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required saved waypoint, and to Edit press the Menu SelectOptn. name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. or Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 4 The display shows <Waypoint name> Confirm del?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows <Waypoint name>deleted . Deleting All Saved Waypoints Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. NOTICE:

You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 4 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Delete All and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows All saved wayp confirm del?. 136 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows All saved waypnts deleted. Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. English Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only) This feature is only available for radio-to-radio voice transmissions, dispatch call and selective call in conventional ASTRO system. For radio-to-radio transmission, in order to allow the radio to show peer-

location, the voice should be directly sent from one radio to 137 English another radio without passing through any infrastructure facility such as repeaters, phone, or DVRS system. Both the transmitting radio and receiving radio must be configured to enable them to send and/or receive the GPS coordinates. You can check with your nearest qualified technician for more details. NOTICE:

If the receiving radio is operating in a Mixed Mode channel, and the voice transmission is through the conventional ASTRO system then the radio can receive the location coordinates of its peers. This feature is also operable in a Scan Active channel or Scan Talkback channel. Upon receiving a voice transmission with GPS coordinates enabled on the receiving radio, the display shows the coordinates available in full or in short coordinates. There are two different formats available. Refer to the following list for the details shown in the Peer-Location quick text. Consult your agent to pick the best format to configure to your radio. Full location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude Relative distance or direction 138 Short location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude NOTICE:

If the transmitting radio is stale at its location after a period of time, the receiving radio display shows ID:<PTT ID> Last Knwn Loc: <Coordinates>. The ID:<PTT ID> and <distance> are optional details depending on the requirements of usage. If the transmitting radio does not have GPS or the receiving radio could not decode the GPS signal of the received signal, the receiving radio display shows ID:<PTT ID> Unknown Loc. The PTT ID is optional to be shown on the display per requirements of usage. Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System) Geofence is a virtual perimeter based on the GPS to define a geographical area on earth. Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. English When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, your radio receives the Dynamic Regroup command from the system and immediately connects to a Dynamic Regroup talkgroup. The radio display shows the new selected Dynamic Regrouped talkgroup with green intelligent light for your attention. On top of that, additional features are Voice Announcement of the new channel, and also direct content display of a text message to indicate that you are currently at Geofence area. Check with your nearest qualified technician on the requirements for these enhancements to work in Geofence. Any new text messages received at Geofence shall have its content displayed immediately on the radio display. NOTICE:

If the radio is set up in DVRS, only mobile radio is supported for this feature. Entering the Geofence Area The Voice Announcement and TMS display in this feature are optional. They must be configured to enable you to hear and see these indicators. When the radio enters a Geofence area, the radio immediately sends a message ACK back to the system. The radio searches the current zone for the channel with same talkgroup assigned as the Dynamic Talkgroup and also with same system ID of current trunk system. Once matched, the radio display shows the first matched and connected channel alias. If there is no channel with matching Talkgroup ID and trunk system ID, the radio display shows the channel alias of

<DYNAMIC talkgroup>. Once the radio is connected, you hear a dynamic regroup tone, the radio display shows <DYNAMIC channel> with temporary green color intelligent backlight and you hear a Voice Announcement. NOTICE:

When the radio loses the GPS signal, the GPS icon blinks and the radio sounds two high-pitched tones repetitively to indicate that the GPS has failed to operate. The radio display shows the red intelligent light. If the first matched channel is not configured with Voice Announcement, no Voice Announcement is played. The system sends a message to your radio. The radio display shows a direct text message content without any user operation. This message indicates you are currently 139 English present in a Geofence area. This TMS remains open on the display until user presses exit/home to exit this screen. NOTICE:

If there is another incoming text message before you exit the previous message, the message screen is refreshed to show the latest message. The following procedure guides you to exit the text message received. Press the Menu Select button below Exit or return to Home screen. to The other operations are the same as normal dynamic regroup command. When the radio exits the Geofence area, your radio reverts to original channel or newly assigned talkgroup. The radio display shows the new channel together with Voice Announcement to indicate the changes. Voice Announcement of the new channel only works if that channel is configured with Voice Announcement. Mission Critical Geofence This feature allows the radio to use the GPS receiver to determine radio location at frequent intervals. 140 This feature also allows the radio to evaluate if the radio is within the Geofence area in real time. Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. Entering Mission Critical Geofence When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, the radio displays <Geofence Alias> with intelligent backlight and the user hears a Voice Announcement. Zone and channel alias of the Geofence area is displayed. If the radio is set to manual, the user can choose either to proceed with zone and channel change or cancel the change. The radio then connects to the designated talkgroup. The radio displays the talkgroup alias and dynamic regroup tone sounds. The transmit power level changes and the radio shows a direct text message content without any user operation. NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not be alerted by Voice Announcement

(VA), TMS display, Intelligent Backlight, and the Transmit Power Level. The user will be alerted only if these indicators are configured in the radio. The VA can be programmed to alert continuously or momentarily. If Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is enabled, the radio mutes any alert that is received when entering the Geofence area and unmutes when exiting. Exiting Mission Critical Geofence When the radio exits the Geofence area, the radio reverts to the original transmit power level, intelligent lighting, channel or newly assigned talkgroup. Voice announcement is cancelled or the user hears a pre-programmed VA tone. The radio displays the new channel and a message is received to indicate the changes. Trunking System Controls This chapters explains the trunking system control features in your radio. English Operating in Failsoft System The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communication during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-pitched tone and the display shows Failsoft. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. To continue in Failsoft and to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. 1 Use the MFK to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. 141 English Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until it locks onto a control channel or failsoft channel, or if it is turned off. SmartZone The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Headthe 142 RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. Site Trunking Feature If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. When this occurs, you can communicate only with the radios within your trunking site. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Site trunking. Locking and Unlocking a Site This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button. Follow the procedure to lock and unlock a site using the radio menu. 1 or to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

2 Press the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. English To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Lock. The display shows Site locked. To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Unlk. The display shows Site unlocked. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. Site Display and Search Button The Site Display and Site Search button allows you to view the name of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. to RSSI and press the Menu Select or button directly below RSSI. The display shows momentarily the name of the current site and its corresponding received RSSI. Changing the Current Site 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. Press and hold down the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. 2 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. You hear a tone and the display shows momentary Scanning Site. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. 143 English Trunked Announcement The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-Ruthless Preemption When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-type busy tone, followed by a call back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. Initiating an Announcement Ensure your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls. 1 Press the Mode Rocker to locate the announcement-group mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate the announcement. Ignition Switch Options This feature allows the user to select the functionality of the radio based on the Ignition State of the radio users vehicle. Blank This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. 144 Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any Trunking dispatch communications since the radio will not affiliate with the Trunking systems. PTT Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the Trunking systems. Required This option allows the user to power on the radio only if the Ignition is present. The radio can be powered off either through Power button press or when Ignition is lost. In addition, the radio automatically powers on when the Ignition is present only if the radio was turned off due to the ignition being removed. English This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Soft Power Off This option allows the user to power on the radio either through Power button presses or when the Ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button was pressed or the Ignition was removed, the radio will be turned off. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Ignition Only Power Up This option allows the user to power on the radio only when Ignition is detected and will power off when it is removed. The radio does not power on or off with the Power button press. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires or when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. 145 English NOTICE:

While Ignition is not present, the radio powers-off with a radio-user Power Off button/knob selection if the radio was powered-up with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press or Ignition Auto Power Off timer is running. While Ignition is present, the radio powers-on with a radio-user Power On button/knob selection only if the radio was powered-down with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer. Using Emergency Power Up This feature allows the user to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a footswitch. In addition, when the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit, this feature will not be available to the users. Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. 146 Auto Power Off Timer Auto Power Off feature powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. There are two different versions of Auto Power Off:

Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the radio is power-on. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. Ignition Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the vehicle key is removed, when the voltage at the ignition sense is removed. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. When the vehicle key is reapplied, the voltage at the ignition is reconnected, this timer is stopped. Although both Inactivity Auto Power Off and Ignition Auto Power Off can be enabled together, Ignition Auto Power Off timer is mutually exclusive with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer when both are enabled. During the last two minutes of the timer countdown, the radio generates continuous low tone and blinks Powering Off warning on the display until the timer expires or the timer is reset. The radio automatically powers off after the timer expires. The duration of the timer is preprogrammed. English When you press the preprogrammed button or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, Talkaround/

Direct, or Transmit Inhibit. Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25) A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator together with audio alert sent to radios at a site or a few sites to notify the users when there is a special situation that they need to be aware of. Your radio supports up to 250 site aliases. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. Upon the activation of a SSA, the receiving radios display the alert alias and generate the periodic alert tone. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone, or channel the user has just been assigned to. This feature is useful when you have difficulty reading the content on the display. The available voice announcement priority options are:

High Voice announcement is enabled even when the radio is receiving calls. Low Voice announcement is disabled when the radio is receiving calls. Voice announcement is available in the following scenarios:

When the radio powers up. When you change to a new zone. When you change to a new channel. When you press the Menu Select button, preprogrammed button, or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct, or Transmit Inhibit. 147 English NOTICE:

Alert alias, alert tone, and alert period can be preprogrammed. Alert period is the duration for the radio to repeat the alert tone. An interval of 5 seconds might impact the battery life of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details. When mixing SSA with received voice audio, the SSA alert is reduced in volume to ensure that the voice message is still heard clearly. Therefore, it is important that the SSA audio files are created with clear loud audio to ensure they can still be heard clearly when played at reduced levels. 3 4 5 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 148 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 4 If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. English or to [SiteID Entry] to send alert through the manual entry. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the desired Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows the Select Alert screen. If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. 6 The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. 149 English If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site ID>does not exist. 7 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. 3 150 4 5 or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. English If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. 151 English 4 or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias>does not exist. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 152 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SiteID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the required Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. One of the following scenarios occur:

If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows Sending req. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the single site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. If the single site does not exist, the display shows

<Site ID> does not exist. 4 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. English or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all sites stop. Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 153 Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels This feature enables the mode of the radio to be changed based on the HUB on/off-hook state on all control heads. Whenever the radio goes off-hook, the radio changes to a preprogrammed zone channel specifically for off-hook state. When the user returns the radio to on-hook state, it reverts to its previous channel zone before the radio goes off-hook. When the radio is in off-hook state, manual mode change

(including mode change triggered by third party devices) is allowed. Radio reverts back to the last mode before off-

hook once the radio goes on-hook. English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. 154 NOTICE:

During PL Defeats and Suspend Scan during on-

hook state, the radio is converted to work in new channel and Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. We do not recommend that Hub Suspend Scan"

and "Channel Change on Off Hook" to be enabled simultaneously. During Dynamic Regroup channel selector lock state, Emergency, Transmit Inhibit, radio lock, or when external key loaded is attached to the radio, the Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. The Off Hook State for APX Dual Radio Setup For Dual Radio, the state of the HUB on the unselected radio is always considered as on-hook. The state of the HUB of the selected radio is always reflected as the actual states of the HUB. When the HUB is placed off-

hook, the selected radio makes channel change per CPS configuration, and the unselected radio does not trigger channel change. With Channel Change on Off Hook enabled, when the HUB is placed off-hook, and there is radio switch, the new selected radio moves to the target channel zone on off hook, and the new unselected radio reverts to the last user selected channel before off-hook. English The Off Hook State for Multiple Radios Setup When there are multi-control heads connected, the states of these HUBs reflect the active control head(s) state. Any HUB placed off-hook by active control head(s) makes the radio goes off-hook state. Only when all HUBs are placed on-hook, the radio can be in on-

hook state. NOTICE:

This feature needs to be carefully enabled. Users must also be familiar with the functionality of this feature as they have to be aware that removing the microphone triggers mode change most of the time. Low Voltage Threshold Warning This feature is created for APX mobile radio to provide warning for low voltage threshold. A specific external device is attached to the radio to monitor the automobile voltage. When the car battery went lower than a pre-defined threshold, the external device asserts the Vehicular Interface Port (VIP) input to the radio. When the voltage of the battery becomes normal, the external device de-asserts the VIP input to the radio. 155 English The voltage threshold is customized in the external device settings. When the VIP switch turns on, the VIP asserts input to the radio. The radio immediately initiates a 15 seconds of low Voltage Pre-alert Timer. If the status of the VIP changed before this time-out timer ends, the radio returns to normal operation. If the status from the VIP unchanged when the time-out timer ends, the radio shows Low battery on the display and also sounds low battery/voltage alert tone. The radio sounds a short, high-pitched tone immediately after the PTT button is released. NOTICE:

If the mobile radio does not have a control head connected, the bricks can only alert the user with battery alert tone and the transmit chirp. Wi-Fi You can connect your radio to a Wi-Fi network for wireless programming. 156 NOTICE:

The Wi-Fi Network Name (SSID) for the radio to connect to must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the preprogrammed button:

a. To toggle the Wi-Fi on or off, press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. This button must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the radio menu button:

a.

-

-

or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. If the display shows WiFi Status being Off, press the Menu Select button directly below On. If the display shows WiFi Status as Searching, Connecting, Connected or No Service, press the Menu Select button directly below Off to turn Wi-Fi off. Selecting WiFi Network This feature allows you to view and select the available WiFi network. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi to enter WiFi screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the WiFi. Radio starts searching for available network. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below List. Radio displays available network selection and the network signal strength. If the radio displays No network available, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh to search for available networks. English 4 Press or to scroll through the list and press Menu Select button directly below Sel to connect to the selected network. Radio displays the WiFi status, the selected network, and the signal strength. NOTICE:

The List and Rfsh buttons are not available when WiFi is searching or connecting to network. Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Long press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. to WiFi and press the Menu Select or button directly below WiFi. The display shows the current status of the Wi-Fi as described next. Searching Looking for available Wi-Fi networks that have been preprogrammed into the radio. 157 English Connecting In the process of connecting to a found Wi-Fi network. Connected Connected to one of the preprogrammed Wi-Fi networks. No Service No available networks or connection with one of the networks failed. If the radio is Wi-Fi connected, you see a Wi-Fi on the display.In signal strength indicator, addition, the WiFi menu shows Connected under the connection Status heading, what network you are connected to under the Network heading, and the signal strength to that network under the Sig Strength heading. Viewing Recent Calls This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) NOTICE:

The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Viewing recent calls using the radio menu:

2 Press to exit. Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. 158 or to Rcnt. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt to access the Recent Calls feature screen. c. or to scroll through the list. d. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu

, or Select button directly below Exit, press the PTT button. Do one of the following to select the power level. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. English The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Selecting the Power Level NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Power level Low enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power level High enables a longer transmitting distance. Selecting the Power Level using the Transmit Power Level switch:

a. Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level using the radio menu:

or to Pwr. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Pwr. The display shows Low power and the low power icon or the display shows High power and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. 159 English NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Do one of the following to select a radio profile. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting a radio profile using the preprogrammed Profile button:

a. Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to scroll through the menu selections. or to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Selecting a radio profile using the radio menu:

160 a. or to Prfl and press the Menu Select button directly below Prfl to access the Profiles feature screen. or to scroll through the menu selections. b. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radio display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio front display. Perform one of the following actions:

To toggle the backlight on or off, press the DIM button. To turn the backlight on, press any key of the keypad, the Menu Select or Menu Navigation buttons, or any programmable radio controls or buttons Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. Turning the tones on or off using the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button:

a. To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button. English Turning Voice Mute On or Off You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Turning Voice Mute off or on using the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:

a. To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off using the radio menu:

or to VMut. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. Turning the tones on or off using the radio menu:

or to Mute. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. The display shows momentary Tones off, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary Tones on, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. The display momentarily shows Voice mute off, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or the display shows momentary Voice mute on, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer This feature turns off the transmitter of your radio. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. 161 English The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 15 to 465 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. NOTICE:

You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. 1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a continuous talk prohibit tone. After four seconds, the transmission is cut-off and the LED goes out. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. 1 or to Sql. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sql. The display shows Squelch, a volume bar and XX value for the current squelch. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below +

to increase the squelch volume. Press the Menu Select button directly below -

to decrease the squelch volume. 4 Press to return to the selected channel. 162 Analog Options Tone Private Line, Digital Private-Line, and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Option Selective Switch Option Carrier squelch Tone Private Line or Digi-

tal Private-Line Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch Normal Squelch Result You hear all digital traffic. You hear any digital traffic having the correct net-

work access code. English Result You hear any digital traffic having the correct net-

work access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch that preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. One of the following occurs:

The radio plays the active transmission on the channel. The radio is muted if no activity is present. 163 English Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. The ID number of your radio is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, the ID of your radio is sent continuously during the voice message. Smart PTT (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When Smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. The following table shows the variations of Smart PTT. Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Description You cannot transmit if traffic is detected on the channel. 164 Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code Quick-Key Override Description You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if se-

cure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Your radio must be pre-

programmed to allow you to use Quick-Key Over-

ride. This feature works with either one of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-in-

hibit state by quick-keying the radio (press PTT but-

ton twice within the pre-

programmed time limit). Transmit Inhibit This feature is available for APCO 25 trunking, Type II trunking and Conventional operations for all APX radios. When Transmit Inhibit feature is enabled, the radio stops all transmission including voice and data. The radio can receive messages but is not able to reply the acknowledgment request of the received message. User can physically control the transmission of the radio especially during operation in hazardous environments with this feature. An environment is considered hazardous when the power emitted by the radio power amplifier could initiate an explosion or other dangerous reactions. When the Transmit Inhibit feature is disabled, the radio functions according to its normal operations. The radio sounds alert tone when user enters or exits this feature and also when PTT is pressed. NOTICE:

Acknowledgment of any messages required from the radio is not transmitted if the Transmit Inhibition is enabled. Enabling Transmit Inhibition Perform one of the following actions:

to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button or below TxIn. English Turn off the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. NOTICE:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit using the menu and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit on. You hear a sequence of short, low-high tones to indicate transmission is inhibited. Pressing PTT triggers the radio sounds a constant short, low-pitched tone (reject tone). NOTICE:

The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change after the radio powers up. The softkey TxIn is created to ease the user of inhibition transmission besides relying solely on Ignition Sense Line. Only if the Ignition Sense Line is on, the softkey TxIn works. If the Ignition Sense Line is on, user can always turn on or off the Transmit Inhibition using the softkey TxIn; but when the Ignition Sense Line is off, function of softkey TxIn is suspended, and the Transmit Inhibition function is always off. 165 English If PTT TX Inhibit is enabled, when using multi control head with one active configuration, with the PTT pressed on the active control head, any press on the programmable button of the other control head which meant for that control head to be active control head will cause an unstoppable long low-pitched tone (Talk Prohibit Tone). The display shows Tx inhibit. This behavior can be stopped by pressing PTT button again on the active control head Disabling Transmit Inhibition Perform one of the following actions:

to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button or below TxIn. Turn on the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. NOTICE:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit using the softkey and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit off. You hear a sequence of short, high-low tone (Transmit Inhibit b. 166 Off tone) to indicate transmission is back to normal operation. Instant Recall This feature allows the user to save the last received call and playback the recorded call. The feature buffers all incoming audio over the air and stored when the audio is saved. Saving and Playback Calls Perform one of the following to save and playback the recorded calls. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Playback and saving the recorded calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt. or to Recent Convs and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view the recent conversations. c. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Play. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the recorded calls in chronological order. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Stop to stop the radio playback. b. c. English or to Saved Convs and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view the recent conversations. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Play. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the saved calls in chronological order. e. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Save. Radio displays Audio Saved momentarily. f. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. g. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Recent calls are lost after radio power cycle if the calls are not saved. Playback the saved calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Stop to stop the radio playback. e. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. f. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving the recorded calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Long press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to save the recorded calls. Radio displays Audio Saved momentarily. Radio plays the saved call automatically if call saving is successful. 167 English A tone sounds if call saving is not successful. Playback the saved calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to playback the saved calls. b. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button again to skip to the next saved call. If there is only a single saved call, the playback skips to the end of the call. Radio auto playback the most recent incoming call followed by saved calls in chronological order. Radio displays the playback status. 168 NOTICE:

Received call overwrites the ongoing record playback. User can short press the programmable button within three seconds to continue the playback and ignore the receiving call. User can short press the programmable button to trigger playback when the radio is receiving call to overwrite the receiving call. Playback can be halted by any tone and button press except for specific buttons. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. General Radio Information Your radio contains the following information:

Radio Information Control Assignments IP Display Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following radio information:

Host Version Secure Version CH 14 Version (depending on the number of channels connected.) Siren Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size and Type RF Band(s) Processor Version MCHIB Version CHIB Version English TIB Version TRC Version VRS Version URC Version DVRS App Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS DSP Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS CP Version (only when DVRS is available) AUX CH Version Codeplug Alias (Optional) NOTICE:

To return to the Home screen, press at any time. 1 2 or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. or to Radio Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Information screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

169 English or to scroll through the various information. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen . Press to return to the Home screen. Viewing the IP Information This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. NOTICE:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Viewing the Control Assignments This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 31 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. to Info and press the Menu Select or button directly below Info. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. to Info and press the Menu Select or button directly below Info. 2 or to IP Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:

170 or to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Control Map screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights English or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. External Alarms (Horn and Lights) All control heads can be equipped for external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. NOTICE:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) until it is turned off. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows Horn/Lites off. Using Permanent Horn and Lights If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically turn on when the radio powers up. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected alarm(s). The display briefly shows the enabled alarms. 171 English Changing the Selected Alarms 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below H+L to turn on both horn and lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Lgts to turn on the lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Horn to turn on the horn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose H+L, the display shows Horn/

Lites on. If you choose Lgts, the display shows Lights on. If you choose Horn, the display shows Horn on. An Off entry is shown at the softkey when one of the alarms is active. Selecting Off deactivates the current active alarm. 172 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On When you receive a call with the Alarms turned on, you hear the vehicles horn sounds for 4 seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. The display shows the type of call received (Call, Page, or Phone) and the selected mode name. The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). The Volume Rocker and the Dim button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. The Volume Rocker and the Dim button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). English Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s). The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s) and exit the Horn and Lights feature. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. Front Panel Programming You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Programming (FPP) to enhance the use of your radio. Entering the Front Panel Programming Mode You can follow this procedure to enter the front panel programming (FPP) mode on your radio. Federal 1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions and proceed to the next step:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 173 English Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. If the password is not entered, the radio displays the non-password protected zones only. 3 Press or to select Zn/Ch. 4 Press 5 Press or to select the required zone. or to select the required channel. The display shows the radio parameter screen. 6 Press edit. or to select the required parameter to Non-Federal 1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen 174 2 Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 3 Press or to select Zn/Ch. 4 Press 5 Press or to select the required zone. or to select the required channel. The display shows the radio parameter screen. 6 Press edit. or to select the required parameter to Editing FPP Mode Parameters Perform the following actions as required while navigating through the feature parameters. Press Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to edit the parameter values. Press the Back button to return to the previous screen. Accessories Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all radio models and/or bandsplits. Refer to the radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. Visit http://www.motorolasolutions.com to know more about the accessories supported by this radio. NOTICE:

GPS only antenna is used in either a single band UHF or 700/800 application where the Public Safety Microphone (PSM) is used with the corresponding PSM antenna. This antenna is only for GPS reception and cannot be used for receive/transmit operation at UHF, VHF, or 700/800. This antenna is never to be used on the PSM. English 175 English Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude 176 bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

-

-

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. NOTICE:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. ber 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

English Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 Receive 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 177 English 16 17**

18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

178 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 65 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources NOTICE:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. NOTICE:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impe-

dance RS232 18 V USB 3.6 V SB9600 5 V 115 Kbps 12 Mbps 9.6 Kbps 5000 90 120 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime 179 English Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to portable and mobile subscriber radio products. ACK Acknowledgment of communication. Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. ASTRO conventional Motorola Solutions standard for wireless analog or digital conventional communications. Autoscan A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. AUX CH Auxiliary Control Head. Analog Signal An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. ARS Automatic Registration Service ASTRO 25 Motorola Solutions standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Call Alert Privately paging an individual by sending an audible tone. Carrier Squelch Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receiver audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. Central Controller 180 English A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It Monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. Channel A group of characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. CHIB Control Head Interface Board. Control Channel In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-way/data-communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Conventional Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater. Frequencies are shared with other users without the aid of a central controller to assign communications channels. Conventional Scan List A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Cursor A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on a display. Deadlock Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio.The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. Digital Private Line A type of digital communications that utilizes privacy call, as well as memory channel and busy channel lock out to enhance communication efficiency. Digital Signal An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. Dispatcher 181 English An individual who has radio-system management duties and responsibilities. Digital Signal Processor A microcontroller specifically designed for performing the mathematics involved in manipulating analog information, such as sound, that has been converted into a digital form. DSP also implies the use of a data compression technique. Dynamic Regrouping A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. DVRS Digital Vehicular Repeater System. ESN Electrical Serial Number. FCC Federal Communications Commission. Hang up Disconnect. Key Variable Loader (KVL) A portable, handheld, rugged device used to transfer encryption keys to a target device. Encryption keys can be entered manually by the KVL user, auto-generated by the KVL, obtained from or shared with another KVL, or downloaded from a Key Management Facility (KMF). Liquid-Crystal Display (LCD) An LCD uses two sheets of polarizing material with a liquid-

crystal solution between them. An electric current passed through the liquid causes the crystals to align so that light cannot pass through them. Failsoft A backup system that allows communication in a non-

trunked, conventional mode if the trunked system fails. Light Emitting Diode (LED) An electronic device that lights up when electricity is passed through it. 182 MCHB Millennium Control Head Board. MDC Motorola Solutions Digital Communications. Menu Entry A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display. Selection of a feature is controlled by the programming of the buttons on the side of the radio. Monitor Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. English Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. Non-tactical/revert The user will talk on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Over-The-Air Rekeying Allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram the encryption keys in the radio. Page A one-way alert with audio and/or display messages. Personality A set of unique features specific to a radio. Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). PIN Personal Identification Number. Network Access Code Preprogrammed 183 English A software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. Private (Conversation) Call A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the group. Private Line (PL) A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Programmable A radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-to-Talk PTT-The switch or button usually located on the left side of the radio which, when pressed, causes the radio to transmit. When the PTT is released, the unit returns to receive operation. Radio Frequency RF-The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light (approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). 184 Repeater Remote transmit/receive facility that re-transmits received signals in order to improve communications range and coverage (conventional operation). Selective Call A feature that allows you to call a selected individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. selective switch Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Squelch Muting of audio circuits when received signal levels fall below a pre-determined value. With carrier squelch, all channel activity that exceeds the preset squelch level can be heard. Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) DSP interface to peripherals that consists of a clock signal line, a frame synchronization signal line, and a data line. Standby An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Status Calls Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. Tactical/non-revert The user will talk on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. TalkAround Bypassing a repeater and talking directly to another unit for local unit-to-unit communications. Talkgroup An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communications path. TMS Text Messaging Service. English Trunking The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users. Allows users to share a smaller number of frequencies because a repeater or communications path is assigned to a talkgroup for the duration of a conversation. Trunking Priority Monitor scan list A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. USK Unique shadow key. UTC Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard (formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time; everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym = Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. 185 English VRS Vehicular Repeater System. Zone A grouping of channels. 186 Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX Mobile Ra-

dios Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty English period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA 187 English SOLUTIONS disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS offers the following optional extended service contracts. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) COMPREHENSIVE Provides for extended hardware repair coverage INCLUDING CHEMICAL, LIQUID, FIRE, AND OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE. Comprehensive coverage is available in conjunction with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty and starts from the FIRST DAY the radio is put into use. Service performed under this plan consists of repair or replacement of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay the inbound shipping charges only with use of the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS designated delivery service. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) LITE Provides extended hardware normal wear and tear repair coverage beginning AFTER MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty period expires. Service performed under this plan consists of repair of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH 188 English PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 189 English 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. 190 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept English its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, nor will MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. VIII. For Australia Only This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. Motorola Solutions Australias limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, 191 Motorola Solutions Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. English please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website: http://

www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/Contact_Us for the most updated warranty terms. SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola Solutions maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola Solutions to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola Solutions makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola Solutions service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola Solutions dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola Solutions two-way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the 192

 

 

APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX MOBILE O5 CONTROL HEAD APX 5500, APX 6500, APX 6500Li, APX 7500, APX 8500 USER GUIDE June 2019 2019 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved

*6875947M01*

6875947M01-HK English Contents Declaration of Conformity.............................................11 Important Safety Information........................................ 13 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada)................15 Software Version.......................................................... 16 Computer Software Copyrights.................................... 17 Documentation Copyrights........................................... 18 Disclaimer.....................................................................19 Read Me First...............................................................20 Notations Used in This Manual..........................20 Radio Maintenance............................................21 Radio Care..............................................21 Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio......................................23 Cleaning the External Plastic Surface.........................................23 Additional Performance Enhancement.............. 24 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data.....................24 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR)........ 24 CrossTalk Prevention............................. 24 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID)............ 24 2 SecureNet...............................................24 Over-the-Air Rekeying............................ 25 P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System

(DVRS)................................................... 25 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements...............................25 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You............................................................. 26 Preparing Your Radio for Use...................................... 27 Turning On the Radio ....................................... 27 Adjusting the Volume.........................................28 Validating Compatibility During Power Up.........28 Radio Controls..............................................................30 Control Head and Microphone...........................30 Programmable Features....................................31 Assignable Radio Functions................... 31 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions..34 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions.........35 Menu Select Buttons...............................35 Advance Programmable Buttons............ 35 Home Button...........................................36 4-Way Navigation Button........................ 37 Data Feature Button............................... 37 Volume Knob.......................................... 37 Using the Mode Knob............................. 37 Keypad.............................................................. 37 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode..38 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode..40 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode......42 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode.......................................................44 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................... 46 Status Indicators...........................................................47 Status Icons.......................................................47 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators.........50 TMS Status Icons................................... 50 TMS Menu Options.................................51 LED Indicator.....................................................52 Intelligent Lighting Indicators............................. 53 Alert Tones ....................................................... 54 General Radio Operation............................................. 58 Selecting a Zone................................................58 Selecting a Radio Channel................................ 58 English Selecting a Channel by using Channel Search Button................................................................ 59 Mode Select Feature......................................... 59 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey....................................................60 Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button..................................................... 60 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call....... 61 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call.........................................61 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)................................62 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)..............63 Methods to Make a Radio Call.......................... 63 Making a Talkgroup Call ........................ 64 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only).... 64 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)....................................................... 65 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button............................................... 66 Monitor Feature................................................. 67 Monitoring a Channel..............................67 3 English Monitoring Conventional Mode............... 67 Advanced Features...................................................... 69 Using ViQi..........................................................69 Advanced Call Features.................................... 74 Calling a Phone Not in the List............... 74 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)....................................................... 74 Receiving a Selective Call........... 74 Making a Selective Call................75 Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only)...................................... 76 Selecting a Talkgroup.................. 76 Sending a Status Call............................. 77 Making a Priority Dispatch Calls............. 77 Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only).... 78 Requesting a Reprogram

(Trunking Only)............................ 78 Classification of Regrouped Radios..........................................79 Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP)....... 79 Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel...........80 4 Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection...................................... 80 Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone..............................81 Multiple Control Head Features.........................81 Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head....................................................... 82 All Active Mode....................................... 82 Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode....................................... 83 One Active Mode.................................... 83 SmartConnect....................................................85 Contacts............................................................ 85 Making a Private Call from Contacts...... 86 Adding a New Contact Entry...................87 Deleting a Contact Entry.........................88 Adding a Contact to a Call List............... 88 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List.......................................................... 89 Editing an Entry Alias...................89 Editing as Entry ID....................... 89 Editing a Call Type.......................90 Scan Lists.......................................................... 90 Intelligent Priority Scan........................... 91 Viewing a Scan List................................ 91 Editing the Scan List............................... 92 Changing the Scan List Status............... 92 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status......................................................93 Scan.................................................................. 94 Turning Scan On or Off...........................94 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only)....................................... 94 Transmitting While the Scan is On......... 95 Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan.. 95 Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan.............................................95 Deleting a Nuisance Channel................. 95 Restoring a Nuisance Channel............... 96 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On....................................................... 96 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List...........96 English Using the Hang Up Box (HUB)............... 97 Call Alert Paging................................................97 Receiving a Call Alert Page.................... 97 Sending a Call Alert Page.......................98 Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert........................................................ 99 Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) .......................................... 100 Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission...100 Emergency Operation......................................100 Exiting Emergency................................102 Exiting Emergency as Supervisor

(Trunking Only)..................................... 102 Sending an Emergency Alarm.............. 103 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only)..................................................... 104 Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only).............................. 104 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call.................................... 105 Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic.......................................... 106 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm...... 107 5 English 6 Special Considerations for Emergencies.........................................107 Impact Detection...................................108 Detecting Impact........................ 108 Post-Alert Timer......................... 109 Triggering Emergency................109 Exiting Impact Detected Condition....................................109 Re-Initiating Impact Detection Sequence...................................109 Automatic Registration Service (ARS).............110 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode.. 110 User Login Feature............................... 111 Logging In as a User..................112 Logging Out............................... 113 Text Messaging Service (TMS)....................... 114 Accessing the Messaging Features......114 Composing and Sending a New Text Message............................................... 115 Sending a Quick Text Message............116 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message............................... 118 Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message............................ 118 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message......................... 118 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message............................ 119 Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message......................... 119 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message.................................... 119 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message.................................... 120 Receiving a Text Message.........120 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox.................................... 121 Replying to a Received Text Message.................................... 121 Accessing the Drafts Folder.......122 Sent Text Messages.................. 123 Deleting Text Messages............ 124 Secure Operations...........................................125 Enabling Secure Transmission............. 125 Accessing the Secure Feature..............125 Selecting Secure Transmissions.......... 125 Managing Encryption............................ 126 Loading Encryption Keys........... 126 Multikey Feature........................ 126 Selecting an Encryption Key...... 127 Selecting a Keyset..................... 127 Erasing Encryption Keys............128 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey.........................................129 MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying Page (Conventional Only)..........129 Infinite UKEK Retention............. 129 Hear Clear..................................130 Radio Lock.......................................................130 Changing Your Password..................... 131 Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password.............................................. 131 Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature (Secure Radios Only).............. 132 Radio Stun and Kill.......................................... 132 English Radio Stun............................................ 132 Using Radio Stun....................... 133 Radio Kill...............................................133 Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio..........................................134 Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio................................. 134 Radio Inhibit.....................................................135 Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System...............................................135 GPS Operation..................................... 135 GPS Performance Enhancement......... 136 The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)..................................................... 136 Location Format....................................137 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature................................................. 138 Selecting Location Format.................... 138 Turning Off GPS................................... 139 Saving a Waypoint................................139 Viewing a Saved Waypoint................... 140 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint............. 141 7 English 8 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint. 142 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint....... 143 Deleting All Saved Waypoints...............143 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint........................ 144 Location Feature in Emergency Mode..144 Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only)................................ 145 Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System)........ 146 Entering the Geofence Area................. 146 Mission Critical Geofence..................... 147 Entering Mission Critical Geofence.......148 Exiting Mission Critical Geofence......... 148 Trunking System Controls............................... 149 Operating in Failsoft System.................149 Out-of-Range Radio..............................149 SmartZone............................................ 149 Site Trunking Feature........................... 150 Locking and Unlocking a Site............... 150 Site Display and Search Button............ 151 Viewing the Current Site............ 151 Changing the Current Site......... 151 Trunked Announcement....................... 151 Initiating an Announcement....... 152 Ignition Switch Options.................................... 152 Blank.....................................................152 Tx Inhibit............................................... 152 PTT Tx Inhibit....................................... 152 Required............................................... 153 Soft Power Off...................................... 153 Ignition Only Power Up......................... 153 Using Emergency Power Up.................153 Auto Power Off Timer........................... 154 Voice Announcement ..................................... 154 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25)..................155 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site

..............................................................155 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry....................................156 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites....157 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites...................................... 158 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site........................................................159 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry.............................160 Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites...160 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites...................................... 161 Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels

.........................................................................162 Low Voltage Threshold Warning..................... 163 Wi-Fi................................................................ 164 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off........................ 164 Selecting WiFi Network.........................164 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio............................... 165 Utilities............................................................. 166 Viewing Recent Calls............................166 Selecting the Power Level.................... 166 Selecting a Radio Profile...................... 167 Controlling the Display Backlight.......... 168 Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off....168 Turning Voice Mute On or Off...............169 Using the Time-Out Timer.................... 169 English Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features................................................170 Analog Options.......................... 170 Digital Options............................170 Using the PL Defeat Feature................ 171 Digital PTT ID Support..........................171 Smart PTT (Conventional Only)............171 Transmit Inhibit..................................... 172 Enabling Transmit Inhibition.......172 Disabling Transmit Inhibition......173 Instant Recall........................................ 174 Saving and Playback Calls........ 174 General Radio Information....................176 Accessing the Radio Information

................................................... 176 Viewing the IP Information......... 177 Viewing the Control Assignments.............................. 178 External Alarms (Horn and Lights)........178 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights......................................... 179 9 English Using Permanent Horn and Lights......................................... 179 Changing the Selected Alarms.. 179 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On............................180 Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms..........................180 Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms........................................180 Front Panel Programming.....................181 Entering the Front Panel Programming Mode................... 181 Editing FPP Mode Parameters.. 182 Accessories................................................................ 183 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range.... 184 Special Channel Assignments.........................184 Emergency Channel............................. 184 Non-Commercial Call Channel............. 184 Operating Frequency Requirements............... 185 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies.....................187 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources...................................................187 10 Glossary..................................................................... 188 Limited Warranty........................................................ 195 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.................... 195 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:........................................... 195 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:........................... 196 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:................................197 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.....197 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:...........................................................197 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:................................................. 198 VII. GOVERNING LAW:.................................. 199 VIII. For Australia Only.................................... 199 SERVICE.........................................................200 Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the following FCC logo. Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) English Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that APX MobileAPX NEXT conforms to FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 11 English NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 12 Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way RadiosRF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios CAUTION:

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

English http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum

(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter is approved by Industry Canada to operate with a Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. 13 English NOTICE:

Setting up the radio as an RF Modem takes complete control of the radio. In this mode, the radio no longer responds to button and PTT presses nor will it unmute to voice activity. This mode is designed to receive and pass specifically formatted over the air data to a tethered computer with RF modem enabled applications. This mode can only be exit by reprogramming the radio with Customer Programming Software (CPS) to not operate in RF modem mode and cycling power. 14 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada's license-exempt RSS's per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. English 15 English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R19.00.00 R01.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 176 to determine the software version of your radio. See Accessing the Radio Information to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the supported features. 16 Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. English 17 English Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 18 Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola Solutions reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola Solutions does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. English 19 English Read Me First This User Guide covers the basic operation of the radio. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. If you attempt to use features which are mutually exclusive, one or more of the following occurs:

The feature control or icon is grayed out. A negative tone sounds. The radio displays Feature not allowed. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of Warning, Caution, and Notice. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. WARNING:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. 20 CAUTION:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. NOTICE:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Home button or Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. PHONE Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the display of the radio. This means Press the right side of the 4-Way Navigation Button. Radio Maintenance This chapter covers the radio and battery care. Radio Care Proper radio usage and care assures efficient operation and long life for the product. The following are recommendations and warnings when using the radio. English CAUTION:

Your radio casting has a vent port that allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Never poke this vent with any objects, such as needles, tweezers, or screwdrivers.This could create leak paths into the radio and the radio submergibility will be lost. Your radio is designed to be submerged to a maximum depth of 6 feet, with a maximum submersion time of 2 hours. Exceeding either maximum limit may result in damage to the radio. Elastomer seals used in portable radios can age with time and environmental exposure. Therefore, Motorola Solutions recommends that radios be checked annually as a preventive measure in order to assure the waterseal integrity of the radio. Motorola Solutions details the disassembly, test, and reassembly procedures along with necessary test equipment in the Service Manual. If the radio battery contact is exposed to water without the battery attached, dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio. Turn the radio over with the battery 21 English contact facing down and shake the radio so any trapped water can escape. The battery contacts must be dry before attaching a battery or a short circuit of the contacts could occur. Avoid subjecting the radio to an excess of liquids. Accessory connector cover must be attached to the radio side accessory connector if an accessory is not attached to the radio. If the radio is submerged or exposed to a high force water spray, such as from a hose, remove the side accessory connector or accessory connector cover immediately and check to make sure no water was forced into the accessory connector/radio interface. Rinse and dry the area and re-attach the accessory or accessory connector cover if leakage occurs. If the radio is exposed to a corrosive environment, such as salt water or corrosive gases or liquids, rinse and clean the radio immediately to prevent damage to radio materials, especially plated surfaces. Refer to Cleaning Your Radio for detailed instructions. Remove the battery and the antenna before cleaning. 22 If the radio has been submerged in water, shake the radio well so that any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port can be removed. Otherwise, the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio. Do not disassemble the radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Any radio maintenance should be performed only by a qualified radio technician. Underwriter Laboratory (UL) certified radios should only be opened and serviced by UL approved service centers. Opening or repairing at unauthorized locations will invalidate the radios hazardous location rating. Do not pound, drop, or throw the radio unnecessarily. The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems. CAUTION:

The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. English Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio CAUTION:

Do not use solvents to clean your radio. Spirits may permanently damage the radio housing. Do not submerge the radio in detergent solution. 1 Combine one teaspoon of mild diswashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls or crevices. 3 Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. Cleaning the External Plastic Surface The detergent-water solution should be applied sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush to work all loose dirt away from the radio. A soft, absorbent, lint-free cloth or tissue should be used to remove the solution and dry the radio. 23 English Make sure that no water remains entrapped near the connectors, cracks, or crevices. Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality, and efficiency of the radios. ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. Add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation to improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication such as failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the 24 CrossTalk Prevention This feature prevents crosstalk scenarios from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the internal SSI clock rate of the radio. This subsequently reduces the possibility of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV&D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. Over-the-Air Rekeying The Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram encryption keys in the radio after a rekey request. Single-system OTAR Single-system OTAR is supported by a single Key Management Facility (KMF). If the radio moves from one secure system to another, it must be reprogrammed to the new system. Multi-system OTAR Multi-system OTAR is supported by multiple KMFs. After an initial programming, the radio is able to seamlessly move to a secure system associated to a newly selected channel. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. English P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System

(DVRS) Motorola Solutions offers an MSI Certified APX compatible, third Party, P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS) that provides low-cost portable radio coverage in areas where only mobile radio coverage is available and portable radio coverage is either intermittent or non-existent. NOTICE:

Portable subscriber units enabled in the system for Radio Authentication shall be able to authenticate regardless of whether they are communicating directly on the system or through a DVRS. Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements A few enhancements have been made to the Conventional Talkgroup at the system. These enhancements improve the Scan feature operation significantly when multiple agencies are using a single conventional radio frequency channel. These enhancements allow users to use Selective Squelch to operate on only the subset of talkgroups that are relevant to the users rather than all talkgroups on the channel. These Scan improvements have been made to 25 English eliminate the audio holes that were present and to turn on the busy LED when activity is present on the channel. Mixed Vote Scan and Standard Conventional Scan configurations are supported. Priority Operation is also supported. Up to 30 different talkgroups can be supported using conventional channels. A maximum of four talkgroups can be supported when Vote Scan channels are being used. Smart PTT is supported with this enhancement as Smart PTT prevents users from transmitting while other users are on the channel. NOTICE:

User Selectable Talkgroups are not compatible with this Conventional Talkgroup Enhancement. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator for the correct radio settings, if the radio is to be operated in extreme temperatures (less than -30 C or more than +60 C). Check with your dealer or system administrator, if the radio is to be operated in extremely cold temperatures (less than -30 C or more than +60 C), for the correct radio settings to ensure proper operation. NOTICE:

To assure radio longevity, front display, LTE, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and GPS are not available when radio internal temperature is below -20 C. The top display will indicate Cold Temp Mode in this temperature. LMR radio communication will continue to operate until the temperature reaches -30 C. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

NOTICE:

Specifications may vary for different radio models. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 26 Preparing Your Radio for Use This section provides simple instructions to prepare your radio for use. Turning On the Radio 1 Press the Power On/Off Button on the radio. briefly to power After a short time, the red, yellow, and green LEDs light up. The display then shows the following:

Current zone and channel text Menu items on the home screen English Codeplug Alias feature is enabled through Customer Programming Software (CPS) configuration to display the codeplug alias as a temporary text during power on. The backlight turns on to the last selected dim level. NOTICE:

The Power On/Off Button is ignored if it is pressed before the LED lights up. If Fail ##/## appears on the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If Error ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Radio Maintenance on page 21 for more information. If Ch mismatch appears, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. 27 A English 2 To turn off the radio, press the Power On/Off button after the LEDs light up. 2 To decrease the volume, rotate this knob counterclockwise. NOTICE:

The duration that user must press and hold the Power On/Off button to turn off the radio is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Adjusting the Volume 1 To increase the volume, rotate the Volume Knob clockwise. Validating Compatibility During Power Up The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power up. During validation, the display shows MAINTENANCE MODE REMOTE DEVICE;

promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. Press the Power On/Off Button to reset when the display shows UPDATE DONE PLEASE RESET upon completion, or when the display shows UPDATE FAILED PLEASE RESET when it fails to update. If the software updates are complete, the radio runs the usual power up operation. If the updates are incomplete, the radio runs the Maintenance Mode and the display shows MAINTENANCE MODE REMOTE DEVICE; promptly followed by other maintenance statuses again. 28 A NOTICE:

If SW INCOMPLETE appears, use Flashport Recovery Tool to update the control heads before you power on the radio again. English 29 English Radio Controls This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control the radio. Control Head and Microphone 1 These radio controls/buttons are programmable. 30 NOTICE:

The microphone is not part of a radio. It is an optional accessory. 1 2 3 4 5 Accessory Port (Microphone) Menu Select Button1 Menu Entries LED Indicators Navigation Button 16810121314151611972345171820212219 Accy 2-Dot Button1 Accy 1-Dot Button1 Accy No-Dot Button (Purple)1 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button Orange Button1 6 7 8 9 10 11 Mode Knob 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Indicators Power On/Off Button Home Button Dim Button Volume Knob Data Feature Button1 Home Button (Microphone) Keypad Buttons Okay/Select Button (

Cancel Button (X) Navigation Button (Microphone)

) English Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to controls that are preprogrammed means that a qualified radio technician must use the radio programming software to assign a feature to a control. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press. Some functions can also be programmed to the radio switches. Assignable Radio Functions Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call.Allows you to answer a private call or phone call. Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. 31 English Dynamic ID (Conventional Only) Allows you to edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. NOTICE:

If the Dynamic ID menu key is not pre-

programmed in the radio, use dongle to display the menu key. Press the menu key and enter the password to view or edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. If the password is not pre-programmed, press the menu key to directly view or edit the ASTRO Individual ID and/or MDC Primary ID of the radio. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-

Two channel. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. 32 Intercom Enables users of multiple control heads to talk to each other using the control heads in a multi-control head setup. Internet Protocol Address Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address, device name, and status of the radio. Location Determines the current location (latitude, longitude, time, and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location or turns the GPS functionality on or off for all locations. Message Enters the current message list. Monitor (Conventional Only) Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until the function is disabled. Multiple Private Line (Conventional Only) Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel from the scan list. One Touch 14 Launches a specific feature with. You can set up as many as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Private Call (Trunking Only) Allows a call from one individual radio to another. Priority Dispatch Allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. Radio Profiles Allows easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. Recent Calls Allows easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher that a new encryption key is needed. Repeater Access Button (RAB) (Conventional Only) Allows you to manually send a repeater access codeword. English Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that a new dynamic regrouping assignment is needed. Request-To-Talk (Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want to send a voice call. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Scan List Programming Selects the scan list for editing (by pressing and holding the Scan button). Secure/Clear Toggles secure transmission on or off. Selective Call (Conventional Only) Calls an assigned radio. Siren Turns different Siren Tones on or off. Site Display/Search (Trunking Only) Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for Automatic Multiple Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation. Site Lock/Unlock (Trunking Only) Locks onto a specific site. 33 English Status (ASTRO 25 Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct (Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater or communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup (Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Automatically registers the user to the server. Virtual Partner Enables the Virtual Partner feature and allows you to perform queries using ViQi. Zone Down Toggles downward through the zones in the radio. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. 34 Zone Up Toggles upward through the zones in the radio. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Dim Changes the display brightness. Front/Rear Toggles between one of the two control heads. Horns/Lights Toggles the horns and lights feature on and off. Keypad Lock Toggles the keypad lock on and off. Low Power Toggles the transmit power level between high and low. Voice Announcement Audibly indicates the current feature mode, zone, or channel that you have been assigned to. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following methods. A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Select Button (

). Menu Select Buttons NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. English Advance Programmable Buttons This feature is to help you to shorten the process of applying certain common features. to access the menu entry of Use the Menu Select button your radio feature. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a channel may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select button (

) directly below CHAN . 35 A English A B Orange Button Menu Select Buttons 36 C D E Accy No-Dot Button (Purple) Accy 1-Dot Button Accy 2-Dot Button NOTICE:

These programmable buttons support the One Touch Button feature.

(Quick Access) One Touch Button Enters a menu with a short press on the preprogrammed One Touch button. Features assigned to these buttons are Call, Call Alert, Phone, Repeater Access, MDC RTT Button Access, Status, and Message. button returns you to the Home (default) Home Button Pressing the screen. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. button is also used to save CBADE NOTICE:

Some features do not require you to press to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. The button also can revert to home channel from any other zone and mode in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4-Way Navigation Button Use the 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll up, down, left, or right with one of the following methods. Press and release one of the buttons to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the buttons to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Data Feature Button Use Data Feature button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. English Volume Knob Use this Volume Knob to adjust the volume of the speakers by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. Using the Mode Knob Use this Mode Knob to scroll through the channels by turning it clockwise or counterclockwise. Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the keypad microphone to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The following tables show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. 37 English Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 1 A D G J

. B E H K M N P Q

, C F I L O R

?

!

;

@ _ S Key 38 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 T U W X V Y Z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 39 English Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 1 a d g j

. b e h k m n p q

, c f i l o r

?

!

;

@ _ s Key 40 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 t w u x v y z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 41 English Keypad Characters Numeric Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8

.

,

?

!

;

@ _ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Key 42 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 8 9 0 Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 43 English Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 A D B E C F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Key 44 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 Not applicable Not applicable English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 45 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Methods to Make a Radio Call on page 63 for more information. on the side of the microphone serves The PTT button two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. 46 A Status Indicators This section explains the status indicators of the radio. Status Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the display of the radio. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the received signal strength for the current site (trunking only) The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the sig-

nal. Direct English On Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored

(during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or se-

lected conventional channel is activated. Off The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or se-

lected conventional channel is deactivat-

ed. or Power Level 47 English 48 L H Radio is set at Low power. Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot Radio detects activity on channel desig-

nated as Priority-One. Steady dot Radio detects activity on channel desig-

nated as Priority-Two. Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On Secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On AES secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. GPS Signal On Feature is enabled and signal is availa-

ble. Off Feature is disabled. Blinking Feature is enabled, but no signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On User is currently associated with the ra-

dio. Off User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Inverted User successfully login to the secured IP Packet Data. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. English Start Case Indicates that the first character of the text entry is capitalized. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Lowercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Mixedcase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in mixed case and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. 49 English Uppercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed represents the signal strength of the Wi-Fi signal. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators Status icons and menu options shown here help you to work more efficiently with TMS feature. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 114 for more information. TMS Status Icons The following icons appear on the radio display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. 50 Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of six messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a pri-

ority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. English TMS Menu Options The following menu options appear on the radio display when you send and receive text messages. Menu Option INBX COMP DRFT BACK SAVE SENT NEW LIST IMPT Description/Function Brings you to your incoming messages screen. Brings you to the compose screen. Brings you to the saved message screen. Brings you back to the previous screen. Saves the messages you have edited to the Draft folder. Brings you to the sent messages screen. Creates a new message. Brings you to the predefined messages screen. Toggles the Priority Status icon on or off for an outgoing message. 51 English Menu Option RQRP CURR ALL DEL EDIT EXIT NO OPTN RPLY SEL SEND YES 52 Description/Function Toggles Request Reply icon on or off for an outgoing message. Deletes the current selected message. Selects to delete all the messages in the current folder. Deletes a message or text. Edits a draft message or key in a target ad-

dress. Exits to the Home screen. Cancel the delete all messages options. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects a predefined message or address. Sends the message. Deletes all the messages in the current folder. LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Red LED A B Yellow LED C Green LED Solid red Radio is transmitting. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow (Conventional Only) Channel is busy. ABC Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. English Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporarily changes the display backlight color and the alert text background color of the radio to help signal that a radio event has occurred. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Orange Notification When Emergency Alerts Red Critical Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio battery is low. The radio is out of range. 53 English Backlight and Bar Color Notification When Green Call Alerts The radio enters Failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio lost GPS signal or GPS function fails. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. The radio enters Geofence. Alert Tones Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of the condition of your radio. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Short, Low-

Pitched Tone Tone Name Radio Self Test Fail Reject Heard When radio fails its power-up self test. When an unauthorized request is made. 54 English Heard Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than six seconds without any activity. After time out.

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed. When the radio ends your call after it detected there are lack of voice for five seconds after the PTT is pressed and hold. Your ra-

dio ends the call to enable your radio to receive calls from other radio users.

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the sys-

tem. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. When system is busy. You Hear Long, Low-

Pitched Tone Tone Name Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Time-Out Timer Timed Out Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Lack of Voice PTT Time out Out of Range Invalid Mode Busy A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Short, Medi-

um-Pitched Tone Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice When a correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. 55 Tone Name Priority Channel Received Emergency Alarm/Call En-

try Central Echo Volume Set Emergency Exit Failsoft Automatic Call Back Keyfail Console Acknowledge Received Individual Call Call Alert Sent Site Trunking Low-Battery Chirp Heard When activity on a priority channel is received. When entering the emergency state. When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. When exiting the emergency state. When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is re-

ceived. When Call Alert or Private Call is received. When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. When battery is below preset threshold value. English You Hear Long, Medi-

um-Pitched Tone A Group of Medium-Pitch-

ed Tones Short, High-

Pitched Tone

(Chirp) 56 You Hear Two High-

Pitched Tones Ringing Gurgle Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Talk Permit Unique, Low-

Pitched Chirp Unique, High-

Pitched Chirp New Message Priority Status Tone Name GPS Fails Heard When the GPS fails or loses signal. English When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.

(When PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received.

(When PTT button is pressed) is verifying with the system for ac-

cepting its transmissions. When a new message is received. When a priority message is received. 57 English General Radio Operation This chapter explains the general radio operations of your radio. Selecting a Zone Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. A zone is a group of channels. Do one of the following to select a radio channel. You can use these options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a zone using the Mode Knob :

a. Rotate the Mode Knob until the display shows the desired zone. Select a zone using the radio menu ZONE:

a. b. or to ZONE and press the Menu Select button directly below ZONE. or to the required zone, or use the keypad to enter the zone number. 58 c. Press or the PTT button to confirm the selected zone number. d. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs. Do one of the following to select a radio channel. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a channel using the Mode knob:

a. Rotate the Mode knob until the display shows the desired channel. b. Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed channel. Select a channel using the radio menu CHAN :

or to CHAN . a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN . or to the required channel. c. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to confirm the selected channel. e. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Selecting a Channel by using Channel Search Button This feature allows you to do a quick search for a specific channel in your radio by keying in the alias of the channel. Your radio prompts the first found channel if a match is found. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Channel Search button. or to CHSR and press the Menu Select button directly below CHSR. A blinking cursor appears on the Channel Search screen. English 2 Use the keypad to type or edit your channel name. 3 To initiate searching, press the Menu Select button directly below CHSR once the entry is done. To exit this procedure, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL . One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows SEARCHING. Once found, the display shows the matched channel name and the radio changes its transmission to the selected channel. If the radio is triggered to search for an empty entry, the display shows INVALID ENTRY. Repeat step 2 to search again. If the entry does not match, the display shows CHANNEL NAME NOT FOUND.Repeat step 2 to search again; or press to exit. or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT Mode Select Feature Mode Select allows a long press to save the current zone and channel of your radio to a programmable button, keypad button, or a softkey; then once programmed, the 59 English short-press of that button or softkey changes the transmission to the saved zone and channel. There are two methods to save the selected zone and channel:

Softkeys Programmable buttons and keypad buttons (digit 0 to 9) NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Softkey Five softkeys are available for you to save the frequently used zone and channel. 1 Toggle from your current zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 or to MS1, MS2 ... or MS5. 60 3 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below one of the softkey (MS1MS5). You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. NOTICE:

To change the programmed zone and channel, repeat this procedure. Short press of the programmed softkey changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this softkey. Saving a Zone and a Channel to a Button You can save the frequently used zone and channel to the programmable buttons and keypad digit 0 to 9 buttons. 1 Toggle from your current zone and channel to the required zone and channel. 2 Press and hold the button you desire to program. You hear a short, medium-pitched tone when the zone and channel is saved. NOTICE:

Repeat this procedure to change the zone and channel of the programmed button. Short press of the programmed button changes your current transmission to the zone and channel programmed in this button. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. Red LED A B Yellow LED C Green LED English The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio displays the following depending on the system your radio is configured to:

For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. 61 ABC English For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. NOTICE:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), when there is no response from the receiving radio, the calling radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone after the timer expires. When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows CALL RECEIVED and the caller alias or ID. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below RESP within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. See also Making a Talkgroup Call on page 64 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from one individual radio to another. The one-to-one call between the two radios are not heard by the others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. 62 3 Press to hang up and return to the Home screen. NOTICE:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below RESP, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the RESP, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See also Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 64 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. NOTICE:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), if there is no response to the call after the timer expires, your radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone. English When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear a telephone-

type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green.The display shows PHONE CALL and the call received icon blinks. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below RESP. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to hang up and return to the Home screen. See also Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 65 for details on making a Telephone Call. Methods to Make a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone menu. The Mode Knob . A preprogrammed One Touch button. The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 85). 63 English NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. Making a Talkgroup Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

or to TGRP and press the Menu Select button directly below TGRP. The display shows the last-

selected talkgroup. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . Use the Mode Knob to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 98 for more information. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 4. 64 or to CALL , and press the Menu Select button directly below CALL . The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows NO ANSWER. English 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. A telephone-type ringing sounds if the receiving unit is in service. The display shows CALLING...

<NUMBER> or CALLING... <ALIAS>. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 4. or to PHON, and press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 65 English 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required phone number. Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 3 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 54 for more information if your call is not answered. 66 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radio coverage area by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. or to DIR and press the Menu Select button directly below DIR. The display shows REPEATER MODE if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. The display shows DIRECT MODE and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Monitor Feature The monitor feature is used to make sure that a channel is clear before transmitting. The lack of static on a digital channel when the users switch from analog to digital radios is not an indication that the radio is malfunctioning. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Monitoring a Channel Monitoring a Channel in Conventional Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. b. Listen for activity on that channel. c. Adjust the Volume Knob if necessary. d. If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. Monitoring a Channel in Trunked Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. b. Press the PTT button. English c. If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if you hear no tone and the indicator lights steadily, then proceed with your message. d. Release the PTT button to receive transmission. If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows OUT OF RANGE. Monitoring Conventional Mode This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus, you can to listen to another user active on the channel. This way, you may be prevented from taking over someone elses conversation. 1 To activate monitoring, perform one of the following actions:

At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, or to MON and press the Menu Select button directly below MON momentarily. 67 English Take the control head off the hook. The display shows MONITOR ON. You hear all channel traffic. 2 Press the Menu Select button again to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows MONITOR OFF. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. 68 Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Contacts Dialer Messages Utilities on page 166 Using ViQi ViQi is an intelligent virtual partner that provides critical information through common query searches and dialog interaction. With ViQi, you are able to perform tasks on your radio by using voice commands.ViQi is available on APX 8500, APX 6500, and APX 5500 radio models using the handheld control head or mobile keypad microphones with programmable buttons. English ViQi retrieves important information from the database without the need to access another device, vehicle, or wait for the dispatcher to run a query. 1 To use ViQi, press and hold the assigned programmable button. 2 After you hear a tone, speak the command clearly, then release the button. If To access ViQi, To identify your cur-

rent zone and chan-

nel, Then say "Look up informa-

tion..."

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my zone and channel"

"Current zone and channel"

"Zone and channel"

To change to a new zone and channel, say one of the follow-

ing commands:

69 English If Then If Then

"Zone <Zone Name>, channel

<Channel Name>"

"Change zone to

<Zone Name>, channel to

<Channel Name>"

"Switch zone to

<Zone Name>, channel to

<Channel Name>"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my zone"

"Current zone"

"Zone"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

To identify your cur-

rent channel, To change to a new channel, To identify your cur-

rent zone, To change to a new zone, 70

"Zone <Zone Name>"

"Change zone to

<Zone Name>"

"Switch zone to

<Zone Name>"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my chan-

nel"

"Current channel"

"Channel"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Channel

<Channel Name>"

"Change channel to

<Channel Name>"

If Then If

"Switch channel to

<Channel Name>"

To change to your home channel, To identify your cur-

rent volume level, To change your vol-

ume level, say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Home channel"

"Change to home channel"

"Switch to home channel"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my vol-

ume"

"Current volume"

"Volume"

say "Volume <Volume Level>". The follow-

ing terms represent the volume values:

To change to a new profile, English Then Low 10%

Medium 50%

High 100%

110 10%100%

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"<Profile Name>

profile"

"Change to

<Profile Name>

profile"

"Switch to

<Profile Name>

profile"

To start or stop scanning, say one of the follow-

ing commands:

71 English If To identify your bat-

tery level, To cancel your previ-

ous command, 72 say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my battery level"

"Battery level"

"Battery"

say "Cancel". NOTICE:

Cancel com-

mand works within a five-

second win-

dow after the last com-

mand. Then

"Start scan"

"Stop scan"

"Start scanning"

"Stop scanning"

If To perform a license plate query, Then say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Run a <State>

plate

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Check a <State>

plate"

To perform a drivers license query, NOTICE:

You can use variations such as

<Plate>

and <Tag>. say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"<State> license

<Alphanumeric String>"

If Then If Then English

"Run a <State>

driver's license

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Check the state of

<State> driver's li-

cense

<Alphanumeric String>"

NOTICE:

You can use variations such as

<Driver's License>,

<DL>, and

<License>. say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Check Vehicle Identification Num-

To perform a Vehicle Identification Num-

ber query, ber

<Alphanumeric String>"

"VIN check

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Run a VIN"

NOTICE:

You can use varia-

tions such as

<Vehicle Identification Number>, <VIN>, and <Vehicle Number>. 73 English Advanced Call Features This chapter explains the operations of the call features available in your radio. Calling a Phone Not in the List 1 or to PHON. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PHON. 3 Enter the desired phone number on the keypad. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press the button or the PTT button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to exit. or Menu Select button directly below PHON 74 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio with privacy. Receiving a Selective Call When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blink and the display alternates between CALL RECEIVED and the home display. The speaker unmutes. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. NOTICE:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below CALL, your conversation is heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the CALL, you are not responding privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 75. Making a Selective Call Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature by using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 3. or to CALL, and press the Menu Select button directly below CALL. English The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to go to the last number dialed. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. 75 English button to hang up, your radio If you do not press remains in Selective Call state with the other unit. You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls. Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. NOTICE:

Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 125 for more information. Selecting a Talkgroup 1 or to TGRP and press the Menu Select button directly below TGRP. The display shows the last Talkgroup that was selected and stored. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to PSET for the preset preprogrammed Talkgroup. or to the required Talkgroup. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the currently selected Talkgroup and return to the Home screen. If the encryption key associated to the new Talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows KEY FAIL. If the encryption key that is associated to the new Talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. 76 4 Press to return to the Home screen. Sending a Status Call This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Status button. or to STS and press the Menu Select button directly below STS. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required status. English Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-

pitched tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. Making a Priority Dispatch Calls If a talkgroup is congested, the Priority Dispatch feature allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. This talkgroup is called the Priority Talkgroup. Each trunking talkgroup can have its own assigned Priority Talkgroup.Priority Dispatch is not available during 77 English Emergency operations. Scan feature is suspended when Priority Dispatch is initiated. Dispatch console that supports this feature must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. 1 Press the preprogrammed Priority Dispatch button. A tone sounds and the radio enters Priority Dispatch mode. The radio exits this mode when the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires. 2 Before the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires, press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The display shows the Priority Talkgroup alias. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The radio exits Priority Dispatch mode, returns to its original talkgroup, and displays the home channel alias. 78 Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it receives a dynamic regrouping command and automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a gurgle tone and the display shows the name of the dynamically regrouped channel. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the previous zone and channel that you were using. If you access a zone or channel that has been reserved as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to RPGM then press the Menu Select button directly below RPGM to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. English channel, once you have selected the dynamic-

regrouping position. Select Disabled Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The radio is forced to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The display shows REPROGRAM RQST and PLEASE WAIT. The Scan and Private Call features are unavailable when your radio is Select Disabled. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows ACK RECEIVED and the radio returns to the Home screen. If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Try again or press to cancel and return to the Home screen. Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into Select Enabled or Select Disabled categories. Select Enabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature works on the condition at least one zone in the radio must be a non-

dynamic zone. This feature provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store frequently used channels be it conventional or trunking. These dynamic channels are saved from pre-existing (non-

dynamic) channels in the radio. This saves the time and effort from the regular navigation around the working zones and channels. User can also delete or update the list in the Dynamic Zone. 79 English Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel 1 2 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. or to <# Dynamic Zone Channels>.2 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

shown on the screen.2 If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 or to ZnPr. Press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. 3 4 or to List Selection. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows Select Chan screen. 2 # indicates number of the channel on the 16-Position Switch which are numbered from 1 to 16. 80 5 or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows Channel updated. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 2 or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. The display shows the dynamic channels list. or to the saved dynamic channel then press the Menu Select button directly below Del. The display shows Channel deleted screen. English 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>Blank. Multiple Control Head Features This feature allows your transceiver to control a combination of up to four O5 control heads on APX Mobile

(depending on the model). You can use the CAN cables to connect in any configuration that does not exceed 131 feet

(40 meters) in combined length. Refer the Control Head Installation Manual (6878215A01) for further information. The Multiple Control Head (MCH) feature consists of 2 modes that can be programmed through Customer Programming Software (CPS):

All Active mode One Active mode 81 English NOTICE:

If two or more control heads are connected to the system before enabling the MCH feature in the CPS, the radio displays EXTRA CH or CH ID # ERR. Both errors are FATAL. Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head This feature allows you to setup the control head in the Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode. During the setup, the control heads are defined as Control Head Number 1, Control Head Number 2, Control Head Number 3, and Control Head Number 4. 1 Power off the radio by pressing the Power button. 2 Press and hold the left-most Menu Select button and the emergency button simultaneously. 82 3 While continuing to depress these two buttons, press the Power button to power on the radio and the control head. The radio and the control head powers on into FPP mode. The display shows the ID number of the control head. 4 Turn the Mode knob to change the ID number of the control head. 5 Press the Power button to power off the radio and exit FPP mode. 6 Repeat step 1 to step 5 to set the ID number for the rest of the attached control heads. All Active Mode The All Active mode enables all connected control heads attached to the radio to operate concurrently with each other. When you activate a feature on one control head, the rest of the control heads have the same activated features and indicators on their respective display. NOTICE:

The multiple control head feature allows only control heads of the same type to be connected. Upon power up, if a control head of a different type is connected to the radio, the display of all the attached control heads shows the FATAL error CH MISMATCH. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate an intercom transmission. All control heads that are attached will receive the same intercom call. The display of the control heads receiving the intercom call shows the alias/ID number of the transmitting control head. English Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode This feature only applies to control heads in the All Active mode. The intercom feature allows one control head user to talk to another control head user in a MCH configuration. At any given time, when a control head being operated has priority for the intercom call, all other control heads are blocked until the active control head releases PTT button. This can be made on any attached control head. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below INTC to activate the intercom feature of any of the control heads. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to deactivate the intercom feature. The intercom feature also deactivates when user initiates a mode change. If the radio is on an emergency channel, pressing of the EMERGENCY button or the emergency footswitch button on any control head also deactivates the intercom feature. One Active Mode The One Active mode enables only one control head to be visibly active at a time in a two control head system. NOTICE:

In the One Active mode, if more than two control heads are present upon power up, the radio shows a FATAL error EXTRA CH on the display of all attached control heads. 83 English The active control head commands the system normally while the inactive control head is in remote mode with its display shows REMOTE. The Volume knob, DIM button, Front/Rear (F/R) softkey, and Emergency button remain active on the inactive control head, while all other controls are disabled. Emergency footswitch and VIP inputs remain active on the inactive control head. The VIP input control head is configurable in the CPS and VIP should be attached to the control head selected in the CPS. NOTICE:

Only two control heads are supported in the one active mode. 84 A B C Transceiver Active Radio Non-Active Radio You can change the command between the two control heads by pressing the Menu Select button directly below F/R, or the Menu Select button preprogrammed user button on the keypad microphone. Z1ZONECHANPWRSQLREMOTEF/RABC SmartConnect SmartConnect allows you to have voice communication by switching the device to any available network with the priority order of Wi-Fi LTE Satellite when LMR is out of range. The radio can connect through a fixed Wi-Fi access point in buildings or in-vehicle Broadband modems such as Sierra Wireless modem MG90, VLM750, or Satellite modem. When a channel is SmartConnect enabled and goes out of range, the radio displays Out of Range and SmartConnect capable icon connected to the available network, the radio displays

. Once the device is SmartConnect and SmartConnect connected icon

. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable only for APX 6000 series, APX 8000 series, and APX 8500 series. Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID

(number) that you use to initiate a call. English Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to five IDs of different call types associated with it. Also, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the following types of calls:

Phone Call Private Call Selective Call Call Alert Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (ASTRO 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. 85 English Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs. NOTICE:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a few contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 2 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN and proceed to the next step. Press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS and proceed to step 6. 86 4 5 or to CALL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to select the call type. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. Adding a New Contact Entry 1 2 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to [NEW CONTACT] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows NAME. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. 4 Use the keypad to enter the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 5 or to [ADD NUMBER] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows TYPE 1 <DEFAULT TYPE>. English 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT . 7 8 or to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. or to NUMBER 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT . The display shows NUMBER 1 and a blinking cursor appears. 9 Use the keypad to enter the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE once you have finished. The display shows <ENTRY> STORED, confirming that the contact entry has been added. The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. 87 English Deleting a Contact Entry Adding a Contact to a Call List 1 2 3 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . or to DEL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows <ENTRY> CONFIRM DEL?. 4 Select the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete the entry, or NO to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows <ENTRY> DELETED and the radio returns to the main screen of Contacts. 1 2 3 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to add and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . or to ADD TO CALLLST or ADD TO PHONLST and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or until the display shows [AVAILABLE] and press the Menu Select button directly below ADD to add as a new entry. or until the display shows <ENTRY> and its associated number and press the Menu Select 88 button directly below RPLC to replace the existing entry. 4 The display shows <ENTRY> ADDED, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. or to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT . A blinking cursor appears. English The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List This feature allows you to edit contacts in a call list. Editing an Entry Alias 1 2 3 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . or to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . 5 Use the keypad to edit the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing as Entry ID 1 2 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . 89 English 3 4 or to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . or to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT . A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing a Call Type 1 or to CNTS and press the Menu Select button directly below CNTS . The entries are alphabetically sorted. 90 2 3 4 5 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . or to EDIT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . or to TYPE and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT . or to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below DONE to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/

groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List Multi-System Talkgroup Scan Refer to a qualified radio technician for the maximum number of Scan Lists can be preprogrammed in your radio. A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Intelligent Priority Scan Intelligent Priority Scan feature allows you to add or delete conventional channels and trunking talkgroups from multiple system into the priority scan lists. You can add or delete priority scan list members and assign priorities using the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button. Radio displays the priority level of the scanned member. English NOTICE:

Priority-One channel and Priority-Two channel member may belong to different Talkgroup Scan systems. When the radio locks onto a channel in the Intelligent Priority Scan list, radio scans for higher priority member within the same Trunking or Conventional system. Viewing a Scan List 1 2 or to SCNL and press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL . or to view the members on the list. 3 Press Home screen. to exit the current display and return to the 91 English Editing the Scan List This feature allows you to change scan list members and priorities. 1 2 or to SCNL and press the Menu Select button directly below SCNL . The display shows the lists that can be changed. or to the entry you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below RCL to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions to select another channel that needs to be added or deleted 92 then repeat step 3. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. or to the desired channel. Use the keypad to enter the desired channel name. Use the Mode Knob to select the channel. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 93 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status 1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan side button. 2 or to the member you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the Mode Knob to select another scan list member. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. English Press the Select button one or more times to toggle between different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:

A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. 93 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) You can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect, and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls while scanning for activity. You may respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed. or to MON and press the Menu Select button directly below MON. The brief MONITOR ON display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. English Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button to initiate or stop scan. or to SCAN and press the Menu Select button directly below SCAN. If the scan is enabled, the display shows SCAN ON and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows SCAN OFF. The radio returns to the Home screen. 94 Transmitting While the Scan is On This feature allows the user to transmit using radio programmed for talkback scan and non-talkback scan. Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below SCAN momentarily. English Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below PAGE or CALL. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing pressing the Menu Select button below either PAGE or CALL. or Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise

(termed nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. 95 English This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, or to NUIS and press the Menu Select button directly below NUIS. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:

Stop and restart a scan. Mode change to another channel and back to the original channel. Turn off the radio and then turn it on again. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. 96 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DYNP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Restoring Priorities in a Scan List To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, perform one of the following actions:

Turn scan off, and then on. Change channels. Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Using the Hang Up Box (HUB) To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box

(HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. NOTICE:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. English If other users are away from their radios or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual call alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, if there is no answer after the maximum ring time or when you press the PTT button for an Enhanced Private Call, the radio automatically sends a call alert page. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Receiving a Call Alert Page When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. If Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled, you hear one alert tone and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows PAGE RECEIVED. Press the PTT button to answer or press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 64 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 64 for more information on returning the call. 97 English Sending a Call Alert Page Do one of the following to send a call alert page:

NOTICE:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Sending a call alert page using the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button:

a. Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-

Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows PAGING...<NUMBER> or

<ALIAS>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Press the Menu Select button 98 directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu PAGE :

or to PAGE . a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below PAGE . or to select the required ID. c. d. Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows PAGING...<NUMBER> or

<ALIAS>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu CALL :

directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. English or to CALL . a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below c. CALL . or to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows SEND PAGE?. d. To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below YES . To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below NO . The display shows PAGING...<ALIAS>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows ACK RECEIVED. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. Press the Menu Select button Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. 1 or to scroll to the VMUT and press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. Voice mute is activated. 2 To turn the feature off, press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut preprogrammed button again. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below VMUT or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. VOICE MUTE ON shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to all conventional dispatch calls and affiliated trunking group calls. 99 English Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) This feature allows the user to broadcast a series of distinct, recognizable tones before a voice transmission from the dispatcher or a radio. The broadcasting dispatcher or radio user can select this alert tone transmission to be sent to an individual Talkgroup or over the entire system. Specific tone or series of tones are pre-programmed into the radios to allow the dispatcher or supervisor to select a list of tones to broadcast before they make their voice transmission. Each tone is distinctive to indicate different situation or different broadcaster. The transmitting radio also plays back the tones for the broadcaster to listen. NOTICE:

The receiving radios must be configured with the Quick Call II tone in order for the radio to sound the selected tone and also to sound a preconfigured alert tone after the selected tone has sound. Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission The broadcasting or transmitting radio must be pre-

programmed to see the tone in the Quick Call II tone list. 100 The receiving radio must also be pre-programmed to decode the tone to broadcast. 1 2 or to QCII, and press the Menu Select button directly below QCII. or to select the tone to broadcast. 3 Press the PTT to broadcast the selected tone, or press and hold the PTT to broadcast the selected tone and transmit with your vocal transmission. You hear the radio sounds the selected tone. You can begin your call after the tone ends. 4 Release PTT to listen. Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Orange button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Special Considerations for Emergencies Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. One channel supports only one Emergency mode. The radio responds differently when pressing the preprogrammed Emergency button in each channel.Only one of the Emergency modes can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except if enabled, it returns to one of the following:

Tactical/Non-Revert The radio sends an emergency alarm and/or makes an emergency call on the current channel. Non-Tactical/Revert for Conventional System The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency channel to send an alarm and/or make an emergency call. English Non-Tactical/Revert for Trunking System The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency talkgroup (trunking system) or channel (conventional system) to send an alarm and/or make an emergency call. NOTICE:

When changing channels during Emergency transmissions:

If the new channel is also preprogrammed for Emergency, you can change channels while in Emergency operation. The emergency alarm or call continues on the new channel. If the new channel is not preprogrammed for Emergency, the display shows No emergency, and you hear an invalid tone until you exit the Emergency state or change to a channel preprogrammed for Emergency. When enabled, the Emergency Keep-Alive feature prevents the radio from being turned off by using the On/Off/Volume Control Knob when the radio is in the Emergency state. 101 English Exiting Emergency The dispatch console that supports this feature can be programmed to clear the emergency state of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. 1 To exit emergency, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Then Press and hold the preprogram-

med Emergency button until you hear the emergency exit tone. a From the Home screen, swipe down the Status Bar. b Tap Cancel and confirm the action by tapping Yes. If 102 If Then Figure 1: Exiting Emergency Exiting Emergency as Supervisor

(Trunking Only) Radios configured as Supervisor are able to cancel emergency mode of other radios. The dispatch console must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. Perform one of the following actions:

If If the emer-

gency mode is initiated by other radios, Then press and hold the Side But-

ton 1 and press the Emer-

gency button. If If the emer-

gency mode is initiated by other radios, If the emer-

gency mode is initiated by the Supervisor, Then press and hold the 1-Dot

(Side Middle) button and press the Emergency button. Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold the Emer-

gency button. Press and hold the Side Button 1 and press the Emergency button. Press and hold the 1-Dot

(Side Middle) button and press the Emergency but-

ton. Wait for console to clear emergency. NOTICE:

The following buttons combinations are supported:

Radio Side Button 1 and Top (Orange) button. English Radio Side Button 1 and accessory Orange button. Radio 1-Dot (Side Middle) and Top (Orange) buttons. Radio 1-Dot (Side Middle) and accessory Top

(Orange) buttons. Accessory 1-Dot Button and radio Top (Orange) button. Accessory 1-Dot Button and accessory Orange button. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. A dispatcher acknowledgment ACK RECEIVED display follows. For trunking system, the radio also sounds a high-pitched tone that 103 English indicates the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 2 Press and hold the EMERGENCY button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A tone sounds and the display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.0 to 2.5 cm) from your mouth. 104 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to send an Emergency Call with hot mic to a group of radios. Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. The hot mic applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Call with hot mic on your radio. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows EMERGENCY on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. A tone sounds to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in the radio's codeplug programming. 4 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. English Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features enabled, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display alternates EMERGENCY and the home display. A high-pitched tone sounds, indicating that the trunked system central controller has received the alarm. A dispatcher acknowledgment (four high-

pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an ACK RECEIVED display. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 105 English 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm and Call with hot mic to a group of radios. Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms and Call with hot mic on your radio. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. If successful, the display shows EMERGENCY on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. 106 The radio exits Emergency Alarm and enters the Emergency Call state when one of the following scenarios occur:

You receive the dispatcher acknowledgment. The display shows ACK RECEIVED. You receive no acknowledgment. The display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in your radio's codeplug programming. 4 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. NOTICE:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. English Special Considerations for Emergencies If you press the emergency button while in a channel that has no emergency capability, a low-pitched tone sounds. If the unit is out of the range of the system and/or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. If you press the emergency button, then change to a mode that has no emergency capability, the display shows NO EMERGENCY and a continuous low-pitched tone sounds until a valid emergency mode is selected or until the emergency is cancelled. When an emergency is active, changing to another mode where emergency is enabled (trunked or conventional) causes an emergency alarm and/or emergency call to be active on the new mode. 107 English Impact Detection This feature allows radio to detect the force of gravity impact or the orientation changes on the vehicle in the event of vehicle crash or rollover. When these events are detected, radio activates the Emergency feature. This feature also sends out the location-based information if GPS feature is enabled. Radio automatically activates Impact Detected condition when the impact event meets or exceeds a predefined threshold. The radio must stay in this condition for a preprogrammed amount of time before the Emergency Alarm or Call is activated. In the event of hardware failure or malfunction, radio alternatively displays IMPACT HW and ERROR and a tone sounds when the radio power-up. Any button press of the radio or accessory except the programmed button for volume and backlighting functionality ceases the error message and sound. The following scenarios affects the Emergency feature activation:

Pressing a preprogrammed Emergency button cancels the Impact Detection sequence and enters the Emergency mode. 108 Pressing the PTT button does not suspend the Impact Detection sequence. Pressing the PTT button, the CLR menu button or the preprogrammed CLEAR button when radio displays the impact detected display alert, exits the Impact Detected condition. Detecting Impact 1 Radio detects the impact on the vehicle and the impact event meets or exceeds the predefined threshold. One of the following scenarios occur:

Radio enters Impact Detected condition. Radio sounds alert tone and displays IMPACT on the screen, and Post-Alert Timer is initiated. Impact Detected condition continues for the time duration defined in the Post-Alert Timer field. When the timer expires, radio enters into Emergency mode. Radio displays EMERGENCY on the screen. Radio enters Emergency mode immediately and displays EMERGENCY on the screen. NOTICE:

If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the radio inhibits all tones and lights on the radio. 2 Press the preprogrammed CLR menu button or the preprogrammed CLEAR button to exit the Impact Detected condition. Post-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time the radio needs to remain in the Impact Detected condition before radio enters into Emergency mode. When the Post-Alert Timer is initiated, the radio sounds alert tone and displays IMPACT on the screen. Triggering Emergency Emergency Alarm or call is triggered when you do not clear the Impact Detected condition and when the Post-Alert English Timer comes to an end. The radio sends emergency message to units within the same Talkgroup. If GPS is enabled, the radio sends GPS coordinates to dispatcher. Exiting Impact Detected Condition If there is false alarm or you do not want to enter into Emergency mode, you can exit the Impact Detected condition and prevent emergency from going off with the following operation. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed CLEAR button to exit. Press the Menu Select button below CLR to exit. Re-Initiating Impact Detection Sequence Radio must first exit Emergency mode to re-initiate the Impact Detected sequence. Radio must return to the normal operations before the next impact can be detected. Refer to Exiting Impact Detected Condition on page 109 to exit the Impact Detected condition. 109 English Automatic Registration Service

(ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. The ARS for the radio consists of two modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-server Mode Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode The following methods are options on how to select or change the ARS Mode. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode using the 16-

Position Select knob:

110 a. Once the zone you want is displayed, turn the preprogrammed 16-Position Select knob to the desired mode. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode using the radio menu:

a. Press and hold or to CHAN . b. Press the Menu Select button directly below CHAN . The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. c. or or press the Mode Knob once and rotate the Mode Knob to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows UNPROGRAMMED. Repeat this step. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows UNPROGRAMMED. Repeat this step. English d. Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and Selecting the ARS mode using the Mode Knob :

a. After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. b. or or press the Mode Knob once and rotate the Mode Knob to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. c. Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and User Login Feature This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application

(Example: Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. NOTICE:

A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. 111 English NOTICE:

Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (AZ), small letters (az), numbers (09), symbols (*, #, -, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight characters or more. Logging In as a User 1 or to USER and press the Menu Select button directly below USER. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to enter ID. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. Use the keypad to 112 type or edit a user name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined user names. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the predefined user name. Press and hold or to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGN to select the predefined user name. If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows INVALID ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. 4 Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number will appear as asterisks. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGN. One of the following scenarios occurs:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and IN PROGRESS, with CNCL . In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and LOGGED IN, with LOGT and EXIT. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows OFFLINE, with LOGT and EXIT. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary LOGIN FAILED. If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary LOGIN FAILED. English NOTICE:

To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL. Logging Out Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. NOTICE:

Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft, and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. 1 or to LOGT and press the Menu Select button directly below LOGT. The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and CLEAR PRIVATE DATA?. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and LOGGED IN, with LOGT and EXIT. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select YES to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary PRIVATE DATA CLEARED. 113 English Select NO to keep your private data. Accessing the Messaging Features 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature using the radio menu. 2 or to TMS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 4 or to scroll through the main menu options. Text Messaging Service (TMS) This features allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. The types of text messages available:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:

Compose Drafts Sent Inbox NOTICE:

See Status Icons on page 47 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 51 for more information on each menu option. 114 NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B-

>C, a->b->c. During the numeric mode, except for keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message

(no multi-tap).

, pressing the 1 or to TMS. English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below COMP to see the compose options. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below NEW to compose a new message. A blinking cursor appears on the COMPOSE screen. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once the message is composed. 7 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [OTHER RECPNT] and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. When a blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 115 English 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows MSG SENT. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows SEND FAILED and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTICE:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 118 for more information. You can also select the DRFT option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 122 for more information. 116 Sending a Quick Text Message Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using the preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to step 4. To access this feature using the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below COMP to see the compose options. Press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to return to the Home screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to see the quick text list. 5 or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. The message appears on the COMPOSE screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND . 8 Perform one of the following actions to send the message:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. The message is sent after the address is selected. or to [OTHER RECPNT] and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. When a blinking cursor appears on the ENTER ADDRESS screen. English Use the keypad to type the address entry. Proceed to step 10 to send the message. 9 or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. The message is sent after the address is selected. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows MSG SENT. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows SEND FAILED and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTICE:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 118 for more information. 117 English Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to indicate the message as important. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message Ensure there is an outgoing message composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. NOTICE:

The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to remove the priority status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . 118 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to request for a reply. The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to indicate the message as important. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to request for a reply. The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 119 English Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Ensure that a outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 115 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below IMPT to remove the priority status icon. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below RQRP to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 120 Receiving a Text Message NOTICE:

When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send a notification to acknowledge that the message was received. Do one of the following to receive a text message. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message using the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Receiving a text message using the radio menu:

When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary NEW MSG, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox The Inbox can hold up to 30 messages. NOTICE:

or to read the message if the content fills more than one screen. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen.Press the Menu Select button directly below INBX. Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below INBX. The display shows the latest received message. English 2 While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below RPLY , DEL , or BACK to access the option. Select RPLY to reply the message. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. NOTICE:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 50 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message NOTICE:

The original date and time stamp, address, and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below RPLY to reply to a message. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

121 English Press the Menu Select button directly below NEW to compose a new message. Press the Menu Select button directly below LIST to select a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of predefined messages and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required message. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 3 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN once you have completed the message. 122 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and SENDING MSG. NOTICE:

Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 118 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button below DRFT. The display shows the latest drafted text message. 4 Select EDIT to edit the message before sending it. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of 10 messages. The oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Perform one of the following actions:

English Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button below SENT. The display shows the latest sent message. 3 While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN , DEL , or BACK to access the option. Select OPTN to configure the message settings. Select DEL to delete the message. Select BACK to return to the previous screen. NOTICE:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 50 for more information. 123 English Sending a Sent Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN while viewing the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND . 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [OTHER RECPNT] and press the Menu Select button below EDIT. When a blinking cursor appears in the ENTER ADDRESS screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 4 Press the Menu Select button below SEND or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the SEND MESSAGE screen and SENDING MSG. 124 NOTICE:

Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 118 for more information. Deleting Text Messages 1 From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen, or to scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to view the delete options. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CURR to delete the current message. Press the Menu Select button directly below ALL to delete all the messages. Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. By default, the radio automatically enters the encrypted environment without having to manually select or clear the secure transmission. Enabling Secure Transmission English NOTICE:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows CLEAR TX only. The radio does not transmit until you disable the secure mode. The radio can be configured to ignore the clear voice or unsecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. 1 or to SEC and press the Menu Select button directly below SEC. Accessing the Secure Feature The display shows key has been enabled. and the current key if multi-

1 or to SEC. 2 Monitor the mode to be sure it is not in use. 2 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below SEC to display Secure feature screen. 3 Press PTT button to transmit. The display shows the Secure screen. Selecting Secure Transmissions 125 English If the Ignore Secure/Clear Switch when Strapped programming option is enabled, the radio transmits without displaying any messages in the strapped mode of operation, regardless of the Secure/Clear switch setting. This option must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. The Secure/Clear switch only applies when the radio is transmitting. Managing Encryption This chapter explains the encryption feature on your radio. Loading Encryption Keys Refer to the Key Variable Loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. 1 Attach the KVL to your radio. The display shows Keyloading and the name of the ASTRO OTAR profile used by the selected channel. All other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. 126 2 Press Target Load. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

For single key, select Key. For multikey, select Group. 4 Select the required keys and press Load on the KVL. The KVL indicates that keyload is successful. Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types of encryption keys:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys are strapped on a one-per-channel basis, through CPS. In addition, you can have operator-

selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications, strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, a different key can be strapped to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key 1 or to KEY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KEY. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 or to scroll through the encryption keys or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. English Press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Turn the 16-Position Select knob to exit. NOTICE:

When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows KEY FAIL. When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows ILLEGAL KEY. Selecting a Keyset This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. 127 English Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. 1 2 or to KSET and press the Menu Select button directly below KSET. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. or to scroll through the keysets or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:

, the PTT button, or the EXIT menu Press selection to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Erasing Encryption Keys Keys that are erased from the radio are also removed from the key database of the associated ASTRO OTAR profile. Do one of the following to erase the selected encryption keys. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Erasing the selected encryption keys using the radio menu:

a. or to ERAS and press the Menu Select button directly below ERAS. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. b. or to the desired encryption key or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below ALL to delete all keys, or press the Menu Select button directly below SNGL to delete current shown key. 128 You can abort this screen and return to Home screen by pressing the Menu Select button directly below ABRT. NOTICE:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the USK. English Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey Ensure that the Unique Shadow Key (USK) or Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) is loaded into the radio with the Key Variable Loader (KVL) while selected to the channel with the intended ASTRO OTAR profile selection before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. 1 or to REKY. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below REKY. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. Press the PTT button again, or the or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows REKEY FAIL. MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying Page

(Conventional Only) This feature allows you to view or define MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode. In addition to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgments, and Power-up Acknowledgments. Some of the selected options require configuration at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even when all the 129 English encryption keys are erased. Without this UKEK key, the radio cannot be rekeyed over the air. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Hear Clear NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two components of Hear Clear. Companding Reduces the channel noise, such as OTA transmission that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expander Expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. 130 Random FM Noise Canceller (Flutter Fighter) Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-

Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are canceled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Radio Lock This feature requires you to enter a password to unlock the radio when it powers on. The default password is 0123456789. Your service provider determines the following requirements:

Number of characters for a password Number of attempts for password entry If you exhaust all attempts at entering the correct password, the radio is deadlocked. Restart the radio to start over. NOTICE:

Depending on the configuration, the radio might carry over the number of attempts remaining even after a power cycle. If you exhaust all attempts in this configuration, the following occurs:

The radio remains inhibited All encryptions and secure keys are erased Changing Your Password 1 or to PSWD. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PSWD. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to UNLOCK PSWD. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . English 7 Enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. NOTICE:

If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password 1 or to PSWD. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below PSWD. The display shows Change Password screen. 131 English 3 or to TACTICAL INH ENCODE PSWD. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . 5 Enter the old password. Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature (Secure Radios Only) This feature allows you to enable or disable the radio lock feature. It is programmable by a qualified radio technician. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 1 or to LOGF. 7 Enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. NOTICE:

If you enter three incorrect passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOGF. One of the following results occur:

The display shows PSWD ENABLED, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. The display shows PSWD DISABLED, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. Radio Stun and Kill This chapter explains the radio stun and kill features. Radio Stun This feature allows you to stun another radio by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. This feature prevents an unauthorized user from using the radio. 132 Once the radio is stunned, a password is required to re-

activate the stunned radio. Using Radio Stun 1 or to STUN. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below STUN. The display shows ENTER PASSWORD. English Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows ACK RECEIVED. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows DEC FAIL. If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen locked and request for password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows radio Contact IDs. NOTICE:

To un-stun a radio, follow the procedure in Unlocking Your Radio. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNUM to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Radio Kill This feature allows you to render your radio or another radio inoperable if the radio is misplaced or lost. When a radio is killed, the display turns blank and all functions of the radio are not usable. 133 English The killed radio can only be recovered from KILL with a special device. Consult an authorized and qualified technician for details. Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio Remote Kill allows you to render another radio inoperable by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. 1 or to KILL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below KILL. The display shows ENTER PASSWORD. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNUM to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEND to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows ACK RECEIVED. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows DEC FAIL. If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows NO ACKNOWLEDGE. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen turns blank, the killed radio is inoperable. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows the radio Contact IDs. Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio Direct Kill allows you to make your own radio inoperable. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required ID. 134 Press and hold the programmable button (2-dot) on the keypad microphone then press the Orange button until the display turns blank and becomes inoperable. Radio Inhibit This feature allows the system administrator to put a radio into a non-functional state when the radio is missing or in an unknown hand. The radio stays in this state regardless of its power changes. NOTICE:

If the radio has Inter-system roaming capability, the system administrator is able to put the radio into a non-functional state when missing radio roamed to another system. The radio can only be uninhibited by receiving an uninhibited command from the system administrator or by reprogramming the radio through labtool or depot CPS only. English Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System NOTICE:

This feature is addressed as GPS across the manual as the naming convention of the buttons and strings remain the same as the legacy feature of GPS. The availability and accuracy of this location information

(and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. GPS Operation The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites to establish location coordinates. Therefore, maximizing your view of unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a 135 English Inside buildings, trains, or covered vehicles wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

Underground locations Under any metal, or concrete roof, or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. NOTICE:

Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 10 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. 136 The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and the open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and English bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of 60 programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. The radio also stores four preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between programmable waypoints and preprogrammed waypoints. Programmable Way-

points Coordinates can be delet-

ed one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Way-

points Coordinates cannot be deleted. NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Programmable Way-

points User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Preprogrammed Way-

points Fixed location coordi-

nates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destina-

tion coordinates are edita-

ble. Location Format This feature allows you to select different display formats of GPS location. The following GPS location formats are available:

Lat/Long(DD) Lat/Long(DDM) Lat/Long(DMS) UTM/UCS SLD99 MGRS 137 English NOTICE:

When you send your location to another radio, the receiving radio displays the location in its selected format. Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature NOTICE:

An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. 1 or to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. The display shows LOCATION OFF <LATITUDE>. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the GPS. The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 138 4 or to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 5 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below RFSH. The top line temporarily displays PLEASE WAIT while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. 6 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Selecting Location Format 1 or to LOC. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 4 5 or to LOC FORMAT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 3 or to check the time and date of the last successful location fix. English or to the preferred location format and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The front display shows the location with the selected format. NOTICE:

If the SLD99 format is selected and the range is invalid, the display shows - on the location. This situation occurs if you are using the radio outside of Sri Lanka and using the SLD99 format. To correct this situation, switch the location display format to other GPS options such as DDM, DMS, UTM/UCS, or MGRS. Turning Off GPS 1 or to LOC. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN . 5 or to TURN OFF GPS (if preprogrammed). 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to turn off the GPS. The display shows LOCATION OFF. 7 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Saving a Waypoint Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LOC. The display shows PREVIOUS LOC <LATITUDE>. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

139 English or to SAVE AS WAYPT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. or to SAVE AS HOME and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL and proceed to step 5. or to SAVE AS DEST. and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL and proceed to step 5. 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Viewing a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 3 Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required, or press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:

The display shows SAVED AS <WAYPOINT NAME>. The display shows SAVED AS HOME. The display shows SAVED AS DEST.. 2 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the list. or to select a waypoint to view the location information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 140 5 To view the longitude, time and date of the selected waypoint, or to VIEW and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 4 or to EDIT NAME and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. A blinking cursor appears in the EDIT NAME screen. English 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BACK, or to return to the Home screen, press or the PTT button. Editing the Alias of a Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 3 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 5 Use the keypad to edit the alias. 6 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the Waypoints main screen. 7 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> UPDATED and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. Press screen. or the PTT button to return to the Home 141 English Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint NOTICE:

The user can only edit preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination. Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [HOME] and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to [DESTINATION] and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to EDIT LOCATION and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The first number blinks. 4 142 5 Utilize the following control buttons to select the number/coordinates if required, then press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT to change the number/coordinates. Press to move to the previous number/

coordinates. Press to move to the next number/coordinates. Press to change the North (N), South or

(S), East (E) or West (W) direction. A blinking cursor appears in the EDIT LOCATION screen. 6 Utilize the following control buttons or menu to change the number/coordinates if required then press the Menu Select button directly below OK once. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below DEL to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below CNCL to return to the previous screen 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once complete setting up the new Home or Destination. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows [HOME] UPDATED and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows [DESTINATION] UPDATED and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows a list of waypoints. English 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select OPTN. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 4 The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> CONFIRM DEL?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below NO to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows <WAYPOINT NAME> DELETED . Deleting All Saved Waypoints Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 143 English NOTICE:

You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 3 4 or to WAYPOINTS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. or to DELETE ALL and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP CONFIRM DEL?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below YES to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below NO to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows ALL SAVED WAYP DELETED. 144 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below OPTN. 2 3 or to DIST FRM HERE and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL . The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only) This feature is only available for radio-to-radio voice transmissions, dispatch call and selective call in conventional ASTRO system. For radio-to-radio transmission, in order to allow the radio to show peer-

location, the voice should be directly sent from one radio to another radio without passing through any infrastructure facility such as repeaters, phone, or DVRS system. Both the transmitting radio and receiving radio must be configured to enable them to send and/or receive the GPS coordinates. You can check with your nearest qualified technician for more details. English NOTICE:

If the receiving radio is operating in a Mixed Mode channel, and the voice transmission is through the conventional ASTRO system then the radio can receive the location coordinates of its peers. This feature is also operable in a Scan Active channel or Scan Talkback channel. Upon receiving a voice transmission with GPS coordinates enabled on the receiving radio, the display shows the coordinates available in full or in short coordinates. There are two different formats available. Refer to the following list for the details shown in the Peer-Location quick text. Consult your agent to pick the best format to configure to your radio. Full location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude Relative distance or direction Short location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude 145 English NOTICE:

If the transmitting radio is stale at its location after a period of time, the receiving radio display shows LAST KNWN LOC: <Coordinates> <distance> on top of ID:<PTT ID>. The PTT ID seen here is optional to be shown on the display per requirement of usage. If the transmitting radio does not have GPS or the receiving radio could not decode the GPS signal of the received signal, the receiving radio display shows UNKNOWN LOC on top of ID:<PTT ID>. If the radio is not configured to show PTT ID, you see only UNKNOWN LOC. Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System) Geofence is a virtual perimeter based on the GPS to define a geographical area on earth. Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, your radio receives the Dynamic Regroup command from the system and immediately connects to a Dynamic Regroup 146 talkgroup. The radio display shows the new selected Dynamic Regrouped talkgroup with green intelligent light for your attention. On top of that, additional features are Voice Announcement of the new channel, and also direct content display of a text message to indicate that you are currently at Geofence area. Check with your nearest qualified technician on the requirements for these enhancements to work in Geofence. Any new text messages received at Geofence shall have its content displayed immediately on the radio display. NOTICE:

If the radio is set up in DVRS, only mobile radio is supported for this feature. Entering the Geofence Area The Voice Announcement and TMS display in this feature are optional. They must be configured to enable you to hear and see these indicators. When the radio enters a Geofence area, the radio immediately sends a message ACK back to the system. The radio searches the current zone for the channel with same talkgroup assigned as the Dynamic Talkgroup and also with same system ID of current trunk system. Once matched, the radio display shows the first matched and connected channel alias. If there is no channel with matching Talkgroup ID and trunk system ID, the radio display shows the channel alias of

<DYNAMIC talkgroup>. Once the radio is connected, you hear a dynamic regroup tone, the radio display shows <DYNAMIC channel> with temporary green color intelligent backlight and you hear a Voice Announcement. NOTICE:

When the radio loses the GPS signal, the GPS icon blinks and the radio sounds two high-pitched tones repetitively to indicate that the GPS has failed to operate. The radio display shows the red intelligent light. If the first matched channel is not configured with Voice Announcement, no Voice Announcement is played. The system sends a message to your radio. The radio display shows a direct text message content without any user operation. This message indicates you are currently present in a Geofence area. This TMS remains open on the display until user presses exit/home to exit this screen. English NOTICE:

If there is another incoming text message before you exit the previous message, the message screen is refreshed to show the latest message. The following procedure guides you to exit the text message received. Press the Menu Select button below EXIT or return to Home screen. to The other operations are the same as normal dynamic regroup command. When the radio exits the Geofence area, your radio reverts to original channel or newly assigned talkgroup. The radio display shows the new channel together with Voice Announcement to indicate the changes. Voice Announcement of the new channel only works if that channel is configured with Voice Announcement. Mission Critical Geofence This feature allows the radio to use the GPS receiver to determine radio location at frequent intervals. This feature also allows the radio to evaluate if the radio is within the Geofence area in real time. 147 English Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. Entering Mission Critical Geofence When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, the radio displays <Geofence Alias> with intelligent backlight and the user hears a Voice Announcement. Zone and channel alias of the Geofence area is displayed. If the radio is set to manual, the user can choose either to proceed with zone and channel change or cancel the change. The radio then connects to the designated talkgroup. The radio displays the talkgroup alias and dynamic regroup tone sounds. The transmit power level changes and the radio shows a direct text message content without any user operation. NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not be alerted by Voice Announcement

(VA), TMS display, Intelligent Backlight, and the Transmit Power Level. The user will be alerted only if these indicators are configured in the radio. The VA can be programmed to alert continuously or momentarily. If Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is enabled, the radio mutes any alert that is received when entering the Geofence area and unmutes when exiting. Exiting Mission Critical Geofence When the radio exits the Geofence area, the radio reverts to the original transmit power level, intelligent lighting, channel or newly assigned talkgroup. Voice announcement is cancelled or the user hears a pre-programmed VA tone. 148 The radio displays the new channel and a message is received to indicate the changes. To continue in Failsoft and to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. English Trunking System Controls This chapters explains the trunking system control features in your radio. Operating in Failsoft System The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communication during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-pitched tone and the display shows FAILSOFT. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. 1 Rotate the 16Position Select Knob to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and OUT OF RANGE. Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until it locks onto a control channel or failsoft channel, or if it is turned off. SmartZone The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when 149 English operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Headthe RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. Site Trunking Feature If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. When this occurs, you can communicate only with the radios within your trunking site. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Site trunking.The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and SITE TRUNKING. 150 Locking and Unlocking a Site This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button. Follow the procedure to lock and unlock a site using the radio menu. 1 or to SITE. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SITE. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below LOCK. The display shows SITE LOCKED. To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below UNLK. The display shows SITE UNLOCKED. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. Site Display and Search Button The Site Display and Site Search button allows you to view the name of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. or to RSSI and press the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. 2 Press the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. The display shows momentarily the name of the current site and its corresponding received RSSI. Changing the Current Site 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. English Press and hold down the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. You hear a tone and the display shows momentary SCANNING SITE. 2 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. You hear a tone and the display shows momentary Scanning Site. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Trunked Announcement The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting 151 English immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-Ruthless Preemption When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-type busy tone, followed by a call back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. Initiating an Announcement Ensure your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls. 1 Turn the Mode Knob to locate the announcement-

group mode. 152 2 Press the PTT button to initiate the announcement. Ignition Switch Options This feature allows the user to select the functionality of the radio based on the Ignition State of the radio users vehicle. Blank This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any Trunking dispatch communications since the radio will not affiliate with the Trunking systems. PTT Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the Trunking systems. Required This option allows the user to power on the radio only if the Ignition is present. The radio can be powered off either through Power button press or when Ignition is lost. In addition, the radio automatically powers on when the Ignition is present only if the radio was turned off due to the ignition being removed. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Soft Power Off This option allows the user to power on the radio either through Power button presses or when the Ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button was pressed or the Ignition was removed, the radio will be turned off. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. English Ignition Only Power Up This option allows the user to power on the radio only when Ignition is detected and will power off when it is removed. The radio does not power on or off with the Power button press. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires or when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. NOTICE:

While Ignition is not present, the radio powers-off with a radio-user Power Off button/knob selection if the radio was powered-up with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press or Ignition Auto Power Off timer is running. While Ignition is present, the radio powers-on with a radio-user Power On button/knob selection only if the radio was powered-down with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer. Using Emergency Power Up This feature allows the user to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a 153 English footswitch. In addition, when the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit, this feature will not be available to the users. Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. Auto Power Off Timer Auto Power Off feature powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. There are two different versions of Auto Power Off:

Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the radio is power-on. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. Ignition Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the vehicle key is removed, when the voltage at the ignition sense is removed. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. When the vehicle key is reapplied, the voltage at the ignition is reconnected, this timer is stopped. Although both Inactivity Auto Power Off and Ignition Auto Power Off can be enabled together, Ignition Auto Power Off timer is mutually exclusive with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer when both are enabled. During the last two minutes of the timer countdown, the radio generates continuous low tone and blinks Powering Off warning on the display until the timer expires or the timer is reset. The radio automatically powers off after the timer expires. The duration of the timer is preprogrammed. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone, or channel the user has just been assigned to. This feature is useful when you have difficulty reading the content on the display. The available voice announcement priority options are:

High Voice announcement is enabled even when the radio is receiving calls. Low Voice announcement is disabled when the radio is receiving calls. Voice announcement is available in the following scenarios:

154 When the radio powers up. When you change to a new zone. When you change to a new channel. When you press the Menu Select button, preprogrammed button, or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct, or Transmit Inhibit. When you press the preprogrammed button or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, Talkaround/

Direct, or Transmit Inhibit. Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25) A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator together with audio alert sent to radios at a site or a few sites to notify the users when there is a special situation that they need to be aware of. Your radio supports up to 250 site aliases. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. Upon the activation of a SSA, the receiving radios display the alert alias and generate the periodic alert tone. English NOTICE:

Alert alias, alert tone, and alert period can be preprogrammed. Alert period is the duration for the radio to repeat the alert tone. An interval of 5 seconds might impact the battery life of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details. When mixing SSA with received voice audio, the SSA alert is reduced in volume to ensure that the voice message is still heard clearly. Therefore, it is important that the SSA audio files are created with clear loud audio to ensure they can still be heard clearly when played at reduced levels. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 155 English 3 4 5 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the site is not available, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> NOT AVAILABLE. If the site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> DOES NOT EXIST. 156 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. 4 or to [SITEID ENTRY] to send alert through the manual entry. Press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the desired Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows the Select Alert screen. If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows INVALID ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. 6 or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the site is not available, the display shows <SITE ID> NOT AVAILABLE. English If the site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ID> DOES NOT EXIST. 7 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. 157 English 4 5 or to [All SITES] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If one or more sites are unavailable, the display shows NOT ALL SITES AVAILABLE. Repeat step 3. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. 158 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to START ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All AVAIL] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <ALERT ALIAS> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site 1 or to SSA. English 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the site is not available, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> NOT AVAILABLE. If the site does not exist, the display shows <SITE ALIAS> DOES NOT EXIST. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. 159 English Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SITEID ENTRY] and press the Menu Select button directly below EDIT. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the required Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. One of the following scenarios occur:

160 If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows INVALID ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows SENDING REQ. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If the single site is not available, the display shows <SITE ID> NOT AVAILABLE. If the single site does not exist, the display shows

<SITE ID> DOES NOT EXIST. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites English 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [ALL SITES] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows NOT ALL SITES AVAILABLE. Repeat step 3. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for all sites stop. 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to STOP ALERT and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All AVAIL] and press the Menu Select button directly below SEND. The display shows SENDING REQ. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows REQ FAILED. If the request is successful, the display shows REQ SUCCESSFUL. 161 English 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels This feature enables the mode of the radio to be changed based on the HUB on/off-hook state on all control heads. Whenever the radio goes off-hook, the radio changes to a preprogrammed zone channel specifically for off-hook state. When the user returns the radio to on-hook state, it reverts to its previous channel zone before the radio goes off-hook. When the radio is in off-hook state, manual mode change

(including mode change triggered by third party devices) is allowed. Radio reverts back to the last mode before off-

hook once the radio goes on-hook. 162 NOTICE:

During PL Defeats and Suspend Scan during on-

hook state, the radio is converted to work in new channel and Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. We do not recommend that Hub Suspend Scan"

and "Channel Change on Off Hook" to be enabled simultaneously. During Dynamic Regroup channel selector lock state, Emergency, Transmit Inhibit, radio lock, or when external key loaded is attached to the radio, the Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. The Off Hook State for APX Dual Radio Setup For Dual Radio, the state of the HUB on the unselected radio is always considered as on-hook. The state of the HUB of the selected radio is always reflected as the actual states of the HUB. When the HUB is placed off-

hook, the selected radio makes channel change per CPS configuration, and the unselected radio does not trigger channel change. With Channel Change on Off Hook enabled, when the HUB is placed off-hook, and there is radio switch, the new selected radio moves to the target channel zone on off hook, and the new unselected radio reverts to the last user selected channel before off-hook. The Off Hook State for Multiple Radios Setup When there are multi-control heads connected, the states of these HUBs reflect the active control head(s) state. Any HUB placed off-hook by active control head(s) makes the radio goes off-hook state. Only when all HUBs are placed on-hook, the radio can be in on-

hook state. NOTICE:

This feature needs to be carefully enabled. Users must also be familiar with the functionality of this feature as they have to be aware that removing the microphone triggers mode change most of the time. Low Voltage Threshold Warning This feature is created for APX mobile radio to provide warning for low voltage threshold. A specific external device is attached to the radio to monitor the automobile voltage. When the car battery went lower than a pre-defined threshold, the external device asserts the Vehicular Interface Port (VIP) input to the radio. When the voltage of the battery becomes normal, the external device de-asserts the VIP input to the radio. English The voltage threshold is customized in the external device settings. When the VIP switch turns on, the VIP asserts input to the radio. The radio immediately initiates a 15 seconds of low Voltage Pre-alert Timer. If the status of the VIP changed before this time-out timer ends, the radio returns to normal operation. If the status from the VIP unchanged when the time-out timer ends, the radio shows LOW BATTERY on the display and also sounds low battery/voltage alert tone. The radio sounds a short, high-pitched tone immediately after the PTT button is released. NOTICE:

If the mobile radio does not have a control head connected, the bricks can only alert the user with battery alert tone and the transmit chirp. 163 English Wi-Fi You can connect your radio to a Wi-Fi network for wireless programming. NOTICE:

The Wi-Fi Network Name (SSID) for the radio to connect to must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the preprogrammed button:

a. To toggle the Wi-Fi on or off, press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. This button must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the radio menu button:

or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. a. 164

-

-

If the display shows WiFi Status being Off, press the Menu Select button directly below On. If the display shows WiFi Status as Searching, Connecting, Connected or No Service, press the Menu Select button directly below Off to turn Wi-Fi off. Selecting WiFi Network This feature allows you to view and select the available WiFi network. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi to enter WiFi screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the WiFi. Radio starts searching for available network. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below List. Radio displays available network selection and the network signal strength. If the radio displays No network available, press the Menu Select button directly below RFSH to search for available networks. 4 Press or to scroll through the list and press Menu Select button directly below SEL to connect to the selected network. Radio displays the WiFi status, the selected network, and the signal strength. NOTICE:

The List and RFSH buttons are not available when WiFi is searching or connecting to network. Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Long press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. English or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. The display shows the current status of the Wi-Fi as described next. Searching Looking for available Wi-Fi networks that have been preprogrammed into the radio. Connecting In the process of connecting to a found Wi-Fi network. Connected Connected to one of the preprogrammed Wi-Fi networks. No Service No available networks or connection with one of the networks failed. If the radio is Wi-Fi connected, you see a Wi-Fi on the display.In signal strength indicator, addition, the WiFi menu shows Connected under the connection Status heading, what network you are connected to under the Network heading, and the signal strength to that network under the Sig Strength heading. 165 English 2 Press to exit. Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. Viewing Recent Calls This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) NOTICE:

The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Viewing recent calls using the radio menu:

a. or to RCNT. 166 b. Press the Menu Select button directly below RCNT to access the RECENT CALLS feature screen. or to scroll through the list. c. d. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu

, or the Select button directly below BACK, PTT button. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Selecting the Power Level NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Power level LOW enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power level HIGH enables a longer transmitting distance. Do one of the following to select the power level. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting the Power Level using the Transmit Power Level switch:

a. Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level using the radio menu:

or to PWR. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below PWR. The display shows LOW POWER and the low power icon or the display shows HIGH POWER and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. English NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Do one of the following to select a radio profile. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting a radio profile using the preprogrammed Profile button:

a. Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL or to scroll through the menu selections. to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Selecting a radio profile using the radio menu:

167 English a. or to PRFL and press the Menu Select button directly below PRFL to access the Profiles feature screen. or to scroll through the menu selections. b. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radio display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio front display. Perform one of the following actions:

To toggle the backlight on or off, press the DIM button. 168 To turn the backlight on, press any key of the keypad, the Menu Select or Menu Navigation buttons, or any programmable radio controls or buttons Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. Turning the tones on or off using the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button:

a. To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button. Turning the tones on or off using the radio menu:

or to MUTE. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below MUTE. The display shows momentary TONES OFF, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary TONES ON, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. Turning Voice Mute On or Off You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Turning Voice Mute off or on using the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:

a. To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off using the radio menu:

or to VMUT and press the Menu Select button directly below VMUT. a. The display shows momentary VOICE MUTE OFF, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or the display shows momentary VOICE MUTE ON, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer This feature turns off the transmitter of your radio. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 15 to 465 seconds, in 15-second English intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. NOTICE:

You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. 1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a continuous talk prohibit tone. After four seconds, the transmission is cut-off and the LED goes out. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. 169 English Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. 1 or to SQL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SQL. The display shows SQUELCH XX, where XX is the value for the current squelch. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below +

to increase the squelch volume. Press the Menu Select button directly below -

to decrease the squelch volume. 4 Press to return to the selected channel. 170 Analog Options Tone Private Line, Digital Private-Line, and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Option Carrier squelch Tone Private Line or Digi-

tal Private-Line Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch Normal Squelch Result You hear all digital traffic. You hear any digital traffic having the correct net-

work access code. Option Selective Switch Result You hear any digital traffic having the correct net-

work access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch that preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. One of the following occurs:

The radio plays the active transmission on the channel. The radio is muted if no activity is present. English Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. The ID number of your radio is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, the ID of your radio is sent continuously during the voice message. Smart PTT (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When Smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. The following table shows the variations of Smart PTT. Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Description You cannot transmit if traffic is detected on the channel. 171 English Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code Quick-Key Override Description You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if se-

cure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Your radio must be pre-

programmed to allow you to use Quick-Key Over-

ride. This feature works with either one of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-in-

hibit state by quick-keying the radio (press PTT but-

ton twice within the pre-

programmed time limit). Transmit Inhibit This feature is available for APCO 25 trunking, Type II trunking and Conventional operations for all APX radios. 172 When Transmit Inhibit feature is enabled, the radio stops all transmission including voice and data. The radio can receive messages but is not able to reply the acknowledgment request of the received message. User can physically control the transmission of the radio especially during operation in hazardous environments with this feature. An environment is considered hazardous when the power emitted by the radio power amplifier could initiate an explosion or other dangerous reactions. When the Transmit Inhibit feature is disabled, the radio functions according to its normal operations. The radio sounds alert tone when user enters or exits this feature and also when PTT is pressed. NOTICE:

Acknowledgment of any messages required from the radio is not transmitted if the Transmit Inhibition is enabled. Enabling Transmit Inhibition Perform one of the following actions:

or to TXIN. Press the Menu Select button below TXIN. English Turn off the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. NOTICE:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit using the menu and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows TX INHIBIT ON. You hear a sequence of short, low-high tones to indicate transmission is inhibited. If PTT TX Inhibit is enabled, when using multi control head with one active configuration, with the PTT pressed on the active control head, any press on the programmable button of the other control head which meant for that control head to be active control head will cause an unstoppable long low-pitched tone (Talk Prohibit Tone). The display shows TX INHIBIT This behavior can be stopped by pressing PTT button again on the active control head Disabling Transmit Inhibition Pressing PTT triggers the radio sounds a constant short, low-pitched tone (reject tone). NOTICE:

The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change after the radio powers up. The softkey TXIN is created to ease the user of inhibition transmission besides relying solely on Ignition Sense Line. Only if the Ignition Sense Line is on, the softkey TXIN works. If the Ignition Sense Line is on, user can always turn on or off the Transmit Inhibition using the softkey TXIN; but when the Ignition Sense Line is off, function of softkey TXIN is suspended, and the Transmit Inhibition function is always off. Perform one of the following actions:

or to TXIN. Press the Menu Select button below TXIN. Turn on the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. NOTICE:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit using the softkey and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows TX INHIBIT OFF. You hear a sequence of short, high-low tone (Transmit Inhibit 173 English Off tone) to indicate transmission is back to normal operation. Instant Recall This feature allows the user to save the last received call and playback the recorded call. The feature buffers all incoming audio over the air and stored when the audio is saved. Saving and Playback Calls Perform one of the following to save and playback the recorded calls. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Playback and saving the recorded calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below RCNT. or to RECENT CONVS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to view the recent conversations. b. 174 c. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below PLAY. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the recorded calls in chronological order. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below STOP to stop the radio playback. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below SAVE. Radio displays Audio Saved momentarily. e. f. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BACK. g. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Recent calls are lost after radio power cycle if the calls are not saved. Playback the saved calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below RCNT. b. c. or to SAVED CONVS and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL to view the recent conversations. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below PLAY. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the saved calls in chronological order. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below STOP to stop the radio playback. e. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below BACK. f. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below EXIT. Saving the recorded calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Long press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to save the recorded calls. Radio displays AUDIO SAVED momentarily. Radio plays the saved call automatically if call saving is successful. A tone sounds if call saving is not successful. English Playback the saved calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to playback the saved calls. b. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button again to skip to the next saved call. If there is only a single saved call, the playback skips to the end of the call. Radio auto playback the most recent incoming call followed by saved calls in chronological order. Radio displays the playback status. 175 English NOTICE:

Received call overwrites the ongoing record playback. User can short press the programmable button within three seconds to continue the playback and ignore the receiving call. User can short press the programmable button to trigger playback when the radio is receiving call to overwrite the receiving call. Playback can be halted by any tone and button press except for specific buttons. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. General Radio Information Your radio contains the following information:

Radio Information IP Display SIM Status Control Assignments 176 Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following radio information:

Host Version Secure Version CH 14 Version (depending on the number of channels connected.) Siren Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size and Type RF Band(s) Processor Version MCHIB Version CHIB Version TIB Version TRC Version VRS Version URC Version DVRS App Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS DSP Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS CP Version (only when DVRS is available) AUX CH Version Codeplug Alias (Optional) NOTICE:

To return to the Home screen, press at any time. 1 2 or to INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. or to RADIO INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Information screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

English or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screenp. to return to the Home screen . Press Viewing the IP Information This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. NOTICE:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 2 or to IP INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

177 English or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. Viewing the Control Assignments This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 31 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to INFO and press the Menu Select button directly below INFO. 2 or to CONTROL MAP and press the Menu Select button directly below SEL. The display shows the Control Map screen. 178 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below BACK to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. External Alarms (Horn and Lights) All control heads can be equipped for external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. NOTICE:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) alternating with the selected mode, until it is turned off. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows HORN/LITES OFF. Using Permanent Horn and Lights If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically turn on when the radio powers up. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected alarm(s). The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. Changing the Selected Alarms 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below H+L to turn on both horn and lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Lgts to turn on the lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Horn to turn on the horn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose H+L, the display shows HORN/

LITES ON. If you choose LGTS, the display shows LIGHTS ON. 179 English If you choose HORN, the display shows HORN ON. An OFF entry is shown at the softkey when one of the alarms is active. Selecting OFF deactivates the current active alarm. Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). The Volume Knob and the DIM button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On When you receive a call with the Alarms turned on, you hear the vehicles horn sounds for 4 seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. The display shows the type of call received (CALL, PAGE, or PHONE) and the selected mode name. The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. 180 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below CALL, PAGE or PHON to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s). The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s) and exit the Horn and Lights feature. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. The Volume Knob and the DIM button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). Front Panel Programming You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Programming (FPP) to enhance the use of your radio. Entering the Front Panel Programming Mode You can follow this procedure to enter the front panel programming (FPP) mode on your radio. English Federal 1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions and proceed to the next step:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. If the password is not entered, the radio displays the non-password protected zones only. 3 Press or to select Zn/Ch. 4 Press or to select the required zone. 5 Press or to select the required channel. The display shows the radio parameter screen. 6 Press or to select the required parameter to edit. 181 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to edit the parameter values. Press the Back button to return to the previous screen. English Non-Federal 1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen 2 Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 3 Press or to select Zn/Ch. 4 Press or to select the required zone. 5 Press or to select the required channel. The display shows the radio parameter screen. 6 Press or to select the required parameter to edit. Editing FPP Mode Parameters Perform the following actions as required while navigating through the feature parameters. Press 182 Accessories Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all radio models and/or bandsplits. Refer to the radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. Visit http://www.motorolasolutions.com to know more about the accessories supported by this radio. NOTICE:

GPS only antenna is used in either a single band UHF or 700/800 application where the Public Safety Microphone (PSM) is used with the corresponding PSM antenna. This antenna is only for GPS reception and cannot be used for receive/transmit operation at UHF, VHF, or 700/800. This antenna is never to be used on the PSM. English 183 English Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude 184 bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

-

-

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. NOTICE:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. ber 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

English Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 Receive 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 185 English 16 17**

18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

186 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 65 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources NOTICE:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. NOTICE:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impe-

dance RS232 18 V USB 3.6 V SB9600 5 V 115 Kbps 12 Mbps 9.6 Kbps 5000 90 120 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime 187 English Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to portable and mobile subscriber radio products. ACK Acknowledgment of communication. Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. ASTRO conventional Motorola Solutions standard for wireless analog or digital conventional communications. Autoscan A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. AUX CH Auxiliary Control Head. Analog Signal An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. ARS Automatic Registration Service ASTRO 25 Motorola Solutions standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Call Alert Privately paging an individual by sending an audible tone. Carrier Squelch Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receiver audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. Central Controller 188 English A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It Monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. Channel A group of characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. CHIB Control Head Interface Board. Control Channel In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-way/data-communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Conventional Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater. Frequencies are shared with other users without the aid of a central controller to assign communications channels. Conventional Scan List A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Cursor A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on a display. Deadlock Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio.The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. Digital Private Line A type of digital communications that utilizes privacy call, as well as memory channel and busy channel lock out to enhance communication efficiency. Digital Signal An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. Dispatcher 189 English An individual who has radio-system management duties and responsibilities. Digital Signal Processor A microcontroller specifically designed for performing the mathematics involved in manipulating analog information, such as sound, that has been converted into a digital form. DSP also implies the use of a data compression technique. Dynamic Regrouping A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. DVRS Digital Vehicular Repeater System. ESN Electrical Serial Number. FCC Federal Communications Commission. Hang up Disconnect. Key Variable Loader (KVL) A portable, handheld, rugged device used to transfer encryption keys to a target device. Encryption keys can be entered manually by the KVL user, auto-generated by the KVL, obtained from or shared with another KVL, or downloaded from a Key Management Facility (KMF). Liquid-Crystal Display (LCD) An LCD uses two sheets of polarizing material with a liquid-

crystal solution between them. An electric current passed through the liquid causes the crystals to align so that light cannot pass through them. Failsoft A backup system that allows communication in a non-

trunked, conventional mode if the trunked system fails. Light Emitting Diode (LED) An electronic device that lights up when electricity is passed through it. 190 MCHB Millennium Control Head Board. MDC Motorola Solutions Digital Communications. Menu Entry A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display. Selection of a feature is controlled by the programming of the buttons on the side of the radio. Monitor Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. English Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. Non-tactical/revert The user will talk on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Over-The-Air Rekeying Allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram the encryption keys in the radio. Page A one-way alert with audio and/or display messages. Personality A set of unique features specific to a radio. Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). PIN Personal Identification Number. Network Access Code Preprogrammed 191 English A software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. Private (Conversation) Call A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the group. Private Line (PL) A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Programmable A radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-to-Talk PTT-The switch or button usually located on the left side of the radio which, when pressed, causes the radio to transmit. When the PTT is released, the unit returns to receive operation. Radio Frequency RF-The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light (approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). 192 Repeater Remote transmit/receive facility that re-transmits received signals in order to improve communications range and coverage (conventional operation). Selective Call A feature that allows you to call a selected individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. selective switch Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Squelch Muting of audio circuits when received signal levels fall below a pre-determined value. With carrier squelch, all channel activity that exceeds the preset squelch level can be heard. Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) DSP interface to peripherals that consists of a clock signal line, a frame synchronization signal line, and a data line. Standby An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Status Calls Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. Tactical/non-revert The user will talk on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. TalkAround Bypassing a repeater and talking directly to another unit for local unit-to-unit communications. Talkgroup An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communications path. TMS Text Messaging Service. English Trunking The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users. Allows users to share a smaller number of frequencies because a repeater or communications path is assigned to a talkgroup for the duration of a conversation. Trunking Priority Monitor scan list A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. USK Unique shadow key. UTC Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard (formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time; everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym = Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. 193 English VRS Vehicular Repeater System. Zone A grouping of channels. 194 Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX NEXT Radio APX Mobile Radios Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year For LACR region:

ASTRO APX NEXT Radio Three (3) Years English Product Accessories One (1) Year MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by 195 English MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS offers the following optional extended service contracts. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) COMPREHENSIVE Provides for extended hardware repair coverage INCLUDING CHEMICAL, LIQUID, FIRE, AND OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE. Comprehensive coverage is available in conjunction with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty and starts from the FIRST DAY the radio is put into use. Service performed under this plan consists of repair or replacement of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay the inbound shipping charges only with use of the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS designated delivery service. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) LITE Provides extended hardware normal wear and tear repair coverage beginning AFTER MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty period expires. Service performed under this plan consists of repair of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF 196 English TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. be provided by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere 197 English with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. 198 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept English its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, nor will MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. VIII. For Australia Only This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. Motorola Solutions Australias limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, 199 Motorola Solutions Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. English please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website: http://

www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/Contact_Us for the most updated warranty terms. SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola Solutions maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola Solutions to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola Solutions makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola Solutions service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola Solutions dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola Solutions two-way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the 200

 

 

APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX MOBILE O7 CONTROL HEAD APX 2500, APX 5500, APX 6500, APX 7500, APX 8500 USER GUIDE June 2019 2019 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved

*68012006034*

68012006034-EK English Contents Declaration of Conformity.............................................11 Important Safety Information........................................ 13 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada)................15 Software Version.......................................................... 16 Computer Software Copyrights.................................... 17 Documentation Copyrights........................................... 18 Disclaimer.....................................................................19 Read Me First...............................................................20 Notations Used in This Manual..........................20 Radio Maintenance............................................21 Radio Care..............................................21 Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio......................................23 Additional Performance Enhancement.............. 24 ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data.....................24 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR)........ 24 CrossTalk Prevention............................. 24 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID)............ 24 SecureNet...............................................24 2 Over-the-Air Rekeying............................ 25 P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System

(DVRS)................................................... 25 Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements...............................25 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You............................................................. 26 Preparing Your Radio for Use...................................... 27 Turning On the Radio ....................................... 27 Adjusting the Volume.........................................28 Validating Compatibility During Power Up.........28 Radio Controls..............................................................30 Control Head and Microphone...........................30 Programmable Features....................................31 One Touch Button...................................31 Assignable Radio Functions................... 32 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions..34 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions.........36 Menu Select Buttons...............................36 Advance Programmable Buttons............ 36 Home Button...........................................37 Dimmer Button........................................38 4-Way Navigation Button........................ 38 Data Feature Button............................... 38 Multi-Function Knob (MFK).....................38 Keypad.............................................................. 39 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode..40 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode..42 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode......44 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode.......................................................46 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............................... 48 Status Indicators...........................................................49 Status Icons.......................................................49 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators.........52 TMS Status Icons................................... 52 TMS Menu Options.................................53 Call Type Icons..................................................54 LED Indicator.....................................................55 Multi-function Knob - Concentric Ring LED....... 56 Intelligent Lighting Indicators............................. 56 Alert Tones ....................................................... 58 General Radio Operation............................................. 64 Selecting a Zone................................................64 English Selecting a Radio Channel................................ 64 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call....... 65 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call.........................................65 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only)................................66 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)..............67 Methods to Make a Radio Call.......................... 67 Making a Talkgroup Call ........................ 68 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only).... 68 Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only)....................................................... 69 Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button............................................... 70 Monitor Feature................................................. 71 Monitoring a Channel..............................71 Monitoring Conventional Mode............... 71 Advanced Features...................................................... 73 Using ViQi..........................................................73 Advanced Call Features.................................... 78 Calling a Phone Not in the List............... 78 3 English 4 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only)....................................................... 78 Receiving a Selective Call........... 78 Making a Selective Call................79 Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only)...................................... 80 Selecting a Talkgroup.................. 80 Sending a Status Call............................. 81 Making a Priority Dispatch Calls............. 81 Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only).... 82 Requesting a Reprogram

(Trunking Only)............................ 82 Classification of Regrouped Radios..........................................83 Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP)....... 83 Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel...........84 Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection...................................... 84 Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone..............................85 Multiple Control Head Features.........................85 Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head....................................................... 86 All Active Mode....................................... 86 Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode....................................... 87 One Active Mode.................................... 88 SmartConnect....................................................89 Contacts............................................................ 89 Making a Private Call from Contacts...... 90 Adding a New Contact Entry...................91 Deleting a Contact Entry.........................92 Adding a Contact to a Call List............... 92 Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List.......................................................... 93 Editing an Entry Alias...................93 Editing as Entry ID....................... 93 Editing a Call Type.......................94 Scan Lists.......................................................... 94 Intelligent Priority Scan........................... 95 Viewing a Scan List................................ 95 Editing the Scan List............................... 96 Changing the Scan List Status............... 96 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status......................................................97 Scan.................................................................. 98 Turning Scan On or Off...........................98 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only)....................................... 98 Transmitting While the Scan is On......... 99 Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan.. 99 Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan.............................................99 Deleting a Nuisance Channel................. 99 Restoring a Nuisance Channel............. 100 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On..................................................... 100 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List.........100 Using the Hang Up Box (HUB)............. 101 Call Alert Paging..............................................101 Receiving a Call Alert Page.................. 101 Sending a Call Alert Page.....................102 English Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert...................................................... 103 Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) .......................................... 104 Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission...104 Emergency Operation......................................104 Exiting Emergency................................106 Exiting Emergency as Supervisor

(Trunking Only)..................................... 106 Sending an Emergency Alarm.............. 107 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only)..................................................... 108 Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only).............................. 108 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call.................................... 109 Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic.......................................... 110 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm...... 111 Special Considerations for Emergencies.........................................111 Impact Detection...................................112 Detecting Impact........................ 112 5 English 6 Post-Alert Timer......................... 113 Triggering Emergency................113 Exiting Impact Detected Condition....................................113 Re-Initiating Impact Detection Sequence...................................113 Automatic Registration Service (ARS).............114 Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode.. 114 User Login Feature............................... 115 Logging In as a User..................116 Logging Out............................... 117 Text Messaging Service (TMS)....................... 118 Accessing the Messaging Features......118 Composing and Sending a New Text Message............................................... 119 Sending a Quick Text Message............120 Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message............................... 122 Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message............................ 122 Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message......................... 122 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message............................ 123 Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message......................... 123 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message.................................... 123 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message.................................... 124 Receiving a Text Message.........124 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox.................................... 125 Replying to a Received Text Message.................................... 125 Accessing the Drafts Folder.......126 Sent Text Messages.................. 127 Deleting Text Messages............ 128 Secure Operations...........................................129 Enabling Secure Transmission............. 129 Accessing the Secure Feature..............129 Selecting Secure Transmissions.......... 130 Managing Encryption............................ 130 Loading Encryption Keys........... 130 Multikey Feature........................ 130 Selecting an Encryption Key...... 131 Selecting a Keyset..................... 131 Erasing Encryption Keys............132 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey.........................................133 MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying Page (Conventional Only)..........133 Infinite UKEK Retention............. 133 Hear Clear..................................134 Radio Lock.......................................................134 Changing Your Password..................... 135 Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password.............................................. 135 Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature (Secure Radios Only).............. 136 Radio Stun and Kill.......................................... 136 Radio Stun............................................ 136 Using Radio Stun....................... 136 Radio Kill...............................................137 English Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio..........................................138 Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio................................. 138 Radio Inhibit.....................................................139 Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System...............................................139 GPS Operation..................................... 139 GPS Performance Enhancement......... 140 The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)..................................................... 140 Location Format....................................141 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature................................................. 142 Selecting Location Format.................... 142 Turning Off GPS................................... 143 Saving a Waypoint................................143 Viewing a Saved Waypoint................... 144 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint............. 145 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint. 145 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint....... 147 Deleting All Saved Waypoints...............147 7 English 8 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint........................ 148 Location Feature in Emergency Mode..148 Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only)................................ 149 Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System)........ 150 Entering the Geofence Area................. 150 Mission Critical Geofence..................... 151 Entering Mission Critical Geofence.......152 Exiting Mission Critical Geofence......... 152 Trunking System Controls............................... 153 Operating in Failsoft System.................153 Out-of-Range Radio..............................153 SmartZone............................................ 153 Site Trunking Feature........................... 154 Locking and Unlocking a Site............... 154 Site Display and Search Button............ 154 Viewing the Current Site............ 155 Changing the Current Site......... 155 Trunked Announcement....................... 155 Initiating an Announcement....... 156 Ignition Switch Options.................................... 156 Blank.....................................................156 Tx Inhibit............................................... 156 PTT Tx Inhibit....................................... 156 Required............................................... 157 Soft Power Off...................................... 157 Ignition Only Power Up......................... 157 Using Emergency Power Up.................157 Auto Power Off Timer........................... 158 Voice Announcement ..................................... 158 Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25)..................159 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site

..............................................................159 Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry....................................160 Sending SSA Notification to All Sites....161 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites...................................... 162 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site........................................................163 Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry.............................163 Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites...164 Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites...................................... 165 Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels

.........................................................................166 Low Voltage Threshold Warning..................... 167 Wi-Fi................................................................ 168 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off........................ 168 Selecting WiFi Network.........................168 Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio............................... 169 Utilities............................................................. 170 Viewing Recent Calls............................170 Selecting the Power Level.................... 170 Selecting a Radio Profile...................... 171 Controlling the Display Backlight.......... 172 Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off....172 Turning Voice Mute On or Off...............172 Using the Time-Out Timer.................... 173 Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features................................................174 Analog Options.......................... 174 Digital Options............................174 English Using the PL Defeat Feature................ 175 Digital PTT ID Support..........................175 Smart PTT (Conventional Only)............175 Transmit Inhibit..................................... 176 Enabling Transmit Inhibition.......176 Disabling Transmit Inhibition......177 Instant Recall........................................ 178 Saving and Playback Calls........ 178 General Radio Information....................180 Accessing the Radio Information

................................................... 180 Viewing the IP Information......... 181 Viewing the Control Assignments.............................. 182 External Alarms (Horn and Lights)........182 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights......................................... 183 Using Permanent Horn and Lights......................................... 183 Changing the Selected Alarms.. 183 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On............................184 9 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:........................................... 199 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:........................... 200 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:................................201 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.....201 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:...........................................................201 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:................................................. 202 VII. GOVERNING LAW:.................................. 203 VIII. For Australia Only.................................... 203 SERVICE.........................................................204 English Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms..........................184 Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms........................................184 Front Panel Programming.....................185 Entering the Front Panel Programming Mode................... 185 Editing FPP Mode Parameters.. 186 Accessories................................................................ 187 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range.... 188 Special Channel Assignments.........................188 Emergency Channel............................. 188 Non-Commercial Call Channel............. 188 Operating Frequency Requirements............... 189 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies.....................191 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources...................................................191 Glossary..................................................................... 192 Limited Warranty........................................................ 199 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.................... 199 10 Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the following FCC logo. Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) English Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that APX MobileAPX NEXT conforms to FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 11 English NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 12 Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way RadiosRF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios CAUTION:

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Portable Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

For a list of Motorola Solutions-approved antennas, batteries, and other accessories, visit the following website:

English http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum

(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter is approved by Industry Canada to operate with a Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. 13 English NOTICE:

Setting up the radio as an RF Modem takes complete control of the radio. In this mode, the radio no longer responds to button and PTT presses nor will it unmute to voice activity. This mode is designed to receive and pass specifically formatted over the air data to a tethered computer with RF modem enabled applications. This mode can only be exit by reprogramming the radio with Customer Programming Software (CPS) to not operate in RF modem mode and cycling power. 14 Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada's license-exempt RSS's per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. English 15 English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R19.00.00 R01.00.00 or later. See Accessing the Radio Information on page 180 to determine the software version of your radio. See Accessing the Radio Information to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the supported features. 16 Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. English 17 English Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 18 Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola Solutions reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola Solutions does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. English 19 English Read Me First This User Guide covers the basic operation of the radio. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. If you attempt to use features which are mutually exclusive, one or more of the following occurs:

The feature control or icon is grayed out. A negative tone sounds. The radio displays Feature not allowed. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of Warning, Caution, and Notice. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed. WARNING:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. 20 CAUTION:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. NOTICE:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition and so on, which is essential to emphasize. The following special notations identify certain items. Example Home button or Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Phone Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the display of the radio. This means Press the right side of the 4-Way Navigation Button. Radio Maintenance This chapter covers the radio and battery care. Radio Care Proper radio usage and care assures efficient operation and long life for the product. The following are recommendations and warnings when using the radio. English CAUTION:

Your radio casting has a vent port that allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Never poke this vent with any objects, such as needles, tweezers, or screwdrivers.This could create leak paths into the radio and the radio submergibility will be lost. Your radio is designed to be submerged to a maximum depth of 6 feet, with a maximum submersion time of 2 hours. Exceeding either maximum limit may result in damage to the radio. Elastomer seals used in portable radios can age with time and environmental exposure. Therefore, Motorola Solutions recommends that radios be checked annually as a preventive measure in order to assure the waterseal integrity of the radio. Motorola Solutions details the disassembly, test, and reassembly procedures along with necessary test equipment in the Service Manual. If the radio battery contact is exposed to water without the battery attached, dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio. Turn the radio over with the battery 21 English contact facing down and shake the radio so any trapped water can escape. The battery contacts must be dry before attaching a battery or a short circuit of the contacts could occur. Avoid subjecting the radio to an excess of liquids. Accessory connector cover must be attached to the radio side accessory connector if an accessory is not attached to the radio. If the radio is submerged or exposed to a high force water spray, such as from a hose, remove the side accessory connector or accessory connector cover immediately and check to make sure no water was forced into the accessory connector/radio interface. Rinse and dry the area and re-attach the accessory or accessory connector cover if leakage occurs. If the radio is exposed to a corrosive environment, such as salt water or corrosive gases or liquids, rinse and clean the radio immediately to prevent damage to radio materials, especially plated surfaces. Refer to Cleaning Your Radio for detailed instructions. Remove the battery and the antenna before cleaning. 22 If the radio has been submerged in water, shake the radio well so that any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port can be removed. Otherwise, the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio. Do not disassemble the radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Any radio maintenance should be performed only by a qualified radio technician. Underwriter Laboratory (UL) certified radios should only be opened and serviced by UL approved service centers. Opening or repairing at unauthorized locations will invalidate the radios hazardous location rating. Do not pound, drop, or throw the radio unnecessarily. The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems. CAUTION:

The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. English Cleaning the External Surface of the Radio CAUTION:

Do not use solvents to clean your radio. Spirits may permanently damage the radio housing. Do not submerge the radio in detergent solution. 1 Combine one teaspoon of mild diswashing detergent to one gallon of water (0.5% solution). 2 Apply the solution sparingly with a stiff, non-metallic, short-bristled brush, making sure excess detergent does not get entrapped near the connectors, controls or crevices. 3 Dry the radio thoroughly with a soft, lint-free cloth. 23 English Additional Performance Enhancement The following performance enhancements are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality, and efficiency of the radios. ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data ASTRO 25 Enhanced Data is optimized to handle different message sizes and variable update rates from different applications of the radio. Add Enhanced Data to the Integrated Data system with a software installation to improve data channel efficiency and enable denser network traffic. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication such as failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV&D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. 24 CrossTalk Prevention This feature prevents crosstalk scenarios from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the internal SSI clock rate of the radio. This subsequently reduces the possibility of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV&D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. Over-the-Air Rekeying The Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) feature allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram encryption keys in the radio after a rekey request. Single-system OTAR Single-system OTAR is supported by a single Key Management Facility (KMF). If the radio moves from one secure system to another, it must be reprogrammed to the new system. Multi-system OTAR Multi-system OTAR is supported by multiple KMFs. After an initial programming, the radio is able to seamlessly move to a secure system associated to a newly selected channel. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. English P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System

(DVRS) Motorola Solutions offers an MSI Certified APX compatible, third Party, P25 Digital Vehicular Repeater System (DVRS) that provides low-cost portable radio coverage in areas where only mobile radio coverage is available and portable radio coverage is either intermittent or non-existent. NOTICE:

Portable subscriber units enabled in the system for Radio Authentication shall be able to authenticate regardless of whether they are communicating directly on the system or through a DVRS. Conventional Talkgroup and Radio Scan Enhancements A few enhancements have been made to the Conventional Talkgroup at the system. These enhancements improve the Scan feature operation significantly when multiple agencies are using a single conventional radio frequency channel. These enhancements allow users to use Selective Squelch to operate on only the subset of talkgroups that are relevant to the users rather than all talkgroups on the channel. These Scan improvements have been made to 25 English eliminate the audio holes that were present and to turn on the busy LED when activity is present on the channel. Mixed Vote Scan and Standard Conventional Scan configurations are supported. Priority Operation is also supported. Up to 30 different talkgroups can be supported using conventional channels. A maximum of four talkgroups can be supported when Vote Scan channels are being used. Smart PTT is supported with this enhancement as Smart PTT prevents users from transmitting while other users are on the channel. NOTICE:

User Selectable Talkgroups are not compatible with this Conventional Talkgroup Enhancement. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You Check with your dealer or system administrator for the correct radio settings, if the radio is to be operated in 26 extreme temperatures (less than -30 C or more than +60 C). NOTICE:

To assure radio longevity, front display, LTE, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and GPS are not available when radio internal temperature is below -20 C. The top display will indicate Cold Temp Mode in this temperature. LMR radio communication will continue to operate until the temperature reaches -30 C. You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

NOTICE:

Specifications may vary for different radio models. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Preparing Your Radio for Use This section provides simple instructions to prepare your radio for use. Turning On the Radio 1 Press the Power Button radio. briefly to power on the After a short time, the red, yellow, and green LEDs light up. The display then shows the following:

Current zone and channel text Codeplug Alias English Menu items on the home screen Codeplug Alias feature is enabled through Customer Programming Software (CPS) configuration to display the codeplug alias as a temporary text during power on. The backlight turns on to the last selected dim level. NOTICE:

The Power Button is ignored if it is pressed before the LED lights up. If Fail ##/## appears on the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If Error ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Radio Maintenance on page 21 for more information. If Ch mismatch appears, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. 27 AB English 2 To turn off the radio, press the Power button after the LEDs light up. NOTICE:

The duration that user must press and hold the Power button to turn off the radio is programmable by a qualified radio technician. Adjusting the Volume 1 To increase the volume, rotate the Multi-Function Knob clockwise. 28 2 To decrease the volume, rotate this knob counterclockwise. The display shows volume bars and volume level when you change the volume. Validating Compatibility During Power Up The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power up. During validation, the display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. Press the Power On/Off Button to reset when the display shows Update done Please reset upon completion, or when the display shows Update failed Please reset when it fails to update. If the software updates are complete, the radio runs the usual power up operation. If the updates are incomplete, the radio runs the Maintenance Mode and the display shows Maintenance Mode Remote Device; promptly followed by other maintenance statuses again. A NOTICE:

If SW incomplete appears, use Flashport Recovery Tool to update the control heads before you power on the radio again. English 29 English Radio Controls This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control the radio. Control Head and Microphone 1 These radio controls/buttons are programmable. 30 NOTICE:

The microphone is not part of a radio. It is an optional accessory. 1 2 3 4 5 Accessory Port (Microphone) Menu Select Buttons1 4-Way Navigation Buttons Home Button1 Data Button1 17911131514161210823456171820212219 Bluetooth Indicator2 Accy 2-Dot Button1 Accy 1-Dot Button1 Accy No-Dot Button (Purple)1 Push-to-Talk (PTT) Button Emergency Button1 DTMF Keypad 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Multi-Function Knob (MFK)1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Dimmer Button LED Indicators Power Button Data Feature Button1 Home Button (Microphone) Keypad Okay/Select Button (

Cancel Button (X)

) English 22 Navigation Button (Microphone) Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to controls that are preprogrammed means that a qualified radio technician must use the radio programming software to assign a feature to a control. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press. Some functions can also be programmed to the radio switches. One Touch Button Each of the four Menu Select buttons, the Emergency button and the three Accy buttons on the microphone are programmable buttons which can be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician to a default function which is activated upon a short press. 2 The hardware of your radio is Bluetooth ready. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. 31 English Assignable Radio Functions Auxiliary Switches back and forth between two radios that are attached to the same control head. Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call.Allows you to answer a private call or phone call. Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. Delete Deletes digit, or deletes a nuisance channel in Scan. Digital Vehicle Repeater System Toggles between the Digital Vehicle Repeater System

(VRS) mode. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a Scan List (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-

Two channel. 32 Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Ext PA On/Off Toggles the audio routing between the connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the internal public address (PA) system of the radio. Intercom Enables users of multiple control heads to talk to each other using the control heads in a multi-control head setup. Internet Protocol Address Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address, device name, and status of the radio. Location Determines the current location (latitude, longitude, time, and date), and also the distance and bearing to another location or turns the GPS functionality on or off for all locations. Message Enters the current message list. Monitor (Conventional Only) Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until the function is disabled. Multiple Private Line (Conventional Only) Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel from the scan list. One Touch 14 Launches a specific feature with. You can set up as many as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Private Call (Trunking Only) Allows a call from one individual radio to another. Private Line Defeat (Conventional Only) Overrides any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that is preprogrammed to a channel. Priority Dispatch Allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. Radio Profiles Allows easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. English Recent Calls Allows easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher that a new encryption key is needed. Repeater Access Button (RAB) (Conventional Only) Allows you to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that a new dynamic regrouping assignment is needed. Request-To-Talk (Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want to send a voice call. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Scan List Programming Selects the scan list for editing (by pressing and holding the Scan button). Secure/Clear Toggles secure transmission on or off. 33 English Selective Call (Conventional Only) Calls an assigned radio. Siren Turns different Siren Tones on or off. Site Display/Search (Trunking Only) Displays the current site ID and RSSI value; performs site search for Automatic Multiple Site Select (AMSS) or SmartZone operation. Site Lock/Unlock (Trunking Only) Locks onto a specific site. Status (ASTRO 25 Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct (Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater or communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup (Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. 34 User Automatically registers the user to the server. Virtual Partner Enables the Virtual Partner feature and allows you to perform queries using ViQi. Zone Down Toggles downward through the zones in the radio. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. Zone Up Toggles upward through the zones in the radio. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Air Horn Toggles the external air horn alert tone on and off. All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones on and off. Backlight Toggles the display backlight on and off. English Channel Announcement Allows you to hear the Voice Announcement audio file that is assigned to the current channel/mode of the radio. Dim Changes the display brightness. External Radio Toggles the external radio on and off. Front/Rear Toggles between one of the two control heads. HiLo Toggles the HiLo Airhorn tones on and off. Horns/Lights Toggles the horns and lights feature on and off. Keypad Lock Toggles the keypad lock on and off. Keypad Mute Toggles the keypad tones on and off. Low Power Toggles the transmit power level between high and low. Manual Toggles the manual tone on and off. Public Address On/Off Toggles the internal public address (PA) system of the radio on and off. Siren Toggles the external siren alert tone on and off. Speaker Activates the external speaker to share your call with your group. Squelch Toggles the squelch level between normal open and tight. TX Power Level Toggles the transmit power level between high and low. Voice Announcement Audibly indicates the current feature mode, zone, or channel that you have been assigned to. Voice Mute Toggles the voice transmission between mute and unmute. Volume Set Tone Sets the volume set tone. Wail Toggles the external wail alert tone on and off. 35 Advance Programmable Buttons This feature is to help you to shorten the process of applying certain common features. English Yelp Toggles the external yelp alert tone on and off. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following methods. A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. Use the Menu Select Button (

). Menu Select Buttons NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Use the Menu Select button to access the menu entry of your radio feature. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a zone may to be the same. Press the Menu Select button (

) directly below Zone. 36 ACB English NOTICE:

These programmable buttons support the One Touch Button feature.

(Quick Access) One Touch Button Enters a menu with a short press on the preprogrammed One Touch button. Features assigned to these buttons are Call, Call Alert, Phone, Repeater Access, MDC RTT Button Access, Status, and Message. button returns you to the Home (default) Home Button Pressing the screen. In most cases, this is the current mode. For selected radio features, the user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. button is also used to save NOTICE:

Some features do not require you to press to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. 37 A B C D E F Emergency Button Menu Select Buttons Home & Data Buttons Accy No-Dot Button (Purple) Accy 1-Dot Button Accy 2-Dot Button DEF English The button also can revert to home channel from any other zone and mode in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Multi-Function Knob (MFK) Mode Change Dimmer Button Use this button to adjust the brightness of the display. Long press to toggle between day and night mode. 4-Way Navigation Button Use the 4-Way Navigation Button to scroll up, down, left, or right with one of the following methods. Press and release one of the buttons to scroll from one entry to the next one. Press and hold one of the buttons to have the radio toggles through the list automatically (release the button to stop). Data Feature Button Use Data Feature button to access data-related features, such as the Text Messaging Service (TMS) feature screen. Press the MFK once and turn clockwise to scroll the channel list. Volume Change Turn the MFK clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the volume level of the speaker. The volume level can be adjusted in 16 steps or 32 steps. A fast turn of the MFK adjusts the volume level in 16 steps with large increments in volume level. A slow turn of the MFK adjusts the volume level in 32 steps with small increments in volume level. The display shows the volume level and bars to indicate the current level. The level of last selected volume when your radio powers down remains the same when the radio powers up. The main display shows the icon of the secondary feature.The main display does not show the icon of primary feature. 38 on the MFK will blink in green Your radio by default is set to use the primary feature. Short press the MFK to toggle it to work on either the secondary or primary feature. The concentric ring LED when the knob is set to secondary feature. The secondary feature has an inactivity timer. This timer starts when the secondary feature is idle. The radio returns to primary feature when the timer expires. If the MFK is set to operate only one feature, it is recommended that it be set to Volume Change. Consult your dealer or system administrator for the best options available for MFK. English Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the keypad microphone to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The following tables show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. 39 A English Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 1 A D G J

. B E H K M N P Q

, C F I L O R

?

!

;

@ _ S Key 40 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 T U W X V Y Z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 41 English Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 1 a d g j

. b e h k m n p q

, c f i l o r

?

!

;

@ _ s Key 42 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 t w u x v y z Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode and lowercase mode. Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 43 English Keypad Characters Numeric Mode 9

-

1 0

*

1 1

#

1 2

&

1 3

$

1 4

/

1 5

+

1 6

=

1 7

\

1 8 1 9 2 0

(

2 1

) Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8

.

,

?

!

;

@ _ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Key 44 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 8 9 0 Space Toggle between numeric and letter mode. 45 English Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 7 1 2 4 5 6 3 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 A D B E C F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Key 46 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 Not applicable Not applicable English 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 47 English Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Methods to Make a Radio Call on page 67 for more information. on the side of the microphone serves The PTT button two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. 48 A Status Indicators This section explains the status indicators of the radio. Status Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the display of the radio. Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Call Received Radio has received an Individual Call. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the received signal strength for the current site (trunking only) The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the sig-

nal. English Direct On Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored

(during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or se-

lected conventional channel is activated. Off The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or se-

lected conventional channel is deactivat-

ed. or Power Level 49 English 50 L H Radio is set at Low power. Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot Radio detects activity on channel desig-

nated as Priority-One. Steady dot Radio detects activity on channel desig-

nated as Priority-Two. View/Program Mode Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady View mode Blinking Program mode Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On Secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On AES secure operation. Off Clear operation. Blinking Receiving an encrypted voice call. GPS Signal On Feature is enabled and signal is availa-

ble. Off Feature is disabled. Blinking Feature is enabled, but no signal is available. User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) On User is currently associated with the ra-

dio. Off User is currently not associated with the radio. Blinking Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Inverted User successfully login to the secured IP Packet Data. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. English Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. Start Case Indicates that the first character of the text entry is capitalized. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. Lowercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. 51 English 52 Mixedcase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in mixed case and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. Uppercase Predictive Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase and with predicted words shown at the bottom of the screen. MFK is in Mode Change feature Turn the MFK to change the channel/

zone. MFK is in Volume Change feature Turn the MFK to turn the volume up or down. The radio Wi-Fi network is connected. The number of bars displayed represents the signal strength of the Wi-Fi signal. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators Status icons and menu options shown here help you to work more efficiently with TMS feature. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 118 for more information. TMS Status Icons The following icons appear on the radio display when you send and receive text messages. Inbox Full The Inbox is full. Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read. Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Normal Message User is composing a message with normal priority and without a request for a reply. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of six messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. English Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a pri-

ority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. TMS Menu Options The following menu options appear on the radio display when you send and receive text messages. Menu Option Back Save Description/Function Brings you back to the previous screen. Saves the messages you have edited to the Draft folder. 53 English Menu Option New Impt RqRp Del Edit Exit No Optn Rply Sel Send Yes 54 Description/Function Creates a new message. Toggles the Priority Status icon on or off for an outgoing message. Toggles Request Reply icon on or off for an outgoing message. Deletes a message or text. Edits a draft message or key in a target ad-

dress. Exits to the Home screen. Cancel the delete all messages options. Brings you to the Options main screen. Replies to a message. Selects a predefined message or address. Sends the message. Deletes all the messages in the current folder. Call Type Icons The following icons appear on the radio main display, when you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID. Radio number. Radio number added to a Call List. Mobile number. Mobile number added to a Call List. Landline phone number. Landline phone number added to a Call List. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. English Blinking red Double blinking red Radio is in Emergency Mode. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow (Conventional Only) Channel is busy. Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. A Red LED B Yellow LED C Green LED Solid red Radio is transmitting. Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. 55 BCA English blinks green when the MFK is Multi-function Knob - Concentric Ring LED The concentric ring LED using the secondary feature. See Multi-Function Knob

(MFK) on page 38 to understand the functionality of MFK. If Intelligent Lighting is activated, the concentric ring LED does not blink green when the MFK is in the secondary mode.The LED turns into solid color of orange, red or green depending on the status of Intelligent Lighting. See Intelligent Lighting Indicators on page 56 for different status of Intelligent Lighting. Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporarily changes the display backlight color and the alert text background color of the radio to help signal that a radio event has occurred. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight and Bar Color Orange 56 Notification When Emergency Alerts The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. A Notification When English Backlight and Bar Color Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts The radio battery is low. The radio is out of range. The radio enters Failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio lost GPS signal or GPS function fails. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. The radio enters Geofence. 57 English Alert Tones Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of the condition of your radio. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Short, Low-

Pitched Tone Long, Low-

Pitched Tone 58 Tone Name Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Time-Out Timer Timed Out Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Lack of Voice PTT Time out Out of Range Invalid Mode Heard When radio fails its power-up self test. When an unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than six seconds without any activity. After time out.

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed. When the radio ends your call after it detected there are lack of voice for five seconds after the PTT is pressed and hold. Your ra-

dio ends the call to enable your radio to receive calls from other radio users.

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the sys-

tem. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. English You Hear A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Short, Medi-

um-Pitched Tone Long, Medi-

um-Pitched Tone A Group of Medium-Pitch-

ed Tones Tone Name Busy Heard When system is busy. Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received Emergency Alarm/Call En-

try Central Echo Volume Set Emergency Exit Failsoft Automatic Call Back Keyfail Console Acknowledge Received Individual Call When a correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. When activity on a priority channel is received. When entering the emergency state. When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. When exiting the emergency state. When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is re-

ceived. When Call Alert or Private Call is received. 59 Tone Name Call Alert Sent Site Trunking Low-Battery Chirp Heard When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. When battery is below preset threshold value. GPS Fails When the GPS fails or loses signal. Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Talk Permit When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.

(When PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received.

(When PTT button is pressed) is verifying with the system for ac-

cepting its transmissions. When a new message is received. When a priority message is received. English You Hear Short, High-

Pitched Tone

(Chirp) Two High-

Pitched Tones Ringing Gurgle Unique, Low-

Pitched Chirp Unique, High-

Pitched Chirp New Message Priority Status 60 You Hear Two high-

pitched tones Four high-

pitched tones every five sec-

onds Single, high-

pitched tone Four high-

pitched tones Sound similar to a telephone busy signal A series of two short, high-pitched tones A series of low-pitched Tone Name Private Conversation When When a Private Call is received. Call Alert When a Call Alert page is received. English Central Acknowledge Mobile Unit Acknowledge System Busy Automatic Call Back Talk Permit (Optional) Scan Alert On When a Call Alert, emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/

message transmission is received by the systems central control-

ler. When a Call Alert page is received by the intended unit, or the emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/message trans-

mission is acknowledged by the intended dispatcher. When the PTT button is pressed, indicates transmission fail be-

cause all system radio channels are in use. Release the PTT but-

ton and wait for call back. When a channel is now available for your previously requested transmission. When the PTT button is pressed, indicates the system is accepting your transmission. When Scan feature is activated through the preprogrammed but-

ton. 61 English You Hear tones followed by a series of high-pitched tones A series of high-pitched tones followed by a series of low-pitched tones Continuous, low-pitched tone 62 Tone Name When Scan Alert Off When Scan feature is deactivated through the preprogrammed button. Talk-Prohibit Smart PTT Inhibit Out-of-Range Illegal Mode

(When the PTT button is pressed) the system is out of service.

(When the PTT button is pressed) the channel is busy with the Smart PTT feature enabled.

(When the PTT button is pressed) indicates the radio is not in the range of the trunked radio system. Illegal Mode When you have entered When you have entered a mode where normal system traffic will be missed, or you are attempting something which is not permit-

ted. Examples include: forgetting to exit the telephone interconnect mode after a call ends (fleet and subfleet calls cannot be re-

ceived), attempting to transmit on a receive-only conventional English You Hear Tone Name Auto Power Off Failsoft Time-Out Timer Warning or Menu Inactive Exit Valid Key Invalid Key Single, high-

pitched tone every nine seconds Brief low-

pitched tone Single, short, high-pitched tone Single, low-

pitched tone When mode, attempting to select a dynamic mode where no dynamic ID assignment has been made. Powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprog-

rammed length of time. When a trunked system central controller failure in an unmuted re-

ceive condition. The radio reverts from trunked operation to a sys-

tem similar to conventional radio repeater operation. Other system users can be heard sharing the channel. When your present transmission will soon be disabled. When you pressed a valid key, or you entered a feature configura-

tion state, or you are receiving or transmitting in the clear mode on secure models (with TX Clear Alert Tones enabled). When you tried to make an invalid key press, or that an emergen-

cy alarm, reprogram request, or status/message was not acknowl-

edged. 63 English General Radio Operation This chapter explains the general radio operations of your radio. Selecting a Zone Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. A zone is a group of channels. Do one of the following to select a radio channel. You can use these options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a zone using the MFK :

a. Rotate the MFK until the display shows the desired zone. Select a zone using the radio menu Zone:

or to Zone and press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. or to the required zone, or use the keypad to enter the zone number. a. b. 64 c. Press or the PTT button to confirm the selected zone number. d. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs. Do one of the following to select a radio channel. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Select a channel using the MFK:

a. If channel is set as the primary mode, turn the MFK until the display shows the desired channel. If channel is not set as the primary mode, press the MFK once and repeat this step. b. Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed channel. Select a channel using the radio menu Chan :

a. or to Chan . b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan . or to the required channel. c. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to confirm the selected channel. e. Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed zone channel. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. English B Yellow LED C Green LED The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. The LED lights up solid red while the radio is transmitting. In conventional mode, the LED lights up solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission. In trunking mode, there is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. A Red LED Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen) the radio displays the following depending on the system your radio is configured to:

65 BCA English For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. For Trunking system, the display shows the caller alias or ID. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. See also Making a Talkgroup Call on page 68 for details on making a Talkgroup Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call (Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from one individual radio to another. The one-to-one call between the two radios are not heard by the others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio 66 automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. NOTICE:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), when there is no response from the receiving radio, the calling radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone after the timer expires. When you receive a Private Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the caller alias or ID. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. If the caller alias is in the call list, the display shows the caller alias during the call. If the caller name is not in the call list, the display shows the caller ID. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to hang up and return to the Home screen. NOTICE:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Resp, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Resp, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See also Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 68 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. NOTICE:

With the inactivity timer enabled (optional), if there is no response to the call after the timer expires, your radio exits the call with Menu Inactive Exit tone. English When you receive a Telephone Call, you hear a telephone-

type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green.The display shows Phone call and the call received icon blinks. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to hang up and return to the Home screen. See also Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) on page 69 for details on making a Telephone Call. Methods to Make a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone menu. The MFK . A preprogrammed One Touch button. The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 89). 67 English NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. For ASTRO Conventional system, the LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. For Trunking system, the LED lights up solid red. Making a Talkgroup Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last-

selected talkgroup. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . Use the MFK to select the channel with the desired talkgroup. 4 Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 102 for more information. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The radio shows different indicators based on the system the radio is configured. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID (number) and initiate the Private Call. Proceed to step 4. 68 or to Call , and press the Menu Select button directly below Call . The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. English 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate the Private Call. A telephone-type ringing sounds if the receiving unit is in service. The display shows Calling...

<Number> or Calling... <Alias>. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. Making a Telephone Call (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number. Proceed to step 4. 69 English or to Phon, and press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 58 for more information if your call is not answered. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. or to the required phone number. Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. 3 Press the PTT button to dial the phone number. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. Switching Between Repeater or Direct Operation Button The Repeater Operation increases the radio coverage area by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The Direct or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. or to Dir and press the Menu Select button directly below Dir. 5 When your call is answered, press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 70 The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. English The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). Monitor Feature The monitor feature is used to make sure that a channel is clear before transmitting. The lack of static on a digital channel when the users switch from analog to digital radios is not an indication that the radio is malfunctioning. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allows only the clear voice or data information to be heard. d. If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. Monitoring a Channel in Trunked Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. b. Press the PTT button. c. If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if you hear no tone and the indicator lights steadily, then proceed with your message. d. Release the PTT button to receive transmission. If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows Out of range. Monitoring a Channel Monitoring a Channel in Conventional Modes:

a. Lift the microphone off the hook. b. Listen for activity on that channel. c. Adjust the volume by rotating the MFK if necessary. Monitoring Conventional Mode This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. Thus, you can to listen to another user active on the 71 English channel. This way, you may be prevented from taking over someone elses conversation. 1 To activate monitoring, perform one of the following actions:

At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, or to Mon and press the Menu Select button directly below Mon momentarily. Take the control head off the hook. The display shows Monitor On. You hear all channel traffic. 2 Press the Menu Select button again to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows Monitor off. Pressing the Menu Select button again turns monitor off and you dont hear all channel traffic. If you try to transmit on a receive-only channel, you hear an invalid tone until you release the PTT button. 72 Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Contacts Dialer Messages Utilities on page 170 Using ViQi ViQi is an intelligent virtual partner that provides critical information through common query searches and dialog interaction. With ViQi, you are able to perform tasks on your radio by using voice commands.ViQi is available on APX 8500, APX 6500, and APX 5500 radio models using the handheld control head or mobile keypad microphones with programmable buttons. English ViQi retrieves important information from the database without the need to access another device, vehicle, or wait for the dispatcher to run a query. 1 To use ViQi, press and hold the assigned programmable button. 2 After you hear a tone, speak the command clearly, then release the button. If To access ViQi, To identify your cur-

rent zone and chan-

nel, Then say "Look up informa-

tion..."

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my zone and channel"

"Current zone and channel"

"Zone and channel"

To change to a new zone and channel, say one of the follow-

ing commands:

73 English If Then If Then

"Zone <Zone Name>, channel

<Channel Name>"

"Change zone to

<Zone Name>, channel to

<Channel Name>"

"Switch zone to

<Zone Name>, channel to

<Channel Name>"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my zone"

"Current zone"

"Zone"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

To identify your cur-

rent channel, To change to a new channel, To identify your cur-

rent zone, To change to a new zone, 74

"Zone <Zone Name>"

"Change zone to

<Zone Name>"

"Switch zone to

<Zone Name>"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my chan-

nel"

"Current channel"

"Channel"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Channel

<Channel Name>"

"Change channel to

<Channel Name>"

If Then If

"Switch channel to

<Channel Name>"

To change to your home channel, To identify your cur-

rent volume level, To change your vol-

ume level, say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Home channel"

"Change to home channel"

"Switch to home channel"

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my vol-

ume"

"Current volume"

"Volume"

say "Volume <Volume Level>". The follow-

ing terms represent the volume values:

To change to a new profile, English Then Low 10%

Medium 50%

High 100%

110 10%100%

say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"<Profile Name>

profile"

"Change to

<Profile Name>

profile"

"Switch to

<Profile Name>

profile"

To start or stop scanning, say one of the follow-

ing commands:

75 English If To identify your bat-

tery level, To cancel your previ-

ous command, 76 say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"What is my battery level"

"Battery level"

"Battery"

say "Cancel". NOTICE:

Cancel com-

mand works within a five-

second win-

dow after the last com-

mand. Then

"Start scan"

"Stop scan"

"Start scanning"

"Stop scanning"

If To perform a license plate query, Then say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Run a <State>

plate

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Check a <State>

plate"

To perform a drivers license query, NOTICE:

You can use variations such as

<Plate>

and <Tag>. say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"<State> license

<Alphanumeric String>"

If Then If Then English

"Run a <State>

driver's license

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Check the state of

<State> driver's li-

cense

<Alphanumeric String>"

NOTICE:

You can use variations such as

<Driver's License>,

<DL>, and

<License>. say one of the follow-

ing commands:

"Check Vehicle Identification Num-

To perform a Vehicle Identification Num-

ber query, ber

<Alphanumeric String>"

"VIN check

<Alphanumeric String>"

"Run a VIN"

NOTICE:

You can use varia-

tions such as

<Vehicle Identification Number>, <VIN>, and <Vehicle Number>. 77 English Advanced Call Features This chapter explains the operations of the call features available in your radio. Calling a Phone Not in the List 1 or to Phon. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. 3 Enter the desired phone number on the keypad. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press the button or the PTT button on the keypad microphone to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to exit. or Menu Select button directly below Phon 78 Selective Call (ASTRO Conventional Only) A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio with privacy. Receiving a Selective Call When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blink and the display alternates between Call received and the home display. The speaker unmutes. 1 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. NOTICE:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Call, your conversation is heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Call, you are not responding privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 79. Making a Selective Call Your radio must be preprogrammed for you to use this feature. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature by using a preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Access

(One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID. Proceed to step 3. or to Call, and press the Menu Select button directly below Call. English The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 2 To select the required ID, perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the last number dialed. or to the required ID. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press to return to the Home screen. 79 English button to hang up, your radio If you do not press remains in Selective Call state with the other unit. You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls. Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. NOTICE:

Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are associated, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 129 for more information. 80 Selecting a Talkgroup 1 or to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last Talkgroup that was selected and stored. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Pset for the preset preprogrammed Talkgroup. or to the required Talkgroup. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the currently selected Talkgroup and return to the Home screen. If the encryption key associated to the new Talkgroup is erased, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Key fail. If the encryption key that is associated to the new Talkgroup is not allowed, you hear a momentary key fail tone and the display shows Illegal key. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. Sending a Status Call This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Status button. or to Sts and press the Menu Select button directly below Sts. The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required status. English Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 3 Press the PTT button to send the status. When the dispatcher acknowledges, you hear four tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. If no acknowledgment is received, you hear a low-

pitched tone and the display shows No acknowledge. 4 Press to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press or the PTT button. Making a Priority Dispatch Calls If a talkgroup is congested, the Priority Dispatch feature allows you to call the dispatcher on a different talkgroup. This talkgroup is called the Priority Talkgroup. Each trunking talkgroup can have its own assigned Priority Talkgroup.Priority Dispatch is not available during 81 English Emergency operations. Scan feature is suspended when Priority Dispatch is initiated. Dispatch console that supports this feature must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. 1 Press the preprogrammed Priority Dispatch button. A tone sounds and the radio enters Priority Dispatch mode. The radio exits this mode when the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires. 2 Before the Priority Dispatch Time Out Timer expires, press and hold the PTT button to transmit. The display shows the Priority Talkgroup alias. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The radio exits Priority Dispatch mode, returns to its original talkgroup, and displays the home channel alias. 82 Dynamic Regrouping (Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a particular channel where they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations. When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it receives a dynamic regrouping command and automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. You hear a gurgle tone and the display shows the name of the dynamically regrouped channel. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the previous zone and channel that you were using. If you access a zone or channel that has been reserved as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, you hear an invalid tone. Requesting a Reprogram (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to notify the dispatcher when you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. or to Rpgm then press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. English channel, once you have selected the dynamic-

regrouping position. Select Disabled Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The radio is forced to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The display shows Reprogram Rqst and Please wait. The Scan and Private Call features are unavailable when your radio is Select Disabled. If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, you hear a low-pitched alert tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press to cancel and return to the Home screen. Classification of Regrouped Radios The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into Select Enabled or Select Disabled categories. Select Enabled Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping Dynamic Zone Programming (DZP) NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. This feature works on the condition at least one zone in the radio must be a non-

dynamic zone. This feature provides one or more Dynamic Zones to store frequently used channels be it conventional or trunking. These dynamic channels are saved from pre-existing (non-

dynamic) channels in the radio. This saves the time and effort from the regular navigation around the working zones and channels. User can also delete or update the list in the Dynamic Zone. 83 English Entering the Dynamic Zone to Select a Dynamic Channel 1 2 or to Zone then press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the Zone screen. or to <# Dynamic Zone Channels>.3 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Saving a Channel in the Dynamic Zone from List Selection The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 or to ZnPr. Press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Search Options screen. Press the Menu Select button below Sel to select. Press the Menu Select button below Exit to exit. If you have selected one of the Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen with the selected <# Dynamic Zone Channels>

shown on the screen.3 If you have selected Exit without selecting any Dynamic Zone Channels list, the display returns to Home screen without any changes. 3 4 or to List Selection. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Select Zone screen. or to the required zone. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Select Chan screen. 3 # indicates number of the channel on the 16-Position Switch which are numbered from 1 to 16. 84 5 or to the required channel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Channel updated. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to Home screen. Deleting a Channel in the Dynamic Zone The radio must be in Dynamic Zone in order to perform this operation. 1 2 or to ZnPr then press the Menu Select button directly below ZnPr to enter Program Zone screen. The display shows the dynamic channels list. or to the saved dynamic channel then press the Menu Select button directly below Del. The display shows Channel deleted screen. English 3 Press the Menu Select button below Exit to return to Home screen. The Home screen shows <Dynamic Zone Channels>. If the channel deleted is the Home channel, the Home screen shows <Zone Name>Blank. Multiple Control Head Features This feature allows your transceiver to control a combination of up to four O7 control heads on APX Mobile

(depending on the model). You can use the CAN cables to connect in any configuration that does not exceed 131 feet

(40 meters) in combined length. Refer the Control Head Installation Manual (6878215A01) for further information. The Multiple Control Head (MCH) feature consists of 2 modes that can be programmed through Customer Programming Software (CPS):

All Active mode One Active mode 85 English NOTICE:

If two or more control heads are connected to the system before enabling the MCH feature in the CPS, the radio displays Extra CH or CH ID # ERR. Both errors are FATAL. Setting the ID of the Initial Control Head This feature allows you to setup the control head in the Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode. During the setup, the control heads are defined as Control Head Number 1, Control Head Number 2, Control Head Number 3, and Control Head Number 4. 1 Power off the radio by pressing the Power button. 2 Press and hold the left-most Menu Select button and the emergency button simultaneously. 86 3 While continuing to depress these two buttons, press the Power button to power on the radio and the control head. The radio and the control head powers on into FPP mode. The display shows the ID number of the control head. 4 Turn the MFK to change the ID number of the control head. The radio displays Please Wait and the ID number of the new control head. 5 When Please Wait is no longer displayed, press the Power button to power off the radio and exit FPP mode. 6 Repeat step 1 to step 5 to set the ID number for the rest of the attached control heads. All Active Mode The All Active mode enables all connected control heads attached to the radio to operate concurrently with each other. When you activate a feature on one control head, the rest of the control heads have the same activated features and indicators on their respective display. until the active control head releases PTT button. This can be made on any attached control head. English NOTICE:

The multiple control head feature allows only control heads of the same type to be connected. Upon power up, if a control head of a different type is connected to the radio, the display of all the attached control heads shows the FATAL error CH mismatch. When you change the volume on one control head, the rest of the active control heads display the volume bar. All active control head display the alias/ID number of the control head that changed the volume. Activating and Deactivating Intercom in All Active Mode This feature only applies to control heads in the All Active mode. The intercom feature allows one control head user to talk to another control head user in a MCH configuration. At any given time, when a control head being operated has priority for the intercom call, all other control heads are blocked 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Intc to activate the intercom feature of any of the control heads. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate an intercom transmission. All control heads that are attached will receive the same intercom call. The display of the control heads receiving the intercom call shows the alias/ID number of the transmitting control head. 3 Press or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to deactivate the intercom feature. The intercom feature also deactivates when user initiates a mode change. If the radio is on an emergency channel, pressing of the Emergency button or the emergency footswitch button on any control head also deactivates the intercom feature. 87 English One Active Mode The One Active mode enables only one control head to be visibly active at a time in a two control head system. NOTICE:

In the One Active mode, if more than two control heads are present upon power up, the radio shows a FATAL error Extra CH on the display of all attached control heads. The active control head commands the system normally while the inactive control head is in remote mode with its display shows Remote. The Volume knob, Dimmer button, Front/Rear (F/R) softkey and Emergency button, MFK, Keypad keys, and Data button, the Emergency footswitch and VIP inputs remain active on the inactive control head, while all other controls are disabled. The VIP input control head is configurable in the CPS and VIP should be attached to the control head selected in the CPS. NOTICE:

Only two control heads are supported in the one active mode. 88 A B C Transceiver Active Radio Non-Active Radio You can change the command between the two control heads by pressing the Menu Select button directly below F/R, or the Menu Select button preprogrammed user button on the keypad microphone. Z1ZONECHANPWRSQLREMOTEF/RABC SmartConnect SmartConnect allows you to have voice communication by switching the device to any available network with the priority order of Wi-Fi LTE Satellite when LMR is out of range. The radio can connect through a fixed Wi-Fi access point in buildings or in-vehicle Broadband modems such as Sierra Wireless modem MG90, VLM750, or Satellite modem. When a channel is SmartConnect enabled and goes out of range, the radio displays Out of Range and SmartConnect capable icon connected to the available network, the radio displays

. Once the device is SmartConnect and SmartConnect connected icon

. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable only for APX 6000 series, APX 8000 series, and APX 8500 series. Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID

(number) that you use to initiate a call. English Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to five IDs of different call types associated with it. Also, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the following types of calls:

Phone Call Private Call Selective Call Call Alert Each entry within Contacts contains the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (ASTRO 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID NOTICE:

Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. 89 English Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs. NOTICE:

Your radio is preprogrammed with a few contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Making a Private Call from Contacts Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. 1 2 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn and proceed to the next step. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts and proceed to step 6. 90 4 5 or to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. or to select the call type. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 8 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid red when the PTT button is pressed. If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. If the call reaches the maximum ring time, the call ends. Adding a New Contact Entry 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . English 1 2 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. 7 8 or to [New Contact] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Name. or to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. or to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . The display shows Number 1 and a blinking cursor appears. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 4 Use the keypad to enter the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 5 or to [Add Number] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows Type 1 <Default Type>. 9 Use the keypad to enter the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. To cancel this operation, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. The display shows <Entry> Stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. 91 English Deleting a Contact Entry Adding a Contact to a Call List 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Del and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows <Entry> confirm del?. 4 Select the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the entry, or No to cancel and return to the main screen of Contacts. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen of Contacts. 92 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to add and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Add to CallLst or Add to PhonLst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or until the display shows [Available]

and press the Menu Select button directly below Add to add as a new entry. or until the display shows <Entry> and its associated number and press the Menu Select button directly below Rplc to replace the existing entry. The display shows <Entry> added, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. The radio returns to the main display of Contacts. Methods of Contact Editing in a Call List This feature allows you to edit contacts in a call list. Editing an Entry Alias 1 2 3 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . English 4 or to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the name and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing as Entry ID 1 2 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 93 English 3 4 or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to edit the number and press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Editing a Call Type 1 or to Cnts and press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts . The entries are alphabetically sorted. 94 2 3 4 5 or to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . or to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to Type and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit . or to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen of Contacts. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/

groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List Multi-System Talkgroup Scan Refer to a qualified radio technician for the maximum number of Scan Lists can be preprogrammed in your radio. A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Intelligent Priority Scan Intelligent Priority Scan feature allows you to add or delete conventional channels and trunking talkgroups from multiple system into the priority scan lists. You can add or delete priority scan list members and assign priorities using the preprogrammed Scan List Programming button. Radio displays the priority level of the scanned member. English NOTICE:

Priority-One channel and Priority-Two channel member may belong to different Talkgroup Scan systems. When the radio locks onto a channel in the Intelligent Priority Scan list, radio scans for higher priority member within the same Trunking or Conventional system. Viewing a Scan List 1 2 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL . or to view the members on the list. 3 Press Home screen. to exit the current display and return to the 95 English Editing the Scan List This feature allows you to change scan list members and priorities. 1 2 or to ScnL and press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL . The display shows the lists that can be changed. or to the entry you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcl to view the next member of the scan list. 4 Perform one of the following actions to select another channel that needs to be added or deleted 96 then repeat step 3. Otherwise, proceed to the next step. Use the keypad to enter the desired channel to the desired channel. or name. Use the MFK to select the channel. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 97 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status 1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan side button. 2 or to the member you want to edit. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Select button once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. Press the Select button one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

or to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. Use the MFK to select another scan list member. 5 Press to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing the Priority Status Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel one or more times to change the priority status of the current displayed channel. English Press the Select button one or more times to toggle between different status of the Scan List status icon of the current displayed channel. The radio shows one of following priority status icons and scenarios:

A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. 97 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) You can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect, and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls while scanning for activity. You may respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed. or to Mon and press the Menu Select button directly below Mon. The brief Monitor on display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. English Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button to initiate or stop scan. or to Scan and press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. If the scan is enabled, the display shows Scan on and the scan status icon. If the scan is disabled, the display shows Scan Off. The radio returns to the Home screen. 98 Transmitting While the Scan is On This feature allows the user to transmit using radio programmed for talkback scan and non-talkback scan. Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below Scan momentarily. English Transmitting Using Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below page or call. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing pressing the Menu Select button below either page or call. or Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise

(termed nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. 99 English This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted, or to Nuis and press the Menu Select button directly below Nuis. The radio continues scanning the remaining channels in the list. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, perform one of the following actions:

Stop and restart a scan. Mode change to another channel and back to the original channel. Turn off the radio and then turn it on again. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. 100 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below DYNP to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. Restoring Priorities in a Scan List To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, perform one of the following actions:

Turn scan off, and then on. Change channels. Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Using the Hang Up Box (HUB) To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box

(HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. NOTICE:

Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. English If other users are away from their radios or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual call alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, if there is no answer after the maximum ring time or when you press the PTT button for an Enhanced Private Call, the radio automatically sends a call alert page. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Receiving a Call Alert Page When you receive a Call Alert page, you hear four repeating alert tones and the LED blinks green. If Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled, you hear one alert tone and the LED blinks green. The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. Press the PTT button to answer or press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 68 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 68 for more information on returning the call. 101 English Sending a Call Alert Page Do one of the following to send a call alert page:

NOTICE:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Sending a call alert page using the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button:

a. Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-

Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID. The display shows Paging...<Number> or

<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button 102 directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu Page :

or to Page . a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Page . or to select the required ID. c. d. Press the PTT button to send the page. The display shows Paging...<Number> or

<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. Sending a call alert page using the radio menu Call :

directly below OK to return to the main screen of Contacts. English or to Call . a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Call . or c. to select the alias or ID, and press the PTT button to initiate the call. If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. d. To send the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below Yes . To exit the screen without sending the call alert page, press the Menu Select button directly below No . The display shows Paging...<Alias>. If the call alert page is sent successfully, you hear four high-pitched tones and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to the Home screen. If the call alert page is not acknowledged, you hear a low tone and the display shows No acknowledge. Press the Menu Select button Enabling and Disabling In-Call User Alert Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. 1 or to scroll to the VMut and press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. Voice mute is activated. 2 To turn the feature off, press the Menu Select button directly below VMut or the VMut preprogrammed button again. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below VMut or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. Voice mute on shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to all conventional dispatch calls and affiliated trunking group calls. 103 English Quick Call II (ASTRO P25 Digital Trunking and Conventional) This feature allows the user to broadcast a series of distinct, recognizable tones before a voice transmission from the dispatcher or a radio. The broadcasting dispatcher or radio user can select this alert tone transmission to be sent to an individual Talkgroup or over the entire system. Specific tone or series of tones are pre-programmed into the radios to allow the dispatcher or supervisor to select a list of tones to broadcast before they make their voice transmission. Each tone is distinctive to indicate different situation or different broadcaster. The transmitting radio also plays back the tones for the broadcaster to listen. NOTICE:

The receiving radios must be configured with the Quick Call II tone in order for the radio to sound the selected tone and also to sound a preconfigured alert tone after the selected tone has sound. Initiating a Quick Call II Transmission The broadcasting or transmitting radio must be pre-

programmed to see the tone in the Quick Call II tone list. 104 The receiving radio must also be pre-programmed to decode the tone to broadcast. 1 2 or to QCII, and press the Menu Select button directly below QCII. or to select the tone to broadcast. 3 Press the PTT to broadcast the selected tone, or press and hold the PTT to broadcast the selected tone and transmit with your vocal transmission. You hear the radio sounds the selected tone. You can begin your call after the tone ends. 4 Release PTT to listen. Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Orange button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports the following Emergency modes:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Call (Trunking Only) Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call Silent Emergency Alarm Special Considerations for Emergencies Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. One channel supports only one Emergency mode. The radio responds differently when pressing the preprogrammed Emergency button in each channel.Only one of the Emergency modes can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. The radio operates in the normal dispatch manner while in Emergency Call, except if enabled, it returns to one of the following:

Tactical/Non-Revert The radio sends an emergency alarm and/or makes an emergency call on the current channel. Non-Tactical/Revert for Conventional System The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency channel to send an alarm and/or make an emergency call. English Non-Tactical/Revert for Trunking System The radio reverts to the preprogrammed emergency talkgroup (trunking system) or channel (conventional system) to send an alarm and/or make an emergency call. NOTICE:

When changing channels during Emergency transmissions:

If the new channel is also preprogrammed for Emergency, you can change channels while in Emergency operation. The emergency alarm or call continues on the new channel. If the new channel is not preprogrammed for Emergency, the display shows No emergency, and you hear an invalid tone until you exit the Emergency state or change to a channel preprogrammed for Emergency. When enabled, the Emergency Keep-Alive feature prevents the radio from being turned off by using the On/Off/Volume Control Knob when the radio is in the Emergency state. 105 English Exiting Emergency The dispatch console that supports this feature can be programmed to clear the emergency state of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. 1 To exit emergency, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Then Press and hold the preprogram-

med Emergency button until you hear the emergency exit tone. a From the Home screen, swipe down the Status Bar. b Tap Cancel and confirm the action by tapping Yes. If 106 If Then Figure 1: Exiting Emergency Exiting Emergency as Supervisor

(Trunking Only) Radios configured as Supervisor are able to cancel emergency mode of other radios. The dispatch console must be preprogrammed to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on dispatch console supporting this feature. Perform one of the following actions:

If If the emer-

gency mode is initiated by other radios, Then press and hold the Side But-

ton 1 and press the Emer-

gency button. If If the emer-

gency mode is initiated by other radios, If the emer-

gency mode is initiated by the Supervisor, Then press and hold the 1-Dot

(Side Middle) button and press the Emergency button. Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold the Emer-

gency button. Press and hold the Side Button 1 and press the Emergency button. Press and hold the 1-Dot

(Side Middle) button and press the Emergency but-

ton. Wait for console to clear emergency. NOTICE:

The following buttons combinations are supported:

Radio Side Button 1 and Top (Orange) button. English Radio Side Button 1 and accessory Orange button. Radio 1-Dot (Side Middle) and Top (Orange) buttons. Radio 1-Dot (Side Middle) and accessory Top

(Orange) buttons. Accessory 1-Dot Button and radio Top (Orange) button. Accessory 1-Dot Button and accessory Orange button. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. A dispatcher acknowledgment Ack received display follows. For trunking system, the radio also sounds a high-pitched tone that 107 English indicates the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 2 Press and hold the EMERGENCY button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) This feature gives your radio priority access to a talkgroup. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. You hear the radio sounds a short low-pitched tone to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.0 to 2.5 cm) from your mouth. 108 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Sending An Emergency Call With Hot Mic (Trunking Only) This feature allows you to send an Emergency Call with hot mic to a group of radios. Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. The hot mic applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Call with hot mic on your radio. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. A tone sounds to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in the radio's codeplug programming. 4 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. English Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature gives your radio priority access on a channel for conventional system, and to a talkgroup for trunking system. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features enabled, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display alternates Emergency and the home display. A high-pitched tone sounds, indicating that the trunked system central controller has received the alarm. A dispatcher acknowledgment (four high-

pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an Ack received display. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 109 English 4 Release the PTT button to end the transmission and wait for a response from the dispatcher. 5 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending An Emergency Alarm and Call with Hot Mic This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm and Call with hot mic to a group of radios. Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms and Call with hot mic on your radio. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. If successful, the display shows Emergency on the current zone and channel. A tone sounds and the LED blinks red momentarily. 110 The radio exits Emergency Alarm and enters the Emergency Call state when one of the following scenarios occur:

You receive the dispatcher acknowledgment. The display shows Ack received. You receive no acknowledgment. The display shows No acknowledge. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds to indicate the selected channel does not support emergency and rejects to launch emergency mode. 2 Hold the radio vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in your radio's codeplug programming. 4 To exit Emergency Call, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button. Turning off the radio also cancels the emergency state. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to the system without triggering any audio or visual indicators. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. NOTICE:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. The display shows no changes, the LED does not light up, and you hear no tones. The silent emergency state continues until you perform the next step. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. English Special Considerations for Emergencies If you press the emergency button while in a channel that has no emergency capability, a low-pitched tone sounds. If the unit is out of the range of the system and/or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. If you press the emergency button, then change to a mode that has no emergency capability, the display shows No emergency and a continuous low-pitched tone sounds until a valid emergency mode is selected or until the emergency is cancelled. When an emergency is active, changing to another mode where emergency is enabled (trunked or conventional) causes an emergency alarm and/or emergency call to be active on the new mode. 111 English Impact Detection This feature allows radio to detect the force of gravity impact or the orientation changes on the vehicle in the event of vehicle crash or rollover. When these events are detected, radio activates the Emergency feature. This feature also sends out the location-based information if GPS feature is enabled. Radio automatically activates Impact Detected condition when the impact event meets or exceeds a predefined threshold. The radio must stay in this condition for a preprogrammed amount of time before the Emergency Alarm or Call is activated. In the event of hardware failure or malfunction, radio alternatively displays Impact HW and Error and a tone sounds when the radio power-up. Any button press of the radio or accessory except the programmed button for volume and backlighting functionality ceases the error message and sound. The following scenarios affects the Emergency feature activation:

Pressing a preprogrammed Emergency button cancels the Impact Detection sequence and enters the Emergency mode. 112 Pressing the PTT button does not suspend the Impact Detection sequence. Pressing the PTT button, the Clr menu button or the preprogrammed Clear button when radio displays the impact detected display alert, exits the Impact Detected condition. Detecting Impact 1 Radio detects the impact on the vehicle and the impact event meets or exceeds the predefined threshold. One of the following scenarios occur:

Radio enters Impact Detected condition. Radio sounds alert tone and displays Impact on the screen, and Post-Alert Timer is initiated. Impact Detected condition continues for the time duration defined in the Post-Alert Timer field. When the timer expires, radio enters into Emergency mode. Radio displays Emergency on the screen. Radio enters Emergency mode immediately and displays Emergency on the screen. NOTICE:

If the radio is programmed with Silent Emergency, the radio inhibits the alert tone and visual alert associated with the emergency feature. If the radio is programmed in Surveillance Mode, the radio inhibits all tones and lights on the radio. 2 Press the preprogrammed Clr menu button or the preprogrammed Clear button to exit the Impact Detected condition. Post-Alert Timer This timer sets the amount of time the radio needs to remain in the Impact Detected condition before radio enters into Emergency mode. When the Post-Alert Timer is initiated, the radio sounds alert tone and displays Impact on the screen. Triggering Emergency Emergency Alarm or call is triggered when you do not clear the Impact Detected condition and when the Post-Alert English Timer comes to an end. The radio sends emergency message to units within the same Talkgroup. If GPS is enabled, the radio sends GPS coordinates to dispatcher. Exiting Impact Detected Condition If there is false alarm or you do not want to enter into Emergency mode, you can exit the Impact Detected condition and prevent emergency from going off with the following operation. Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Clear button to exit. Press the Menu Select button below Clr to exit. Re-Initiating Impact Detection Sequence Radio must first exit Emergency mode to re-initiate the Impact Detected sequence. Radio must return to the normal operations before the next impact can be detected. Refer to Exiting Impact Detected Condition on page 113 to exit the Impact Detected condition. 113 English Automatic Registration Service

(ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. The ARS for the radio consists of two modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non-server Mode Selecting or Changing the ARS Mode The following methods are options on how to select or change the ARS Mode. The result of all the methods is the same. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode using the 16-

Position Select knob:

114 a. Once the zone you want is displayed, turn the preprogrammed 16-Position Select knob to the desired mode. Selecting or Changing the ARS mode using the radio menu:

a. Press and hold or to Chan . b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan . The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. c. or or press the MFK once and rotate the MFK to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat this step. If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat this step. English d. Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and Selecting the ARS mode using the MFK :

a. After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. b. or or press the MFK once and rotate the MFK to the desired channel. One of the following scenarios occur:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. c. Press channel. to confirm the displayed zone and User Login Feature This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application

(Example: Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. NOTICE:

A predefined username that is set more than the maximum allowed characters is an invalid name. 115 English NOTICE:

Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters (AZ), small letters (az), numbers (09), symbols (*, #, -, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight characters or more. Logging In as a User 1 or to User and press the Menu Select button directly below User. The display shows the User Login screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [ID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to enter ID. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. Use the 116 keypad to type or edit a user name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok to submit. or to scroll through the list of predefined user names. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the predefined user name. Press and hold or to scroll through the list of predefined user names at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn to select the predefined user name. If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. 4 Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number will appear as asterisks. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and In progress, with Cncl . In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline, with Logt and Exit. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If the user name is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also shows momentary Login failed. English NOTICE:

To cancel the login process and return to the initial user login screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl. Logging Out Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. NOTICE:

Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft, and Sent folder. The next user is able to access the Inbox, Draft, and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. 1 or to Logt and press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. The display shows the User Login Indicator icon and Clear private data?. Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in, with Logt and Exit. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary Private data cleared. 117 English Select No to keep your private data. Accessing the Messaging Features 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. Press and hold the Data Feature button or the preprogrammed TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature using the radio menu. 2 or to TMS. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 4 or to scroll through the main menu options. Text Messaging Service (TMS) This features allows you to quickly send and receive messages and run database queries directly from your radios. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. The types of text messages available:

A new text message (free form message). A predefined message (quick text message). An edited quick text message. The main menu consists of the following options:

Compose Drafts Sent Inbox NOTICE:

See Status Icons on page 49 for more information on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 53 for more information on each menu option. 118 NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Composing and Sending a New Text Message During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B-

>C, a->b->c. During the numeric mode, except for keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message

(no multi-tap).

, pressing the 1 or to TMS. English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Comp to see the compose options. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below New to compose a new message. A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once the message is composed. 7 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send . 8 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking 119 English cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTICE:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 122 for more information. You can also select the Drft option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 126 for more information. 120 Sending a Quick Text Message Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

To access this feature using the preprogrammed button, press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to step 4. To access this feature using the menu, proceed to the next step. 2 or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to Comp and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to return to the Home screen. or to List. 9 4 5 or to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message, if required. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 7 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 8 Perform one of the following actions to send the message:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. The message is sent after the address is selected. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears on the Enter Address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Proceed to step 10 to send the message. English or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. The message is sent after the address is selected. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below Send or press the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. If the message is sent, you hear a tone and the display shows Msg sent. If the message is not sent, you hear a low tone, the display shows Send failed and returns to the main TMS screen. NOTICE:

You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 122 for more information. 121 English Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message Before sending your message, you can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. Appending a Priority Status to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 119 for more information. NOTICE:

The Priority Status icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. 2 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to indicate the message as important. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Priority Status from a Text Message Ensure there is an outgoing message composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 119 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to remove the priority status icon. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 122 Appending a Request Reply to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 119 for more information 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to request for a reply. The request reply icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. Removing a Request Reply from a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 119 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . English 2 or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message Ensure that an outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 119 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 3 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to indicate the message as important. or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to request for a reply. The priority status and request reply icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 123 English Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message Ensure that a outgoing message is composed to allow you to perform this procedure. See Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 119 for more information. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 2 3 or to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to remove the priority status icon. or to RqRp and press the Menu Select button directly below RqRp to remove the reply status icon. The display shows the normal message icon on the label bar. 124 Receiving a Text Message NOTICE:

When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send a notification to acknowledge that the message was received. Do one of the following to receive a text message. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Receiving a text message using the Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. Receiving a text message using the radio menu:

When the new message icon appears and the display shows momentary New msg, press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the Inbox. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox The Inbox can hold up to 30 messages. 2 NOTICE:

or to read the message if the content fills more than one screen. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. to Inbx and press the Menu Select button below Sel . or Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature to Inbx and press the Menu screen. Select button below Sel . or The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message on top. English or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Rply , Del , or Back to access the option. Select Rply to reply the message. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. NOTICE:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 52 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message NOTICE:

The original date and time stamp, address, and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. 1 or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. 125 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rply to reply to a message. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once you have completed the message. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

6 or to New and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . or to List and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel for a predefined message. or to scroll through the list of predefined messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. One of the following scenarios occurs:

A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 4 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. 126 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. NOTICE:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 122 for more information. Accessing the Drafts Folder This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. 1 or to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 4 or to Drft and press the Menu Select button below Drft. The display shows a list of drafts, with the latest text message drafted on top. or to the required text message and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of 10 messages. The oldest message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. English Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen. or to TMS and press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 2 3 or to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Sent. The display shows a list of aliases or IDs, with the recipient of latest sent message on top. or to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. While on the view message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Optn , Del , or Back to access the option. Select Optn to configure the message settings. Select Del to delete the message. 127 English Select Back to return to the previous screen. NOTICE:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Indicators on page 52 for more information. Sending a Sent Text Message 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn while viewing the message. 2 or to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send . 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the address list and select the required address. or to [Other Recpnt] and press the Menu Select button below Edit. When a blinking cursor appears in the Enter Address screen, use the keypad to type the address entry. 128 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. NOTICE:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Priority Status and Request Reply of a New Text Message on page 122 for more information. Deleting Text Messages 1 From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen, scroll through the messages. or to 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to view the delete options. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Curr to delete the current message. Press the Menu Select button directly below All to delete all the messages. Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. By default, the radio automatically enters the encrypted environment without having to manually select or clear the secure transmission. Enabling Secure Transmission 1 or to Sec and press the Menu Select button directly below Sec. The display shows key has been enabled. and the current key if multi-

2 Monitor the mode to be sure it is not in use. English 3 Press PTT button to transmit. NOTICE:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows Clear TX only. The radio does not transmit until you disable the secure mode. The radio can be configured to ignore the clear voice or unsecured transmission when the radio is in secured transmission. Check with your agent for details. Accessing the Secure Feature 1 or to Sec. 2 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below Sec to display Secure feature screen. The display shows the Secure screen. 129 English Selecting Secure Transmissions All other radio functions, except for power down, backlight, and volume, are locked out. If the Ignore Secure/Clear Switch when Strapped programming option is enabled, the radio transmits without displaying any messages in the strapped mode of operation, regardless of the Secure/Clear switch setting. This option must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. The Secure/Clear switch only applies when the radio is transmitting. Managing Encryption This chapter explains the encryption feature on your radio. Loading Encryption Keys Refer to the Key Variable Loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. 1 Attach the KVL to your radio. The display shows Keyloading and the name of the ASTRO OTAR profile used by the selected channel. 130 2 Press Target Load. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

For single key, select Key. For multikey, select Group. 4 Select the required keys and press Load on the KVL. The KVL indicates that keyload is successful. Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types of encryption keys:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys are strapped on a one-per-channel basis, through CPS. In addition, you can have operator-

selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications, strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, a different key can be strapped to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-selectable key erasure. Selecting an Encryption Key 1 or to Key. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 or to scroll through the encryption keys or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Perform one of the following actions:

English Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. Press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. NOTICE:

When the selected key is erased, you hear a momentary keyfail tone and the display shows Key fail. When the selected key is not allowed, you hear a momentary illegal key tone and the display shows Illegal key. Selecting a Keyset This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. 131 English Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. 1 2 or to KSet and press the Menu Select button directly below KSet. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. or to scroll through the keysets or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected keyset. The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:

, the PTT button, or the Exit menu Press selection to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. 132 Erasing Encryption Keys Keys that are erased from the radio are also removed from the key database of the associated ASTRO OTAR profile. Do one of the following to erase the selected encryption keys. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Erasing the selected encryption keys using the radio menu:

a. b. or to Eras and press the Menu Select button directly below Eras. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. or to the desired encryption key or use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below All to delete all keys, or press the Menu Select button directly below Sngl to delete current shown key. You can abort this screen and return to Home screen by pressing the Menu Select button directly below Abrt. Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey Ensure that the Unique Shadow Key (USK) or Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) is loaded into the radio with the Key Variable Loader (KVL) while selected to the channel with the intended ASTRO OTAR profile selection before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. 1 or to Reky. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reky. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. Press the PTT button again, or the or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. If the rekey operation fails, you hear a bad-key tone and the display shows Rekey fail. NOTICE:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the USK. English MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying Page

(Conventional Only) This feature allows you to view or define MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features. It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode. In addition to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgments, and Power-up Acknowledgments. Some of the selected options require configuration at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Infinite UKEK Retention This feature enables Unique Key Encryption Key (UKEK) to be permanently stored in the radio even when all the encryption keys are erased. Without this UKEK key, the radio cannot be rekeyed over the air. NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 133 English Hear Clear NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two components of Hear Clear. Companding Reduces the channel noise, such as OTA transmission that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor Reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expander Expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. Random FM Noise Canceller (Flutter Fighter) Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-

Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are canceled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Radio Lock This feature requires you to enter a password to unlock the radio when it powers on. The default password is 0123456789. Your service provider determines the following requirements:

Number of characters for a password Number of attempts for password entry If you exhaust all attempts at entering the correct password, the radio is deadlocked. Restart the radio to start over. NOTICE:

Depending on the configuration, the radio might carry over the number of attempts remaining even after a power cycle. If you exhaust all attempts in this configuration, the following occurs:

The radio remains inhibited All encryptions and secure keys are erased 134 Changing Your Password 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Unlock Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 7 Enter the new password. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. English If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. NOTICE:

If you enter three incorrect old passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Changing Your Tactical Inhibit Password 1 or to Pswd. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pswd. The display shows Change Password screen. 3 or to Tactical Inh Encode Pswd. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . 5 Enter the old password. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 135 English 7 Enter the new password. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below LogF. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . 9 Re-enter the new password. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The password is updated. If the two passwords do not match, repeat step 5 through step 10. NOTICE:

If you enter three incorrect passwords, the radio exits the password feature. You cannot access this feature again until you turn the radio off and on. Enabling or Disabling the Radio Lock Feature (Secure Radios Only) This feature allows you to enable or disable the radio lock feature. It is programmable by a qualified radio technician. 1 or to LogF. 136 One of the following results occur:

The display shows Pswd enabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is enabled. The display shows Pswd disabled, indicating that the radio lock feature is disabled. Radio Stun and Kill This chapter explains the radio stun and kill features. Radio Stun This feature allows you to stun another radio by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. This feature prevents an unauthorized user from using the radio. Once the radio is stunned, a password is required to re-

activate the stunned radio. Using Radio Stun 1 or to Stun. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Stun. The display shows Enter Password. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows radio Contact IDs. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Dec fail. English If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Ack. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen locked and request for password. NOTICE:

To un-stun a radio, follow the procedure in Unlocking Your Radio. Radio Kill This feature allows you to render your radio or another radio inoperable if the radio is misplaced or lost. When a radio is killed, the display turns blank and all functions of the radio are not usable. The killed radio can only be recovered from KILL with a special device. Consult an authorized and qualified technician for details. 137 English Using Remote Kill to Kill Another Radio Remote Kill allows you to render another radio inoperable by sending an over the air command using the menu on your radio. 1 or to Kill. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Kill. The display shows Enter Password. Press the Menu Select button directly below Send to initiate command. If the receiving radio received the command, your radio display shows Ack received. If the receiving radio does not have encryption key to decrypt the received encrypted command, your radio display shows Dec fail. If the receiving radio is powered off or already killed, your radio display shows No Ack. 3 Use the keypad to enter your Tactical Inhibit Encode Password. Once the receiving radio received the command, its screen turns blank, the killed radio is inoperable. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK . The display shows the radio Contact IDs. Using Direct Kill to Kill Your Own Radio Direct Kill allows you to make your own radio inoperable. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

or to the required ID. Press the Menu Select button directly below LNum to go to the last number dialed. Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 138 Press and hold the programmable button (2-dot) on the keypad microphone then press the Orange button until the display turns blank and becomes inoperable. English Radio Inhibit This feature allows the system administrator to put a radio into a non-functional state when the radio is missing or in an unknown hand. The radio stays in this state regardless of its power changes. NOTICE:

If the radio has Inter-system roaming capability, the system administrator is able to put the radio into a non-functional state when missing radio roamed to another system. The radio can only be uninhibited by receiving an uninhibited command from the system administrator or by reprogramming the radio through labtool or depot CPS only. Global Positioning System/Global Navigation Satellite System NOTICE:

This feature is addressed as GPS across the manual as the naming convention of the buttons and strings remain the same as the legacy feature of GPS. The availability and accuracy of this location information

(and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. GPS Operation The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites to establish location coordinates. Therefore, maximizing your view of unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

Underground locations Under any metal, or concrete roof, or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover Inside buildings, trains, or covered vehicles 139 English In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. NOTICE:

Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 10 meters from your actual location, but sometimes farther away. The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. GPS Performance Enhancement Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, take note of the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and the open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of 60 programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. 140 English The radio also stores four preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. The following table shows the differences between programmable waypoints and preprogrammed waypoints. NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled. You hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Programmable Way-

points User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be delet-

ed one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Way-

points Fixed location coordi-

nates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destina-

tion coordinates are edita-

ble. Coordinates cannot be deleted. Location Format This feature allows you to select different display formats of GPS location. The following GPS location formats are available:

Lat/Long(DD) Lat/Long(DDM) Lat/Long(DMS) UTM/UCS SLD99 MGRS NOTICE:

When you send your location to another radio, the receiving radio displays the location in its selected format. 141 English Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature NOTICE:

An ON radio menu may be present on the Location menu screen if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current latitude. Toggle to see the longitude, time and date. The location coordinates are updated automatically every 5 seconds while the location signal is present. 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Location off <Latitude>.. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the GPS. The display shows Previous loc <Latitude>. 4 or to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 6 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Selecting Location Format 1 or to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 To obtain a new location fix, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh. The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new 4 142 or to Loc Format and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 or to the preferred location format and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The front display shows the location with the selected format. NOTICE:

If the SLD99 format is selected and the range is invalid, the display shows - on the location. This situation occurs if you are using the radio outside of Sri Lanka and using the SLD99 format. To correct this situation, switch the location display format to other GPS options such as DDM, DMS, UTM/UCS, or MGRS. Turning Off GPS 1 or to Loc. English 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn . 5 or to Turn Off GPS (if preprogrammed). 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to turn off the GPS. The display shows Location off. 7 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving a Waypoint Ensure that your radio shows the current location on the screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Previous loc <Latitude>. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

3 or to check the time and date of the last successful location fix. or to Save as Waypt and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 143 English or to Save as Home and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to step 5. or to Save as Dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to step 5. Viewing a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. A blinking cursor appears on the screen. 2 3 Use the keypad to edit the auto-generated waypoint, if required, or press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Location main screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. One of the following scenarios occur:

The display shows Saved as <Waypoint name>. The display shows Saved as Home. The display shows Saved as Dest.. 5 To return to the Home screen, press

, the PTT button, the preprogrammed GPS button or the Menu Select button directly below Exit. 144 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

to scroll through the list. to select a waypoint to view the location or or information in full. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 To view the longitude, time and date of the selected waypoint, Select button directly below Sel. or to View and press the Menu 6 To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back, or to return to the Home screen, press or the PTT button. Editing the Alias of a Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. English 6 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Waypoints main screen. 7 The display shows <Waypoint name> Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 8 Perform one of the following actions:

2 3 4 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. 5 Use the keypad to edit the alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press screen. or the PTT button to return to the Home Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint NOTICE:

The user can only edit preprogrammed coordinates of Home and Destination. 145 English Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. Press to move to the previous number/

coordinates. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to [Home] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to [Destination] and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 or to Edit location and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The first number blinks. 5 Utilize the following control buttons to select the number/coordinates if required, then press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to change the number/coordinates. 146 Press to move to the next number/coordinates. Press to change the North (N), South or

(S), East (E) or West (W) direction. A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Location screen. 6 Utilize the following control buttons or menu to change the number/coordinates if required then press the Menu Select button directly below OK once. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once complete setting up the new Home or Destination. One of the following scenarios occurs:

The display shows [Home] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows [Destination] Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

English or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Del. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del. 4 The display shows <Waypoint name> Confirm del?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete the waypoint or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows <Waypoint name>deleted . Deleting All Saved Waypoints Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. NOTICE:

You cannot delete any of the preprogrammed waypoints. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 147 English 2 3 4 or to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required saved waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. or to Delete All and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows All saved wayp confirm del?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete all waypoints or press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to the Waypoints main screen. The display shows All saved waypnts deleted. Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Ensure your radio shows the current location on the screen. 148 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 3 or to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows a list of waypoints. or to the required waypoint and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel . The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. Location Feature in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the Home (default) screen so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. Peer-Location on the Display (ASTRO Conventional only) This feature is only available for radio-to-radio voice transmissions, dispatch call and selective call in conventional ASTRO system. For radio-to-radio transmission, in order to allow the radio to show peer-

location, the voice should be directly sent from one radio to another radio without passing through any infrastructure facility such as repeaters, phone, or DVRS system. Both the transmitting radio and receiving radio must be configured to enable them to send and/or receive the GPS coordinates. You can check with your nearest qualified technician for more details. NOTICE:

If the receiving radio is operating in a Mixed Mode channel, and the voice transmission is through the conventional ASTRO system then the radio can receive the location coordinates of its peers. English This feature is also operable in a Scan Active channel or Scan Talkback channel. Upon receiving a voice transmission with GPS coordinates enabled on the receiving radio, the display shows the coordinates available in full or in short coordinates. There are two different formats available. Refer to the following list for the details shown in the Peer-Location quick text. Consult your agent to pick the best format to configure to your radio. Full location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude Relative distance or direction Short location coordinates PTT ID (This is optional.) Longitude and latitude 149 English NOTICE:

If the transmitting radio is stale at its location after a period of time, the receiving radio display shows ID:<PTT ID> Last Knwn Loc: <Coordinates>. The ID:<PTT ID> and <distance> are optional details depending on the requirements of usage. If the transmitting radio does not have GPS or the receiving radio could not decode the GPS signal of the received signal, the receiving radio display shows ID:<PTT ID> Unknown Loc. The PTT ID is optional to be shown on the display per requirements of usage. Geofence (ASTRO 25 Trunking System) Geofence is a virtual perimeter based on the GPS to define a geographical area on earth. Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, your radio receives the Dynamic Regroup command from the system and immediately connects to a Dynamic Regroup talkgroup. The radio display shows the new selected 150 Dynamic Regrouped talkgroup with green intelligent light for your attention. On top of that, additional features are Voice Announcement of the new channel, and also direct content display of a text message to indicate that you are currently at Geofence area. Check with your nearest qualified technician on the requirements for these enhancements to work in Geofence. Any new text messages received at Geofence shall have its content displayed immediately on the radio display. NOTICE:

If the radio is set up in DVRS, only mobile radio is supported for this feature. Entering the Geofence Area The Voice Announcement and TMS display in this feature are optional. They must be configured to enable you to hear and see these indicators. When the radio enters a Geofence area, the radio immediately sends a message ACK back to the system. The radio searches the current zone for the channel with same talkgroup assigned as the Dynamic Talkgroup and also with same system ID of current trunk system. Once matched, the radio display shows the first matched and connected channel alias. If there is no channel with matching Talkgroup ID and trunk system ID, the radio display shows the channel alias of

<DYNAMIC talkgroup>. Once the radio is connected, you hear a dynamic regroup tone, the radio display shows <DYNAMIC channel> with temporary green color intelligent backlight and you hear a Voice Announcement. NOTICE:

When the radio loses the GPS signal, the GPS icon blinks and the radio sounds two high-pitched tones repetitively to indicate that the GPS has failed to operate. The radio display shows the red intelligent light. If the first matched channel is not configured with Voice Announcement, no Voice Announcement is played. The system sends a message to your radio. The radio display shows a direct text message content without any user operation. This message indicates you are currently present in a Geofence area. This TMS remains open on the display until user presses exit/home to exit this screen. English NOTICE:

If there is another incoming text message before you exit the previous message, the message screen is refreshed to show the latest message. The following procedure guides you to exit the text message received. Press the Menu Select button below Exit or return to Home screen. to The other operations are the same as normal dynamic regroup command. When the radio exits the Geofence area, your radio reverts to original channel or newly assigned talkgroup. The radio display shows the new channel together with Voice Announcement to indicate the changes. Voice Announcement of the new channel only works if that channel is configured with Voice Announcement. Mission Critical Geofence This feature allows the radio to use the GPS receiver to determine radio location at frequent intervals. This feature also allows the radio to evaluate if the radio is within the Geofence area in real time. 151 English Check with your dealer or qualified technician to programme the geofence coordinates and actions. Entering Mission Critical Geofence When the radio enters the predefined Geofence area, the radio displays <Geofence Alias> with intelligent backlight and the user hears a Voice Announcement. Zone and channel alias of the Geofence area is displayed. If the radio is set to manual, the user can choose either to proceed with zone and channel change or cancel the change. The radio then connects to the designated talkgroup. The radio displays the talkgroup alias and dynamic regroup tone sounds. The transmit power level changes and the radio shows a direct text message content without any user operation. NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not be alerted by Voice Announcement

(VA), TMS display, Intelligent Backlight, and the Transmit Power Level. The user will be alerted only if these indicators are configured in the radio. The VA can be programmed to alert continuously or momentarily. If Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is enabled, the radio mutes any alert that is received when entering the Geofence area and unmutes when exiting. Exiting Mission Critical Geofence When the radio exits the Geofence area, the radio reverts to the original transmit power level, intelligent lighting, channel or newly assigned talkgroup. Voice announcement is cancelled or the user hears a pre-programmed VA tone. 152 The radio displays the new channel and a message is received to indicate the changes. To continue in Failsoft and to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. English Trunking System Controls This chapters explains the trunking system control features in your radio. Operating in Failsoft System The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communication during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. During failsoft operation, your radio transmits and receives in conventional operation on a predetermined frequency. You hear a medium-pitched tone and the display shows Failsoft. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. 1 Rotate the MFK to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. Out-of-Range Radio When your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. You hear a low-pitched tone and/or the display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until it locks onto a control channel or failsoft channel, or if it is turned off. SmartZone The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. 153 English SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Headthe RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. Site Trunking Feature If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. When this occurs, you can communicate only with the radios within your trunking site. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Site trunking. Locking and Unlocking a Site This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. You can toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked by pressing the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button. Follow the procedure to lock and unlock a site using the radio menu. 1 or to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

To lock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Lock. The display shows Site locked. To unlock the site, press the Menu Select button directly below Unlk. The display shows Site unlocked. The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. Site Display and Search Button The Site Display and Site Search button allows you to view the name of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. 154 Viewing the Current Site 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. or to RSSI and press the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. 2 Press the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. The display shows momentarily the name of the current site and its corresponding received RSSI. Changing the Current Site 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. Press and hold down the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. English 2 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Displ/Srch button. You hear a tone and the display shows momentary Scanning Site. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Trunked Announcement The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for 155 English the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-Ruthless Preemption When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-type busy tone, followed by a call back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. Initiating an Announcement Ensure your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls. 1 If channel is set as the primary mode, turn the MFK to locate the announcement-group mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate the announcement. 156 Ignition Switch Options This feature allows the user to select the functionality of the radio based on the Ignition State of the radio users vehicle. Blank This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any Trunking dispatch communications since the radio will not affiliate with the Trunking systems. PTT Tx Inhibit This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the current state of the Ignition. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the Trunking systems. Required This option allows the user to power on the radio only if the Ignition is present. The radio can be powered off either through Power button press or when Ignition is lost. In addition, the radio automatically powers on when the Ignition is present only if the radio was turned off due to the ignition being removed. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Soft Power Off This option allows the user to power on the radio either through Power button presses or when the Ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button was pressed or the Ignition was removed, the radio will be turned off. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. English Ignition Only Power Up This option allows the user to power on the radio only when Ignition is detected and will power off when it is removed. The radio does not power on or off with the Power button press. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires or when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. NOTICE:

While Ignition is not present, the radio powers-off with a radio-user Power Off button/knob selection if the radio was powered-up with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press or Ignition Auto Power Off timer is running. While Ignition is present, the radio powers-on with a radio-user Power On button/knob selection only if the radio was powered-down with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer. Using Emergency Power Up This feature allows the user to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a 157 English footswitch. In addition, when the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit, this feature will not be available to the users. Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. Auto Power Off Timer Auto Power Off feature powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. There are two different versions of Auto Power Off:

Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the radio is power-on. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. Ignition Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the vehicle key is removed, when the voltage at the ignition sense is removed. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. When the vehicle key is reapplied, the voltage at the ignition is reconnected, this timer is stopped. Although both Inactivity Auto Power Off and Ignition Auto Power Off can be enabled together, Ignition Auto Power Off timer is mutually exclusive with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer when both are enabled. During the last two minutes of the timer countdown, the radio generates continuous low tone and blinks Powering Off warning on the display until the timer expires or the timer is reset. The radio automatically powers off after the timer expires. The duration of the timer is preprogrammed. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, zone, or channel the user has just been assigned to. This feature is useful when you have difficulty reading the content on the display. The available voice announcement priority options are:

High Voice announcement is enabled even when the radio is receiving calls. Low Voice announcement is disabled when the radio is receiving calls. Voice announcement is available in the following scenarios:

158 When the radio powers up. When you change to a new zone. When you change to a new channel. When you press the Menu Select button, preprogrammed button, or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, PL Disabled, Talkaround/Direct, or Transmit Inhibit. When you press the preprogrammed button or switch of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, Talkaround/

Direct, or Transmit Inhibit. Site Selectable Alerts (ASTRO 25) A Site Selectable Alert (SSA) is an Intelligent Lighting indicator together with audio alert sent to radios at a site or a few sites to notify the users when there is a special situation that they need to be aware of. Your radio supports up to 250 site aliases. Only authorized radios are enabled to send SSA. Upon the activation of a SSA, the receiving radios display the alert alias and generate the periodic alert tone. English NOTICE:

Alert alias, alert tone, and alert period can be preprogrammed. Alert period is the duration for the radio to repeat the alert tone. An interval of 5 seconds might impact the battery life of the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details. When mixing SSA with received voice audio, the SSA alert is reduced in volume to ensure that the voice message is still heard clearly. Therefore, it is important that the SSA audio files are created with clear loud audio to ensure they can still be heard clearly when played at reduced levels. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 159 English or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to the desired Site Alias. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to Single Site by Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. 3 4 5 160 4 or to [SiteID Entry] to send alert through the manual entry. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the desired Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows the Select Alert screen. If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. 6 or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. English If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site ID>does not exist. 7 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Sending SSA Notification to All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. 161 English 4 5 or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired <Alert Alias> and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. 162 Sending SSA Notification to All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 5 or to Start Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Alert screen. or to select the desired Alert Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 4 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. If you are at the site designated to receive this alert, you can hear an alert tone repeated periodically. The display shows the <Alert Alias> with the intelligent lighting at Home screen. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. English or to select the desired Site Alias and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If the site is not available, the display shows <Site Alias> not available. If the site does not exist, the display shows <Site Alias>does not exist. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of a Single Site by Manual Entry 1 or to SSA. 163 English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [SiteID Entry] and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows the Enter SiteID screen. 5 Key in the required Site ID and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. One of the following scenarios occur:

If a wrong Site ID is entered, the display shows Invalid ID and prompts to enter the Site ID again. If a correct Site ID is entered, the display shows Sending req. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 164 If the single site is not available, the display shows <Site ID> not available. If the single site does not exist, the display shows

<Site ID> does not exist. 6 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for the designated site stops. Stopping SSA Notification of All Sites 1 or to SSA. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. 4 or to [All Sites] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. If one or more sites are not available, the display shows Not all sites available. Repeat step 3. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all sites stop. Stopping SSA Notification of All Available Sites 1 or to SSA. English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below SSA. The display shows the Site Alert screen. 3 4 or to Stop Alert and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Select Site screen. or to [All Avail] and press the Menu Select button directly below Send. The display shows Sending req. If radio is out of range, roaming to a foreign system or in a failsoft situation, the display shows Req failed. If the request is successful, the display shows Req successful. 5 To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. The SSA Alert for all available sites stop. 165 English Channel Change on Off Hook on All Channels This feature enables the mode of the radio to be changed based on the HUB on/off-hook state on all control heads. Whenever the radio goes off-hook, the radio changes to a preprogrammed zone channel specifically for off-hook state. When the user returns the radio to on-hook state, it reverts to its previous channel zone before the radio goes off-hook. When the radio is in off-hook state, manual mode change

(including mode change triggered by third party devices) is allowed. Radio reverts back to the last mode before off-

hook once the radio goes on-hook. 166 NOTICE:

During PL Defeats and Suspend Scan during on-

hook state, the radio is converted to work in new channel and Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. We do not recommend that Hub Suspend Scan"

and "Channel Change on Off Hook" to be enabled simultaneously. During Dynamic Regroup channel selector lock state, Emergency, Transmit Inhibit, radio lock, or when external key loaded is attached to the radio, the Channel Change on Off Hook feature is suspended until these conditions end. The Off Hook State for APX Dual Radio Setup For Dual Radio, the state of the HUB on the unselected radio is always considered as on-hook. The state of the HUB of the selected radio is always reflected as the actual states of the HUB. When the HUB is placed off-

hook, the selected radio makes channel change per CPS configuration, and the unselected radio does not trigger channel change. With Channel Change on Off Hook enabled, when the HUB is placed off-hook, and there is radio switch, the new selected radio moves to the target channel zone on off hook, and the new unselected radio reverts to the last user selected channel before off-hook. The Off Hook State for Multiple Radios Setup When there are multi-control heads connected, the states of these HUBs reflect the active control head(s) state. Any HUB placed off-hook by active control head(s) makes the radio goes off-hook state. Only when all HUBs are placed on-hook, the radio can be in on-

hook state. NOTICE:

This feature needs to be carefully enabled. Users must also be familiar with the functionality of this feature as they have to be aware that removing the microphone triggers mode change most of the time. Low Voltage Threshold Warning This feature is created for APX mobile radio to provide warning for low voltage threshold. A specific external device is attached to the radio to monitor the automobile voltage. When the car battery went lower than a pre-defined threshold, the external device asserts the Vehicular Interface Port (VIP) input to the radio. When the voltage of the battery becomes normal, the external device de-asserts the VIP input to the radio. English The voltage threshold is customized in the external device settings. When the VIP switch turns on, the VIP asserts input to the radio. The radio immediately initiates a 15 seconds of low Voltage Pre-alert Timer. If the status of the VIP changed before this time-out timer ends, the radio returns to normal operation. If the status from the VIP unchanged when the time-out timer ends, the radio shows Low battery on the display and also sounds low battery/voltage alert tone. The radio sounds a short, high-pitched tone immediately after the PTT button is released. NOTICE:

If the mobile radio does not have a control head connected, the bricks can only alert the user with battery alert tone and the transmit chirp. 167 English Wi-Fi You can connect your radio to a Wi-Fi network for wireless programming. NOTICE:

The Wi-Fi Network Name (SSID) for the radio to connect to must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the preprogrammed button:

a. To toggle the Wi-Fi on or off, press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. This button must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Turning Wi-Fi on or off using the radio menu button:

or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. a. 168

-

-

If the display shows WiFi Status being Off, press the Menu Select button directly below On. If the display shows WiFi Status as Searching, Connecting, Connected or No Service, press the Menu Select button directly below Off to turn Wi-Fi off. Selecting WiFi Network This feature allows you to view and select the available WiFi network. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi to enter WiFi screen. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the WiFi. Radio starts searching for available network. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below List. Radio displays available network selection and the network signal strength. If the radio displays No network available, press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh to search for available networks. Searching Looking for available Wi-Fi networks that have been preprogrammed into the radio. English 4 Press or to scroll through the list and press Menu Select button directly below Sel to connect to the selected network. Radio displays the WiFi status, the selected network, and the signal strength. NOTICE:

The List and Rfsh buttons are not available when WiFi is searching or connecting to network. Checking the Wi-Fi Configuration and Status of the Radio 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Long press the preprogrammed Wi-Fi button. or to WiFi and press the Menu Select button directly below WiFi. The display shows the current status of the Wi-Fi as described next. Connecting In the process of connecting to a found Wi-Fi network. Connected Connected to one of the preprogrammed Wi-Fi networks. No Service No available networks or connection with one of the networks failed. If the radio is Wi-Fi connected, you see a Wi-Fi on the display.In signal strength indicator, addition, the WiFi menu shows Connected under the connection Status heading, what network you are connected to under the Network heading, and the signal strength to that network under the Sig Strength heading. 2 Press to exit. 169 English Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. Viewing Recent Calls This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing Only) NOTICE:

The radio can also be preprogrammed to log only the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Viewing recent calls using the radio menu:

a. or to Rcnt. 170 b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt to access the Recent Calls feature screen. or to scroll through the list. c. d. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu

, or the Select button directly below Back, PTT button. The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Selecting the Power Level NOTICE:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. This feature enables you to reduce the transmit power level for specific case that requires a lower power level. You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Power level Low enables a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Power level High enables a longer transmitting distance. Do one of the following to select the power level. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting the Power Level using the Transmit Power Level switch:

a. Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level switch to toggle the power level between low and high power. Selecting the Power Level using the radio menu:

or to Pwr. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Pwr. The display shows Low power and the low power icon or the display shows High power and the high power icon. Selecting a Radio Profile This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. English NOTICE:

The radio automatically exits the feature, if the feature inactivity timer is enabled, when the radio is left idle and the timer expires. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Do one of the following to select a radio profile. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Selecting a radio profile using the preprogrammed Profile button:

a. Press the preprogrammed Profile button. b. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to scroll through the menu selections. or to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Selecting a radio profile using the radio menu:

171 English a. or to Prfl and press the Menu Select button directly below Prfl to access the Profiles feature screen. Turning the Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. or to scroll through the menu selections. b. c. Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile, or press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Controlling the Display Backlight You can enable or disable the radio display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display or keypad difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radio front display. Press the Dimmer button to adjust the brightness of the display. Long press to toggle between day and night mode. 172 Turning the tones on or off using the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button:

a. To turn the tones off or on, press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button. Turning the tones on or off using the radio menu:

or to Mute. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. The display shows momentary Tones off, indicating that the tones are disabled or the display shows momentary Tones on, and you hear a short tone indicating that the tones are enabled. Turning Voice Mute On or Off You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Turning Voice Mute off or on using the preprogrammed Voice Mute button:

a. To turn the feature off or on, press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button. Turning Voice Mute on or off using the radio menu:

NOTICE:

You hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. English or to VMut. a. b. Press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. The display momentarily shows Voice mute off, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is disabled or the display shows momentary Voice mute on, and you hear a short tone, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer This feature turns off the transmitter of your radio. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 15 to 465 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. 1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a continuous talk prohibit tone. After four seconds, the transmission is cut-off and the LED goes out. 2 Release the PTT button. The timer resets. 3 To re-transmit, press the PTT button. The time-out timer restarts and the LED lights up solid red. 173 English Using Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. 1 or to Sql. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sql. The display shows Squelch XX, where XX is the value for the current squelch. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below +

to increase the squelch volume. Press the Menu Select button directly below -

to decrease the squelch volume. 4 Press to return to the selected channel. 174 Analog Options Tone Private Line, Digital Private-Line, and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Option Carrier squelch Tone Private Line or Digi-

tal Private-Line Result You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. Digital Options One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Option Digital Carrier-Operated Squelch Normal Squelch Result You hear all digital traffic. You hear any digital traffic having the correct net-

work access code. Option Selective Switch Result You hear any digital traffic having the correct net-

work access code and correct talkgroup. Using the PL Defeat Feature This feature allows you to override any coded squelch that preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. One of the following occurs:

The radio plays the active transmission on the channel. The radio is muted if no activity is present. English Digital PTT ID Support This feature allows you to see the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. The ID number of your radio is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, the ID of your radio is sent continuously during the voice message. Smart PTT (Conventional Only) Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When Smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. The following table shows the variations of Smart PTT. Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Description You cannot transmit if traffic is detected on the channel. 175 English Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code Quick-Key Override Description You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if se-

cure-equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Your radio must be pre-

programmed to allow you to use Quick-Key Over-

ride. This feature works with either one of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-in-

hibit state by quick-keying the radio (press PTT but-

ton twice within the pre-

programmed time limit). Transmit Inhibit This feature is available for APCO 25 trunking, Type II trunking and Conventional operations for all APX radios. 176 When Transmit Inhibit feature is enabled, the radio stops all transmission including voice and data. The radio can receive messages but is not able to reply the acknowledgment request of the received message. User can physically control the transmission of the radio especially during operation in hazardous environments with this feature. An environment is considered hazardous when the power emitted by the radio power amplifier could initiate an explosion or other dangerous reactions. When the Transmit Inhibit feature is disabled, the radio functions according to its normal operations. The radio sounds alert tone when user enters or exits this feature and also when PTT is pressed. NOTICE:

Acknowledgment of any messages required from the radio is not transmitted if the Transmit Inhibition is enabled. Enabling Transmit Inhibition Perform one of the following actions:

or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. English Turn off the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. NOTICE:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit using the menu and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit on. You hear a sequence of short, low-high tones to indicate transmission is inhibited. If PTT TX Inhibit is enabled, when using multi control head with one active configuration, with the PTT pressed on the active control head, any press on the programmable button of the other control head which meant for that control head to be active control head will cause an unstoppable long low-pitched tone (Talk Prohibit Tone). The display shows Tx inhibit. This behavior can be stopped by pressing PTT button again on the active control head Disabling Transmit Inhibition Pressing PTT triggers the radio sounds a constant short, low-pitched tone (reject tone). NOTICE:

The status of the Transmit Inhibit does not change after the radio powers up. The softkey TxIn is created to ease the user of inhibition transmission besides relying solely on Ignition Sense Line. Only if the Ignition Sense Line is on, the softkey TxIn works. If the Ignition Sense Line is on, user can always turn on or off the Transmit Inhibition using the softkey TxIn; but when the Ignition Sense Line is off, function of softkey TxIn is suspended, and the Transmit Inhibition function is always off. Perform one of the following actions:

or to TxIn. Press the Menu Select button below TxIn. Turn on the ignition through Ignition Sense Line. NOTICE:

If the user has disabled TX Inhibit using the softkey and then moves the switch to the position where TX Inhibit is enabled, the new value overwrites the menu value. The display shows Tx inhibit off. You hear a sequence of short, high-low tone (Transmit Inhibit 177 English Off tone) to indicate transmission is back to normal operation. c. Instant Recall This feature allows the user to save the last received call and playback the recorded call. The feature buffers all incoming audio over the air and stored when the audio is saved. Saving and Playback Calls Perform one of the following to save and playback the recorded calls. You can use the options interchangeably depending on your preference and the programmed functions. Playback and saving the recorded calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below to Recent Convs and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view the recent conversations. Rcnt. or b. 178 or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Play. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the recorded calls in chronological order. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Stop to stop the radio playback. e. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Save. Radio displays Audio Saved momentarily. f. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. g. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Recent calls are lost after radio power cycle if the calls are not saved. Playback the saved calls using the radio menu:

a. Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt. b. c. or to Saved Convs and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view the recent conversations. or to the required call and press the Menu Select button directly below Play. Radio playback the selected call and auto playback the saved calls in chronological order. d. Press the Menu Select button directly below Stop to stop the radio playback. e. To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. f. To return to the Home screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Exit. Saving the recorded calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Long press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to save the recorded calls. Radio displays Audio Saved momentarily. Radio plays the saved call automatically if call saving is successful. A tone sounds if call saving is not successful. English Playback the saved calls using the preprogrammed Record Playback button:

a. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button to playback the saved calls. b. Short press the preprogrammed Record Playback button again to skip to the next saved call. If there is only a single saved call, the playback skips to the end of the call. Radio auto playback the most recent incoming call followed by saved calls in chronological order. Radio displays the playback status. 179 English NOTICE:

Received call overwrites the ongoing record playback. User can short press the programmable button within three seconds to continue the playback and ignore the receiving call. User can short press the programmable button to trigger playback when the radio is receiving call to overwrite the receiving call. Playback can be halted by any tone and button press except for specific buttons. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. General Radio Information Your radio contains the following information:

Radio Information IP Display SIM Status Control Assignments 180 Accessing the Radio Information This feature displays the following radio information:

Host Version Secure Version CH 14 Version (depending on the number of channels connected.) Siren Version Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number Flash Size and Type RF Band(s) Processor Version MCHIB Version CHIB Version TIB Version TRC Version VRS Version URC Version DVRS App Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS DSP Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS CP Version (only when DVRS is available) AUX CH Version Codeplug Alias (Optional) NOTICE:

To return to the Home screen, press at any time. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. or to Radio Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Information screen. 1 2 3 Perform one of the following actions:

English To return to the previous screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Back. Press to return to the Home screen . Viewing the IP Information This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. NOTICE:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 2 or to IP Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the IP Info screen. or to scroll through the various information. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

181 English or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. Viewing the Control Assignments This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 31 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the preprogrammed Info button. or to Info and press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 Perform one of the following actions:

or to scroll through the various information. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Press to return to the Home screen. External Alarms (Horn and Lights) All control heads can be equipped for external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. NOTICE:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. or to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows the Control Map screen. 2 182 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) alternating with the selected mode, until it is turned off. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows Horn/Lites off. Using Permanent Horn and Lights If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically turn on when the radio powers up. 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). English 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected alarm(s). The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. Changing the Selected Alarms 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below H+L to turn on both horn and lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Lgts to turn on the lights. Press the Menu Select button directly below Horn to turn on the horn. One of the following scenarios occurs:

If you choose H+L, the display shows Horn/

Lites on. If you choose Lgts, the display shows Lights on. 183 English If you choose Horn, the display shows Horn on. An Off entry is shown at the softkey when one of the alarms is active. Selecting Off deactivates the current active alarm. Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). The Volume Knob and the Dimmer button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On When you receive a call with the Alarms turned on, you hear the vehicles horn sounds for 4 seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. The display shows the type of call received (Call, Page, or Phone) and the selected mode name. The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms 1 Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. 184 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms Perform one of the following actions:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon to turn off the external alarm(s) and access that feature. The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s). The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s) and exit the Horn and Lights feature. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. The Volume Knob and the Dimmer button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). Front Panel Programming You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Programming (FPP) to enhance the use of your radio. Entering the Front Panel Programming Mode You can follow this procedure to enter the front panel programming (FPP) mode on your radio. English Federal 1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen. 2 Perform one of the following actions and proceed to the next step:

Press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. If the password is not entered, the radio displays the non-password protected zones only. 3 Press or to select Zn/Ch. 4 Press or to select the required zone. 5 Press or to select the required channel. The display shows the radio parameter screen. 6 Press edit. or to select the required parameter to 185 English Non-Federal Press or to scroll through options or navigate vertically. 1 Press or to FPP and press the Menu Select button directly below FPP. The radio displays the Enter password screen Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit to edit the parameter values. Press the Back button to return to the previous screen. 2 Enter the password and press the Menu Select button directly below Ok. 3 Press or to select Zn/Ch. 4 Press or to select the required zone. 5 Press or to select the required channel. The display shows the radio parameter screen. 6 Press edit. or to select the required parameter to Editing FPP Mode Parameters Perform the following actions as required while navigating through the feature parameters. 186 Accessories Not all accessories are FCC certified to operate with all radio models and/or bandsplits. Refer to the radio price pages for a list of FCC certified accessories or contact your sales representative for accessory compatibility. Visit http://www.motorolasolutions.com to know more about the accessories supported by this radio. English 187 English Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude 188 bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

-

-

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. NOTICE:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. ber 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

English Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 Receive 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 189 English 16 17**

18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

190 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 65 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources NOTICE:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. NOTICE:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impe-

dance RS232 18 V USB 3.6 V SB9600 5 V 115 Kbps 12 Mbps 9.6 Kbps 5000 90 120 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime 191 English Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to portable and mobile subscriber radio products. ACK Acknowledgment of communication. Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. ASTRO conventional Motorola Solutions standard for wireless analog or digital conventional communications. Autoscan A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. AUX CH Auxiliary Control Head. Analog Signal An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. ARS Automatic Registration Service ASTRO 25 Motorola Solutions standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Call Alert Privately paging an individual by sending an audible tone. Carrier Squelch Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting (turning on) a receiver audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. Central Controller 192 English A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It Monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. Channel A group of characteristics, such as transmit/receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. CHIB Control Head Interface Board. Control Channel In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-way/data-communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Conventional Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater. Frequencies are shared with other users without the aid of a central controller to assign communications channels. Conventional Scan List A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Cursor A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on a display. Deadlock Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio.The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. Digital Private Line A type of digital communications that utilizes privacy call, as well as memory channel and busy channel lock out to enhance communication efficiency. Digital Signal An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. Dispatcher 193 English An individual who has radio-system management duties and responsibilities. Digital Signal Processor A microcontroller specifically designed for performing the mathematics involved in manipulating analog information, such as sound, that has been converted into a digital form. DSP also implies the use of a data compression technique. Dynamic Regrouping A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. DVRS Digital Vehicular Repeater System. ESN Electrical Serial Number. Failsoft A backup system that allows communication in a non-

trunked, conventional mode if the trunked system fails. 194 FCC Federal Communications Commission. Hang up Disconnect. IV&D Integrated Voice and Data. Key Variable Loader (KVL) A portable, handheld, rugged device used to transfer encryption keys to a target device. Encryption keys can be entered manually by the KVL user, auto-generated by the KVL, obtained from or shared with another KVL, or downloaded from a Key Management Facility (KMF). Liquid-Crystal Display (LCD) An LCD uses two sheets of polarizing material with a liquid-

crystal solution between them. An electric current passed through the liquid causes the crystals to align so that light cannot pass through them. Light Emitting Diode (LED) An electronic device that lights up when electricity is passed through it. MCHB Millennium Control Head Board. MDC Motorola Solutions Digital Communications. Menu Entry A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display. Selection of a feature is controlled by the programming of the buttons on the side of the radio. Monitor Check channel activity by pressing the Monitor button. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List A scan list that can include both talkgroups (trunked) and channels (conventional). English Network Access Code Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. Non-tactical/revert The user will talk on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Over-The-Air Rekeying Allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram the encryption keys in the radio. Page A one-way alert with audio and/or display messages. Personality A set of unique features specific to a radio. PIN Personal Identification Number. 195 English Preprogrammed A software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. RF-The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light (approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). Private (Conversation) Call A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the group. Private Line (PL) A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Programmable A radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-to-Talk PTT-The switch or button usually located on the left side of the radio which, when pressed, causes the radio to transmit. When the PTT is released, the unit returns to receive operation. Radio Frequency 196 Repeater Remote transmit/receive facility that re-transmits received signals in order to improve communications range and coverage (conventional operation). Selective Call A feature that allows you to call a selected individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. selective switch Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Squelch Muting of audio circuits when received signal levels fall below a pre-determined value. With carrier squelch, all channel activity that exceeds the preset squelch level can be heard. English Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) DSP interface to peripherals that consists of a clock signal line, a frame synchronization signal line, and a data line. TMS Text Messaging Service. Standby An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Status Calls Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. Tactical/non-revert The user will talk on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. TalkAround Bypassing a repeater and talking directly to another unit for local unit-to-unit communications. Talkgroup An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communications path. Trunking The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users. Allows users to share a smaller number of frequencies because a repeater or communications path is assigned to a talkgroup for the duration of a conversation. Trunking Priority Monitor scan list A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. USK Unique shadow key. UTC Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard (formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich (up to 180 degrees) is later in time; everything 197 English west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym = Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. VRS Vehicular Repeater System. Zone A grouping of channels. 198 Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX NEXT Radio APX Mobile Radios Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year For LACR region:

ASTRO APX NEXT Radio Three (3) Years English Product Accessories One (1) Year MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by 199 English MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS offers the following optional extended service contracts. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) COMPREHENSIVE Provides for extended hardware repair coverage INCLUDING CHEMICAL, LIQUID, FIRE, AND OTHER PHYSICAL DAMAGE. Comprehensive coverage is available in conjunction with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty and starts from the FIRST DAY the radio is put into use. Service performed under this plan consists of repair or replacement of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay the inbound shipping charges only with use of the MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS designated delivery service. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. SERVICE FROM THE START (SfS) LITE Provides extended hardware normal wear and tear repair coverage beginning AFTER MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSS standard Commercial Warranty period expires. Service performed under this plan consists of repair of the covered equipment as set forth in the terms and conditions. Repairs will be made only at the designated MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS repair depot. Local services are not included. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay for outbound shipping via MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S normal shipping methods. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF 200 English TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. be provided by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere 201 English with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. 202 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA SOLUTIONSs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept English its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, nor will MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software. MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. VIII. For Australia Only This warranty is given by Motorola Solutions Australia Pty Limited (ABN 16 004 742 312) of Tally Ho Business Park, 10 Wesley Court. Burwood East, Victoria. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. Motorola Solutions Australias limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, 203 Motorola Solutions Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. English please call Motorola Solutions Australia at 1800 457 439. You may also visit our website: http://

www.motorolasolutions.com/XA-EN/Pages/Contact_Us for the most updated warranty terms. SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola Solutions maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola Solutions to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola Solutions makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola Solutions service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola Solutions dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola Solutions two-way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the 204

 

 

en-US fr-CA es-LA pt-BR RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mobile Two-Way Radios installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations Formation sur lexposition aux RF et information sur la scurit du produit pour radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes dans des vhicules ou comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes Capacitacin sobre la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia e informacin de proteccin del producto para radios de dos vas mviles instalados en vehculos o como estaciones de control fijas Treinamento sobre a Exposio Energia de RF e Informaes de Segurana do Produto para Rdios Portteis Bidirecionais Instalados em Veculos ou como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo English Caution Before using this radio, read this booklet which contains important operating instructions. For information on product details, brochures, user manuals and approved accessories. Please refer to www.motorolasolutions.com. Compliance with RF Exposure Standards National and international regulations require manufacturers to comply with the RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed. Your Motorola Solutions two-way radio is designed, manufactured, and tested to comply with all applicable national and international regulations for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, applicable regulations may require users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information and Operational Instructions for Occupational Use Notice: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions where users are aware of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet the requirements in national and international regulations. This radio device is not authorized for general population, consumer use. For more information on what RF energy exposure is, and how to control your exposure to ensure compliance with established RF exposure limits, consult the following websites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

For additional user training information on exposure requirements, consult the following websites:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

1 English RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines To control exposure to yourself and others, and to ensure compliance with the relevant RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following guidelines:

Do not remove any of the RF Exposure Labels if present from this device or its related accessories. Attach these instructions to the device when you transfer it to other users. Do not use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. Operating Instructions Transmit no more than 50% of the time. To transmit (talk), press the Push-To-

Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls, release the PTT button. Transmitting more than 50% of the time may cause RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. Transmit only when people (bystanders) outside the vehicle are at least at the recommended minimum lateral distance (as shown in Tables 1 and 2) away from the vehicle body. This separation will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed (according to the installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the relevant RF exposure limits. To ensure continued compliance with applicable RF exposure limits, use only Motorola Solutions approved, supplied or replacement antennas, batteries, and accessories. For a list of Motorola Solutions approved accessories please refer to your user manual or visit www.motorolasolutions.com Table 1 lists the recommended lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle (For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed single-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for single-band radios, depend on the radio rated power. Table 1: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Single-Band Mobile Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Single-Band Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Notice) Minimum Lateral Distance of By-

standers from Vehicle Body Less than 7 W 7 to 14 W 15 to 39 W 40 to 110 W 8 in. (20 cm) 1 ft (30 cm) 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) 2 English Notice: If you are not sure of the rated power of your single-band radio, contact your Motorola Solutions representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you cannot determine the rated power, then assure 3 ft (90 cm) separation for bystanders from the body of the vehicle. Table 2 lists the recommended lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle (For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed multi-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for multi-band radios, depend on whether the radio is installed on a motorcycle, or on other kinds of vehicles. Table 2: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Multi-Band Mobile Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Type of Vehicle Motorcycle Other vehicles Minimum Lateral Distance of By-

standers from Vehicle Body 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines Make sure to follow the antenna installation guidelines that are provided in this mobile radio installation manual. Use only Motorola Solutions approved supplied antenna, or a Motorola Solutions approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed and operated at a fixed location, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with applicable RF exposure limits. The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. Actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions may be required in order to ensure compliance with RF exposure limits. 3 English Vehicles To avoid possible interference between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission control modules, your mobile radio should be installed only by an experienced installer, using the following precautions when installing the radio:

1 Refer to the manufacturer instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2 Before installing the radio, determine the location of the vehicle electronic control modules and their harnesses within the vehicle. 3 Route all radio wiring, including the antenna cable, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated harnesses. Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Industry Canada's license-

exempt RSS's per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. Operational Warnings The following explains the operational warnings:

For Vehicle With Air Bags Warning:

Refer to vehicle manufacturers manual prior to installation of electronic equipment to avoid interference with air bag wiring. DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Warning:

Use of a radio that is not intrinsically safe in a potentially explosive atmosphere could result in a serious injury or death. You should only 4 English use a certified Intrinsically Safe radio in potentially explosive atmospheres. Explosive atmospheres refer to hazard classified locations that may contain hazardous gas, vapors, dusts, such as fueling areas below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transferor storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere unless it is a radio type specifically certified for use in hazardous location areas. DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas, or remove or install antennas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas Warning: To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. European Union(EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE) Directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 5 RED_2.fm Page 5 Friday, June 23, 2017 10:11 AM Notes Franais (Canada) Mise en garde Avant d'utiliser cette radio, lisez cette brochure qui contient d'importantes consignes d'utilisation. Pour obtenir plus dinformation sur les dtails du produit, les brochures, les manuels et les accessoires approuvs. Veuillez vous reporter www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformit aux normes sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences Les rglementations nationales et internationales noncent que les fabricants doivent sassurer que leurs produits sont conformes aux limites dexposition l'nergie RF avant de les commercialiser. Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola Solutions a t conue, fabrique et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes nationales et internationales lies l'exposition des tres humains l'nergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, la rglementation en vigueur exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de l'exposition et qu'ils soient capables de contrler le niveau d'exposition auquel ils se soumettent afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Information de sensibilisation et de gestion de l'exposition l'nergie RF, et consignes pour l'utilisation professionnelle Avis: Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de l'exposition l'nergie RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par les rglements nationaux et internationaux. Ce dispositif radio n'est pas autoris pour l'utilisation grand public par des consommateurs ordinaires. Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce qu'est l'nergie RF et sur les moyens de contrle prendre afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire d'exposition aux radiofrquences :

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

Pour plus de renseignements sur la formation des utilisateurs relativement aux limites d'exposition, consultez les sites suivants :

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

1 Franais (Canada) Directives de conformit et de contrle de l'exposition aux RF Pour contrler votre exposition ainsi que celle des autres personnes et garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, observez toujours les consignes suivantes :

Ne pas retirer les tiquettes relatives l'exposition aux RF qui sont apposes sur cet appareil ou sur ses accessoires. Joignez ces directives l'appareil lorsque vous le transfrez d'autres utilisateurs. N'utilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites aux prsentes ne sont pas runies. Consignes d'utilisation Ne pas mettre plus de 50 % du temps. Pour transmettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton Push-to-talk (PTT). Pour recevoir les appels, relchez le bouton PTT. Le fait de transmettre plus de 50 % du temps peut entraner le dpassement de la limite dexposition normalise au rayonnement RF. Transmettez seulement lorsque les personnes (les passants) lextrieur du vhicule se trouvent la distance latrale minimale recommande (comme illustr dans les tableaux 1 et 2) de la carrosserie du vhicule. Cet cart constitue une distance suffisante par rapport une antenne extrieure convenablement installe (conformment aux consignes dinstallation) pour rpondre aux exigences applicables en matire dexposition lnergie RF. Pour assurer la conformit continue avec les limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, utilisez uniquement les antennes, les batteries et les accessoires de remplacement ou fournis et approuvs par Motorola Solutions. Pour obtenir une liste des accessoires approuvs par Motorola Solutions, veuillez consulter votre manuel ou visitez le site www.motorolasolutions.com Le Tableau 1 indique la distance latrale recommande entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio monobande et son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio monobande, dpendent de la puissance nominale de la radio. 2 Franais (Canada) Tableau 1: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande (voir avis) Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Moins de 7 W 7 14 W 15 39 W 40 110 W 20 cm (8 po) 30 cm (1 pi) 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) Avis: Si vous ntes pas sr de la puissance nominale de votre radio monobande, contactez le reprsentant ou le concessionnaire Motorola Solutions et indiquez-lui le numro de modle de la radio qui figure sur ltiquette de la radio. Si vous ne pouvez pas dterminer la puissance nominale, conservez une distance de sparation de 90 cm (3 pi) entre les passants et la carrosserie du vhicule. Le Tableau 2 indique la distance latrale recommande entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio multibande et son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio multibande, varient selon que la radio est installe sur une moto ou sur dautres types de vhicules. Tableau 2: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile multibande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Type de vhicule Motocyclette Autres vhicules Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) Consignes d'installation pour les antennes de radios mobiles Veillez suivre les directives d'installation de l'antenne qui sont fournies dans le manuel d'installation de cette radio mobile. 3 Franais (Canada) Utilisez uniquement l'antenne agre fournie par Motorola Solutions ou une antenne de rechange agre par Motorola Solutions. L'utilisation d'antennes ou d'accessoires non agrs, ainsi que les modifications non agres peuvent endommager la radio et constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire d'nergie de RF. Directives et consignes de fonctionnement des radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes Si de l'quipement de radio mobile est install et utilis dans un emplacement fixe, l'installation de l'antenne doit satisfaire aux exigences suivantes afin d'assurer un rendement optimal et la conformit aux limites d'exposition l'nergie RF. L'antenne devrait tre monte l'extrieur de l'difice sur le toit ou sur une tour, si possible. Comme pour toutes les installations d'antennes emplacements fixes, il incombe au grant de maintenir l'emplacement en conformit avec les rglements en vigueur. Les actions telles que les mesures de propagation, la signalisation et les restrictions d'accs l'emplacement peuvent tre ncessaires afin de garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux radiofrquences. Vhicules Afin d'viter une ventuelle interfrence entre la radio mettrice et l'un des modules de contrle lectronique du vhicule, comme le contrle du systme de freinage antiblocage (ABS), le contrle du moteur ou les modules de contrle de la transmission, il est recommand de faire appel uniquement un installateur qualifi pour raliser l'installation de la radio et de prendre les prcautions suivantes :

1 Consultez la notice du fabricant ou toute autre documentation technique contenant des recommandations pour l'installation de la radio. 2 Avant d'installer la radio, dterminez l'emplacement des modules de commande lectronique du vhicule et leurs points d'ancrage lintrieur de celui-ci. 3 Faites passer tout le cblage de la radio, y compris le cble de l'antenne, le plus loin possible des units de commande lectronique et de leurs points dancrage. Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence et la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC :

Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. 4 Franais (Canada) Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans lautorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler lautorisation dutiliser cet appareil. Avertissements de fonctionnement Le tableau suivant explique les avertissements de fonctionnement :

Pour vhicules quips de coussins gonflables Avertissement:

Consultez le manuel du fabricant du vhicule avant d'installer un appareil lectronique, afin d'viter toute interfrence avec le cblage des coussins gonflables. NE MONTEZ PAS ET NE PLACEZ PAS de radio mobile dans la zone situe au-dessus d'un coussin gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Un coussin gonflable de scurit se dploie avec beaucoup de force. Si une radio se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du sac, lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors d'occasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers du vhicule. Atmosphres potentiellement explosives Avertissement:

L'utilisation d'une radio autre qu'une radio scurit intrinsque dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive est susceptible d'entraner des blessures graves ou la mort. Vous ne devez pas utiliser de radio de scurit intrinsque agre dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives. On retrouve des atmosphres explosives dans les lieux classs comme tant dangereux en raison de la prsence de gaz, de vapeurs et de poussires reprsentant un danger, par exemple, les zones d'avitaillement en carburant dans des cales de bateau, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques, et les zones dans lesquelles l'air est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas. teignez la radio avant d'accder un lieu prsentant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive, moins qu'il s'agisse d'un type de radio certifi spcifiquement pour une utilisation dans des zones dangereuses. VITEZ d'enlever, d'installer ou de charger les batteries, ou d'enlever ou d'installer des antennes dans de tels lieux. Les tincelles dans des 5 Franais (Canada) atmosphres potentiellement explosives peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles, voire la mort. Zone de dynamitage et dtonateurs Avertissement: teignez la radio lorsque vous vous trouvez proximit de dtonateurs lectriques ou dans une zone de dynamitage afin dviter de dclencher une explosion, ou lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un endroit o il est indiqu : teindre les radios bidirectionnelles . Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. Directive sur la mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques de l'Union europenne (UE) (WEEE) La directive WEEE de l'Union europenne exige que les produits vendus dans les pays de l'UE portent l'tiquette de la poubelle barre (ou leur emballage, dans certains cas). Comme le dfinit la directive WEEE, cette tiquette de poubelle barre signifie que les clients et les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de l'UE ne doivent pas jeter les quipements lectriques et lectroniques ou leurs accessoires dans les ordures domestiques. Les clients ou les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de l'UE doivent communiquer avec le reprsentant ou le centre de service de leur fournisseur d'quipement pour obtenir des renseignements sur le systme de collecte des dchets de leur pays. 6 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Precaucin Antes de usar este radio, lea el folleto que contiene instrucciones de funcionamiento importantes. Para obtener informacin sobre los detalles del producto, folletos, manuales de usuario y accesorios aprobados, consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidad con las normas sobre exposicin a la radiofrecuencia Las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales obligan a que los fabricantes cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia para radios mviles de dos vas antes de que se puedan comercializar. El radio de dos vas de Motorola Solutions est diseado, fabricado y probado para cumplir con todas las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales correspondientes en materia de exposicin humana a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Cuando los radios de dos vas se usan para trabajar, las regulaciones correspondientes podran exigir que los usuarios conozcan y controlen su nivel de exposicin para cumplir con los requisitos de uso profesional. Conocimiento de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia, informacin de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para uso ocupacional Nota: Este radio est diseado para usarse en condiciones controladas o profesionales, donde los usuarios tengan pleno conocimiento de su exposicin y puedan controlarla con el fin de cumplir con los requisitos de las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales. Este dispositivo de radio no est autorizado para el uso particular de la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms informacin sobre el significado de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia y cmo controlar la exposicin con el fin de asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias establecidos, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

Para obtener informacin adicional de la capacitacin de los usuarios sobre los requisitos de exposicin, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html 1 Espaol (Latinoamrica) http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

Cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia y pautas de control Para controlar el nivel de exposicin a la que usted y otros estn expuestos y garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias correspondientes, respete siempre las siguientes pautas:

No retire ninguna de las etiquetas de exposicin a radiofrecuencias, si las hubiere, de este dispositivo o sus accesorios respectivos. Adjunte estas instrucciones al dispositivo cuando se lo transfiera a otros usuarios. No utilice este dispositivo si no se cumple con los requisitos de funcionamiento descritos en este documento. Instrucciones de funcionamiento No transmita ms de un 50 % del tiempo. Para transmitir (hablar), presione el botn Push to Talk (PTT). Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Una transmisin superior al 50 % del tiempo de uso podra provocar que se superen los requisitos de cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Realice transmisiones solo cuando las personas (transentes) que estn fuera del vehculo se encuentren, por lo menos, a la distancia lateral mnima recomendada (segn se indica en las Tablas 1 y 2) del vehculo. Con esta separacin se garantiza que haya una distancia suficiente entre una antena instalada correctamente en el exterior (segn las instrucciones de instalacin) para cumplir con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes. Para garantizar el cumplimiento continuo de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes, utilice solamente las antenas, las bateras y los accesorios de repuesto suministrados o aprobados por Motorola Solutions. Para obtener una lista de los accesorios aprobados por Motorola Solutions, consulte el manual del usuario o visite www.motorolasolutions.com. En la Tabla 1 se indica la distancia lateral recomendada para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta, etc.) equipado con un radio mvil de banda nica y su(s) respectiva(s) antena(s), aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios de banda nica, dependen de la potencia nominal del radio. 2 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Tabla 1: Potencia nominal del radio mvil de banda nica instalada en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada desde el vehculo Potencia nominal de radio mvil de banda nica (consulte Aviso) Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo Menor que 7 W De 7 a 14 W De 15 a 39 W De 40 a 110 W 8 pulg. (20 cm) 1 pie (30 cm) 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) Nota: Si no est seguro de la potencia nominal del radio de banda nica, contctese con un representante, distribuidor o proveedor de Motorola Solutions e indquele el nmero de modelo del radio que figura en la etiqueta. Si no puede determinar la potencia nominal, asegrese de establecer una separacin de 3 pies (90 cm) entre los transentes y el vehculo. En la Tabla 2 se indica la distancia lateral recomendada para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta, etc.) equipado con un radio mvil multibanda y su(s) respectiva(s) antena(s), aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios multibanda, dependen de si el radio est instalado en una motocicleta o en otro tipo de vehculos. Tabla 2: Potencia nominal del radio mvil multibanda instalado en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada desde el vehculo Tipo de vehculo Motocicleta Otros vehculos Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) Pautas de instalacin de la antena mvil Asegrese de seguir las pautas de instalacin de la antena incluidas en el manual de instalacin de este radio mvil. Use nicamente antenas suministradas y aprobadas por Motorola Solutions o una antena de repuesto aprobada por Motorola Solutions. Las antenas, las modificaciones o los agregados no autorizados podran daar el radio y causar el incumplimiento con los estndares de seguridad de RF. 3 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Pautas de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para radios mviles de dos vas instalados en estaciones de control fijas Si el equipo de radio mvil se instala y utiliza en una ubicacin fija, la instalacin de la antena debe cumplir con los siguientes requisitos para garantizar el rendimiento ptimo y el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia correspondientes. La antena debe instalarse en el exterior de los edificios, en el techo o en una torre de ser posible. Al igual que en todas las instalaciones de antena en sitios fijos, la administracin del sitio, conforme a los requisitos normativos correspondientes, es responsabilidad del titular de la licencia. Es posible que sea necesario realizar acciones como inspeccionar el sitio, instalar sistemas de sealizacin y restricciones de acceso al sitio para garantizar el cumplimiento con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Vehculos Para evitar posibles interferencias entre el transmisor del radio y cualquier mdulo de control electrnico de un vehculo, como sistemas de frenado antibloqueo, motor o mdulos de control de transmisin, la instalacin del radio mvil debe ser responsabilidad de una sola persona con experiencia y que tome las siguientes precauciones durante la instalacin:

1 Consulte las pautas del fabricante u otros boletines tcnicos para ver las recomendaciones a la hora de instalar el radio. 2 Antes de instalar el radio, determine la ubicacin de los mdulos de control electrnico y el cableado dentro del vehculo. 3 Enrute todo el cableado del radio, incluido el cable de la antena, lo ms alejado posible de las unidades de control electrnicas y el cableado asociado. Nota para los usuarios (FCC y el Ministerio de Innovacin, Ciencia y Desarrollo Econmico de Canad) Este dispositivo cumple con la parte 15 de las normas de la FCC y con los estndares RSS exentos de licencia del Ministerio de Innovacin, Ciencia y Desarrollo Econmico de Canad conforme a las siguientes condiciones:

Este dispositivo no puede provocar interferencia nociva. Este dispositivo debe aceptar toda interferencia recibida, incluida aquella interferencia que pudiera causar un funcionamiento no deseado. Los cambios o las modificaciones que se realicen en este dispositivo, no aprobados expresamente por Motorola Solutions, podran anular el permiso del usuario de operar este equipo. 4 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Advertencias de funcionamiento A continuacin, se explican las advertencias de funcionamiento:

Para vehculos con airbags Advertencia:

Consulte el manual del fabricante del vehculo antes de instalar equipos electrnicos para evitar la interferencia con el cableado de las bolsas de aire. NO instale ni ubique el radio mvil en el rea que se encuentra encima de la bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de esta. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se pone un radio en la zona de despliegue de la bolsa de aire y esta se infla, es posible que el radio salga disparado con gran fuerza y cause lesiones graves a los ocupantes del vehculo. Atmsferas potencialmente explosivas Advertencia:

El uso de un radio que no sea intrnsecamente seguro en una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva puede provocar lesiones graves o la muerte. En atmsferas potencialmente explosivas, debe utilizar solamente un radio intrnsecamente seguro certificado. El trmino atmsferas explosivas se refiere a lugares clasificados como peligrosos en los que podra haber gases, vapores o polvos peligrosos, como reas con combustibles bajo las cubiertas de los botes o instalaciones de almacenamiento o transferencia de qumicos, y reas en que el aire contenga productos qumicos o partculas, como material granulado, polvo o polvo metlico. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas generalmente hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. Apague el radio antes de ingresar en cualquier rea que posea una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva, a menos que se trate de un tipo de radio certificado especficamente para ser usado en zonas de ubicaciones peligrosas. NO retire, instale ni cargue bateras, ni tampoco retire o instale antenas en dichas reas. Las chispas en ambientes potencialmente explosivos pueden desencadenar una explosin o un incendio, y ocasionar lesiones o incluso la muerte. 5 Espaol (Latinoamrica) reas de voladuras y explosivos Advertencia: Para evitar posibles interferencias con operaciones de voladuras, apague el radio cuando se encuentre cerca de zonas de voladuras elctricas, en un rea de explosivos o en reas donde se encuentre el siguiente aviso: Apague el radio de dos vas. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Directiva de Residuos de Aparatos Elctricos y Electrnicos

(RAEE) de la Unin Europea (UE) La directiva de RAEE de la Unin Europea requiere que los productos que se venden en los pases de la UE tengan la etiqueta de un bote de residuos tachado sobre el producto (o en el paquete en algunos casos). Como se define en la directiva de RAEE, esta etiqueta con un bote de basura tachado indica que los clientes y los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE no deben deshacerse de los equipos o accesorios elctricos y electrnicos con la basura domstica. Los clientes o los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE deben ponerse en contacto con su representante distribuidor de equipos o el centro de servicio locales para obtener informacin sobre el sistema de recoleccin de residuos de su pas. 6 Portugus (Brasil) Ateno Antes de usar o rdio, leia este folheto, que contm importantes instrues de operao. Para obter informaes sobre detalhes do produto, folhetos, manuais do usurio e acessrios aprovados. Consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidade com os Padres de Exposio RF Os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais exigem que os fabricantes estejam em conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF para rdios mveis bidirecionais antes de serem comercializados. O rdio bidirecional Motorola Solutions foi projetado, fabricado e testado para estar em conformidade com todos os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais aplicveis para exposio humana energia eletromagntica de radiofrequncia. Ao usar rdios bidirecionais por motivos de trabalho, os regulamentos aplicveis podem exigir que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes e aptos a controlar sua exposio de modo a atender s exigncias ocupacionais. Informaes sobre Conscientizao e Controle de Exposio Energia de RF e Instrues Operacionais para o Uso Ocupacional Comunicado: Este rdio destina-se ao uso em condies ocupacionais/

controladas, em que os usurios estejam cientes de sua exposio e possam exercer controle sobre ela, para atender aos requisitos nos regulamentos nacionais e internacionais. O uso do dispositivo de rdio pela populao em geral no autorizado. Para obter mais informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e como controlar a exposio para garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

Para informaes adicionais de treinamento sobre os requisitos de exposio, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

1 Portugus (Brasil) Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle de Exposio RF Para controlar a exposio para si e demais pessoas, e garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio RF em questo, sempre siga estas diretrizes:

No remova as Etiquetas de Exposio RF, se houverem, do dispositivo ou acessrios relacionados. Anexe essas instrues ao dispositivo quando o transferir a outros usurios. No use este dispositivo se os requisitos operacionais descritos aqui no forem atendidos. Instrues Operacionais Transmita, no mximo, 50% do tempo. Para transmitir (falar), pressione o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Transmitir mais de 50% do tempo pode fazer que os requisitos de conformidade de exposio RF sejam excedidos. Transmita somente quando as pessoas (observadores) fora do veculo estiverem, pelo menos, distncia lateral mnima recomendada (conforme exibido na Tabela 1 e 2) da carroceria de um veculo. Essa separao garantir que haja distncia suficiente de uma antena externa adequadamente instalada

(de acordo com as instrues de instalao) para atender aos limites de exposio RF em questo. Para garantir constantemente a conformidade com os limites aplicveis de exposio RF, use apenas antenas, baterias e acessrios de reposio aprovados ou fornecidos pela Motorola Solutions. Para obter uma lista dos acessrios aprovados pela Motorola Solutions, consulte o manual do usurio ou acesse www.motorolasolutions.com A Tabela 1 lista a distncia lateral recomendada para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de banda nica aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas associadas. Essas distncia laterais, para rdios de banda nica, dependem da potncia nominal do rdio. Tabela 1: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Banda nica Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima Recomendada da Carroceria do Veculo Potncia Nominal do Rdio Mvel de Banda nica (consulte o Aviso) Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo Inferior a 7 W 20 cm (8 polegadas) 2 Portugus (Brasil) Potncia Nominal do Rdio Mvel de Banda nica (consulte o Aviso) Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo 7 a 14 W 15 a 39 W 40 a 110 W 30 cm (1 p) 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Comunicado: Se voc no tiver certeza da potncia nominal do seu rdio de banda nica, entre em contato com o representante ou o fornecedor da Motorola Solutions e fornea o nmero do modelo encontrado na etiqueta de modelo do rdio. Se voc no conseguir determinar a potncia nominal, garanta uma separao de 90 cm (3 ps) da carroceria do veculo. A Tabela 2 lista a distncia lateral recomendada para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de vrias bandas aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas associadas. Essas distncias laterais, para rdios de vrias bandas, dependem se o rdio est instalado em uma motocicleta ou em outros tipos de veculos. Tabela 2: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Vrias Bandas Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima Recomendada do da Carroceria do Veculo Tipo de Veculo motocicleta Outros veculos Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Diretrizes de Instalao da Antena Mvel No deixe de seguir as diretrizes de instalao da antena fornecidas neste manual de instalao do rdio mvel. Use somente antenas aprovadas, fornecidas ou de reposio aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions. Antenas, modificaes ou acessrios no autorizados podem danificar o rdio e resultar em no conformidade com os Padres de Segurana de RF. 3 Portugus (Brasil) Diretrizes e Instrues de Operao para Rdios Mveis Bidirecionais Instalados como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo Se o equipamento de rdio mvel for instalado e operado em um local fixo, a instalao da antena dever seguir estes requisitos para garantir o desempenho ideal e o cumprimento dos limites de exposio energia de RF. A antena deve ser instalada fora do prdio, no teto ou em uma torre, se possvel. Assim como ocorre com todas as instalaes de antena em site fixo, de responsabilidade do licenciado gerenciar o site de acordo com os requisitos regulamentares. Aes adicionais, como medidas de inspeo do site, sinalizao, e restrio de acesso ao site podem ser necessrias a fim de garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF. Veculos Para evitar uma possvel interferncia entre o transmissor de rdio e quaisquer mdulos de controle eletrnico de veculos, como ABS, motor ou de controle da transmisso, o rdio mvel dever ser instalado apenas por um profissional experiente, observando-se as precaues a seguir durante a instalao do rdio:

1 Consulte as instrues do fabricante ou outros boletins tcnicos para obter recomendaes sobre a instalao do rdio. 2 Antes de instalar o rdio, determine o local dos mdulos de controle eletrnico e sua fiao eltrica no veculo. 3 Direcione a fiao do rdio, incluindo o cabo da antena, o mais distante possvel de unidades de controle eletrnico e dos chicotes associados. Aviso aos Usurios (FCC e Indstria Canadense) Este dispositivo est em conformidade com a Parte 15 das normas da FCC e da RSS (Radio Standards Specification, especificao de padres de rdios) isentas de licena da Indstria Canadense, de acordo com as seguintes condies:

Este dispositivo no pode causar interferncias prejudiciais sade. Este dispositivo deve aceitar qualquer interferncia, inclusive as que possam causar operao indesejvel do dispositivo. Alteraes ou modificaes feitas neste dispositivo, que no sejam expressamente aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions, podero anular o direito do usurio de operar o equipamento. Avisos Operacionais A seguir so explicados os avisos operacionais:

4 Portugus (Brasil) Para Veculos Equipados com Air Bags Aviso:

Consulte o manual do fabricante do veculo antes de instalar equipamentos eletrnicos para evitar interferncia com o funcionamento do air bag. NO instale nem coloque um rdio mvel sobre um air bag ou sobre a rea de expanso dos air bags. Os air bags inflam com muita fora. Se um rdio estiver colocado na rea de abertura do air bag e ele inflar, o rdio poder ser impelido com grande fora e causar graves ferimentos aos ocupantes do veculo. Ambientes Potencialmente Explosivos Aviso:

O uso de um rdio que no intrinsecamente seguro em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo poder resultar em danos graves e at em morte. Voc deve usar apenas rdios Intrinsecamente Seguros certificados em ambientes potencialmente explosivos. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos referem-se a locais classificados como de risco que podem conter gases, vapores ou ps nocivos, como reas de abastecimento embaixo do convs principal em barcos, instalaes de armazenamento ou transferncia de produtos qumicos ou combustvel e reas onde o ar contm partculas ou elementos qumicos, como fibras, poeira ou ps metlicos. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos so frequentes, mas nem sempre h avisos sobre isso. Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em qualquer rea com ambientes potencialmente explosivos, a menos que o tipo de rdio seja especificamente certificado para utilizao em reas de risco. NO remova, instale ou carregue baterias nessas reas, nem remova ou instale antenas. Fascas em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo podem causar uma exploso ou incndio que pode resultar em ferimentos e, at mesmo, morte. reas e Equipamentos para Detonao Aviso: Para evitar possveis interferncias em operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo a detonadores eltricos, reas de detonao ou reas onde haja avisos tais como: Desligue rdios bidirecionais. Obedea a todas as sinalizaes e instrues. 5 Portugus (Brasil) Diretiva de Resduos de Equipamentos Eltricos e Eletrnicos

(WEEE) para a Unio Europeia (UE) A Diretiva de WEEE da Unio Europeia exige que os produtos vendidos nos pases da UE tenham a etiqueta de lixeira riscada no produto (ou no pacote, em alguns casos). Conforme definido pela diretiva WEEE, essa etiqueta de lixeira cruzada indica que os clientes e os usurios nos pases da UE no devem descartar equipamentos ou acessrios eltricos ou eletrnicos em lixo domstico. Os clientes ou os usurios nos pases da UE devem entrar em contato com o representante local do fornecedor do equipamento ou com a central de servios para obter informaes sobre o sistema de coleta de lixo em seu pas. 6 Cover2.fm Page 1 Wednesday, April 24, 2019 1:07 PM MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2005 and 2019 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

*NNTN7851F*

NNTN7851F

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-KB

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 EXHIBIT 9 Internal Photographs

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.1033(b)(7), 2.1033(c)(12) and RSP 100 Annex C) The following photographs are attached. 1. RF Board with Shields (Top) 2. RF Board without Shields (Top) 3. RF Board with Shield (Bottom) 4. RF Board without Shield (Bottom) 5. Controller Board (Top) 6. Controller Board (Bottom) 7. Radio Assembly RF Board (Top View) 8. Radio Assembly Controller (Bottom View) 9. Exploded View Exhibit 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F 9G 9H 9I EXHIBIT 9 Page 1 of 10 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 9A: RF Board with Shields (Top) EXHIBIT 9 Page 2 of 10 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 9B: RF Board without Shields (Top) EXHIBIT 9 Page 3 of 10 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 9C: RF Board with Shield (Bottom) EXHIBIT 9 Page 4 of 10 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 9D: RF Board without Shield (Bottom) EXHIBIT 9 Page 5 of 10 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 9E: Controller Board (Top) EXHIBIT 9 Page 6 of 10 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 9D: Controller Board (Bottom) EXHIBIT 9 Page 7 of 10 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 9E: Radio Assembly RF Board (Top View) EXHIBIT 9 Page 8 of 10 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 9F: Radio Assembly Controller Board (Bottom View) EXHIBIT 9 Page 9 of 10 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Tx/Rx Antenna Port Bluetooth/Wi-Fi Antenna Port EXHIBIT 9 Page 10 of 10 Exhibit 9I: Exploded View

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 EXHIBIT 3 EXTERNAL PHOTOGRAPHS

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.1033(b)(7) and 2.1033(c)(12) and RSP 100 Annex C) The following photographs are attached. 1. Front View (Controls) 2. Back View 3. Top View 4. Bottom View (FCC/IC label location) 5. FCC label (Close view) 6. RF Exposure label (Close view) 7. Side View (Left) 8. Side View (Right) 9. Top view with microphone and rear accessory cable Exhibit 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 3G 3H 3I EXHIBIT 3 Page 1 of 9 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 3A Front View (Controls) Exhibit 3B Back View EXHIBIT 3 Page 2 of 9 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 3C Top View EXHIBIT 3 Page 3 of 9 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. Exhibit 3D Bottom View (FCC/IC Label Location) FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 EXHIBIT 3 Page 4 of 9 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. Exhibit 3E FCC label (Close view) FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 APX6500 FCC label (Close View) APX6500Li FCC label (Close View) EXHIBIT 3 Page 5 of 9 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 APX4500 FCC label (Close View) APX2500 FCC label (Close View) EXHIBIT 3 Page 6 of 9 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 APX1500 FCC label (Close View) Exhibit 3F RF Exposure label (Closed view) EXHIBIT 3 Page 7 of 9 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 3G Side View (Left) Exhibit 3H Side View (Right) EXHIBIT 3 Page 8 of 9 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 Exhibit 3I Top View with microphone and rear accessory cable 1. Cables from the connectors are wrapped and placed on the radio. 2. RF exposure label placed at the end of the Microphone cable. Note:

EXHIBIT 3 Page 9 of 9

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.1033(c)(11), 2.1033(b)(7) and RSP 100 Annex C and Sec 3) EXHIBIT 1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL LOCATION See the Attached Photograph or Sketch Front of Radio Back of Radio Top of Radio X Bottom of Radio Back of Radio under Belt Clip TYPE MARKINGS (TEXT) X The label is a paper polyester film laminate with a pressure sensitive adhesive backing. The adhesive is a permanent type acrylic with minimum peel strength of 40 oz/inch. X See the Attached Photograph and Exhibit 3 for the actual location of the FCC/IC label on the device. X Label Attached Below. See Attached Drawing. FCC Label for APX6500 Page 1 of 3 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 FCC Label for APX6500Li FCC Label for APX4500 Page 2 of 3 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 FCC Label for APX2500 FCC Label for APX1500 Page 3 of 3

 

 

 

 

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 CONFIDENTIALITY REQUEST April 22, 2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request for Transmitter with FCC ID:AZ492FT7124 Dear Sir / Madam, Motorola Solutions Inc is requesting that Exhibit 12 (Operational Description) not be made routinely available for public inspection. Motorola Solutions Inc considers the information in this exhibit to be classified as trade secrets, pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.457(d), 0.459 and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act. Please mark Exhibit 12 as Confidential. Please contact me if you require any additional information. Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ EXHIBIT 13B Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 Date: April 20, 2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Class 2 Permissive Change to FCC Authorized Transceiver with FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 Dear Sir:

A Class 2 permissive change is requested for the subject transceiver (Table 1) which is marketed in the United States and elsewhere. It is capable of operating as a system in tandem with MOBEXCOM DVRS

(Table 2) and Sierra LTE Modems/VML750 (Table 3) Product Name APX6500 APX6500Li APX4500 APX2500 APX1500 Model No. M25URS9PW1BN M25URS9PW1BN M22URS9PW1BN M24URS9PW1BN M36URS9PW1BN Table 1 FCC ID AZ492FT7124 Model No. Product Description FCC ID MOBEXCOM DVRS VHF MOBEXCOM DVRS UHF MOBEXCOM DVRS 700 MOBEXCOM DVRS 800 MOBEXCOM Digital Vehicular Repeater DVR VHF (136-174 MHz) MOBEXCOM Digital Vehicular Repeater DVR UHF (380-512 MHz) MOBEXCOM Digital Vehicular Repeater DVR 700 (764-776 MHz; 794-806 MHz) MOBEXCOM Digital Vehicular Repeater DVR 800 (806-824 MHz; 851-869 MHz) Table 2 LO6-DVRSVHF LO6-DVRSUHF LO6-DVRS700 LO6-DVRS800 Model No. Product Description VML750 LTE Vehicle Modem VML750 Contains: Module LM63S1 Contains: Module MC7354 MP70 Sierra Wireless High Performance Vehicle Router FCC ID AZ492FT7058 2AAGMLM63S1 N7NMC7355 N7NMC7455 TK4WLE900VX ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13A N7NMC7355 T7V1316 N7NEM75S TK4WLE900VX N7NEM75S N6C-SDPAC GX450 MG90 Sierra Wireless Mobile Gateway Sierra Wireless High Performance Multi-Network Vehicle Router FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 RV55 Sierra Wireless Rugged LTE-A Pro Router Table 3 A. DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT CHANGES:

Add in the MOBEXCOM DVRS and Sierra LTE modems/VML750 to be used as accessories to the radios. No changes on the transceiver, DVRS or data modem. We are also adding Part 15C and 15E to the motorcycle. B. PERFORMANCE DIFFERENCES:

No impact to the radio performance on file with FCC for this transmitter. We are including the simultaneous data when the mobiles in Table 1 work with either Table 2 or Table 3 devices. C. CONCLUSION:

The radio performance remains the same with the previous granted equipment and this radio continues to meet all FCC emissions requirements for which authorization was granted. Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13A

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 April 22, 2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch, FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7124. Dear Sir/Madam:

This transmitter was designed to operate in the following frequency ranges:

Band / Mode 700 800 Bluetooth WiFi 2.4GHz WiFi 5 GHz Frequency ranges 762-776 MHz, 792-806 MHz 806-825 MHz, 851-870 MHz 2402-2480 MHz 2412 2462MHz 5180 5825MHz FCC rule parts 90 90 15C 15C 15E To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above applicable frequencies range under FCC Rule Parts 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. Frequency Range Part 90 Federal Other Regions Emission Designator Rule

(MHz) 762-768 768-769*

769-775 775-776*

792-798 798-799*

799-805 805-806*

806-809 809-824 824-825 851-854 854-869 869-870 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 16K0F3E, 20K0F1E, 11K0F3E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1W 16K0F3E, 20K0F1E, 11K0F3E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1W 16K0F3E, 20K0F1E, 11K0F3E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1W 16K0F3E, 20K0F1E, 11K0F3E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1W 16K0F3E, 20K0F1E, 11K0F3E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1W

* Canada Please contact me if you required any additional information. Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com _________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.907, 2.908 and RSP 100 Sec 4) EXHIBIT 2 Statement of Certification 2.1 Statement of Certification Transceiver type described herein (AZ492FT7124/109U-FT7124) is in compliance with all applicable parts of the FCC rules and ISED RSS standards. This device is P25 Compliant as well which meets FCC Part 90.548 and RSS Section 5.11 as declared in exhibit 12. Each unit manufactured, imported, or marketed will conform to the samples tested herein, within the statistical variations that can be expected due to high volume production and test measurement error. NAME: Danesh R Thayaparan SIGNATURE:

DATE: April 8, 2020 TITLE: Engineering Manager EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc. FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 / IC: 109U-92FT7124 2.2 Attestation Statement (Equipment Class DTS and DSS Bluetooth/WiFi) This device contains an embedded Bluetooth device and WiFi device that are compliant with the applicable FCC Part 15C, FCC Part 15E and ISED RSS 247 regulations. Part 15.247 (a)(1) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The hopping sequence must be pseudo random. Each frequency must be used equally on the average by each transmitter The receivers input bandwidth is approximately equal to the transmit bandwidth The receiver hops in sequence with the transmitted signal Part 15.247 (g) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system is designed to comply with all of the regulations in this section when the transmitter is presented with a continuous data (or information) Part 15.247(h) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system does not coordinate its channel selection/hopping sequence with other frequency hopping systems for the express purpose of avoiding the simultaneous occupancy of individual hopping frequencies by multiple transmitters. NAME: Yeoh Tih Huang SIGNATURE:

DATE: April 8, 2020 TITLE: Senior Electrical Engineer EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 2 OF 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DTS-UNII Device Declaration Letter September 10, 2019 Client with Radar detection capability , N/A To whom it may concern, We have declared below featured for FCC equipment authorization, Device FCC ID: AZ492FT7124

(1) DFS Device --

(2) Master Client without radar detection capability Active / Passive Scanning , ad-hoc mode access point capability Frequency Band

(MHz) 5150-5250 5250-5350 5470-5725 5725-5850 Active Scanning

(the device can transmit a probe

(beacon) Yes , Yes , Yes , Yes , No No No No passive scanning

(where the device can listen only with no probes) No No No No Yes , Yes , Yes , Yes , Ad Hoc Mode or WIFI Direct capability Access point capability Yes , Yes , Yes , Yes , No No No No Yes , Yes , Yes , Yes , No No No No No Yes , Country code selection ability -

(3) If yes, please explain how it was implemented: (please also help to provide detail of options for each country selection)

(4) Meet 15.202 requirement -

Please check below:

Yes, No, A master device is defined as a device operating in a mode in which it has the capability to transmit without receiving an enabling signal. In this mode it is able to select a channel and initiate a network by sending enabling signals to other devices A client device is defined as a device operating in a mode in which the transmissions of the device are under For client devices that have software configuration control to operate in different modes (active scanning control of the master. A device in client mode is not able to initiate a network.

(5) in some and passive scanning in others) in different bands (devices with multiple equipment classes or those that operate on non-DFS frequencies) or modular devices which configure the modes of operations through software, the application must provide software and operations description on how the software and / or hardware is implemented to ensure that proper operations modes cannot be modified by end user or an installer. Apply, No Apply, (If apply, please help to provide explanation on how it was implemented, and how software was controlled) Factory set only.

Name: Daneshkumar R Thayaparan Title: Engineering Manager Tel: +60(012)4421676 E-mail: DANESH.RThayaparan@motorolasolutions.com

 

 

Date: September 10, 2019 Declaration We, Motorola Solutions, Inc., declare that the device, FCC ID: AZ492FT7124, does not support any non-US channels in all the operational mode(s) in the US market. All non-US frequencies, US 2.4G channel 12-14, US 5.0G channels below 36 and above 165, and Country code selection are disabled through proprietary software Should you have any question or comment regarding this matter, please do not and are not user changeable. hesitate to contact me. Sincerely yours,

Name: Daneshkumar R Thayaparan Title: Engineering Manager Tel: +60(012)4421676 E-mail: DANESH.RThayaparan@motorolasolutions.com

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 August 28, 2019 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch, FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7124. Dear Sir/Madam:

This transmitter was designed to operate in the following frequency ranges:

Band / Mode 700 800 Bluetooth WiFi 2.4GHz WiFi 5 GHz Frequency ranges 762-776 MHz, 792-806 MHz 806-825 MHz, 851-870 MHz 2402-2480 MHz 2412 2462MHz 5180 5825MHz FCC rule parts 90 90 15C 15C 15E To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above applicable frequencies range under FCC Rule Parts 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. Frequency Range Part 90 Federal Other Regions

(MHz) 762-768 768-769*

769-775 775-776*

792-798 798-799*

799-805 805-806*

806-809 809-824 824-825 851-854 854-869 869-870 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

* Canada Please contact me if you required any additional information. _________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13C FCC ID: AZ492FT7124 Sincerely, Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager E-mail: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com _________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc. 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322 EXHIBIT 13C